Contract Technical Specification

FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND OUTFITTING OF A

SELF-ELEVATING MOBILE OFFSHORE DRILLING UNIT

ARO 2005 AND ARO 2006

FOR ARAMCO ROWAN OFFSHORE DRILLING COMPANY

DATED 12 JAN 2020

REVISION 0

REVISION STATUS AND HISTORY

Rev. Date Rev. Description

6 16-Jun-2019 Final release, post technical clarification

0 12-Jan-2020 Final release for execution

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

CONTENT

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL PROVISIONS ......................................................... 11

1.1 INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATION ...................................................................................... 11
1.2 STRUCTURE OF THE SPECIFICATION AND ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS .................... 11
1.3 GENERAL CONDITIONS AND STANDARDS ..................................................................... 12
1.3.1 LANGUAGE .................................................................................................................. 12
1.3.2 UNIT CONVENTION ..................................................................................................... 12
1.3.3 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVENTION ..................................................................... 13
1.3.4 TERMINOLOGY AND ABBREVIATIONS ..................................................................... 13
1.3.5 CLASSIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 16
1.3.6 RULES AND STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 16
1.3.7 FLAG STATE ................................................................................................................ 18
1.4 END USER COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................... 18
1.5 CONTRACT PLANS, DRAWINGS AND COMMENT SHEETS ............................................ 19
1.6 SAFETY, PEFORMANCE AND EFFICENCY OF THE VESSEL ......................................... 20
1.7 DRAWING SCHEDULE AND APPROVAL PROCESS ........................................................ 21
1.8 PROVISION OF EQUIPMENT, SPARES AND CONSUMABLES ........................................ 21
1.9 QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................................ 21
1.10 OFE – OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 22
1.11 BFE – BUILDER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT ....................................................................... 22
1.12 SPECIAL BUILDER-FURNISHED SERVICES ..................................................................... 23
1.12.1 EQUIPMENT TAGGING ............................................................................................... 23
1.12.2 VIRTUAL WAREHOUSE .............................................................................................. 23
1.13 SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .................................................................... 23
1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................................. 23
1.15 DATA COLLECTION AND DATA SECURITY ...................................................................... 24
1.15.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR DATA SECURITY ................................................................... 24
1.15.2 DATA ACQUISITION, ANALYSIS AND CONDITION BASED MONITORING ............. 25
1.16 MASTER EQUIPMENT AND MAKERS LIST ....................................................................... 25
1.17 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE............................................................................................. 26
1.18 OPERATIONAL READINESS ............................................................................................... 27
1.19 ACCEPTANCE, TESTING AND DELIVERY ........................................................................ 27
SECTION 2 – DESIGN SPECIFICATION, CRITERIA AND CONDITIONS ......................................... 29
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND DESIGN CONDITIONS .................................................... 29
2.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................... 29
2.1.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................... 29
2.1.3 AREA OF OPERATION ................................................................................................ 30
2.1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN CRITERIA....................................................................... 31
2.1.5 DESIGN LIFE ................................................................................................................ 31

PAGE 2 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.1.6 DESIGN CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 31

2.1.7 DESIGN LIMITATIONS ................................................................................................. 40
2.1.8 RIG MOVE CRITERIA .................................................................................................. 40
2.1.9 PRELOADING CRITERIA ............................................................................................. 41
2.2 CONTRACT PLANS, DRAWINGS, REPORTS .................................................................... 41
2.3 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 41
2.4 NOISE, VIBRATION AND TEMPERATURE LIMITS ............................................................ 42
2.4.1 VIBRATION LIMITS ...................................................................................................... 42
2.4.2 NOISE LIMITS............................................................................................................... 43
2.4.3 TEMPERATURE LIMITS IN CLIMATE CONTROLLED SPACES ................................ 44
2.5 ACCESS AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................. 44
2.6 MATERIAL HANDLING ......................................................................................................... 45
2.7 ESCAPE ROUTES, HEADROOM AND WALKWAYS .......................................................... 46
2.8 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND DATASHEETS ........................................................ 47
SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION ............................................................................. 48
3.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................................................................................................... 48
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................ 48
3.2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS .............................................................................................. 48
3.2.2 QUALITY OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 48
3.2.3 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP .................................................................................... 49
3.2.4 WEIGHT CONTROL ..................................................................................................... 51
3.2.5 LIGHTWEIGHT MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 52
3.3 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS .......................................................................................... 52
3.4 CONSTRUCTABILITY .......................................................................................................... 52
3.4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION ON STEEL ..................................................................... 53
3.5 STEEL STRUCTURES AND STEEL OUTFITTINGS ........................................................... 54
3.5.1 HULL CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................... 54
3.5.2 HULL TANKS AND EXTERNAL TANKS ...................................................................... 55
3.5.3 SEA CHEST STRUCTURE AND HULL PENETRATIONS........................................... 56
3.5.4 LEG WELL SECTIONS ................................................................................................. 56
3.5.5 JACKING STRUCTURES ............................................................................................. 57
3.5.6 LEG STRUCTURE ........................................................................................................ 57
3.5.7 CANTILEVER, DRILL FLOOR AND SUPPORTING STRUCTURES ........................... 59
3.5.8 DERRICK STRUCTURE ............................................................................................... 62
3.5.9 DECK MOUNTED SUPPORT STRUCTURES ............................................................. 64
3.5.10 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................... 64
3.5.11 LAYDOWN AREAS ....................................................................................................... 66
3.5.12 ACCOMMODATION DECKHOUSE .............................................................................. 66
3.5.13 HELICOPTER DECK AND SUPPORT STRUCTURE .................................................. 66
3.5.14 EMERGENCY GENERATOR HOUSE ......................................................................... 67

PAGE 3 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.5.15 DRAWWORKS HOUSE AND WINDWALL ................................................................... 67

3.5.16 PAINT LOCKER ............................................................................................................ 68
3.5.17 MUD PUMP ROOM....................................................................................................... 68
3.5.18 MUD ENGINEER’S laboratory ...................................................................................... 68
3.6 PIPING SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS ............................................................................ 69
3.6.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 69
3.6.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 70
3.6.3 MAIN SYSTEM PIPING SPECIFICATION & SCHEDULES ......................................... 71
3.6.4 PIPE THICKNESS STANDARD .................................................................................... 76
3.6.5 PIPE THREAD AND FITTING STANDARDS ............................................................... 76
3.6.6 PIPING INSTALLATION AND JOINING ....................................................................... 76
3.6.7 INSULATION OF PIPING AND SWEAT PROTECTION .............................................. 77
3.6.8 ROUTING AND ACCESS TO VALVES AND PUMPS .................................................. 77
3.6.9 PIPE SUPPORTS AND PIPE CLAMPS ....................................................................... 78
3.6.10 BULKHEAD AND DECK PENETRATIONS .................................................................. 78
3.6.11 VALVES AND VALVE OPERATION ............................................................................. 78
3.6.12 OPERATION, AUTOMATION AND SENSOR CONTROL ........................................... 79
3.6.13 TUBING AND TUBING INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 79
3.6.14 HOSES, FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS ........................................................................ 79
3.6.15 PIPING CLEANING AND FLUSHING ........................................................................... 80
3.7 GENERAL SPECIFICATION ON HULL ACCESS ................................................................ 83
3.7.1 DOORS ......................................................................................................................... 83
3.7.2 HATCHES ..................................................................................................................... 84
3.7.3 MANHOLES AND MANWAYS ...................................................................................... 85
3.7.4 STAIRCASES AND COMPANIONWAYS ..................................................................... 85
3.7.5 PLATFORMS ................................................................................................................ 85
3.7.6 WALKWAYS AND GRATING ....................................................................................... 86
3.7.7 LADDERS ..................................................................................................................... 87
3.7.8 ESCAPE ROUTES ........................................................................................................ 87
3.7.9 BULWARKS, GUARD AND HANDRAILS ..................................................................... 87
3.8 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS ......................................................... 89
3.8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT .......................................... 89
3.8.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 89
3.8.3 SYSTEM STUDIES ....................................................................................................... 89
3.8.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY ...................................................................... 90
3.8.5 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY ..................................................................................... 91
3.8.6 HARMONIC LEVEL....................................................................................................... 91
3.8.7 DOCUMENTATION....................................................................................................... 91
3.8.8 HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATION ...................................................................... 92
3.8.9 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ................................................................................... 93

PAGE 4 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.9 INTEGRATED MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................... 96

3.9.1 INTEGRATED MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM (IMCS) ............................... 96
3.9.2 CYBER SECURITY AND DATA PROTECTION SYSTEM ........................................... 98
3.10 POWER GENERATION SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 99
3.10.1 MAIN POWER GENERATION .................................................................................... 100
3.10.2 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION ..................................................................... 105
3.10.3 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ............................................................................ 109
3.11 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS ................................................................ 110
3.11.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 110
3.11.2 RATINGS .................................................................................................................... 110
3.11.3 CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................... 110
3.11.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................................................................................................. 111
3.11.5 MAIN 600V AC SWITCHBOARD ................................................................................ 111
3.11.6 MAIN 480V SWITCHBOARD ...................................................................................... 113
3.11.7 EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARDS............................................................................... 113
3.11.8 230 VOLT MAIN AND EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARDS .......................................... 115
3.11.9 24V DC SUPPLIES ..................................................................................................... 116
3.11.10 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................ 117
3.11.11 PHASE SHIFT TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................. 118
3.11.12 DRILLING SWITCHBOARD (VFD’S) .......................................................................... 119
3.12 ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ................................................................. 121
3.12.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING ................................................................................... 121
3.12.2 RECEPTACLES .......................................................................................................... 122
3.12.3 ACCOMMODATION QUARTERS AND OFFICES ..................................................... 122
3.12.4 WORKSHOPS AND STOREROOMS ......................................................................... 122
3.12.5 MACHINERY AREAS ................................................................................................. 123
3.12.6 115V RECEPTACLES FOR HAND TOOLS ............................................................... 123
3.12.7 ELECTRICAL CABLES ............................................................................................... 123
3.12.8 TEST AFTER INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 130
3.12.9 AC MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC) AND CONTROLLERS ........................... 130
3.12.10 AC MOTORS............................................................................................................... 132
3.12.11 POWER SYSTEM CONNECTIONS ........................................................................... 133
3.12.12 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS ............................................................... 133
3.12.13 UPS POWER SYSTEMS ............................................................................................ 134
3.13 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS ..................................................................................................... 136
3.13.1 DRILL FLOOR HPU .................................................................................................... 136
3.14 DRILLING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 137
3.14.1 DRILL FLOOR LAYOUT AND SYSTEMS .................................................................. 137
3.14.2 DRILLING CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION ..................................................... 137
3.14.3 DRILLER’S CABIN ...................................................................................................... 141

PAGE 5 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.4 HOISTING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 142

3.14.5 PIPE HANDLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 145
3.14.6 ZONE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ................................................................................ 148
3.14.7 WELL CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 148
3.14.8 BOP HANDLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................... 152
3.14.9 MATERIAL HANDLING UNDER CANTILEVER ......................................................... 153
3.14.10 SERVICE ACCESS BASKET ..................................................................................... 153
3.14.11 HOSES FOR DRILLING SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 154
3.14.12 CONDUCTOR TENSIONING UNIT (CTU) ................................................................. 155
3.14.13 WINCHES ................................................................................................................... 156
3.14.14 BULK MUD AND CEMENT ......................................................................................... 158
3.14.15 LOW PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM .............................................................................. 159
3.14.16 MUD PROCESSING ................................................................................................... 161
3.14.17 HIGH PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM ............................................................................. 163
3.14.18 HIGH PRESSURE Cement SYSTEM ......................................................................... 164
3.14.19 WELL TEST SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 164
3.14.20 DRILL STRING AND DOWN HOLE EQUIPMENT (OFE) .......................................... 165
3.14.21 OWNER AND THIRD-PARTY EQUIPMENT, AREA AND SPACES .......................... 165
3.15 JACKING SYSTEM ............................................................................................................. 168
3.15.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 168
3.15.2 JACKING CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................................................. 168
3.15.3 OIL LEVEL INDICATION ............................................................................................ 169
3.15.4 POWER SUPPLY........................................................................................................ 169
3.15.5 ELEVATING UNITS .................................................................................................... 169
3.15.6 Pinion Load Monitoring System .................................................................................. 170
3.15.7 LEG JUNCTION BOXES ............................................................................................ 170
3.15.8 COMMUNICATION ..................................................................................................... 170
3.16 SKIDDING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................... 171
3.16.1 SKIDDING UNITS ....................................................................................................... 171
3.16.2 GREASING SYSTEM SKIDDING SYSTEM ............................................................... 171
3.16.3 CONTROL SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 171
3.16.4 THE PORTABLE REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (RCP) .............................................. 171
3.16.5 POWER SUPPLY........................................................................................................ 172
3.16.6 MAINTENANCE ACCESS .......................................................................................... 172
3.17 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS ..................................... 172
3.17.1 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ......................................................................... 173
3.17.2 LIVING QUARTERS.................................................................................................... 173
3.17.3 VENTILATION ............................................................................................................. 176
3.17.4 HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT .......................... 179
3.18 SAFETY SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................ 184

PAGE 6 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.18.1 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM ....................................................................... 184

3.18.2 FIRE DETECTION ...................................................................................................... 185
3.18.3 GAS DETECTION ....................................................................................................... 185
3.18.4 COMBINED FIRE AND GAS CABINET ...................................................................... 186
3.18.5 ALARMS ...................................................................................................................... 187
3.18.6 CRITICAL ACTION PANELS ...................................................................................... 187
3.18.7 MUSTER STATIONS .................................................................................................. 187
3.19 OTHER KEY VESSEL SYSTEMS ...................................................................................... 188
3.19.1 TANK LEVEL INDICATION SYSTEM ......................................................................... 188
3.19.2 VENTS, SOUND AND OVERFLOWS......................................................................... 188
3.19.3 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS ................................................................................. 189
3.19.4 BILGE SYSTEM .......................................................................................................... 195
3.19.5 PRELOAD SYSTEM ................................................................................................... 197
3.19.6 LEG JETTING SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 199
3.19.7 RAW WATER SYSTEM .............................................................................................. 199
3.19.8 ACTIVE FIRE-FIGHTING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 201
3.19.9 FIRE HYDRANTS/FIRE STATIONS ........................................................................... 203
3.19.10 PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION ................................................................................... 208
3.19.11 EVACUATION ESCAPE AND RESCUE .................................................................... 209
3.19.12 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 211
3.19.13 GENERAL DRAIN SYSTEMS ..................................................................................... 213
3.19.14 SANITARY DRAIN SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 216
3.19.15 POLLUTION CONTROL ............................................................................................. 217
3.19.16 WASH DOWN UNITS ................................................................................................. 218
3.19.17 FUEL OIL TRANSFER AND SERVICE SYSTEM ...................................................... 218
3.19.18 LUBE OIL SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 222
3.19.19 FRESH WATER ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM .......................................................... 223
3.19.20 DRILL WATER SYSTEM ............................................................................................ 225
3.19.21 BASE OIL SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 226
3.19.22 BRINE SYSTEM.......................................................................................................... 228
3.19.23 MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 229
3.19.24 MECHANICAL HANDLING ......................................................................................... 231
3.19.25 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM ......................................................................... 233
3.19.26 TOWING AND MOORING EQUIPMENT .................................................................... 233
3.19.27 LIGHTING SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 235
3.19.28 RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT .................................................................. 237
3.19.29 INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS ................................................................................ 240
3.20 MISCELLANEOUS MARINE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 244
3.20.1 NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................ 244
3.20.2 FLAGS ......................................................................................................................... 245

PAGE 7 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.20.3 SHIP SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM ............................................................................ 245

3.20.4 ANTI-FOULING SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 245
3.20.5 MASTS AND POSTS .................................................................................................. 246
3.21 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 246
3.21.1 ESCAPE EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 246
3.21.2 RESCUE EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 246
3.21.3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT .................................................................. 247
3.21.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .............................................................................................. 247
3.21.5 FIRE BLANKET ........................................................................................................... 248
3.21.6 PERSONNEL TRANSFER BASKET .......................................................................... 248
3.21.7 STRETCHERS ............................................................................................................ 248
3.21.8 FIREMAN'S OUTFIT ................................................................................................... 249
3.21.9 DEFIBRILLATORS and FIRST AID KITS ................................................................... 249
3.21.10 SAFETY SHOWERS and EYEWASH STATIONS ..................................................... 249
3.21.11 EMERGENCY AND MARINE SIGNALS ..................................................................... 250
3.21.12 EMERGENCY LINE THROWING APPLIANCE .......................................................... 250
3.21.13 LIFE BUOYS ............................................................................................................... 250
3.21.14 SAFETY GATES ......................................................................................................... 251
3.22 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATION ITEMS ........................................................................ 251
3.22.1 DRAG CHAINS ........................................................................................................... 251
3.22.2 LIFTING GEAR ........................................................................................................... 253
3.23 WORKSHOPS TOOL ROOMS AND STORES .................................................................. 254
3.23.1 MECHANICAL WORKSHOP ...................................................................................... 254
3.23.2 RIGGING STORE ....................................................................................................... 255
3.23.3 WELDERS SHOP ....................................................................................................... 255
3.23.4 WAREHOUSE ............................................................................................................. 256
3.23.5 HEAVY TOOL STORE ................................................................................................ 257
3.23.6 CHEMICAL STORE IN PORT SACK STORAGE ROOM ON MACHINERY DECK .. 257
3.23.7 TOOL CONTAINER 1 ................................................................................................. 257
3.23.8 TOOL CONTAINER 2 ................................................................................................. 257
3.23.9 Shaker House store .................................................................................................... 257
3.23.10 ELECTRICAL WORKSHOP ........................................................................................ 257
3.24 PAINTING, MARKINGS AND CORROSION PROTECTION ............................................. 260
3.24.1 PAINTING ................................................................................................................... 260
3.24.2 MARKING .................................................................................................................... 261
3.24.3 NOTICE AND INFORMATION FRAMES .................................................................... 264
3.24.4 ON SITE MAINTENANCE AND PRESERVATION ..................................................... 264
3.24.5 CLEANING .................................................................................................................. 264
3.25 ACCOMMODATION UNIT AND FURNISHING .................................................................. 266
3.25.1 ACCOMMODATION GENERAL ARRANGEMENT .................................................... 266

PAGE 8 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.2 ACCESS WAYS .......................................................................................................... 267

3.25.3 JOINER WORK INSULATION, AND DECK COVERING ........................................... 268
3.25.4 INSULATION ............................................................................................................... 269
3.25.5 ACCOMODATION WINDOWS AND DOORS ............................................................ 270
3.25.6 OUTFITTING AND FURNISHING SCHEUDLE .......................................................... 271
3.25.7 REFRIGERATED SPACES ........................................................................................ 281
3.25.8 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 284
3.25.9 TOILET & SHOWER MODULES ................................................................................ 285
SECTION 4 – INSPECTIONS, TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND TRIALS .................................... 286
4.1 PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................... 286
4.2 SCOPE ................................................................................................................................ 286
4.3 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 286
4.3.1 VENDOR/SUPPLIER SELECTION AND SURVEILLANCE ....................................... 287
4.3.2 CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................................... 287
4.3.3 MECHANICAL COMPLETION .................................................................................... 288
4.3.4 PRE-COMMISSIONING .............................................................................................. 290
4.3.5 COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................................... 292
4.3.6 ADDITIONAL ACTIVITIES .......................................................................................... 293
4.4 SECTION 4 – APPENDIX 1- ACTIVITY AND RESPONSIBILITY FLOWCHART .............. 296
SECTION 5 – DESIGN, ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION .................... 297
5.1 MASTER DOCUMENT REGISTER AND LIBRARY ........................................................... 297
5.2 PLANS, DRAWINGS, REPORTS ....................................................................................... 297
5.3 TEST RECORDS AND COMMISSIONING DOSSIERS..................................................... 297
5.4 PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS ......................................................................................... 297
5.5 3D MODEL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 298
5.6 CONSTRUCTION PORTFOLIO ......................................................................................... 298
5.7 OPERATIONS MANUAL ..................................................................................................... 299
5.8 STABILITY BOOKLET AND SOFTWARE .......................................................................... 299
5.9 IADC SCHEDULE A AND EQUIPMENT LIST .................................................................... 299
5.10 SPARE PART INVENTORY AND CONSUMABLES LIST ................................................. 299
5.11 PRV AND HOSE REGISTER.............................................................................................. 300
5.11.1 HOSE REGISTER ....................................................................................................... 300
5.11.2 PRV REGISTER.......................................................................................................... 300
5.12 PAD EYE AND LIFTING GEAR REGISTER ...................................................................... 300
5.13 GREASING SCHEDULE ..................................................................................................... 300
5.14 LUBRICATION SCHEDULE ............................................................................................... 300
5.15 TORQUE TABLES .............................................................................................................. 300
5.16 HAZARDOUS AREA EQUIPMENT REGISTER ................................................................. 301
5.17 FINAL FUNCTIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 301
5.18 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES AND IN-SERVICE INSPECTION MANUAL ..................... 301

PAGE 9 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

5.19 MATERIAL HANDLING ENVELOPE .................................................................................. 302

5.20 TAGGING STRUCTURE AND REGISTER ........................................................................ 302
5.21 VIRUTUAL WAREHOUSE INVENTORY ............................................................................ 302
5.21.1 DEFENITION OF INVENTORY FIELDS ..................................................................... 303
5.22 VENDOR AND THIRD-PARTY DOCUMENTATION .......................................................... 304
5.23 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION AND FINISHED PLANS .................................................... 304
5.24 BUILD RECORDS, MATERIAL TRACEABILITY ................................................................ 305
5.25 DOCUMENT NUMBERING AND CORRESPONDENCE ................................................... 305
SECTION 6 – APPENDICES .............................................................................................................. 306
6.1 APPENDIX I – SUPER 116E BASIC DESIGN SPECIFICATION ....................................... 306
6.2 APPENDIX II – CONTRACT PLANS AND DRAWINGS .................................................... 307
6.3 APPENDIX III - MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST (MAKERS LIST) ......................................... 308
6.4 APPENDIX IV – VENDOR SPECIFICATIONS AND DATASHEETS ................................. 357
6.4.1 LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND DATASHEETS .................. 357

PAGE 10 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL PROVISIONS

This Specification and its accompanying documents, drawings, Contract Plans, datasheets,
and appendices forming part thereof, and referred to as the “Specification”, “this or these
Specification(s)” or Contract Technical Specification (“CTS”) and shall form an integral part of
the “CONTRACT” between BUILDER and BUYER. This Specification is subject always to the
terms and conditions contained in the main body of the Contract and in the event of any
discrepancy or inconsistency between the terms of the Contract and the terms of the
Specifications, the terms contained in the main body of the Contract shall prevail. The date of
the CONTRACT is herein also referred to as EFFECTIVE DATE.
The supply and installation of materials, labour, machinery, equipment and furnishings is
specified in the Contract and the BUILDER shall be responsible for the installation of the same
in accordance to the Contract and these Specifications forming part thereof. Upon delivery the
VESSEL shall be completely commissioned and successfully tested, ready for operation and
in accordance with the requirements specified in the Contract and documents accompanying
and forming part thereof.

1.1 INTENT OF THE SPECIFICATION

It is the intent of this Specification, Contract Plans, and other documents attached hereto, to
provide for construction and delivery to the BUYER, of a Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit, herein
referred to as “VESSEL”, self-elevating with the functionality, capacities, arrangements,
outfitting’s, machinery, maintainability and performance as further described in this
Specification.
The VESSEL is to be designed, constructed, equipped, fitted and tested in accordance with
the Specifications and Plan(s). It is not the intent of this Specification to have described all and
everything, and items not otherwise mentioned but necessary to complete the vessel to fulfil
its intended operating function are to be supplied by the BUILDER at no cost to the BUYER.
As defined in the Specifications and in the Contract for the VESSEL to be operating in the
Arabian Gulf with specific focus on END USER (Saudi Aramco) requirements and to operate
in the waters of the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. Functional requirements related to the operation
of systems and equipment as defined in the Specifications may overrule and have priority over
the description of technical solutions, materials or supplies. Such overruling is in all cases
subject to BUYER’s review and approval.
The details, which are not mentioned in these Specifications, are to be in accordance with the
current BUILDER's standards / practices but subject to taking into consideration the GOOD
INDUSTRY PRACTICE of similar shipyards and similar state-of-the-art drilling rigs at no
additional cost to the BUYER.

1.2 STRUCTURE OF THE SPECIFICATION AND ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTS

The following sections are provided in the Specification. All sections and its Specifications and
accompanying documents, drawings, Contract Plans, Datasheets and CTS Appendices shall
form integral part of the Specification and the requirements to design, build and deliver the
VESSEL in accordance with the Contract.

SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 2 – DESIGN SPECIFICATION, CRITERIA AND CONDITIONS
SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION
SECTION 4 – INSPECTIONS, TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND TRIALS
SECTION 5 – DESIGN, ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION

PAGE 11 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 6 – APPENDICES AND ATTACHMENTS

List of appendices and attachments that form an integral part of the Specification.
• APPENDIX I – SUPER 116E BASIC DESIGN SPECIFICATION
• APPENDIX II – CONTRACT PLANS AND DRAWINGS
• APPENDIX III - MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST (MAKERS LIST)
• APPENDIX IV – PROTECTIVE COATINGS SPECIFICATION

1.3 GENERAL CONDITIONS AND STANDARDS

1.3.1 LANGUAGE
The project language for all verbal and written communication shall be US English. All
documentation, drawings, datasheets, specifications, manuals, testing and inspection
documentation and all other documents relevant to and part of the design and build of the
VESSEL shall be in US English.

Where required for safety or quality reasons and throughout the execution of the Engineering,
Procurement and Construction Project, multi-language signs and notices shall be provided on
all construction sites to adequately address labour languages.

1.3.2 UNIT CONVENTION

The Metric system shall be adopted unless specifically stated otherwise in the Specifications.
Unit Description SI – Unit System
Length m (= 1,000 mm)
Force N
KN (= 1,000 N)
Pressure bar
Weight kg
t or ton (metric = 1,000 kg)
Volume litre
m3 (= 1,000 litre)
Flow l/min
m3/h
Speed m/s
Revolution Speed rpm
Power kW
Voltage V(volts)
Current A(amps)
Resistance Ohm
Temperature ° or deg C (Celsius)

The BUILDER is to prepare a table of their preferred SI-Units and their proposed US
convention Units for the BUYER’s review and approval.
In some cases, the following imperial Units will be provided in this specification:
• Instead of the SI-Units
• In brackets, following the SI-Units

PAGE 12 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Unit Description Imperial – Unit System

Length “ or in (= 25.4 mm)
ft (= 0.3048 m)
Pressure psi (≈ 0.069 bar)
lbs / ft2 (≈ 0.048 kN/ m2)
Weight lbs (≈ 0.454 kg)
kips (= 454 kg)
Volume cu ft or ft3 (≈ 0.0283 m3)
bbls (≈ 0.159 m3)
Flow US gpm (≈ 0.227 m3/h)
Speed ft/sec (≈ 0.305 m/sec)
knots (≈ 0.514 m/sec)
Power hp (= 0.746 kW)

Some project deliverables, to be provided by BUILDER, shall include additional multiple Units
(either SI System, Metric System or a combination of both) that may not be listed in the CTS.
These deliverables include, but shall not be limited to:
1. S116E Operations Manual
2. S116E Construction Portfolio
3. S116E IADC Technical Specification (“Schedule A”)
4. S116E Maintenance Envelope
BUILDER shall include and list the required units as per BUYER’S request and approval.
All instruments/displays shall be dual scale (metric SI-Unit and US standard Units) where
available from makers. In the case of electronic displays, to avoid clutter, the choice of Units
shall, as an option, be user selectable. The actual Units used shall be indicated at all times
(approved abbreviations are acceptable).

1.3.3 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVENTION

The coordinate system utilized in all drawings, design documentation, software and Operating
Manual prepared by the BUILDER is to be applied as follows:
Frame zero (0): Transom of the VESSEL

Longitudinal / X-Direction: Origin at Transom (+) forward, (-) aft

Origin at VESSEL
Transverse / Y-Direction: (+) stbd, (-) port
Centreline (CL)
Origin at molded VESSEL
Vertical / Z-Direction: (+) up, (-) down
Baseline (BL)

1.3.4 TERMINOLOGY AND ABBREVIATIONS

The following terminology and abbreviations are used in this Specification.
ACRONYMS TERMINOLOGY / DESCRIPTION
AC Alternating Current
AFC Approved for Construction
AHU Air Handling Units
ARC Arc welding
AVCG Allowable Vertical Centre of Gravity

PAGE 13 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ACRONYMS TERMINOLOGY / DESCRIPTION

BERT Bit Error Rate Test
BFE BUILDER Furnished Equipment
BUILDER / Builder the Company that is to build and deliver the VESSEL
BUYER / Buyer the Company for whom the VESSEL is to be built
CCR Central Control Room
CCTV Closed Circuit Tele Vision
CLASS or Class The Classification Society as specified in section 1.3.5
The document that formalizes the building and delivery of the
CONTRACT / Contract
VESSEL by the BUILDER to the BUYER

CTS Contract Technical Specification, this Specification

DC Direct Current
DCR Drilling Control Room/ Drillers Cabin
DESIGNER / BASIC
Keppel LeTourneau
DESIGNER
DFT Dry Film Thickness
EPIRB Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacon
ERW Electric Resistance Welding
FAT Factory Acceptance Test
FCAW-G Flux Cored Arc Welding-Gas (shielded)
FO Fuel Oil
FRP Fibre Reinforced Plastic
GMAW Gas Metal Arc Welding
GMDSS Global Maritime Distress Safety System
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GTAW Gas Tungsten Arc Welding
HC Hydrocarbon
HF High Frequency
HHP High Holding Power
HLO Helicopter Landing Officer
HSE Health Safety and Environment
HT High Temperature
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning
ID Inner Diameter
IP Ingress Protection
IS Intrinsically Safe
ISO International Standardization Organization
LAN Local Area Network
LO Lubricating Oil
MAG Metal Active Gas
MCC Motor Control Centre
MCT Multi Cable Transit
MF Medium Frequency
MGS Mud Gas Separator

PAGE 14 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ACRONYMS TERMINOLOGY / DESCRIPTION

MIG Metal Inert Gas
MPI Magnetic Particle Inspection
NDT Non Destructive Testing
NUC Not Under Command
OD Outer Diameter
OFE OWNER Furnished Equipment
OIM Offshore Installation Manager
OSS Operation Support System
OWNER or Owner BUYER – The Company for whom the VESSEL is to be built
PA Public Address
PABX Private Automatic Branch exchange
PAGA Public Address and General Alarm
POB Persons on Board
PS / Port Portside
PT Potential Transformer
P-tank Pressure tank
PTT Push To Talk
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
International and national organisations providing regulations
Regulatory Bodies:
relevant to a Self-elevating Drilling Unit
RPD Rack Phase Difference
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
RIG The VESSEL, the drilling rig S116E
SART Search and Rescue Transponder
SAW Submerged Arc Welding
SB, STBD Starboard
SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding
SMM Nautical Mobile Service (Mobile Maritime System)
SMS Safety Management System
Specification or this Construction Specification or Contract Technical
Specifications Specification and all associated documents
SPL Sound Pressure Level
PMS Production and Maintenance System
SSAS Ship Security Alert System
SSB Single-Side Band modulation
SWL Safe Working Load
TBD To Be Decided, Determined
TFT Thin Film Transistor
TIG Tungsten Inert Gas
The S116E, the three-legged jack-up Mobile Offshore Drilling
VESSEL or Vessel
Unit, type S116E, as described in this Specification
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
UT Ultra-sonic Testing
UV Ultra Violet

PAGE 15 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ACRONYMS TERMINOLOGY / DESCRIPTION

Vendor A company that supplies materials, equipment or systems
VFD Variable Frequency Drive
VDL Variable Deck Load, Variable Load
VI Visual Inspection
VOC Voice of Customer
VSAT Very Small Aperture Terminal
WP Working Pressure
WT Watertight
Yard BUILDER’s construction site
Client BUYER’s customer
Saudi Aramco / SAR END USER / BUYER’s customer
MEL Master Equipment List
OEM Original Equipment Manufacture

“GOOD INDUSTRY PRACTICE” means using the standards, practices, methods and
procedures, complying with APPLICABLE LAW, CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY, and
REGULATORY BODY requirements, and exercising the degree of prudence and foresight
which would be expected from a properly skilled and experienced shipbuilder of drilling
platforms in the international offshore oil and gas industry performing work similar to the work
performed by the BUILDER hereunder (“WORK”).This shall include, but not be limited to:
• Development of soundly conceived and engineered detailed plans and drawings,
• Incorporation of the specified components and materials,
• Utilization of sound construction and approved testing methods.
1.3.5 CLASSIFICATION
The VESSEL and its machinery, equipment and outfitting, shall be built under special survey
of the Classification Society, also referred to as “CLASS”, for VESSELS of this type of Self-
Elevating Drilling VESSELS, also referred to by CLASS as Mobile Offshore Drilling Units.

The VESSEL shall be designed, built and in full compliance with the following Classification
and Notations:
American Bureau of Shipping “Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Offshore Drilling
Unit” for Class A1, Self-Elevating Drilling Unit, CPS, HELIDK, CRC OC-PL
All items required by CLASS and other Regulatory Bodies (including latest changes,
amendments and published revisions) in effect as of the date of the Contract signing, shall be
BUILDER’s responsibility.
All changes or revisions required by the CLASS or Regulatory Bodies, and as requested by
BUYER, as a direct result of rule changes put into effect after the date of the Contract signing
shall be for BUYER’s account.

1.3.6 RULES AND STANDARDS

It shall be the BUILDER's responsibility to comply with all the Rules and Regulations listed
below and in the CTS. BUILDER shall obtain all certificates in connection with CLASS or
Regulatory requirements. Such responsibility covers all documentation for both the VESSEL
itself and its equipment and outfitting installed on-board. The applicable Rules and Regulations
shall be those in force as of the date of the CONTRACT, or if not in force as of the date of the
CONTRACT, which are ratified and promulgated on or before the date of the CONTRACT and

PAGE 16 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

which will be compulsory for the VESSEL on or before the delivery of the VESSEL in
accordance with Article VII of the CONTRACT.
In case the Class requirements or Rules and Regulations from the various Regulatory Bodies
differ, or are in direct conflict, the priority will be as follows:
1. Classification Society
2. Regulatory Bodies
In the event of a conflict, inconsistency or other dispute between the CLASSIFICATION
SOCIETY and any REGULATORY BODY pertaining to the construction of the VESSEL,
BUILDER shall notify BUYER of such conflict, inconsistency or other dispute promptly after
BUILDER becomes aware of same. While BUILDER may consider input from the BUYER as
to resolution of the such conflict, inconsistency or other dispute, BUILDER shall use its
reasonable judgment to resolve the conflict, inconsistency or other dispute in order to avoid
construction delays and shall remain liable for any resulting non-compliance with requirements
of the CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY and any REGULATORY BODY or APPLICABLE LAWS,
provided, however, the BUILDER shall always follow and comply with the APPLICABLE LAWS
in the event that after BUILDER’S BEST ENDEAVORS the conflict, inconsistency or other
dispute with requirements of the CLASSIFICATION SOCIETY and any REGULATORY BODY
with APPLICABLE LAWS cannot be resolved.

The VESSEL shall be designed, built and delivered in full compliance with the following rules,
codes, standards, regulations and guidelines as applicable to Mobile Offshore Drilling Units.
• ABS “Rules for Building and Classing Mobile Offshore Drilling Units” (MODU) 2018
• Marshall Islands Flag State statutory regulations
• IMO Code for the Construction and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units (2009
IMO MODU Code, 2010 Edition); Resolutions A 1023(26) & MSC 435(98)
• IMO Fire Safety Systems Code - FSS Code (IMO)
• IMO Life Saving Appliance Code – LSA Code (IMO)
• International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), where applicable
• UK Civil Aviation Authority, CAP 437 for helicopter deck design
• International Convention on Load Lines, 1966 Regulation 10(2) Annex I
• ILO convention 92 & 133 (excluding swimming pool)
• International Convention on Tonnage Measurement of Ships, 1969
• International Convention for Prevention of Pollution from Ships (MARPOL 1973/78,
Consolidated Edition 2017, Annexes I (Oil), IV (Sewage), V (Garbage) and VI (Air
Pollution)
• ABS Crane Register Certificate (CRC). Cranes are designed to API 2C Specification
for Offshore Cranes. (Monogram)
• COLREGS 1972 Navigation Regulations
• ABS Guide for crew habitability on offshore installation
• ABS Guidance notes for Noise and vibration control for inhabited spaces.
• ISO 15614- welding
• ISO 1461 - Hot dipped galvanizing
• Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA) - Heavy Ducting
• DW144 stiffening for light gauge ducting
• EN 779 particle & removal filter performance
• ASHRAE Handbooks
a. HVAC Applications 2015
b. HVAC Systems & Equipment 2016
c. Fundamentals 2017
d. Refrigeration 2018
• ASTM F1166 Standard practice for Human Engineering Design

PAGE 17 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• GMDSS-tech Checksheet
• Ship Security Alert System – SSAS
• De-Ratting Certification
• Maritime Regulatory bodies of the Saudi Arabian Government and those International
Maritime Conventions and Regulatory Bodies to which the Saudi Arabian Government
is a signatory
• IMO International Convention on Standards of Training, Certification and
Watchkeeping for Seafarers (STCW) 1978, with the adopted amended Resolution
A.891 (21) by END USER for MODU personnel
• END USER’s Aviation and Loss Prevention Department Helideck Safety requirements
• AISC (Structure/Steel Outfitting)
• American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Pressure Vessels
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Piping
• American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) – Manual of Steel Construction –
Allowable Stress Design, Latest Edition
• IEEE Standard No.45 “Recommended Practice for Electrical Installation Shipboard”.
• IEC–Publication by International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC61982 for offshore
installations
• IEC–Publication by International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC no.92 for electrical
installation in ships
• IEC, publication no.61000 for EMC
• IEC 61892-7 Hazardous Areas
• IEC 61508 - Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems – Parts 1 to 7
• IEC 60092 - Electrical installations in ships - ALL PARTS
• International Tele-Communication and Radio Regulation
• ISO 15138 Petroleum and natural gas industries – Offshore production installations –
Heating, ventilation and Air-conditioning
• ISO 7547 Air-conditioning and ventilation of accommodation spaces on board ships --
Design conditions and basis of calculations
• Latest API Rules as necessary, including but not limited to: API S53, API 16A, API 6A,
API 16C, API 16D, API RP 54, API RP 505, API RP510, etc.
• NACE MR-01-75 Petroleum and natural gas industries—Materials for use in H2S-
containing environments in oil and gas production
• AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel (latest revision).
• National Fire Alarm and Signalling Code (NFPA)
• Dropped object industries guidelines. (throughout the rig and not limited to
substructure and derrick)
• Hydrogen Sulphide stress cracking-resistant metallic material for oil field equipment –
NACE Standard MR-01-75
• International Ship and Port Facility Security Code - ISPS Code
• IMO BWM Code, Ballast Water Management Code, 2019
• IMO Res. A.468(XII), Code on Noise Levels on board Ships, 1981
• ISO 6954-2000 (E) Mechanical vibration
1.3.7 FLAG STATE
The Flag State for the VESSEL shall be Marshall Islands and the VESSEL shall be compliant
with all applicable and latest revisions of the Marshall Islands Flag State statutory regulations.

1.4 END USER COMPLIANCE

The VESSEL shall be designed, built and delivered to operate primarily for END USER in the
Arabian Gulf. Any requirements provided by END USER standards, subject to approval by

PAGE 18 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

BUYER and Class, shall prevail over assumptions or solutions proposed by BUILDER during
the Basic Design period and BUILDER shall implement the requirements at no additional cost
to BUYER. The following END USER standards and requirements shall be included in the
design basis:
1. Schedule G, latest edition provided for the S116E
2. SWIM (Safe Working Instruction Manual), latest edition
3. HSERM (Health Safety and Environmental Requirement Manual), latest edition
4. WCM (Well Control Manual) 6th edition, latest edition
5. SAEM (Environmental Manual, 2018, latest edition)
6. Engineering Standards
7. Aviation Standards

1.5 CONTRACT PLANS, DRAWINGS AND COMMENT SHEETS

All drawings listed in APPENDIX II – CONTRACT PLANS AND DRAWINGS, as attached,
shall form integral part of this Specification and hereafter referred to as “Contract Plans”. In
the event of conflicts, or inconsistencies, between the Specification and the Contract Plans,
the Specification shall prevail. In any event, if the BUILDER discovers a conflict or an
inconsistency between the Specification and any of the Contract Plans, BUILDER shall bring
such conflict or inconsistency to the attention of the BUYER who shall promptly provide the
BUILDER with a resolution. Under no circumstances shall such resolution cause the BUILDER
to request a variation order unless the resolution clearly exceeds the intent of the Specification.
It is understood by both parties that due to lack of some information, the drawings and plans
provided in the Specification cannot be considered complete and that BUYER’s comments to
BUILDER’S drawings during the detailed engineering phase would provide the necessary
definition to the technical aspects of the Technical Specification. Contract Plans do not reflect
the full Class approved package given by the Designer to the BUILDER. The Specification
calls for compliance with Class and other Regulatory Body requirements as defined in Section
1, paragraph 1.3.6. BUILDER shall modify and supplement the Contract Plans, as necessary,
to meet the full requirement of Section 1, paragraph 1.3.6 and shall build the VESSEL
according to such modified and supplemented Contract Plans.

All Contract Plans shall be supported by analyses and calculations which shall be provided to
BUYER and CLASS for review and approval in the detailed design phase of the Project. In all
cases, if any system specifications, its ratings or capacities, are required to be increased as a
result of CLASS requirements or detailed design calculations, BUILDER shall implement these
changes without cost or delay to the BUYER. BUILDER shall in all cases, adhere to the details
and the intent of the Specifications and BUILDER shall not reduce the requirements or the
Specification as a result of minimal CLASS requirements or detail design calculations unless
specifically approved by the BUYER.

During the detail engineering phase, the BUILDER shall provide for all detailed
measurements, prepare and provide for all detailed engineering plans, drawings, analysis etc.,
including calculations as required for the approval of the BUYER and Class prior to the use of
these drawings for production and construction. The BUILDER shall also prepare and provide
full composite layouts and / or isometric drawings (for hull, deck, machinery and
accommodation spaces), including piping, electrical cable ways, and ventilation ducts, for
review and comment by the BUYER.
The approval of drawings, datasheets, schematics, etc. by the BUYER or Class does not
relieve the BUILDER of its responsibility to provide a complete and operable VESSEL in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification. If it is found, after approval of the

PAGE 19 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

drawings by the BUYER or Class, that a drawing is in error or is not in compliance with these
Specifications, the BUILDER shall correct the drawing and make any changes to the VESSEL
required to ensure compliance with the Specifications at no additional cost to the BUYER.

No departure from principal characteristics, basic arrangements or major dimensions will be

permitted. While it is recognized that exact adherence to basic structural arrangements, and
machinery general layouts, is not always feasible in progressing from the Contract Plans to
the detailed design and construction drawings, any deviations made by the BUILDER shall be
subject to BUYER’s review and approval. Permitted changes shall be kept to a minimum and
be subject to the BUYER’s prior written approval as per Contract.

1.6 SAFETY, PEFORMANCE AND EFFICENCY OF THE VESSEL

The BUILDER shall be responsible for the development of the detail design, including but not
limited to all systems and subsystems, in accordance with the Specifications and the Contract
Plans included therein. The VESSEL shall be a self-elevating, mobile offshore drilling rig with
the maximum efficiency levels as per the highest industry standards of previous rigs such as
but not limited to the latest deliveries of GustoMSC CJ-46, CJ50 or similar designs, able to
drill in water depths up to 330ft and a drilling depth down to 30,000 ft with 5 1/2” drill pipe
under the conditions defined in the Specification.

The VESSEL shall be equipped with “state of the art” equipment and shall be designed with
an operationally safe and efficient layout with high focus on optimizing the deck spaces, usable
with forklifts, within the constraint as defined by the General Arrangement drawings.

During the design and the layout of the VESSEL, BUILDER shall always consider technical
safety characteristics, any potential hazards, emergency response, evacuation and rescue
requirements from a technical, regulatory and operational viewpoint. In order to identify,
validate and discuss the safety and efficiency of the design, BUILDER shall host, conduct and
facilitate with BUYER and CLASS attendance, risk assessments, hazard identification
reviews, operability reviews and interdisciplinary design review workshops for each of the rig
sections, compartments, systems and functional areas. All such activities shall take place prior
to completion of the detail design and prior to freezing the detail design for construction of the
VESSEL.

Within sixty (60) days, after the Effective date of the Contract, BUILDER shall develop detailed
planning, facilitation and reporting procedures for any risk assessments, hazard identification
reviews, operability reviews and interdisciplinary design review workshops and submit the
procedures to BUYER for review and approval. Any finding, risk, hazards or operational
inefficiency identified during such risk assessments, hazard identification reviews, operability
reviews and interdisciplinary design review workshops shall be corrected and rectified
according to a solution approved by BUYER and at no additional cost to BUYER.
All arrangements and working areas shall be designed to ensure safe and efficient working
places on the VESSEL while operating in accordance with the Specification and GOOD
INDUSTRY PRACTICE such as applied for other and similar mobile offshore drilling rigs being
built in accordance with a similar design, size and configuration, unless clearly defined in this
Specification.

PAGE 20 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

1.7 DRAWING SCHEDULE AND APPROVAL PROCESS

The BUILDER shall at all times keep and maintain the responsibility to obtain approvals from
CLASS for the applicable drawings, reports and analysis while maintaining the integrity of the
Basic Design requirements provided by the Basic Designer.
The BUILDER shall provide the BUYER, within sixty (60) days after the Contract date, the
updated detail design Master Document Register with detailed design drawings, production
drawings, working drawings, reports and analysis, to be submitted for approval. The register
shall list for each drawing the proposed and actual submittal dates, approval dates and
revision submittal and approval dates. The register shall be brought up to date monthly and
resubmitted to the BUYER.
The BUILDER shall submit two (2) paper copies in the format required by BUYER and one (1)
electronic copy of drawings, datasheets, sketches, diagrams, design reports, calculations, etc.
developed by BUILDER to the BUYER for approval. The BUILDER shall simultaneously
submit to both Class and to other applicable Regulatory Bodies and agencies all documents
required by those organizations to obtain the required certification as per Section 1
paragrah1.3.6 Rules and Standards.

The BUILDER is responsible for any modifications to the drawings or calculations required by
Class or Regulatory Bodies or agencies. The requested modifications shall be made in a timely
manner and shall be resubmitted to all parties including the BUYER for approval.
Any deviation, change, revision or modification to drawings cannot be carried out without
BUYER’s written approval. BUYER shall normally approve the drawings within fourteen (14)
days after receipt or the BUYER shall advise the BUILDER of discrepancies, which would
require revision and re-submittal. The BUILDER shall provide assistance to BUYER to obtain
all necessary Flag State Approvals and certificates. Two (2) print copies of all drawings
approved by CLASS will be issued by the BUILDER to the BUYER.

The BUILDER shall provide Class Project Oversight Access by enabling BUYER to access
the details of the CLASS approval status, including but not limited to the detailed document
review comments provided by CLASS to BUILDER as well as all approval letters, including
open and closed comments, provided by CLASS to BUILDER.

1.8 PROVISION OF EQUIPMENT, SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

BUILDER shall provide all equipment, machinery, fittings, furnishings, materials, spares,
consumables, etc. required for the construction, testing, commissioning and delivery of the
VESSEL in line with the Specification, ready to operate and to drill. All loose equipment and
hand tools for all operational disciplines shall be provided by BUILDER. The accommodation
shall be fully outfitted, furnished and ready for the intended use.
BUILDER shall deliver the VESSEL with one (1) year full operational spares for all major and
safety critical equipment and safety critical spares as required by Class and approved by
BUYER.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

The VESSEL shall be built in strict compliance with tolerances and quality of workmanship
related to the contractual Codes and Regulations outlined in Section 1, paragraph 1.3.6.
During construction and until delivery the BUILDER shall be responsible for protection and
preservation as required by manufacturer of all material, equipment, etc. intended for the

PAGE 21 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

VESSEL. All electrical and electronic equipment shall be provided with climate-controlled
storage as necessary during storage in the BUILDER’s yard.
The BUILDER shall have a quality control system and inspection force of its own to ensure
the quality of workmanship and materials at the yard and at vendors’ plants as necessary. The
construction project shall be administered based upon an ISO 9000 Quality Management
System.
Failure on the part of the BUILDER to provide these safeguards shall not later be the basis of
a claim for delay in delivery if workmanship or design of a vendor is rejected by the BUYER.
Failure on the part of the BUYER to identify substandard quality at a particular time does not
relieve the BUILDER of its responsibility to correct a problem once it is discovered and at no
cost to the BUYER.
All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by BUYER representatives at any
reasonable time during manufacturing, production and construction, at any or all places, where
such work is carried out by BUILDER and/or its Subcontractors.
The BUYER or its representative shall have the authority to reject workmanship or material
whenever found defective, not in conformity with GOOD INDUSTRY PRACTICE, or not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract plans and Specifications. BUYER shall be
permitted access to BUILDER’s and BUILDER’s Subcontractors’ yards and offices twenty-four
hours a day seven days a week.

1.10 OFE – OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

Owner will provide the OFE as outlined in the MEL to BUILDER and BUILDER shall take
receipt of the OFE as per the process and requirements outlined in the CONTRACT and this
CTS. Any changes to the OFE scope of supply will be subject to the Project Change
Management procedure. It is the intention to limit such changes to the absolute minimum.
If OFE is provided, then any OFE that has been used during construction of the VESSEL shall
be fully inspected, serviced, cleaned and certified to “as new” condition by the OEM. Any
damage or worn parts shall be replaced by the OEM or an OEM approved vendor prior to
delivery of the VESSEL and at no additional cost to BUYER.

1.11 BFE – BUILDER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

Unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract, the BUILDER shall furnish and install all
necessary materials, machinery, equipment, accessories, furnishings, fittings etc., as
specified herein for the construction, outfitting, commissioning, testing and delivery of a
completely outfitted and equipped VESSEL for the BUYER to safely and efficiently operate
the VESSEL in line with the Specification.
BUILDER shall adequately protect, lubricate and maintain all equipment and machinery until
delivery of the VESSEL including protection following testing and commissioning. This shall
include remote locations and connection of grease fittings, space heaters or cooling
requirements.

All BUILDER furnished machinery and equipment shall be operated and/or tested by the
BUILDER as per Section 4 of this CTS. All tests of both BUILDER and Owner furnished
equipment shall be intended to prove satisfactory operation of the equipment’s and full
compliance with the requirements of this Specification, the Regulatory Bodies, and the original
equipment manufacturers (“OEM”), so far as is reasonably practical.
Any BFE that has been used during Construction of the VESSEL shall be fully inspected,
serviced, cleaned and certified to “as new” condition by the OEM. Any damage or worn parts

PAGE 22 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

shall be replaced by the OEM or an OEM approved vendor prior to the delivery of the VESSEL
and at no additional cost to BUYER.

1.12 SPECIAL BUILDER-FURNISHED SERVICES

1.12.1 EQUIPMENT TAGGING
All components forming part of the VESSEL, including fixed or movable equipment,
machinery, outfitting, furnishing, tool, material (as required), spare part, etc. shall be provided
with a dedicated and unique identification tag. The tagging system to be followed and used is
referenced in Section 5.20. All tags shall be physically and permanently marked on the
hardware, clearly visible and durable during use in operation of the VESSEL and shall also be
readable into an electronic inventory record by means of Barcode scanner or similar.
All tags shall be kept consistent throughout the detailed engineering, construction,
commissioning of the VESSEL. All drawings shall have reference to the tags provided and the
tags installed shall match the tags referenced on the drawings to identify equipment or
components of the VESSEL. BUILDER shall maintain an updated Tagging Register and
deliver the final as-built register as per Section 5.20 prior to delivery of the VESSEL.

1.12.2 VIRTUAL WAREHOUSE

BUILDER shall prepare and maintain throughout the construction and until delivery of the
VESSEL a dedicated warehouse for BUYER’S supplies to include but not limited to, BUILDER
supplied operational spares, BUYER furnished spares and consumables or Third-Party
supplies required to furnish the VESSEL for its operational readiness. The warehouse is to be
provided in a separate and dedicated section of BUILDER’S warehouses. The warehouse
shall be enclosed and indoors, secure and provided with continuous security and protected
from the environment. A separate and continuously updated inventory register shall be
prepared and managed by BUILDER as per Section 5.21 Virtual Warehouse and Inventory.
All material and equipment arriving shall be clearly marked and tagged with a dedicated rig
system tag as per Section 1.12.1 Equipment Tagging and shall also be provided with a Virtual
Warehouse Inventory tag as per Section 5.21 Virtual Warehouse and Inventory. Prior to
delivery of the VESSEL and at a time advised and agreed by BUYER, BUILDER shall transfer
all stored items in the warehouse on board the VESSEL and assist the rig crew with moving
the items to the dedicated permanent storage and warehouse locations on board. The location
on board the VESSEL shall be consistent with the location outlined on the inventory tagging
register.

1.13 SOURCE OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

All equipment and materials shall be new, unused and carry the required and valid certification,
duly endorsed by CLASS and the OEM, at the time of installation on board. Any major or minor
equipment, drilling equipment, machinery, electrical equipment and materials used for
installation on board produced in China will require special and specific approval by BUYER.
No novel equipment or prototype shall be purchased and installed unless specifically approved
and agreed upon with the BUYER.

1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS
All equipment and materials shall be as per the requirements outlined in the Specification(s).
Where materials, fittings or equipment and machinery are specified by vendor, trade name or
model numbers, then it is the intent of the Specification that such product be furnished and
installed by the BUILDER. Where the terms "or equal" or "similar to" are used, the BUILDER

PAGE 23 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

may propose materials and equipment that is substantially similar in design, quality and
construction and produced by reputable manufacturers other than those indicated.
Such proposed substitutions shall be formally submitted to the BUYER for written approval,
with the reasons for the substitution and a full description and specification of the materials
and/or equipment to be substituted, as well as the proposed substitution.
Any substitution made without prior and specific approval by the BUYER shall not be permitted
and will result in replacement of such substitution at BUILDER’s cost.
If BUILDER fails to source and make available the required equipment or materials described
and specified in the Specification then BUILDER’s proposal for substitution of such equipment
or material shall be of equal quality, origin, performance, durability and certification as the
original equipment or material outlined in the Specification. Any cost associated with
substitutions or proposed substitutions shall be on BUILDER’s account and shall not be
grounds for schedule delay or an increase in weight. The BUYER’s written decision regarding
the acceptability or otherwise of any substitution shall be final.

1.15 DATA COLLECTION AND DATA SECURITY

These requirements shall be considered minimum requirements and are intended to provide
clarification to BUILDER about BUYER’s basic data security philosophy.
It shall be noted that BUYER reserves the right to further enhance these requirements during
the detail design period and as deemed necessary into order to comply with internal company
policies and new data security threat developments.

1.15.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR DATA SECURITY

1. Data security requirements shall be met for all IT (information Technology) and
OT (operational Technology) systems, subsystems and components supplied
by the vendors
2. Vendors responsibilities shall, include but shall not be limited to:
i. Participation in Cyber security risk assessment workshops
ii. Implementation of risk assessment workshop findings and
recommendations
iii. Supply and installation of required components such as firewalls, anti-
virus software and operating systems, all components shall be subject
to BUYER’s approval
iv. BUILDER and or BUILDER’s vendors shall demonstrate to BUYER,
their hardware / software lifecycle management system ensuring
firewalls, switches, processors, anti-virus software, operating systems,
system software and HMI’s are maintained and supported throughout
the lifecycle of the rig. Demonstration shall include how the OEM’s
respond to known vulnerabilities on systems deployed throughout the
fleet.
v. To ensure compliance with future security enhancements and
protection against future virus signatures, the vendor shall describe how
software and hardware upgrades are handled through their change
management process and procedures; from initiation through to
development, installation, commissioning and close out for the lifecycle
of the rig.
vi. BUILDER and or BUILDER’s Vendors to employ application whitelisting
on all supplied systems indexing approved software, software libraries,

PAGE 24 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

plug-ins, extensions and configuration files that are permitted to be

present and active on such systems.
vii. BUILDER and or BUILDER’s Vendors shall install an “Agent” solution
on all systems to prevent USB drives installing malignant files or
software without first performing anti-virus checking by a USB cyber
scanning kiosk. Choice of “agent” solution to be determined by BUYER.
viii. BUILDER and or BUILDER’s Vendors shall ensure network traffic is
mirrored and made accessible to BUYER to leverage an Intrusion
detection system. Vendor shall agree that BUYER may passively
monitor vendors networks installed on board utilizing an Intrusion
Detection system

1.15.2 DATA ACQUISITION, ANALYSIS AND CONDITION BASED MONITORING

1. BUILDER and or BUILDER’s Vendor shall provide details of and include an
OPC UA Compliant interface and data acquisition server to allow BUYER to
acquire and analyse running operational and raw data from OEM installed
systems. Vendor to provide a data map including scaling, tagging of all sensor
data, scaled data or calculated data via the OPC UA compliant interface.
2. Vendor to agree that any raw or analysed data collected from vendor systems
installed on the rig is owned and controlled by BUYER and that this data can
be used, stored and analysed for BUYER maintenance and system
performance analysis or other purposes
3. Vendor specific algorithms that fall under vendor intellectual property and that
may be used for the on-board equipment condition data and trend analysis shall
not be required to be mapped or transmitted
4. Vendor shall agree to utilize BUYER’s system and procedures for remote
access and connection authorization (Privileged Access Management
System). Any remote connection to the vendor system on board for
maintenance / fault finding / data collection shall only be allowed via hardware
or software switch system that positively identifies and authorizes such
connection; no direct connection without authorization shall be allowed, details
of the remote connections proposed by vendor are to be reviewed and
approved by BUYER. BUYER to define the remote access system during
detailed design phase of the project.

1.16 MASTER EQUIPMENT AND MAKERS LIST

The Master Equipment List (MEL) in Section 6.4 of the Specification describes major and
minor equipment to be installed on the VESSEL and designates which items shall be provided
by the BUYER (OFE) and which items shall be provided by the BUILDER (BFE). Spare parts
are to be supplied according to the Specification and OEM standard.
Where the term “or equivalent” is used, it shall be understood to mean that equipment of
equivalent specification and quality to that listed but manufactured by a maker not on the
approved list, may be substituted by the BUILDER, provided prior and formal approval is
granted by the BUYER.

BUILDER shall maintain the Master Equipment List in the layout approved by BUYER during
and throughout the engineering and construction period and until delivery of the VESSEL.
Prior to delivery BUILDER shall provide a final as-built MEL with detailed location, weight (wet

PAGE 25 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

and dry) and center of gravity information, capacity and basic utility requirement for each of
the major and minor items of equipment. For equipment identification and traceability, the MEL
shall include the original equipment manufacturer, model and type and as well as the
equipment tag as per BUYER provided and approved tagging procedure.

1.17 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

The BUILDER shall, within sixty (60) days, after the Effective date of the Contract, prepare
and furnish the BUYER or the Representative a detailed key event production schedule in the
form of a Gantt bar chart based on Microsoft Project or Primavera software showing planned
VESSEL construction progress. The delivery date provided therein shall be binding and
considered the “Delivery Date” of the VESSEL.

After approval of the production schedule by the BUYER or the Representative within twenty-
one (21) days after receipt thereof, the production schedule (herein called the “Construction
Schedule”) shall be the basis of interpretation of actual construction progress of the VESSEL.
The Construction Schedule shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
• An erection sequence to show the order in which the construction of the VESSEL shall
take place; this Schedule shall be in a form detailing all major activities with time
duration for each
• The Schedule shall be prepared in sufficient detail to show all production items
including the proposed start and finish dates for hull groups, machinery items, piping
systems, electrical items and systems, ventilation and air conditioning systems, and
joiner items
• The Schedule shall contain the milestones to be achieved during the construction
• A schedule of proposed plans; This schedule shall include all plans to be prepared by
the BUILDER and his subcontractors
• A schedule of required dates for material, showing the dates on which all material
items, including any OFE, are required at the BUILDER’s facilities for fabrication,
erection or installation
• A schedule of documentation submittal to Class or Regulatory Bodies
• A schedule of documentation deliverables to BUYER
• The schedule shall include required resources as well as Class hold points and key
vendor surveillance activities, including planned FAT dates
All tasks shall be appropriately and logically linked according to their interdependencies and
the BUILDER shall use the tracking features of the software to indicate actual progress against
planned activities and to identify the critical path for completion.
Detailed bi-weekly progress reports from BUILDER to BUYER are to commence sixty (60)
days following the date of the Effective date of the Contract through to completion of the
VESSEL.
The Schedule shall be kept current with the progress of the work, revised to show all changes,
progress (percentage complete) and delays, and shall be submitted to the BUYER as part of
the shipyards bi-weekly progress report, for information and review.
“Percentage complete” shall not be limited to an evaluation of the steel tonnage completed,
but shall include evaluations of the status of items such as engineering, procurement and
systems installation as well as mechanical completion, commissioning and trials etc. So as to
be a true reflection of progress, BUILDER shall include drawings completed, material on site
and critical path, etc. As each item on the schedule is completed, it shall be so indicated. Dates
of submittals and approvals shall be included and noted.

PAGE 26 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

1.18 OPERATIONAL READINESS

The VESSEL shall be delivered “Ready to Drill”, complete and accepted by Class and BUYER.
All equipment and all systems, outfitting’s and installations shall be operationally ready for its
intended purposes and shall be tested to prove operational readiness and achievement of
performance requirements to the satisfaction of the BUYER, Class and Regulatory Bodies.
For the avoidance of doubt, operationally ready means the VESSEL can be operated by
BUYER as per Specification and the functional requirements outlined therein. All
documentation, operation manuals, maintenance manuals, certificates, approvals have been
submitted from BUILDER to BUYER and all OEM final approvals and OEM certifications,
including COC’s, are in place. All safety features, functions, systems and provisions shall be
carefully checked and functionally demonstrated to the BUYER and Class.

1.19 ACCEPTANCE, TESTING AND DELIVERY

All shop FATs, VESSEL installation tests, dock trials, and acceptance trials (DELIVERY
TESTS AND TRIALS) shall be completed to the satisfaction of the BUYER and shall be in
accordance with procedures reviewed and approved by BUYER, requirements of the
Regulatory Bodies, the equipment manufacturers, and these Specification. Minimum
requirements for testing, inspections and trials are outlined in Section 4 of the Specification.
The scope and minimum requirements outlined in Section 4 shall not limit the testing and
inspection requirements for the BUILDER to deliver the VESSEL in its full and complete
operational readiness.

As further detailed in Section 4, the BUILDER shall prepare all inspection procedures,
commissioning procedures and system trial procedures including but not limited to Inclining
Test, Component test, all Systems tests, Machinery Vibration test, Jacking Trials, Living
Quarter Tightness test, Cantilever / Drill floor skidding trial, Derrick and Cantilever Load test,
Drilling System Integration test, Zone Management tests, Endurance test and Docking Trials,
Noise and Vibration tests, Illumination test, Thermographic test, Power limits etc. and submit
the procedures to Class and BUYER for review and approval.
For the avoidance of doubt, no test procedure, inspection, commissioning or system trial shall
be carried out without prior approval of BUYER. No testing shall be waived without the written
consent of the BUYER in each specific instance.
All consumables used during the test and the trials such as fuel, lube oils, filters, treated water
etc. shall be provided by the BUILDER. All expenses or costs e.g. vendor representative,
Class personnel, etc. for the tests and trials shall be borne by the BUILDER.
All DELIVERY TESTS AND TRIALS shall be scheduled by the BUILDER and notification of
such testing shall be given to the BUYER’S representatives no less than ten (10) days prior to
commencement of the test. All other TRIALS of the VESSEL shall be scheduled by the
BUILDER and notification of such testing shall be given to the BUYER’S representatives no
less than seven (7) days prior to commencement of the test. The BUILDER shall ensure all
relevant and necessary documentation on-board the VESSEL or at the testing site at the time
of the test.

The VESSEL shall be delivered in afloat condition, even keel, at the location stated in the
CONTRACT. The VESSEL shall be completed in every respect, fully tested and outfitted for
service in accordance with the scope of supply as per this Specification, with fluid in all
machinery to working level, ready for immediate operation. Before delivery, the BUILDER shall
provide all assistance and service, to load on board and store supplies, spares, tools, material

PAGE 27 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

and equipment as supplied by the BUILDER or the BUYER and which are required for the
operation of the VESSEL.

PAGE 28 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 2 – DESIGN SPECIFICATION, CRITERIA AND CONDITIONS

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND DESIGN CONDITIONS

2.1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The VESSEL shall consist of an almost triangular pontoon shaped steel hull, with inner bottom
and ring perimeter tanks, equipped with three open-truss legs of square cross-section, tubular
rack chord supported by three sets of robust rack and pinion type elevating systems.
It is equipped with a Five (5) level living quarters, to accommodate 120 POB with a central
control room (CCR). For the purpose of this CTS, references to Jacking Control Room and
Central Control Room shall be considered, one and the same compartment. There shall be a
bow-mounted helicopter deck suitable for the use of an S61N, S92 or B-214 helicopter and a
cantilever carrying the drilling topsides with substructure and the drilling package. The purpose
of the cantilever system is to perform all longitudinal movements of the complete cantilever-
drill floor assembly relative to the hull and to maintain the selected position when drilling. The
transverse movements of the substructure carrying the drilling topsides will allow the drill floor
assembly to move transverse relative to the hull and to maintain the selected position when
drilling.

2.1.2 MAIN CHARACTERISTICS

2.1.2.1 HULL
Length hull 243.1 ft (74.09 m)
Breadth hull 206.0 ft (62.79 m)
Longitudinal leg centres 129 ft (39.32 m)
Transverse leg centres 142 ft (43.28 m)
Aft leg centres to transom 54.1 ft (16.49 m)
Depth hull 26 ft (7.92 m)
Design draft(s) (max / min) 17.00 ft (5.18m)

2.1.2.2 LEGS AND SPUDCANS

Number of Legs Three (3) Legs
Type of Leg Square open truss X-braced structure
Size chord centre to centre 30 ft (9.14 m)
Length including Spudcan 343 ft (104.55 m)
Maximum pre-loading at Spudcan 17,300 kips
Spudcan area (approx.) 1,555 ft2
Design storm bearing pressure 10.5 ksf (502 Kpa)

2.1.2.3 JACKING SYSTEM

Number of Pinions 60 pinions (12 x 5 layers)
Make Keppel-LeTourneau
Drive and Controls AC electric, single speed (DOL)
Jacking speed (hull raising and lowering) 0.46 m/min (1.5 ft/min)

PAGE 29 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.1.2.4 LIVING QUARTERS

Type Semi-Wrap-around forward leg, CCR at
level-5
Cabins for 120 persons with approximate allocation of:
Min 10 persons in single rooms
Min 54 persons in two-man rooms
Min 56 persons in four-man rooms
General spaces for 120 persons
Sick Bay 2 beds
Inside Muster Stations 120 persons

2.1.2.5 HELICOPTER DECK

Size / Diameter Approx. 73 ft (22.2 m) – as required per
CAP437 latest edition
Helicopter type S61N, S92 and B-214
Maximum take-off weight 27.8 kips (12.6 t)
Location Bow mounted octagon (Flat-to-Flat) with its
longitudinal centreline to be in line with the
centreline of the longitudinal VESSEL.

2.1.2.6 CANTILEVER
Length 126 ft (38.4m)
Width 52 ft (15.85m)
Depth 18 ft (5.49m)
Height to drill floor (from base of cantilever) 33.46 ft (10.2m)
Pipe rack Height above Main Deck 22.5 ft (6.86 m)
Maximum reach Longitudinal: 70 ft from transom
Transverse: 15 ft to both sides of CL

2.1.3 AREA OF OPERATION

The initial leg length for the VESSEL is selected based on an operational water depth of 200ft
(61m). The VESSEL is designed to operate in water depths from 30ft (9.14m) up to 330 ft
(100m) in an environmental condition for “unrestricted service” as per ABS classification and
without any modification to the jacking systems and its holding capacity or any other system
specified in the Specification.
Special attention shall be given to the primary operation of the VESSEL in the waters of the
Arabian Gulf and the increased regional environmental challenges with respect to maximum
ambient temperatures, humidity, sand and dust storms and UV-radiation.

PAGE 30 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN CRITERIA

2.1.4.1 DESIGN TEMPERATURES

The design temperatures below are minimum requirements. The actual temperatures for the
VESSEL’S area of operation and its specific regional challenges and requirements are to be
considered. BUILDER shall notify BUYER and request BUYER’s approval in writing for any
deviation or restriction for future operation due to design temperatures.
2.1.4.1.1 For Steel Structures
Design service temperature for steel (except Spudcans) -10 °C

Design service temperature for Spudcans 0 °C

2.1.4.1.2 For HVAC Systems:

Maximum ambient temperature (summer) +50 °C at 50% RH

Minimum ambient temperature (winter) 0 °C

2.1.4.1.3 For Piping and Engine Cooling Systems:

Maximum seawater temperature +35 °C

Minimum seawater temperature 0 °C (no ice)

2.1.4.1.4 For Electrical and other Machinery Spaces

Design service ambient temperature for equipment 0°C to +50 °C

Maximum design service temperature for electrical 45°C

equipment installed in air-conditioned environment
defined as per ABS MOU 4-3-1/17.3
Maximum design ambient temperature for electronic 55°C
equipment

2.1.5 DESIGN LIFE

The VESSEL shall have a minimum design life of 25 years.

2.1.6 DESIGN CONDITIONS

The various design conditions are listed in the following sections. Any deviation to the design
conditions provided shall be subject to approval by BUYER/CLASS and the Basic Designer.

2.1.6.1 LIGHTSHIP WEIGHT

Lightship is the weight of the VESSEL with all equipment and outfit items, machinery in
working condition and water in fresh water and fire main systems before loading any items of
consumable or variable load or liquids, cargo, stores, drill loads or crew and their effects.

PAGE 31 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

1. Basic Load - Includes the hull steel, gear units and braces, hatches, watertight
doors, manholes, ladders, handrails, breakwater, bilge and eductor system,
preload fills and dumps, fire main system, vents and sounding tubes, aids to
navigation, lighting, elevation controls and wiring, mud pit structure, skid rails and
pads, bollards, cleats, anodes and hull paint. Legs and spud cans are also a basic
load but are treated separately because they are movable and not part of the elevated
load.

2. Stationary Fixed Load - Includes all items of outfit not included in the basic
load of the VESSEL such as cranes, quarters structure and joiner, heliport, sea
water caissons, lifesaving equipment, HVAC systems, piping and electrical
systems, pipe racks structure, all drilling equipment (except that on the movable
cantilever assembly), engines, generators and controls, pumps, compressors, and
other such equipment permanently attached to and stationary on the VESSEL. All
fluids in equipment and associated piping systems at normal operating levels are
included; however, drilling fluids are not included.

3. Cantilever Assembly (Movable Fixed Load) - Consists of the cantilever structure,

elevated pipe rack, mud process areas, drill floor, windbreak, derrick, and attached
equipment including the moon pool area. All fluids in equipment and piping systems
at normal operating levels are included; however, BOPs and drilling fluids are not
included

The Weight and VDL summary table in Section 2.1.6.13 describes and specifies the maximum
allowable Lightship Weight and the guaranteed minimum Variable Load Capacities of the
VESSEL.

2.1.6.2 WEIGHT CONTROL AND CENTERS OF GRAVITY

The BUILDER shall be responsible for monitoring the structural, outfitting, equipment weight
and centres of gravity.
The weight control report for recording and monitoring of the Lightship Weights and Centre of
Gravity (COG) shall be issued to BUYER on a bi-weekly basis. The report shall address all
major rig systems and shall also provide potential mitigation measures in case the contractual
target VDL becomes at risk during the detail engineering and construction phases.
The primary objective of the weight and COG control report is to report and monitor the Weight,
COG and contingency status of the VESSEL throughout various design stages, construction,
transportation and delivery.
The Lightship Weight and COG report provides weight monitoring during construction and
evaluates them against the design targets and limits for each major rig system and
components. The report also supports the Change Management process by making
recommendations about potential design changes.

2.1.6.3 ELEVATED CONDITIONS

The VESSEL is to be designed to withstand at least the environmental conditions and loading
conditions given below as design basis:
• Calculations as per ABS MODU 2018 and ISO19905-1
• No marine growth
• No ice accretion
• Seabed fixity: pinned footings
• Dynamic loads based on SDOF and 5% damping

PAGE 32 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Minimum factor of safety of 1.1 on overturning

• Omni-direction calculations
• Current profile based on ISO-19905-1, with following parameters:
• Vw + Vt = 2.0 kn, Vt + Vs = 0.6 kn, h = 10 m
• Wind speed reference level at 10 m above SWL
• Water depth taken as 200 ft to SWL
• Elevated weight is the summation of elevated light weight (legs and Spudcans not
included), variable load and combined cantilever load
• Longitudinal and transverse eccentricities are for the centre of gravity of the elevated
weight with respect to the centre of legs

In all cases actual foundation safety is to be determined through a site-specific foundation

analysis.

2.1.6.4 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS

The conditions for installation (Spudcan touchdown, jacking and pre-loading) are as follows:

Guaranteed Minimum Variable Load 4550 kips

Combined cantilever load 300 kips setback + 400 kips BOPs (included
in variable load)
Wave height 2.8 m (max) / 1.5 m (significant)
Wave period 6.0 s
Wind velocity 16 knots
Current velocity 0.8 knots

The VESSEL shall be designed to allow pre-loading to be carried out on all 3 legs
simultaneously under normal installation conditions.
The maximum allowable eccentricity of the horizontal centre of gravity of the elevated weight
with respect to the centre of the legs for the installation conditions, is 0.1 m transversely and
0.25 m longitudinally.

2.1.6.5 TRANSIT CONDITIONS

The VESSEL is designed to withstand the external loading in the towing conditions according
to the following main criteria:

In the afloat mode (343 ft leg) the unit will have the capability of supporting, at a hull draft of
approximately 17 ft. (5.18m) the combined hull, leg, basic, fixed and variable weights with the
legs’ positioned below the hull baseline (TOC) as stated. The final load line draft shall be
assigned by Class.

Condition Wind Motions TOC Hull Draft

Velocity (amplitude/period) (ft) (ft)
Shallow water / Light Weather 50 Knots 6° @ Nat. Period 0.0 17
Transit – 343 ft
Normal Transit –343 ft 70 Knots 6° @ Nat. Period 10.4 17
Severe Storm Transit – 343 ft 100 Knots 15° @ 10 sec 111.3 17

PAGE 33 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Maximum setback load under Normal Transit is limited by final selection of derrick and
warranty surveyor approval of tie down and shall also be limited to a maximum of 300 kips,
allowable KG limitations defined in the Operating Manual and for short field moves only.

The Guaranteed Minimum Variable Load for the transit conditions is 4,550 Kips and shall be
inclusive of the combined cantilever load of at least 300 kips setback plus 400 kips BOPs.

2.1.6.6 DRY OCEAN TRANSPORT

The VESSEL is installed on a transport Ship. The legs are fully retracted and the Spudcans
are flush with the base of the hull. The Spudcans are to be emptied of water and all equipment
is properly sea-fastened.
In the dry ocean transport condition, the legs and associated structures are capable of
withstanding roll and pitch motion up to 7 degrees in a full cycle period of 14 seconds. The
actual situation will depend on the type of dry transport Ship and shall be checked for each
particular case. In the above case the centre of rotation for roll and pitch is assumed to be at
the bottom of the VESSEL.

2.1.6.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The tables (I-2.1 & I-2.2) are applicable for 343 ft leg length.

(A) ELEVATED SURVIVAL STORM MODE ENVIRONMENTAL CRITERIA

TABLE I-2.1

ELEVATED SURVIVAL STORM 343 FT LEGS

Water Air Wind Surface Bottom Wave Wave
Penetration
Depth Gap Speed Moment Current Height Period
ft m ft m ft m knts m/s knts m/s knts m/s ft m Sec
S01P 100 30.5 50 15.2 15 4.6 100 51.4 1.0 0.51 0.5 0.26 58 17.7 12.1
S02P 150 45.7 50 15.2 15 4.6 100 51.4 1.0 0.51 0.5 0.26 57 17.4 12.0
S03P 200 61.0 50 15.2 15 4.6 100 51.4 1.0 0.51 0.5 0.26 50 15.2 11.2

S11P 100 30.5 50 15.2 15 4.6 100 51.4 2.0 1.03 1.0 0.51 56 17.1 11.9
S12P 150 45.7 50 15.2 15 4.6 100 51.4 2.0 1.03 1.0 0.51 54 16.5 11.9
S13P 200 61.0 50 15.2 15 4.6 100 51.4 2.0 1.03 1.0 0.51 47 14.3 10.9
S14P 180 54.9 58 17.7 15 4.6 100 51.4 1.8 0.93 0.9 0.46 35 10.7 9.8

Maximum elevated weight for operating storm mode is 24300 kips inclusive of variable load and
combined drilling load as defined by the cantilever load chart. The minimum rotary position for
above conditions is +30ft for the cases provided in Table I-2.1.

(B) ELEVATED DRILLING STORM MODE ENVIRONMENTAL CRITERIA

TABLE I-2.2

Water Air Wind Surface Bottom Wave Wave Period

Penetration
Depth Gap Speed Moment Current Height
ft m ft m ft m knts m/s knts m/s knts m/s ft m Sec
D01P 100 30.5 50 15.2 15 4.6 70 36 1.0 0.51 0.5 0.26 56 17.1 11.9
D02P 150 45.7 50 15.2 15 4.6 70 36 1.0 0.51 0.5 0.26 54 16.5 11.7
D03P 200 61.0 50 15.2 15 4.6 70 36 1.0 0.51 0.5 0.26 45 13.7 10.7

D11P 100 30.5 50 15.2 15 4.6 70 36 2.0 1.03 1.0 0.51 53 16.2 11.6
D12P 150 45.7 50 15.2 15 12.2 70 36 2.0 1.03 1.0 0.51 51 15.5 11.6
D13P 200 61.0 50 15.2 15 12.2 70 36 2.0 1.03 1.0 0.51 42 12.8 10.3
D14P 180 54.9 58 17.7 15 4.6 70 36 1.8 0.93 1.0 0.51 35 10.7 9.8

PAGE 34 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Maximum elevated weight for operating storm mode is 21300 kips inclusive of variable load and up
to 200 kips of combined drilling load. The minimum rotary position for above conditions is +70ft for
the cases provided in Table I-2.2.

NOTES: (Applicable for both Table I-2.1 & I-2.2):

• All elevated storms assume that rig weight is managed for equal leg reactions prior to
storm.
• All stated water depths and air gaps correlate to the actual storm condition (Highest
Astronomical Tide, HAT).
• Site specific tide and surge values must be added to the stated HAT air gap to
determine the LAT (Lowest Astronomical Tide) air gap (for comparison to minimum
LAT air gap requirements such as API RP 95J). Similarly, the tide and surge values
must be subtracted from the HAT water depth to determine the LAT water depth.
• The air gap is defined from LAT to bottom of the Hull.
• Wind velocity is based upon 1-minute mean at 10 meters above Still Water Level
(SWL).
• Wave height denotes maximum wave height, H-max
• All storms include dynamic effects per SNAME T&R 5-5 and calculated per ABS SC-
S RS methodology, a minimum factor of safety of 1.1 is maintained against overturning
about leg centres.
• Leg length is 343 feet for all cases and little to no marine growth or icing is considered.
• Derrick size of 170' x 35' x 32' is considered for wind load calculations.
• Ratings are based upon Keppel-LeT calculations per ABS MODU Rules, AISC 9th
Edition, and SNAME T&R 5-5 Guidelines. Approval for a specific site is subject to
separate site assessment as per SNAME T&R 5-5 Guidelines.
• The maximum water depth, including tides, as stated in Table I-2.1 & Table I-2.2
above, assumes a leg penetration as indicated.
• Any increase in the penetration will result in a corresponding decrease in the maximum
allowable water depth.
• Any decrease in penetration does not increase the maximum allowable water depth.
2.1.6.8 VARIABLE LOAD
Variable loads (VDL) are supplies and consumables not essential for marine operations and/or
equipment that are required and expendable during normal operations or that are required
only for temporary use during a specific part of the normal operation of the VESSEL. For any
load condition listed in the Specification, the variable load shall be efficient and maximized for
the VESSELS primary operational use. For the avoidance of doubt, the allowable amount of
fluids (such as Fuel oil, Potable water, Drillwater etc.) for the afloat load conditions shall be
subject to BUYER’s review and approval. In all cases, BUILDER shall avoid using fluids as
majority of VDL and shall maximize the utilization of operational Deck loads such as tubulars,
Third-Party equipment, well control items etc.
The variable load is composed of the following items:
• Fuel oil, potable water, waste water, dirty oil, lubricating oil, cooling water, pre-
load/ballast water, seawater, fresh water, bilge/drain water
• Drill water, brine, base oil, cuttings
• Fluid mud, bulk mud, bulk cement, sacks, chemicals
• Drill string and down-hole equipment
• Casing pipes, drill pipes, drill collars, drilling/ handling tools, spare parts drilling
equipment, customer spare parts
• Coiled tubing equipment
• Subsea or temporary production equipment

PAGE 35 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Well test and logging equipment, burner booms. Note: Fixed well test piping is part of
lightship.
• Completion equipment
• Measurement while drilling (MWD) system
• Mud logging Unit
• Third-Party equipment
• Cementing Unit
• Crane lifting load
• Helicopter and helicopter fuel storage tanks
• Temporary material handling (non-fixed) and sea fastening equipment
• Provisions in accommodation and office stores, crew and their effects
• Galley stores and other consumables
• Spare parts above Class requirements
• Combined cantilever load
• BOP stacks
• Diverter, Riser and conductor pipe
2.1.6.9 COMBINED CANTILEVER LOAD
The combined cantilever load is composed of the following items, each with its allowable
maximum load:
Hook load 1,500 kips
Rotary load 1,500 kips
Setback load 750 kips
Conductor tension 400 kips
BOP’s 250 kips
The maximum load combination of any of the above loads may not exceed 2,650 kips for the
operational (drilling) condition.

2.1.6.10 CANTILEVER DESIGN LOADS

The cantilever is designed for the following loads relative to the longitudinal reach (well centre
distance from transom) and the transverse reach:
Maximum Combined Load * 2,650 Kips 1,202 MT
Maximum Component Loads
- Hook Load 1,500 Kips 680 MT
- Rotary Load 1,500 Kips 680 MT
- Setback 750 Kips 340 MT
- Tensioner (Vertical) 400 Kips 181 MT
- Maximum Setback Load (while skidding & afloat) 300 Kips 136 MT

The Guaranteed Cantilever Capacity is 2650 Kips at 60 feet outreach at centreline. Reference
is made to the "Cantilever Load Chart" and “Cantilever Skidding chart below” for load limitation
versus rotary position.

PAGE 36 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.1.6.10.1 Cantilever Load Chart:

2.1.6.10.2 Cantilever Load for Minimum Allowable Loads While Skidding:

The skidding system shall be designed for skidding with 50 knots wind speed (measured at
10 m above sea water level), with the following maximum load combinations:

PAGE 37 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.1.6.11 TANKS AND STORAGE CAPACITIES

All capacities and ratings given below shall be considered minimum capacities and ratings
and shall be considered operational and usable capacities and ratings. Unusable volume or
loadings intended for other purposes than its purpose shall be excluded from these minimum
capacities and ratings.

Bulk tanks are provided on main deck with the following total capacities:
Cement 5,250 cu-ft (149 m3)
Barite / Bentonite 7,000 cu-ft (198 m3)

Fixed tanks are provided with the following minimum operating capacities:
Sand trap and Process tanks 349 bbls (55 m3)
Skimmer Tank 281 bbls (44.7 m3)
Trip Tank 2x 60 bbls (18 m3)

Pipe racks shall be provided with the following minimum operating capacities for tubulars:
Main deck 800 kips (363 t)
Cantilever 800 kips (363 t)

Fixed tanks are provided in the hull with the following minimum operating capacities:
Pre-load Water a) 52,854 bbls (8,403 m3)
Base Oil Storage 984 bbls (156 m3)
Brine Storage 984 bbls (156 m3)
b)
Drilling Water 16,536 bbls (2,629 m3)
Potable Water 2,576 bbls (410 m3)
c)
Fuel Oil 3,916 bbls (623 m3)
Lube Oil 35 bbls (5.6 m3)
Dirty Oil 66 bbls (11 m3)
d)
Liquid Mud Storage 4,000 bbls (635 m3)
Pre-mix/ Slugging Pits 252 bbls (40 m3)
Skimmer tank adequate design & capacity
a= including dual tanks
b= partly dual tanks, pre-load / drill water
c= excluding fuel oil day tanks
d= including pre-mix/ slugging pits

2.1.6.12 DECK LOADING

The following minimum operating deck loading ratings and design criteria shall be taken into
account in the design:
• Main deck:
o Main frames and girders 500 lbf/ft2 (2.4 t/m2)
o Deck plating and stiffeners 820 lbf/ft2 (4.0 t/m2)
o Pipe rack supporting members 820 lbf/ft2 (4.0 t/m2)
• Cantilever pipe rack 620 lbf/ft2 (3.0 t/m2)
• Deckhouse:
o Roof 100 lbf/ft2 (0.5 t/m2)
o Lay-down & storage areas 210 lbf/ft2 (1.0 t/m2)
PAGE 38 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Quarters & Walkways 100 lbf/ft2 (0.5 t/m2)

• Sack storage area (on machinery deck) 1,250 lbf/ft2 (6.1 t/m2)
• Storage area (excluding sack storage) 620 lbf/ft2 (3.0 t/m2)
• Machinery area 500 lbf/ft2 (2.4 t/m2)
• Drill floor 500 lbf/ft2 (2.4 t/m2)
The sack store and all areas that are included in the forklift material handling and access plan
are designed for a 3 t forklift. Specific design attention shall be given to forklift wheel loads on
stiffened deck panels and to reduce buckling of the panel sections between stiffeners due to
the forklift wheel loads.

2.1.6.13 BASIC LOAD CONDITIONS

The following table provides the basic design loading conditions to be followed. The summary
also describes and specifies the maximum guaranteed Lightship Weight and the minimum
guaranteed Variable Load Capacities of the VESSEL:
MODES AFLOAT ELEVATING HOLDING
(Weight in kips) LOADLINE NORMAL PRELOAD PRELOAD DRILLING STORM
GG
Hull & Basic Load 14000 14000 14000 14000 14000 14000
Cantilever Assembly Load 3400 3400 3400 3400 3400 3400
Elevated Lightship Weight 17400 17400 17400 17400 17400 17400
Variable Load* 4550 4550 4550 4550 4300 3900
Preload / Drill Load 0 0 3130 18685 2650 0
Total Variable Load 4550 4550 7680 23235 6950 3900
Total Elevated Load 21950 21950 25080 40635 24300 21300
Spud Can Weight 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300 1300
Leg Weight – 343 Ft 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175 5175
Total Leg Weight 6475 6475 6475 6475 6475 6475
Lightship Weight 23875 23875 23875 23875 23875 23875
Total Weight 28425 28425 31555 47110 30775 27775

Notes for above table:

1) Setback load in non-drilling modes must be accounted as variable load.
2) Elevated Lightship Weight exclusive of legs.
3) Maximum Cantilever Drilling load is function of Cantilever Load Chart.
4) Variable Loads are considered Minimum Variable Load Capacity guaranteed by Builder.

The cantilever structure shall extend to a maximum position such that the centreline of the
rotary table is 70 feet (21.3 m) aft of the stern of the hull. The cantilever and associated
components will accept the following maximum loads:
Hook Load 1,500,000 lbs*
Rotary Load 1,500,000 lbs*
Setback Load 750,000 lbs*
Conductor Tension 400,000 lbs*
Pipe Rack Load (cantilever) 800,000 lbs*
Deck Load between pipe rack beams 270 lbs/sq. ft.
Deck Load on Drill Floor (outboard of derrick) 270 lbs/sq. ft
Deck Load on Drill Floor (within derrick base) 500 lbs/sq. ft
Load for each pipe rack beam 5,000 lbs/lin. ft.
Any combination of the four loads indicated thus “*” shall not exceed 2,650,000 pounds
(governed by Cantilever Load Chart). The Load Chart depicts the maximum allowable
combined Hook, Rotary, Setback and Conductor Tension Loads, (based on the total allowable

PAGE 39 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

structure and equipment load shown weight), that may be placed on the drill floor at any one
time in the positions shown. Equipment Dead Load is included in Cantilever Assembly Weight.

2.1.6.14 WORK-OVER CONDITION

The VESSEL shall be capable of working at a work-over air gap of 85 ft (LAT to bottom of
Hull). This condition is intended to specify requirements for systems where the actual air gap
of the VESSEL in operational conditions is relevant; e.g. the raw water hose reels, life boat
and Rescue Boat davits, off-loading stations, etc.

2.1.7 DESIGN LIMITATIONS

The VESSEL shall be capable of performing drilling and workover operations for END USER
as outlined and defined in the Specification. BUILDER shall advise BUYER of any limitations
that will not allow to operate as intended and outlined in the Specification in writing and prior
to the Effective date of the Contract. Any design correction or modification after the Effective
date of the Contract but required to design and build the VESSEL to operate as intended in
this Specification shall be on BUILDER’s account and cost. The BUILDER shall also advise of
any limitations that prevent the VESSEL of being upgraded or operated in other areas.

2.1.8 RIG MOVE CRITERIA

The rig move design criteria shall be in line with Section 1, paragraph 1.3.6, of the Specification
and the following minimum requirements.
The system shall be positioned and fitted with suitable equipment to support the exchange of
towing gear parts such as chains and shackles, as safely as possible. The Central Control
Room shall be positioned on top of the main accommodation with 360-degree visibility all
around as well as line of sight to all three (3) leg position indicators. CCTV Cameras shall be
provided, including but not limited to, the Bow towing gear handling station and leg position
indicators.

Suitable ‘high strength’ locations of the standard hull design shall be selected as the most
appropriate ‘push points’ for manoeuvring the rig, when afloat, by attendant tugs. No
additional strengthening shall be required from the standard hull design.
The word “TUG”, in upper case letters, shall be enclosed within a boundary marking the limits
of the ‘high strength’ location. Such markings shall be applied at each of the following eight
(8) locations:
1. Port Forward
2. Port Aft
3. Port mid ships
4. Starboard Forward
5. Starboard Aft
6. Starboard mid ships
7. Transom Port
8. Transom Starboard
The markings shall be accomplished by painting alone, with ‘no necessity’ for welded plate
definition.
The markings shall be white, and the dimensions shall be as follows:
• Boundary Line – 100mm in width
• Letters - Approximately 900mm, in Height, 300mm in Width, with line width of
approximately 100mm.

PAGE 40 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.1.9 PRELOADING CRITERIA

The preloading criteria for the VESSEL shall allow the following minimum operational criteria:
• Preload all three (3) legs simultaneously
• Preload fill and dump displayed on IMCS control console and operable from CCR
• Complete full and maximum preloading within eight (8) hours
The preload system shall be designed and installed so that preloading progress and status
can be monitored remotely and from the Central Control Room (Radio Room). The System
shall be designed to safely and efficiently fill and empty the preload tanks with the capability
to fill and emergency dump all legs simultaneously. The preload tank filling status shall be
displayed and monitored remotely and controls to be implemented to prevent from exceeding
the maximum allowable preload filling.
Remote access shall be provided to all preload dump and discharge valves. The access shall
be easily accessible for operation and maintenance.

2.2 CONTRACT PLANS, DRAWINGS, REPORTS

As per Section 1.5, the Contract Plans, Datasheets, existing BUYER’s Document Review
Forms related to BUILDER’s deliverables including but not limited to the Basic Design
Specification shall form an integral part of this Specification, are listed in Section 6 of this
Specification.
In the event there are conflicts or inconsistencies between this Specification and the Contract
Plans or the Basic Design Specification provided by the Designer, the Specification will prevail.

2.3 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS

BUILDER shall develop and submit for BUYER’s and Class review and approval detailed
functional design specifications for all systems required for the operation of the VESSEL.
These include but are not limited to:
• All drilling systems
• All marine systems
• All safety critical systems
BUILDER shall develop Functional Design Specifications during the detailed design period
including but not limited to:
• Functional Design Specification - Marine Systems
• Functional Design Specification - Fire Water, Deluge and Foam System
• Functional Design Specification - Integrated Monitoring & Control System
• Functional Design Specification - Lube & Dirty Oil System
• Functional Design Specification - Power Management Systems
• Functional Design Specification - Power Systems
• Functional Design Specification - B.O.P. Accumulator & Diverter Control System
• Functional Design Specification - Base Oil System
• Functional Design Specification - Black & Grey Water System
• Functional Design Specification - Brine System
• Functional Design Specification - Compressed Air System
• Functional Design Specification - Engine Cooling System
• Functional Design Specification - Low Pressure Mud System
• Functional Design Specification - Mud Processing System
• Functional Design Specification - Vent & Sounding System
• Functional Design Specification - Well Test System
• Functional Design Specification - Drill Water System
• Functional Design Specification - Engine Exhaust System

PAGE 41 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Functional Design Specification - Air Conditioning and Ventilation System

• Functional Design Specification - VESSEL Monitoring System (IMCS)
• Functional Design Specification - Fire & Gas Detection System
• Functional Design Specification - GMDSS, Radio & Communication Equipment
• Functional Design Specification - PA/GA and Driller's Talkback System
• Functional Design Specification - Refrigeration System of Chiller/ Freezer Room
• Functional Design Specification - PABX, LAN, Entertainment and CCTV System
• Functional Design Specification - Bilge & Preload Stripping System
• Functional Design Specification - Bulk Air System
• Functional Design Specification - Bulk Mud & Cement System
• Functional Design Specification - Drain Water System
• Functional Design Specification - Fuel System
• Functional Design Specification - Hp Mud, Cement and Choke & Kill System
• Functional Design Specification - Potable Water System
• Functional Design Specification - Preload & Dump System
• Functional Design Specification - Raw Water System
• Functional Design Specification - Spudcan Tank and Leg Jetting System
All Functional design specifications shall include the system design criteria and design limits,
functionality etc. and shall be accurate to reflect the final detailed design for each system and
as approved by BUYER.

2.4 NOISE, VIBRATION AND TEMPERATURE LIMITS

2.4.1 VIBRATION LIMITS
Special attention shall be given to the equipment mountings, foundations and support
structures with regard to the machinery or equipment, which is likely to produce vibrations and
as a result transmission of noise and or vibrations through the VESSEL'S structure.
Therefore, vibration reduction measures, such as vibration isolators, shall be furnished and
installed for such type of equipment including but not limited to:
• The Main Diesel-Generator Sets,
• Emergency Diesel-Generator Set,
• Air-Compressors,
• Radiators,
• HPUs,
• HVAC Equipment,
• Pumps, etc.
Attention shall also be paid to limiting, as far as practically feasible, any relative deflections of
equipment foundations to ensure positive alignments and to avoid any harmful effects on
couplings, shafts, bearings, etc.
All vibration limits shall be in line with equipment and machinery OEM’s recommendation and
as limited by requirements in Section 1.3.6.
For the avoidance of doubt, the vibration limitations, shall be valid for normal drilling operations
on a location and not as simulated during trials and commissioning of the VESSEL. The
measurement of the vibration shall be representative for its location intent and purpose. The
procedure for the measurement and verification of the as-built vibration shall be prepared by
BUILDER and to submitted to BUYER and Class for review and approval.
If the vibration level exceeds the criteria recommended by ABS and the OEM, then BUILDER
shall make all necessary improvements, to a practical extent and under the BUILDER’s
responsibility.

PAGE 42 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

2.4.2 NOISE LIMITS

Noise and vibration levels shall be maintained within the limit requirements of the
Specification. Suitable sound absorption shall be provided in way of all noisy spaces adjacent
to or within the accommodation, such as auxiliary rooms, air handling rooms, laundry, video
or movie room, exercise room (gym), change and wash rooms, galley and mess room,
conference room, etc.
To avoid or minimize sound transmission, sound insulation shall be installed on bulkheads,
decks and overheads as well as in the overhead space on all draft stops and ceiling plates,
which are installed above free standing bulkheads and draft stops.
The following noise limits shall be applied during the detail design of the VESSEL and shall
be valid for normal operating modes of the VESSEL. Areas not defined to be in accordance
with Section 1.3.6.
Table: 2.4.2. Noise Limits
AREA COMPARTMENT Total Noise dB (A)
Working Area Workshops 80
Working Area Warehouse and Stores 70
Working Area Galley 70
Working Area Offices 50
Working Area Laboratories / Third-Party Container Area 65
Working Area Radio / Communications Rooms / 55
Control Rooms
Working Area Drillers Cabin 65
Working Area Drill Floor 85
Accommodation Laundry Rooms 70
Accommodation Change Rooms 60
Accommodation Common Toilets 60
Accommodation Mess Rooms 55
Accommodation Recreation Rooms 55
Accommodation Gymnasium 55
Accommodation Theatre / Conference Rooms 55
Accommodation Television Rooms 55
Accommodation All Cabins, Sleeping Areas 50
Accommodation Medical Rooms 50
Accommodation Hospital 50
Accommodation Mosque (Inside LQ) 50
Accommodation Corridors and Staircases 60
Working Area Egress and Staircases 85
Working Area Machinery Spaces 85~95
Working Area Engine Room 95~105

Specific Noise mitigating measures shall be considered and implemented based on a safety
and cost benefit evaluation following recommendations from a predictive Noise Analysis to be
provided by the BUILDER. The analysis shall be carried out by an independent Third-Party
approved by BUYER.
The assessment and identification of the noise mitigating measures shall be performed
considering the following elements.
• Technical Measures (primary at the noise source, secondary at the exposed area
• Administrative Measures (Operational procedures)

PAGE 43 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Personnel Protective Equipment measures

Specifically, the following additional noise mitigation methods shall be implemented by the
BUILDER in order to reduce the noise levels:
• Vibration isolators are provided for all the reciprocating machinery like engines, air
compressors, refrigeration compressors, hydraulic power units etc.
• Flexible joints and hoses for all pipe and cable connections to the reciprocating
machinery.
• Noise enclosure for air compressors, chiller units and cementing unit engines.
• Silencers to be provided for engine exhaust pipes, air hoists, blowers for mud pumps
and Drawworks.
• Noise from HVAC system shall be reduced by using low speed and low noise fans
together with adequate silencers and duct sound reduction methods.
• Floating floors and acoustic insulation for deck heads and bulkheads are to be provided
as necessary.
• Hydraulic power units for BOP control and hydraulic power units for drill floor
machinery shall be located in noise isolated enclosures.
• Personal ear protection and warning signs are provided for high noise areas.
• Routing of ventilation and air-conditioning machinery to minimize noise transmissions.
• Furnish and install sound absorbing treatment of bulkheads, floors and ceilings to
reduce the reflection of sound.
• The BUYER shall furnish the required resilient mountings for the OFE (if applicable),
for installation by the BUILDER
2.4.3 TEMPERATURE LIMITS IN CLIMATE CONTROLLED SPACES
All temperature limits inside the accommodation, manned machinery spaces and control
rooms shall be in line with Section 3.17.1 of this Specification.

2.5 ACCESS AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

The BUILDER will ensure that all equipment, machinery and foundations are properly located
and installed with adequate free working and maintenance access space around all
equipment. BUILDER will ensure adequate working and maintenance platforms where
needed. All foundation bolts shall be readily accessible for maintenance and inspection.
When determining the type, location, amount, and size of doors, hatches, or manholes, the
BUILDER shall consider the need for removal or replacement of any parts of an equipment or
material in the space that may require removal for regular maintenance. As far as reasonably
practicable, all bulkheads, decks and overheads in the equipment removal paths shall be kept
clear of all piping, wiring, ventilation ducts and other equipment. In any case, provisions shall
be made for the disconnection and removal of obstructions without the need for cutting or
splicing piping, wiring, ventilation ducts and other equipment.

The location and installation of VESSELS equipment shall, in general, be in accordance with
the arrangement shown on the Contract Plans. Deviations will only be permitted with the prior
specific approval of the BUYER. The final arrangement of compartments and spaces shall be
developed with a conscious effort to utilize all spaces to achieve a practical layout for access,
operation, and maintenance.
All means of access to carry out close-up regulatory inspections and thickness measurements
shall be described in the Class approved access manual. The access manual is to be prepared
by BUILDER and submitted to BUYER and Class for review and approval. The access manual
will include the following for each space:

PAGE 44 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Plans showing the means of access to the space, with appropriate technical
specifications and dimensions
• Plans showing the means of access within each space to enable an overall inspection
to be carried out, with appropriate technical specifications and dimensions. The plans
also indicate from where each area in the space can be inspected
• Plans showing the means of access within the space to enable close-up inspections
to be carried out, with appropriate technical specifications and dimensions. The plans
also indicate the positions of critical structural areas, whether the means of access is
permanent or portable and from where each area can be inspected
• Instructions for inspecting and maintaining the structural strength of all means of
access and means of attachment, taking into account any corrosive atmosphere that
may be within the space
• An inventory of all portable means of access;
• Formats for records of periodical inspections and maintenance of the VESSEL’S
means of access

All compartments and spaces shall be designed as such to allow safe and efficient access
and transport of spares and consumables during normal operation and good access for
emergency response and rescue teams during emergency.
All equipment, valves, machinery and system components required to be accessed during
normal operations shall be readily accessible for normal operation, for maintenance to be
carried out on regular basis, for inspections and repair work as and when required. BUILDER
shall develop and provide for BUYER review and approval a detailed Maintenance Envelope
that outlines the access requirements around all machinery and equipment and furthermore
includes the material handling for spare parts to and from the location of the equipment and
machinery as from the warehouses or the main deck.

2.6 MATERIAL HANDLING

BUILDER shall prepare and provide to BUYER for review and approval a detailed material
handling study that demonstrates the handling and the flow of materials, consumables, spare
parts and any VDL on main deck, inside the hull, to and from the Cantilever storage areas, to
and from the Drill floor etc.
The general handling philosophy is based on the following:
For major equipment components above 200kg in weight, permanent lifting provision in the
form of pad eye or trolley beam shall be provided above the components. Major equipment
components shall include but not be limited to:
• Generators
• Electrical driving motors,
• Engine piston, cylinder liners,
• Mud pump bull shaft, liners, pistons
• Strainers and filters
• Pumps components

For components above 25kg in weight which require frequent lifting operation or manual
handling, dedicated temporary lifting and transportation devices shall be provided. E.g. A-
frames, carts etc. Local mechanical handling facilities such as trolley beams, davits, lifting pad
eyes, etc. will be located above the equipment together with suitable lay down areas.

BUILDER shall design to allow the safe transfer of loads to main crane lay down areas
(including below hatch openings), to heavy tool store, warehouses, or mechanical and

PAGE 45 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

electrical workshops etc. using suitable mobile transfer equipment such as mobile trolleys or
carts and forklifts, through the designated access ways. Along the access ways, portable
ramps shall be provided to allow smooth movement of the mobile cart across the watertight
doorsills.
The deck cranes installed on the VESSEL will be primarily used for:
• Transferring of equipment parts that required servicing offshore to the supply boats
• Handling of spares and daily supplies from supply boats, including drill pipe/equipment,
coiled tubing, all bunkering activities for replenishing diesel oil, handling of goods and
containers, chemical, lubricant and consumable supply, etc.
• All other material handling activities on board the VESSEL that require deck cranes

2.7 ESCAPE ROUTES, HEADROOM AND WALKWAYS

All escape routes are to meet the requirements of Section 1.3.6, and shall be clearly marked
with suitable and sufficient lighting.
All access ways and walk ways and headroom in the access and walk ways shall be designed
and provided as per below minimum requirements:
• The free width in corridors shall be at least 1,000 mm (1,500 mm required when escape
of more than 50 persons in one direction).
• The clear width of door openings in all rooms for personnel shall be at least 750 mm,
with a clear height of at least 2,050 mm. (except cabin toilet/shower area doors and
toilet doors (width: 600mm)).
• In passageways and escape routes the door openings shall not be less than 900 mm.
• Doors for material handling of large items, or where escape of 50 persons or more may
occur, shall be sized according to the size of the item and have a minimum width of
1,200 mm.
• Staircases shall be constructed and arranged in accordance with an accepted
standard and wide enough for four (4) persons to carry a stretcher.
• Special emergency exits shall be a minimum of 800 x 800 mm and shall be easily
opened by one person from both sides.
• Working areas, access and transport routes shall be designed so that the actual stay,
work operations, conveyance of people, equipment and goods can be carried out in a
rational and fully satisfactory manner.
• The minimum net floor to ceiling height (i.e. top of floor finish to underside of
suspended ceiling surface/deck plate) shall be as follows:
• Cabins: 2,300 mm
• Prefabricated bathroom units: 2,100 mm
• Minor stores and rooms: 2,300 mm
• Corridors: 2,300 mm
• Common rooms/areas: 2,400 mm
• Common rooms/areas larger than 100 m2: 2,500 mm
• Single office: 2,400 mm
• Office landscape larger than 100 m2: 2,500 mm
• LER, LIR (to underside technical lining): 2,200 mm
• MCR: 2,700 mm
• Machinery Spaces 2,100 mm (clear height)

All doors on the VESSEL shall be fitted with locking devices as per the following:
• External doors (i.e. exposed to Marine environment) shall be of heavy duty severe
service marine type.
• Locks of all types shall permit egress of the locked space.

PAGE 46 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• All locks shall be keyed differently except where there is more than one door to the
same compartment, in which case these doors shall be keyed alike.
• Each door lock to living spaces shall be provided with one key for each occupant plus
two spares.
• All other spaces requiring keys shall be provided with a total of three keys.
• Two (2) master keys shall be provided, one for all accommodation spaces and the
other for machinery spaces. Both master keys shall be keyed to one grand master key.
Two (2) spares shall be provided for each master key. Two key lockers shall be
provided and installed

2.8 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND DATASHEETS

In the selection of equipment, machinery and components, special attention shall be given to
improving and reducing the routine maintenance requirements, greasing, oiling, etc. without
compromising the safety and functionality of the equipment.
If any equipment and or system specifications are required to be increased as a result of
requirements outlined in Section 1.3.6 and system performance and design calculations,
BUILDER shall implement these changes without cost or delay to the BUYER.

For the avoidance of doubt, BUILDER shall not reduce the Specifications as a result of minimal
Class requirements or calculations unless formally approved by the BUYER. Approval of
datasheets or Specifications by the BUYER or Class does not relieve the BUILDER of his
responsibility to provide a complete and operable VESSEL in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications.

If it is found, after approval of the drawings by the BUYER or CLASS, that a drawing is in error
or is not in compliance with these Specifications, the BUILDER shall correct the drawing and
make any changes to the VESSEL required to ensure compliance with the Specifications at
no additional cost to the BUYER.

PAGE 47 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 3 – CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION

The purpose of the section of the Contract Technical Specification (CTS) is to ensure that
there is no dubiety as to the scope, quality, Specification(s), or responsibilities relating to the
construction of the VESSEL.
The section is structured so as to provide a clear understanding of the various elements of
construction in the following hierarchy:
• Overall Quality Control
• Quality of Material, Equipment and Workmanship
• Construction Techniques for the overall structure
• Fabricated Elements and Compartments
• Main Systems and Equipment installation
• Subordinate Systems, Equipment and Outfitting
This methodology shall ensure that so far as is reasonably practicable, all aspects of the
construction scope are captured.

3.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

The construction scope within this section of the CTS that includes, but is not limited to, the
provision of Materials, Fabrication, and the provision and installation of Equipment and
Systems, shall meet the following minimum requirements:
•Compliance with all requirements as stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS
•Conformity with the Design Specification, Criteria, and Conditions as stipulated in
Section 2.0 of this CTS
• Compliance with the Inspection, Testing and Witnessing of the construction scope in
accordance with the requirements set out in Section 4.0 of this CTS and the
subordinate BUILDER documents referenced within it.
• Design, equipped, delivered with as further detailed and specified in Section 5.0 and
Section 6.0 of this CTS
The BUILDER shall prepare all detailed working drawings and calculations for the VESSEL to
meet the requirements of these Specifications and the Regulatory Bodies.

3.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

3.2.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
Quality Control and Quality Assurance is to be in accordance with the BUILDER’s Quality
Management System, the BUILDER Project Quality Plan, and the BUYER approved
documentation stipulated in Section 4.0 of this CTS. The BUILDER shall provide it’s Project
Quality Plan within sixty (60) days from the date of contract signing for review and approval
by BUYER.

3.2.2 QUALITY OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

All materials and equipment’s shall be of high quality, free from imperfections of manufacture
and from defects which could adversely affect performance or serviceability and it shall be as
per these Specifications. All material, machinery and equipment furnished by BUILDER shall
be new (unused & with valid certification). Repaired or re-conditioned equipment shall not be
used.
The BUILDER shall obtain all required certificates, and/or documents, except for Owner-
Furnished Equipment, covering the approval and indicating compliance with the governing
regulations, all to be delivered to the BUYER. All costs attendant to the procurement of such

PAGE 48 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

certificates, including but not limited to, requisite inspections at subcontractors or vendors
facilities shall be to BUILDER's account.
The BUILDER shall ensure that proper Certificates and traceability of materials are maintained
and documented throughout construction of the VESSEL and that adequate measures are
enforced to ensure that the BUILDER’s workforce are fully conversant with the procedures in
place to maintain the traceability of materials. This includes but is not limited to plate marking,
pipe identification, weld mapping, nesting, etc.
All materials, components and equipment shall be provided with necessary test reports and
certificates from relevant recognized authorities, confirming compliance with the Specification.
Before installing materials, fittings or equipment the BUILDER shall allow time for BUYER’s
inspection and approval of the proper documentation, quality and if necessary, non-
conformance reporting.

3.2.3 QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP

All workmanship shall be of GOOD INDUSTRY PRACTICE, highest marine and offshore
quality and acceptable to the BUYER.
The BUILDER shall ensure that all structures, outfitting, machinery and equipment are
properly installed in accordance with CLASS, OEM and BUYER’s satisfaction during
construction and erection.
The BUILDER shall repair all construction and erection damage such as welding burrs, scabs,
scars, etc. to the base materials. Scars shall be filled with compatible weld metal and ground
smooth.
The BUILDER shall remove all building aids such as scaffolding attachment brackets, erection
clips, fit-out legs, temporary gussets, etc. and repair any damage. The BUYER may request
that certain elements of scaffolding and/or temporary equipment in place for a specified period
of time prior to final removal.
Temporary construction fittings, fixtures, access openings, etc., shall be removed and the
VESSEL structure and material reinstated to an 'as new' and 'as built' standard.
Any portion of the work that is found to be defective or not in compliance with this Specification
and/or the requirements of section 3.2 shall be removed and satisfactorily replaced at no
additional cost to the BUYER.

3.2.3.1 WELDING
All BUILDER welding processes shall be documented by way of written Weld Procedures
Specifications' (WPS). All WPS shall be according to AWS D1.1 and CLASS Rules. In order
to validate the WPS they shall be supported by the performance of Test Welds and
documented in a Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR).
All welds (structural, steel outfitting and LP/HP piping, hydraulic piping, etc.) shall be shown
on the BUYER approved construction drawings, using standard industry symbols and call
outs, and shall be executed in accordance with approved WPS.
All BUILDER welders, direct employees or subcontractors, shall be qualified in accordance
with AWS D1.1, ASME IX and to a level appropriate to the WPS to which they are to complete.
BUILDER welders are to be certified with a qualification test that shall be documented in a
Welder Qualification Test Record (WQTR). The WQTR shall document the welders
understanding and demonstrable ability to carry out the work as specified WPS. All WPS,
WPQRs and WQTRs shall be provided to the BUYER as part of the Weld and Mechanical
Completion package.
All welding shall be subject to inspection and approval by the BUYER, or the BUYER’s
authorized representatives and CLASS. All BUILDER’s welding inspectors (direct employees

PAGE 49 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

or subcontractors) shall be qualified to the level required to approve the WPS, to inspect
completed welds, and to confirm, or otherwise their satisfactory execution.
Welds requiring NDT shall be identified and executed out as required by CLASS and Section
4.0 of this Contract Technical Specification. Over and above the minimum CLASS
requirements, all welds shall be 100% visually inspected.
Should any visual inspection show that thickness, surface contour, or appearance of continuity
of any strength weld is not in accordance with the Specification or should radiographic (x-ray),
magnetic particle or ultrasonic examination and testing of any weld, indicates a defect or
defects of an unacceptable nature as determined by standards of the Specification, the weld
shall be carefully repaired to a procedure approved by BUYER. The quality and integrity of the
repaired weld shall be determined by the same method of inspection at the BUILDER’s
expense. This specifically includes any additional radiographic inspections (x-ray) required
and which shall be provided at no additional cost to the BUYER.
In addition to the minimum CLASS requirements, the BUYER shall be provided with the option
of up to 200 additional radiographic inspections (x-ray), to be taken at locations as directed by
BUYER at no additional cost to the BUYER.
The welding of all beams, brackets, stiffeners, etc., above or below deck, shall be continuously
welded on both sides of the member to completely seal the faying surfaces. Any “stich”, “chain”
or un-continuous welding of hull structures such as stiffeners, frames or angles shall be subject
to BUYER’s approval.

3.2.3.2 TOLERANCES AND ALIGNMENT

Special attention shall be paid by BUILDER to dimensional control and tolerances in
accordance with the requirements of the Specification. BUILDER shall deploy and engage 3D
scanning, laser surveys and/or theodolite surveys as required to demonstrate correct
alignment, verification prior to, or during, the installation of sections, structures or equipment
or as required to plan alignment correction measures requested by BUYER.
All plating, beams, girders etc. shall be erected in proper alignment. Bulkheads and decks
shall be erected in proper alignment to provide a good appearance and to prevent the
collection of water. The plating throughout is to straight, smooth and tightly fitted, and without
excessive buckles, depressions or uneven edges.
All fittings, piping, etc. shall be properly and securely fastened in place, neatly and smoothly
finished and placed in true alignment. Stressed or pre-tensioned piping to achieve jointing or
alignment shall not be permitted and will be rejected by the BUYER. At all times during
construction work, special care shall be exercised that the given dimensions and tolerances
are continually adhered to in order to minimize defective work and attendant delay and rework.
The BUILDER shall submit all of its structural, piping, electrical, outfitting, HVAC and
accommodation standards to BUYER for approval. All standards shall be in accordance with
the Specification and any deviation shall be subject to approval by BUYER.

3.2.3.3 HANDLING AND STORAGE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

The BUILDER shall be responsible for OFE and BFE during off-loading handling operations.
All equipment shall be handled by BUILDER as per OEM recommended practices. Equipment
skids, pallets, lifting slings, cranes, trucks, lifting dollies or other handling equipment shall be
maintained and its condition and certification documented for BUYER verification. The
BUILDER representatives shall check the equipment with regards to any shipping damage,
and to check that the content corresponds to the shipping documents and shall notify the
BUYER of any such damage. BUILDER shall provide to BUYER a monthly material and
equipment arrival, storage and preservation status report on monthly basis. BUYER’s

PAGE 50 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

representative shall be granted access to all of BUILDER’s storage and warehouse facilities
as and when requested by BUYER to carry out inspections and verifications.
Following offloading and joint inspection between BUILDER and BUYER, the BUILDER shall
be responsible for all OFE until the VESSEL has been accepted and delivered to the BUYER.
This shall include all storing and handling at BUILDER’s facilities. BUYER’s representatives
shall direct the BUILDER when and where to place consumables and spares etc. on board.
BUYER shall send the OFE shipping documents to BUILDER and BUILDER and shall arrange
for local customs clearance and the transportation to the BUILDER’s storage area. All
expenses for customs clearance, handling at dockside and transportation shall be for the
BUYER's account. Expenses in connection with transportation and handling of BFE and OFE
inside BUILDER's premises shall be for BUILDER’s account.

The BUILDER shall be responsible for the preservation, maintenance and the care of all
machinery and equipment furnished by the BUILDER or the BUYER, during the period from
arrival at the BUILDER yard until the VESSEL is delivered to the BUYER. BUILDER shall
prepare a preservation maintenance program for machinery and equipment to be followed
during the construction period. As a minimum the program shall include, but not be limited to,
the following requirements:
• All water piping shall be kept drained except during trials and tests
• Preservation shall be such that all warranties remain valid
• Electrical, electronic and interior communication equipment shall be adequately
protected against dust, moisture or other foreign matter
• All unpainted machinery parts, both interior and exterior, shall be protected against
corrosion and deterioration, especially those having working surfaces or passages or
piping for lubricating oil. Shall be kept clean and protected during manufacture,
storage, assembly and after installation
• All preservation applied to machinery and equipment by the manufacturer shall be
maintained intact until installation and delivery of the VESSEL; where removal of the
preservation is necessary for testing the machinery or equipment prior to installation,
the BUILDER shall reinstate the level of preservation that was in place prior to Its
removal
• Where, following installation, testing and commissioning, equipment is to remain idle
then a suitable and sufficient degree of preservation shall be re-applied to protect the
equipment from damage or degradation until operation of the equipment is required
again
• At the point of delivery all preservation on working parts shall have been removed from
the VESSEL
All equipment, machinery, prefabricated parts, furniture and items such as lines and canvas
etc. shall be thoroughly examined for, and freed off, rats and vermin prior to installation on
board the VESSEL or parts of the VESSEL.
During construction, if the BUILDER makes use of equipment such as Main Engines,
Generators, Pumps and Deck Cranes etc., then such equipment shall be maintained as per
the manufacturer recommendations and recorded in the appropriate maintenance logs. Such
equipment shall be restored to ‘as-new’ condition prior to Delivery of the VESSEL. All
equipment and material certification and warranty validity durations shall be maintained as
new and starting from delivery of the VESSEL.

3.2.4 WEIGHT CONTROL

At all times during design and construction of the VESSEL, BUILDER shall implement and
follow a weight control process as required by CLASS and approved by BUILDER. The
objective of weight control shall be achieved by clearly defining the weight and center of gravity

PAGE 51 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

control guidelines followed through the detail design and construction stages and as detailed
in the project specific weight control procedure approved by CLASS and BUYER.
The BUILDER shall be responsible for monitoring the weight, weight contingency and center
of gravities. Additional and minimum weight management requirements are outlined in BUYER
provided Weight Management Procedure (100-00-00-NBEG-PLN-00001).
As per Section 2.1.6.2, a detailed lightship weight and center of gravity report shall be
prepared by BUILDER to also support in the construction, lifting, load out and float off of the
rig sections as per the requirements of Section 4.0 of this CTS. The light ship, LCG &TCG and
VCG trends within the report shall provide the projected weight from data provided by each
involved discipline. The report shall also detail and record any weight changes agreed to by
the BUYER.

3.2.5 LIGHTWEIGHT MATERIALS

It is imperative to adopt the state-of-the-art weight saving measures where possible to optimize
the lightship weight and improve the available Variable Deck Load. All materials shall be
CLASS approved.
As part of weight reduction measure, lightweight materials shall be used as agreed with
BUYER and on a cost benefit basis in the following areas or systems:
•GRP piping where allowed by CLASS and Regulatory Bodies, such as:
•Drain line for drill floor, cantilever, Helideck and inside the preload tanks, Drill water
system, and bilge line for compartments, Stripping line for preload tanks, Sea water
services line, Brine system, Tank vents and sounding system.
• FRP Grating, Handrails and Cable trays to be used where approved by CLASS and
Regulatory Bodies.
• Lightweight materials for the thermal & fire insulation and deck covering.
For any change of material or lightweight material proposed by BUYER, the requirements for
material substitutions as outlined in this CTS shall be followed.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS

The BUILDER shall be responsible for the development of all construction standards used
during construction of the VESSEL and which shall include but not be limited to Piping,
Structural, Outfitting, Mechanical, Electrical and Instrumentation, Welding, Architectural,
HVAC, Testing, Painting etc. based upon GOOD INDUSTRY PRACTICE, CLASS and
regulatory bodies requirements. It shall be a guide for the design and construction works.
BUILDER’s shall submit the construction standards to BUYER and CLASS for review and
approval.

3.4 CONSTRUCTABILITY
BUILDER shall provide all build sequence plan(s) and the same shall contain the fabrication
logic and the build sequences to be undertaken during all stages of the construction and until
delivery of the VESSEL. The build sequence plan(s) shall document how the BUILDER
intends to maximize the use and efficiency of the BUILDER facilities during the fabrication and
assembly of VESSEL components, the VESSEL structure, the installation of major equipment,
and the outfitting of the interconnecting and subsidiary equipment and systems.
Full use shall be made of all shipyard facilities allowing simultaneous construction activities to
be undertaken on as many work faces as possible to ensure the most efficient construction
and build schedule can be developed and maintained. The build sequence documentation
shall be supported by a comprehensive and fully resource loaded Level 4 Construction
Schedule that shall clearly outline the critical path.

PAGE 52 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

In order to facilitate the installation of major equipment, its removal at a later date, or for
maintenance requirements, the location of all necessary soft patch areas shall be identified
and agreed with the BUYER.
The BUILDER in the development of his structural details shall not use details, which could
cause lamellar tearing. In high stress areas (special and primary structures) where such
problems may reasonably be expected, through-thickness tested quality steel shall be used
as requested and required by CLASS.

3.4.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATION ON STEEL

3.4.1.1 DEFINITION OF STEEL CATEGORIES

The selection of structural steel shall comply with the codes and standards identified in the
Specifications.

3.4.1.2 MATERIAL GRADE

Mechanical and chemical properties shall satisfy the requirements of the Specification. All
material grades to be used shall be as indicated on the approved drawings. BUILDER shall
provide to BUYER a Certificate of Compliance to confirm that the materials used for
construction and delivery of the VESSEL are as per the Basic Design requirements and the
Class approved Basic Design.
High tensile steel shall be of normalized steel or TMCP steel. High tensile steel is to be used
wherever suitable, and as agreed with the BUYER, for weight-saving purposes. Aluminium
alloy shall be suitable for use in a saliferous marine environment. Where a specific grade or
type of metal is attached to a dissimilar metal, or to a dissimilar alloy, it shall be isolated from
the dissimilar material to avoid damage or degradation due to galvanic corrosion.
Where dissimilar materials are to be attached, the fastenings shall, except where otherwise
specified, be of AISI 316 Finish No 4 stainless steel or equal. Specialized material or type of
fastener shall be subject to approval of the BUYER.

3.4.1.3 CERTIFICATION
For all materials that are intended to be used for construction, Mill Certificates shall be
obtained, and as requested or required by BUYER, submitted to CLASS for approval. All
materials used for construction shall be ordered with an original (or by certifying authority at
supplier verified and stamped copy) inspection certificate according to Class. As a general
rule for CLASS constructions, a Type 3.2 certificate is required. For all non-CLASS
constructions, a Type 3.1 certificate is the minimum requirement. Dimension & tolerance of
plates shall be in accordance with the Specification. Mill sheets and mechanical test reports
shall be furnished, and traceability of steel used shall be maintained by BUILDER. All mill
sheets and mechanical test reports for special steel, primary steel and secondary steel
identified by BUYER’s included but not limited to piping used for drilling and firefighting
systems, shall be duly endorsed by Class.
The certificates shall be in accordance with ABS requirement and it shall as minimum detail
the production method, delivery condition, chemical analysis, tensile strength, yield strength,
percentage of elongation and Charpy V-notch impact test values (including test temperature).

PAGE 53 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.5 STEEL STRUCTURES AND STEEL OUTFITTINGS

3.5.1 HULL CONSTRUCTION

3.5.1.1 GENERAL
The hull shall be a fully welded structure of triangular design incorporating inner bottom and
ring perimeter tanks. It shall include openings for three open-truss legs of square cross section
and tubular rack chord supported by a robust rack and pinion elevating systems. The main
structure can be designed to transversal or longitudinal framing system. The configuration of
the hull shall be constructed with a flat bottom profile. There shall be no bilge radius on the
hull bottom. The main deck shall have a camber from close to the centre line to the sides of
the hull. The deck structure shall be designed in accordance with the Specification and the
loads specified herein. Concentrated loads such as foundations, depending on the framing
method used, may require changes to the local scantlings. Such changes shall be considered
as a development of the design and shall be at BUILDER expense.
Waterholes, air holes, slots, and all other penetrations cut in, or through steel structure, shall
be in accordance with CLASS Rules and Regulations, and the BUYER’s approved BUILDER’s
standard procedures and/or construction standards. No paint operations shall start until the
successful completion of the hull structure, any air tightness testing necessary inspections are
completed, and tests report signed by BUILDER, CLASS and BUYER. The BUILDER shall
document all water-tightness tests including but not limited to, the sea chests in accordance
with CLASS to water-tight requirements. The hull shall be completely sealed, such that all
contaminated water and fluids shall be retained on-board, i.e. zero-discharge. This is to
include rainwater and wash water. All retained liquids shall be held in dedicated collection
tanks.

3.5.1.2 SCANTLINGS
All structural design and scantlings shall be in accordance with CLASS requirements and
recommendations. The structural layout shall be optimized to avoid stress concentrations.
The BUILDER may propose scantlings that differ from those shown on the Contract Plans to
suit the BUILDER's material procurements, yard fabrication methods, etc. BUILDER may
propose angle steel to substitute the bulb profiles contained within the Contract Plans. Any
substitutions shall be in accordance with the BUYER substitution requirements outlined in the
Specification.

3.5.1.3 WATERTIGHT INTEGRITY

The watertight integrity of the hull including components maintaining the watertight integrity
i.e. Doors, man holes, hatches, shall be as per the contract plan and in accordance with the
Specification and reviewed and approved by BUYER and CLASS. The complete hull structure,
including the watertight boundaries shall meet the intact and damage stability requirements,
and all tanks, etc. shall be tested in accordance with the Specification. Piping penetrating
watertight decks or bulkheads and the main deck and other wet or weather exposed areas
shall be continuously welded on both sides of the piping and the penetration locally reinforced
with doublers as approved by CLASS.
Where cables pass through watertight decks, multi cable transits shall be used. Watertight
cable transits are to be used through watertight and/or gas tight decks and bulkheads. The
use of potting compounds on cable penetrations on watertight, gastight, weather tight, or fume
tight (CLASS A) bulkheads shall not be permitted.

PAGE 54 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.5.2 HULL TANKS AND EXTERNAL TANKS

3.5.2.1 BUILT IN TANKS

Built-in tanks shall be provided where shown on the Contract Plans to accommodate and
provide for the minimum capacities identified in the Specification. All tanks shall be designed,
constructed and shall be tested and proven watertight in line with the Specification.
No tanks with overboard discharge capability shall be used for dual service where this could
introduce the risk of harmful environmental discharges and/or the contravention of the
environmental protection rules, codes and standards contained within Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Potable water tanks shall as far as possible be constructed smooth except for the bulkhead
that forms part of the vessel side shell and where frames are required for structural strength.
Bilge sumps and fuel tanks shall not be located over or adjacent to the potable water tanks.
The mud pits shall be totally enclosed with plate and shall form and /or integrate with the mud
pit room deck plate. Openings shall be limited to access for personnel, installed equipment,
and maintenance. Openings shall so far as possible be capable of closure. Ventilation of the
mud pits and the mud pit room shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans for Hazardous
Area Classification, and the pertinent sections within this CTS. The inside surface of the mud
pit, sand trap and trip tank shall be smooth, without any structural frames, sharp corners and
wedges. All mud pits tank corners (vertical and horizontal) shall be filled with Chamfer plates.
Tanks shall be designed to prevent, so far as reasonably practicable, the fallout and build-up
of solids from the mud system solids to settle and for ease of tank cleaning. Sumps for suction
shall be installed in each pit to allow efficient emptying and stripping.

3.5.2.2 MISCELLANEOUS TANKS

All miscellaneous tanks, including but not limited to those listed below, shall be designed,
constructed, tested and proven watertight in line with the Specification. The tanks shall be
supported on suitable foundations and provided with the required connections that include but
not limited to, fill, discharge, gauge drains, relief valves, sounding, access manholes,
inspection openings, filling status monitoring and alarms where required. Tank capacities shall
be suitable for the service requirements.
• Engine cooling expansion tanks.
• After cooler expansion tanks.
• Freshwater cooling expansion tanks.
• Service air, start air, drill floor, BOP control, E-gen starting receivers.
• ‘P’ Tanks,
• Dust collectors,
• Surge tanks,
• Potable water pressure set.
• Mud sand traps.
• Trip tanks,
• Stripping tank,
• Skimmer tank,
• Lube oil tanks,
• E-Gen. fuel oil day tank,
• Fuel oil tank for burner booms (OFE)
• Fire water pressure tanks,
• Foam tank
• Helideck drain holding tank.
• Lube oil tank for E-Gen.
• Hydraulic oil storage tanks.

PAGE 55 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Tote tank for mud pump/sack mixer coaming drain

3.5.3 SEA CHEST STRUCTURE AND HULL PENETRATIONS

3.5.3.1 SEA CHESTS

A minimum of two (2) Sea chests shall be built into the hull structure at the lowest possible
location. The position of the sea chests shall minimize the influx of sea bed deposits and debris
when afloat in shallow waters as specified in Section 2 of this CTS. Sea chests shall be of
steel, welded plate construction. Doubler plates shall be fitted where necessary to maintain
the structural integrity of the hull. All components of the sea chest system including but not
limited to, valves, boundaries, and strainer plates shall be in accordance with the Specification.
The BUILDER shall ensure that the design of the sea chest is fit for the shallow water design
draft.
Sea chests shall be fitted with portable perforated stainless-steel strainer plates, grade 316,
16mm (5/8”) thick with 25mm diameter holes. The Free area through the strainer plate shall
not be less than two (2) times the combined area of all the sea valves and piping connected
to the sea chest. Strainer Plate shall be secured in place with stainless steel studs and nuts
in such a manner to be removable with no part projecting beyond the shell/bottom. Nuts shall
be lock wired with stainless steel wire. The strainer plate shall be secured by fasteners and
have a stainless-steel hinge arrangement to facilitate the opening of the strainer plate down
and outwards for diver access to the sea chest internals without having to completely remove
and lower the strainer plate.
There shall be an internal sea chest removable top cover into which the anodes shall be
located. The cover retaining bolts shall be stainless steel and lock wired with stainless steel
locking wire. There shall be suitable certified pad eyes installed to aid the removal of the top
sea chest cover plate assembly. A watertight Manhole and Ladder shall be provided to access
the internals of the sea chest.
Sea chests shall be provided with vents and blow down line for debris from the perforated sea
chest intake plate in the form of a service air supply with an air isolation valve and suitable
check valve.

3.5.3.2 HULL PENETRATIONS

All openings in the hull structure, permanent or temporary, shall be in accordance the
approved Basic Design, approved by the Designer and in line with the Specification.
During the outfitting of the VESSEL, care shall be taken to keep the size and number of
openings made in the structure for the passage of piping, wiring, ventilation ducts, etc., to a
minimum. Where openings are required, they shall be carefully designed, and the surrounding
structure shall be properly reinforced in accordance with Class requirements. Where approved
by Class, doublers may be used for reinforcement in way of pipe and cable penetrations if
such reinforcement is required. The design and construction shall always provide for suitable
and sufficient support of steel constructions and equipment installations.

3.5.4 LEG WELL SECTIONS

The leg well sections shall be designed and constructed as shown on the Contract Plans and
the requirements outlined in the Specification.
There are three (3) leg wells, one (1) at the bow and one (1) either side aft, Port and Starboard.
The main full depth leg well sections extend from the hull bottom to the main deck opening
through which the legs pass, and which dimensions are suitable to allow the Spudcans to be
completely retracted into the leg well for afloat conditions. The design shall be such that the
lowest point of the Spudcan is flush with the hull bottom.

PAGE 56 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.5.5 JACKING STRUCTURES

The jacking structures shall be designed and constructed as shown on the Contract Plans and
the requirements outlined in the Specification.
The jacking structures are a vertical box-type structural arrangement that when machined to
the OEM drawing tolerances and mounted into the correct position as per drawing shall
provide the correct mounting arrangement for each gearbox assembly which in turn shall
determine the accuracy of the jacking pinion alignment with relationship to the leg chord
centralization of the rack and support for the leg guides. The accuracy of the jacking support
shall be as per Class and jacking system OEM requirements and must provide the correct
alignment of the jacking pinions with relationship to the centralization of the jacking frame
around the leg chord, which shall ensure correct and OEM approved contact between the rack
chord and the pinion assembly.
The jacking structures are interconnected by horizontal beams at upper guide level. A further
set of diagonal beams is arranged between upper guide level and the main deck.
The jack house assemblies shall be installed in the leg well with jigs to maintain leg to guide
tolerance. All required tolerances shall be verified during installation and after the installation
is complete. All jacking drive assemblies shall be watertight.
The BUILDER shall propose a procedure for both installing the jack houses and verifying
pinion and guide placement that is to the satisfaction of BUYER, Basic Designer, and CLASS.

3.5.5.1 LEG GUIDES

The leg guide structure shall be designed and constructed as shown on the Contract Plans
and the requirements outlined in the Specification. The BUILDER shall align guides in the hull
with those of the jack case to insure proper operation of the jacking system. The construction
tolerances shall be in line with the Contract Plans and the Designer recommendation.
The location and installation of the guides shall be as approved by CLASS, the Designer, and
the jacking system and leg designer.
The legs must be manufactured within a tolerance that allows free movement of the legs
through the guides as positioned to satisfy the pinion/rack alignment described above.
The leg guides are arranged within the structure at each one of the leg chords, at two levels:
• Intermediate Guides, permanent guide structures at the main deck level
• Lower guides near the bottom hull, to engage each corner member of the leg
Intermediate Leg Guides, the permanent guide structures at the main deck level, will serve
the purpose of facilitating inspection of the leg-to-footing connection. Limitations regarding
elevation of the spud leg for inspection will be described in the operating manual. For normal
and storm operating conditions for this Unit, the intermediate guide liners must not be installed.

3.5.6 LEG STRUCTURE

3.5.6.1 GENERAL
There shall be three square structural legs, each of truss and braced steel construction. The
legs have a face width (chord centre-to-centre distance) and a length (from tip of Spudcan to
top of leg chord) as stated in Section 2.0. The strength of the legs shall be such that the
VESSEL can operate in conditions as provided in Section 2.0 of this Specification. All
components shall be of steel with properties as indicated in the Contract Plans and as
approved by CLASS.
The leg assemblies shall be constructed of material and within the tolerances as stated in the
separate leg chord specification that shall be provided by the BUILDER. All interior spaces of
leg chords and braces shall be closed watertight.

PAGE 57 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All leg structural components are classified as primary structure and shall be Keppel-LeT
specified steel quality as indicated below:

• Leg Chord Rack and (Type B) Side Plates and Back Plates – Keppel-LeT ABS N25
HN (1516.00-06 CL3) proprietary low alloy quenched and tempered steel, 100,000 psi
yield, 112,000/136,000 psi tensile, Charpy impact test values (CVN) of 30 ft-lbs
Longitudinal at -40 deg C, as per Classification Requirements, flame cut teeth free of
cracks and laminations. Vacuum degassed, fine grained practice, sulfur max. 0.011 as
approved by ABS .

• Leg Chord: (Type A) Side Plates and Back Plates– Keppel-LeT N20 (1518.00-06 CL
6) proprietary low alloy quenched and tempered steel, 85,000 psi yield,
100,000/125,000 psi tensile, CVN impact test of 43.5 ft-lbs Longitudinal at -40 deg C,
as per Classification Requirements, 0.018 sulfur maximum.

• Diagonal and Horizontal Face Braces –Keppel LeT M&M (1511) proprietary low alloy
quenched and tempered steel tubing, 90,000 psi minimum yield, 104,000 min tensile,
CVN impact test 46 ft-lbs Longitudinal at -40 deg. C, as per Classification
Requirements.

• Internal Span Breaker – Keppel LeT M&M (1511) tubing, 85,000 psi minimum yield,
100,000 min tensile, CVN impact test 36 ft-lbs Long. at -40 deg. C, as per Classification
Requirements.
Keppel-LeT 1516.00-06 CL3 & 1518.00-06 CL6 materials for side and back plates may be
substituted with ASTM A514 Grade H (MOD) with 100ksi min yield, 110-130ksi min tensile,
CVN impact test 43.5 ft-lbs Longitudinal at -40 deg. C.
Keppel-LeT 1516.00-06 CL3 material for rack plate may be substituted with DILLIMAX 690E
(MOD) with 100ksi min yield, 110-130ksi min tensile, CVN impact test 30 ft-lbs Longitudinal at
-40 deg. C.
Subject to approval by CLASS and BUYER, the above structural material may be substituted
by equivalent grades in case of non-availability.

All anodes and piping for jetting, flooding and eductor systems shall be provided by the
BUILDER and securely attached to the bracing member of the legs.

3.5.6.2 WELDING OF LEG STRUCTURES

All welding and repair procedures shall be developed by BUILDER in accordance with the
requirements of the Specification and special attention paid to the risk of hydrogen sulphide
induced cracking in high strength and extra high strength steels.
The completed leg assemblies shall be true to dimensions as described in the Contract Plans.
The rack sections shall be installed to maintain accurate tooth pitch through the entire vertical
range. Rack teeth in way of upper guides, with legs in all towing positions, shall be built-up to
remove clearance between guide and teeth tips.
For the single-sided welds, such as rack-scale welds and scale-scale welds, the use of
permanently fitted backing strips shall be avoided. Any proposal to use backing strips shall be
subject to review and approval by CLASS and BUYER. All welding details and procedures,

PAGE 58 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

alignment and dimensional control procedures, method statements, heat treatment processes
and procedures, etc. shall be submitted to CLASS and BUYER for approval.

3.5.6.3 NDT OF LEG STRUCTURES

All butt welds on the chord and rack as well as the braces are to be fully (to 100%)
ultrasonically or radiographically (X-rayed) tested in accordance with the BUYER approved
NDT plan. All other welds are to be fully (to 100%) ultrasonically tested. All welds are to be of
a quality that meets the approval of the BUYER and CLASS. The chord sections are to be
watertight throughout and are to be proven sound by UT and MPI as required.

3.5.6.4 LEG LADDERS, ANODES AND PLATFORMS

General vertical ladder requirements are stipulated in the Hull Access section of this CTS.
However, for each leg two (2) vertical continuous ladders shall be installed over the entire
length of leg and reaching from the Spudcan to the Leg lighting support platform on top of the
legs. The ladder shall be accessible from the Main Deck.
Access platforms shall be provided for the Spudcan hatches that are accessible from the main
deck. All Leg platforms are to be safely accessible from the leg ladder and provided with
standard three tier pipe handrails, secured grating and kick plates. It shall be possible to
service all hazard and other lights located at the top of the leg while standing on the platform.
Cathodic protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
The VESSEL shall be delivered with legs free of marine fouling, construction debris and solids.

3.5.6.5 SPUD CANS

The bottom of each leg will be equipped with a spud can (soil bearing footing). The design and
strength of the Spudcans shall be such that the VESSEL can operate in conditions as provided
in Section 2.0 of this Specification. All components shall be of steel with properties as indicated
in the Contract Plans and as approved by CLASS.
The top and bottom plate of the spud can shall be of a conical configuration. The spud can is
designed to be free flooding. A single access trunk shall be provided in each Spudcan, that
shall extend above the top of the Spudcan and incorporate a non-watertight hinged manhole
with venting arrangement. Access grating shall be provided to the trunk and a vertical ladder
shall be provided in the trunk. Additionally, a flooding valve shall be provided near the top of
the spud can. A leg jetting system shall be provided.
The centre tube structure and radial internal bulkheads/frames and external bulkheads in line
with the leg chords, which form the main supporting elements of the footing, are classed as
Primary structure for material selection purposes.
When empty of all sea water, and the Spudcan watertight, the Spudcan shall be capable of
providing additional buoyancy to the hull.
Access grating shall be provided to the trunk and a vertical ladder provided in the trunk. Spud
cans shall be fitted with a vent line and educator system to evacuate the water, in case of
internal spud can inspection. The VESSEL shall be delivered with Spudcans free of marine
fouling, construction debris and solids.

3.5.7 CANTILEVER, DRILL FLOOR AND SUPPORTING STRUCTURES

The Cantilever, Drill floor and Supporting Structure shall be provided as detailed on the
Contract Plans and in accordance with Section 1.0 of this Specification. However, the final
design and arrangements shall take into consideration the drilling equipment selected by the
BUYER. The BUILDER shall verify all equipment dimensions and local loadings to determine
whether or not they are within the allowable loads as per Specification. The BUILDER shall

PAGE 59 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

be responsible for monitoring the final weights, details and adequacy of the deck structure for
drill floor / cantilever.

3.5.7.1 CANTILEVER AND SUBBASE

The Cantilever shall be provided as detailed on the Contract Plans and in accordance with
Section 1.0 of this Specification. The cantilever shall be capable of the maximum outreach
and with the combined pipe rack loads stipulated in Section 2.0 of this CTS.
The cantilever consists of two (2) longitudinal steel beams, approximately 129 ft - 3 in (39.4
m) long x 18 ft (5.48 m) deep. These two (2) beams are on 52-foot (15.8 m) longitudinal centers
and are held in parallel by the pipe rack and sub base girders. The beams skid along the skid
pad/guide structures on the main deck of the hull. The aftermost skid pads (push-ups) have
bronze liners or cladding, provided in Keppel-LeT Kit and installed by Builder. In addition, two
(2) sets of Hilman rollers shall be provided and installed by BUILDER, such that the load of
the cantilever transitions from the aftermost skid pads onto the rollers. Grease fittings shall
provided along the skidding surfaces of the main deck skid pads, and to the Hilman roller
assemblies. Keppel-LeT electric skidding units with racks and controls shall be provided with
this structure.

Hold-down structures shall be provided as per Basic Designer (Keppel-LeTourneau)

requirements and shall be installed through the main deck near the forward extremity of the
cantilever when the cantilever is extended beyond the edge of the hull allowing for a maximum
distance of 70 feet (21.3) from the stern edge of the hull to the centerline of the rotary. A
locking / sea fastening arrangement shall be provided for securing the Cantilever and the Drill
Floor in the stowed position.
The sub base is a box-beam type structure with trussed end panels approximately 32 ft long
x 68 ft wide x 11 ft high. The top of the sub base consists of two parallel beams running athwart
ship allowing transverse skidding of the drill floor, such that the rotary can be located 15’ either
side of sub base centerline. The sub base beams are fixed in position on top of the cantilever
beams.

3.5.7.2 TEXAS DECK

BUILDER shall design and provide a Texas Deck at the stern of the VESSEL for open water
drilling operation to include the following basic specifications.
• It shall be designed to be both hinged and removable. It shall not project below the hull
bottom in any circumstances.
• Platform shall be design for a tensioning load of 400 kips, supported from the hull
transom by chains and turnbuckles.
• It shall be designed for a fixed centreline 20 ft aft of transom. BUILDER shall ensure it
does not project more than 5ft aft of the transom while it is it’s hinged up stored position.
Additional pad eyes shall be provided to allow for the option of an offset centreline
position, for both port and starboard.
• The platform deck shall be 30 ft wide and of a length to suit the above Section.
• The deck shall be provided with dropped object compliant heavy-duty grating, it shall
be suitable to store BOP parts and well head etc. rated and fitted as per Specification
• Two (2) means of access shall be provided by one (1) removable staircase and one
(1) vertical ladder with back scratcher and lad safe system.
In addition, the BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient safe means of, stowing,
deploying and setting the Texas deck.

PAGE 60 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.5.7.3 DRILL FLOOR AND SUBSTRUCTURE

The Drill floor structure shall be provided, and the design shall be as per Contract Plans and
Specification. The drill floor shall be fixed on the substructure/cantilever.
The drill floor shall support the imposed loads of integral equipment that shall include, but not
be limited to, the following:
• Derrick (Fully outfitted)
• Drawworks, including drivers and brakes incl. Ventilation and cooling
• Hydraulic Drive Rotary table
• Setback area
• Drawworks & Choke and kill roof and Wind Walls.
• Deadline anchor
• Top Drive System (Including dolly)
• Manifolds (C&K, Cement, Mud)
• Pipe Racking Machine
• Iron Roughneck
• Mud Gas Separator
• Stripping tank
• Drillers House, including instrumentation and equipment control packages.
• Brake Water Cooling Package.
• Local Equipment Room/Workstation
• Work Desk Station
• BOP Control Panels
• Winches (Both service and man rider)
• Drill floor bug blowers
• Mouse/Fox Hole
• Tong Posts
• Drill floor/Derrick Lighting
• Wire Line Reel
• Wire Line Measuring Unit
• Choke Manifold Control Panels and Glycol injection.
• Compressed Air Receiver
• Diverter Control Panel / Manifold
• Hydraulic Cathead
• BB Diverter with Hydraulic Ball Valves
• Secondary Conductor Tensioning Cylinders
• Mud bucket
• Drillers control cabin
• Pipe systems from main deck to cantilever or drill floor
The area of the drill floor within the operating envelope of the vertical pipe racker shall be
designed to withstand the impact imposed by a 27.4m stand of 9-1/2” drill collars (3 joints of
range two pipe) dropped (free fall) from a height of one 1.0 meter. There shall be provided
impact resistant sub-flooring beneath the drill floor as required to withstand such impact. The
setback area shall have one 152mm layer of hardwood decking and have a storage capacity
as stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS.

BUILDER shall provide for permanent safe and efficient access to the area below the Drill floor
to carry out maintenance on the mud return system, diverter and diverter valves, secondary
tensioner cylinders, moonpool utility winches etc.

PAGE 61 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The drill floor shall be provided with an adequately sized drain collection (drip pan) system
and system of gutters and drains around the rotary table cover, the setback area, pipe racking
system, around drill floor (inside the wind wall) and in line with the Specification.
The Drill floor shall be provided with a suitable and sufficient Windwall with the necessary
windows and openings, a drawworks enclosure, choke and kill manifold enclosure and a
Windwall at the monkey board level. Suitable and efficient access shall be provided to all
levels of the Drill floor such as but not limited to drawworks enclosure and choke and kill
manifold enclosure. A partitioned space shall be provided within the LER to accommodate a
single desktop / workstation for the use of the crew. The partitioned off space shall have a
dedicated entrance to avoid unnecessary traffic through the LER, but shall share the same
A/C and Non-Hazardous area pressurization so as to allow the safe use of non ex equipment
such as desktop computer, telephone, and LAN network etc.
The surface of drill floor shall be flush, as far as reasonably practicable, in order to limit tripping
hazards including the area in and around the iron roughneck and its tracks and the setback
area. Industry standard rubber matting shall be provided to cover the area around the rotary
table and as far as practical the working area of the Drillfloor. The rubber mats shall be red
and yellow, provided with antiskid and grooves to allow fluids to drain off. The mats shall be
safely secured on the floor to avoid movement during operations.
Suitable and sufficient hatches and access shall be provided for the maintenance and removal
of the Choke and Kill manifold (in one piece and as assembled) and Drawworks components.

3.5.7.4 PIPE RACKS

There shall be two (2) main pipe racks, one (1) on the main deck and one (1) on the cantilever.
The tubular and load capacities of the pipe racks shall be in accordance with Section 2.0 of
this Specification. The pipe racks shall be provided with suitable and sufficient structural
support beams for the tubulars, the beams shall incorporate hard wood surface to prevent
damage to tubulars, removable Samson Posts, removable wooden partitions, and hatches for
access to the lower levels of both the cantilever and the hull. The hatches shall be of such
dimensions and design to allow for the safe storage and removal of equipment and materials
as specified throughout this CTS.
The arrangement of the pipe racks shall be as shown on the Contract Plans. The removable
Samson posts for the segregation of tubulars throughout the pipe rack shall slot into sockets
when in use. The arrangement shall include a robust and safe retention system. The Samson
Posts shall incorporate arrangements to allow for removal by mechanical handling means,
including the rig cranes. The lifting arrangement shall be such that the Sampson post cannot
get hung up on the crane lifting accessories and be lifted out of the socket unintentionally.
The sockets provided shall incorporate drain holes to prevent the accumulation of water. A
tie-down system shall be provided for securing tubulars while afloat.
Wooden barge boards/partitions, approximately 2 meters high, shall be provided at the forward
end of all pipe. Barge boards shall consist of 75mm oak or similar hardwood timbers attached
to the flanges of “H” beam stanchions. The wooden barge boards shall be robust. Stanchions
shall be on approximately 1.8m centres and shall be suitably braced.
Storage racks for subs and bales shall be provided adjacent to the pipe racks.

3.5.8 DERRICK STRUCTURE

The Derrick shall be hot dipped galvanized bolted truss construction. So far as is reasonably
practicable all the necessary attachments and anchorages shall be incorporated in the
construction of the derrick 'prior to galvanizing'. Galvanizing procedure as per ASTM standard
or equal. All bolted connections, of the derrick and other installed equipment in the derrick
shall be secured to prevent dropped objects and in accordance with this specification.
PAGE 62 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The derrick structure shall have a footprint of the 35 ft. x 32 ft. x 170ft and shall be rated for
1.5 million pounds static hook load and shall be designed and built to API Standard 4F
Monogrammed.
The derrick shall be mounted on the drill floor substructure on pedestals extending above the
drill floor level. Suitably rated, Xylan coated blue stud anchor bolts shall be used to affix the
derrick to the pedestals. A levelling system shall allow the derrick to be adjusted during
installation (levelling shims and hydraulic jacks with a, maximum shimming height of 100mm).
The V-door opening at the pipe rack side shall allow for the passage of large equipment and
the full range of tubulars via the catwalk and Horizontal to Vertical arrangement on and off the
drill floor. A V-door protection system shall be incorporated to prevent damage to the derrick
structure incorporating a deflector bar for protection of the structure and fingerboard cladding
from crane wire abrasion.
A full walk around platform shall be incorporated at the fingerboard level complete with grating,
self-closing gates and handrails as deemed necessary by the BUYER. The walkway shall be
protected by a Windwall of CLASS approved, robust, and weatherproof protective cladding
All sides of fingerboard Windwall shall be equipped with identification panels that are
sufficiently large to accommodate both the mandatory aviation identification marking
requirements and any company information and/or logos. These panels shall be illuminated
by flood lights that are mounted on hinged brackets for easy maintenance.
At the fingerboard level a self-closing access door, a derrick man’s escape platform shall be
installed. This shall be outfitted with a ready to use descender type derrick man’s escape
system with guide wire. The landing position shall provide a good means of egress for the
Derrickman in an emergency escape scenario.
Stainless steel fencing and/or guards shall be provided where necessary to prevent contact
by personnel with the fast line, wires from utility winches, tong counterweights and rotating
equipment.
A Gin Pole structure is mounted at the top of the Derrick. A gin pole platform shall be provided
to allow for Crown Block, lifting equipment, Meteorological Instruments, and Navigation Light
access, inspection, and maintenance. The platform shall incorporate a walkway with suitable
grating, guardrails that include sufficient openings that are protected when not in use by self-
closing gates.
The water table is located below the gin pole and supports the crown block with fast line and
deadline sheaves. The underside of the water table shall be equipped with pad eyes and
sheaves. A platform of similar specifications to the gin pole shall be provided at the water
table. It shall be arranged around the crown block for access, inspection and maintenance.
Hatches shall be provided in the water table platform to facilitate the lowering and removal of
the crown block, and fast line and deadline sheaves.
Guide rails/Dolly tracks for the top drive dolly are installed at the drawworks side of the derrick.
The rails/tracks shall be suitably braced and fit for purpose. The tracks shall have provision
for adjustment in horizontal plane at each connection for alignment.
A rubber bumper shall be is installed at appropriate height to the underside of the water table
to prevent impact from the travelling block.
The derrick shall incorporate suitable and sufficient integral supports, anchorages, and pad
eyes for the Top Drive service loop, instrument loop, hydraulic hoses, and general outfitting.
In addition, so far as is reasonably practicable, integral brackets and plates shall be provided
to include, but not be limited to, the installation of all junction boxes, IO panels, Electrical
Panels, CCTV equipment, Lighting, and PA/GA speakers.

PAGE 63 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Suitable and sufficient access platforms shall be provided for the two (2) mud and one (1)
cement manifolds, standpipes, and goose necks to allow safe access for operation and
maintenance of all valves and hammer unions etc.
The Derrick shall incorporate all the necessary anchorages and pad eyes for the hang off of
all major equipment in the derrick, including but not limited to, the Top Drive, Horizontal to
Vertical Machine, and Casing Stabbing Arm and Fingerboard. Pad eyes shall be provided for
installation, hanging off, and removal/replacement of major hoses such as mud and cement
hoses. In addition, brackets and pad eyes shall be provided for the support of other hoses,
as deemed necessary by the BUYER when not in use shall be provided to the derrick structure
with access platform.
All ladders shall be equipped with safety cages and rest platforms. Platforms and walkways
shall be in accordance with the hull access section 3.7 of this CTS. The following additional
outfitting requirements shall apply:
• All sheave blocks (snatch blocks) shall be tower block type; safety slings for the snatch
blocks shall have an eye on each end and connected together with a four part shackle
• No grating opening in the Derrick shall be larger than 15mm, GRP grating is to be used
where feasible
• All piping shall be of welded construction and only flanged at the interface connections.
• A dedicated hand winch shall be provided for pulling back the Topdrive Hang-Off Line.
• A dedicated Hang-Off Line shall be provided which shall be equipped with a Hook on
one end to connect to the shackle on top of the Traveling Block for hanging-off the
Topdrive
• Padeyes shall be provided for Tong Counter weights, Utility Winches, Manrider
Winches, Power Tongs, Pipe Spinners etc.
• Rubber Bumpers shall have safety wires to prevent dropped objects
3.5.9 DECK MOUNTED SUPPORT STRUCTURES
BUILDER shall provide and install following deck mounted support structures on Main deck.
All structures shall be designed to be fit for purpose. The BUILDER shall ensure that no
support structures shall impede the free movement of the forklift between material handling
areas of the main deck area. These structures include, but shall not be limited to:
• Raw water hose reel unit platforms, (port and stbd)
• Radiator platforms, (port side)
• Hose loading stations, (port and stbd)
• Platform for well logging unit and tool house, (stbd side)
• Drag chain supports.
• Cement Unit and tank structures
• All crane pedestals
• Pipe Racks
• END USER super-sack storage and handling area (port side)
• Marine support structures such as smit brackets, bollards, etc.
• P-Tank supports etc.
• Burner / Flare booms supports and foundations
3.5.10 FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS

3.5.10.1 GENERAL
The BUILDER shall design and provide all the foundations and under deck support for the
satisfactory distribution of loads into the structure for all machinery, equipment’s, structures
and outfitting as shown on Contract Plans. The responsibility for the provision shall lie

PAGE 64 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

expressly with the BUILDER, irrespective of whether the components requiring the
foundations are OFE, BFE, or Third Party.
All foundations shall be arranged for ease of maintenance, and the maintenance of the
equipment they support. Foundations shall be provided for adequate and safe free working
and maintenance access space around, and where necessary, under all equipment.
BUILDER shall pay special attention to the provision of sufficient rigidity of the foundation
support structure, and to the aligning and cushioning and restraint of piping, machinery or
equipment which is likely to produce vibrations, so as to minimize or otherwise control
vibrations and consequent transmission of noise and/or vibrations through the structure of the
VESSEL to acceptable levels as specified by applicable Code and Regulations.
Particular attention shall also be paid to limiting any relative deflections of foundations to
ensure positive alignments are maintained on machinery and to avoid any detrimental effects
on bearings, etc. BUILDER shall submit plans of all equipment foundations, access platform
etc. to BUYER and CLASS for approval and comments, prior to commencing their fabrication
and inclusion in the construction. In general, the layout equipment and systems on the
Contract Plans is the intent of that to be constructed. However, where the BUILDER would
propose an alternative arrangement this shall be as agreed by the BUYER. Any decision on
the proposed change by the BUYER shall be final and any relocation of equipment or
machinery during the detail design period shall not constitute a change resulting in any cost
or schedule impact.

3.5.10.2 FOUNDATION DESIGN

Foundations shall be designed and installed to act as complete supports, against all loading
conditions, independent of the casings, frame bed plates, or other parts of the supported
panels, equipment, or machinery etc., and in accordance with Manufacturer’s
recommendations. Skid Furnished Equipment may, as agreed with the BUYER, be mounted
on deck pads with under deck chocking at structural intersections. Foundations shall be
designed and installed to preclude development of thermal stresses in either the foundation
or in the supported heat producing equipment. Foundations for non-reciprocating equipment
shall be designed in accordance with the codes and standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this
CTS.

3.5.10.3 DECK CRANE SUPPORTS

The BUILDER shall provide suitable foundations for three (3) deck cranes designed in
accordance with the crane manufacturer loading and CLASS requirements.
The crane pedestals shall be designed, fabricated and installed as shown in the Contract
Plans and shall be attached to the main deck and hull structure.

3.5.10.4 BURNER BOOM SUPPORTS

The BUILDER shall provide foundation supports, reinforcements, support and stowage tower,
etc. for two burner booms of a length defined by the BUYER, one on either side of the rig.
The burner booms shall be capable of being stowed in a vertical open frame trussed tower
with ladder to an access platform(s) at the securing level. The burner booms shall be secured
to the tower by a system of locking pins and pad eyes when in the stowed position.
A universal joint type pivoting foundation shall support each burner boom at the main deck
level. This foundation shall permit the burner boom to hinge vertically for stowage or
horizontally for operation or access to the burner head for maintenance or removal. Handling
of burner boom shall be by deck cranes and dedicated air winches.

PAGE 65 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.5.10.5 FOUNDATION FOR THIRD-PARTY EQUIPMENT

The BUILDER shall provide all foundations for Client and Third-Party equipment as shown on
the Contract Plans. The required Third-Party foundations shall include but not limited to:
• Well Logging Unit and Accessories
• Mud logging Unit
• Cement Unit and Accessories
• Well test equipment
• Mud centrifuges and mud cooler
• Client Third-Party Tool Container

Where Contract Plans show details of some foundations, it shall be understood that they are
included for guidance to the BUILDER to assist at the bid stage. They are intended to provide
a basic design and indication of the minimum standard of strength expected for a generic item
of equipment.
Such information shall not constitute the actual foundations required and the BUILDER, as
per previous sections is expressly responsible for the provision of 'fit for purpose' foundation
for the equipment.

3.5.11 LAYDOWN AREAS

Laydown/Storage areas are meant for short term or long-term storage of material. As far as is
reasonably practicable all the laydown/storage areas shall be capable of being accessed by
at least two (2) Main Deck Cranes. Full details of all laydown areas shall be in the material
handling plan to be furnished to the BUYER by the BUILDER. In any case, all laydown areas
shall be suitably rated for the equipment and materials that are intended to be landed and
stored upon them. A marking and color code of the laydown area shall be provided indicating
the design load rating and location of primary supports below to provide guidance for point
loads.

3.5.12 ACCOMMODATION DECKHOUSE

The accommodation structure shall have the scantlings and dimensions as shown on the
Contract Plans. It shall be weathertight, all-welded construction of reinforced and corrugated
steel plate. Adequate headers shall be provided below the main deck to transfer the imposed
loads to the structure. The accommodation structure shall be fabricated of mild steel and shall
support the lifeboat davit structures on the port side, and the Lifeboat davit and rescue boat
structures on the starboard side.
Wet spaces or spaces that are frequently hosed down, such as service lockers, laundry rooms,
etc. shall be continuously welded.

3.5.13 HELICOPTER DECK AND SUPPORT STRUCTURE

The helicopter deck shall be arranged on the bow of the hull, and shall meet the requirements
of the rules, regulations codes, and standards as stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS
The helicopter deck shall be supported by a truss structure forward of the accommodation.
The structure shall also act as the anchorage points for the UNIT towing bridle. The design of
the hull and accommodation structure interfaces with the helicopter deck supports shall be in
accordance with the Contract Plans.
The helideck shall be sized for a Sikorsky S61N, S92 and B-214 helicopter. The load bearing
structures below the helideck shall therefore be capable of supporting the maximum take-off
weight of the helicopter together with the weight of any other fabrication or structures intended

PAGE 66 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

to be supported structure that shall include, but not be limited to, the towing equipment, and
helideck under deck walkways and platforms.
The helideck shall be constructed of aluminium in accordance with END USER’s Aviation
requirements. The aluminium elements shall be fully isolated from any dissimilar metals with
the potential for galvanic corrosion.
The helicopter deck surface shall be permanently non-slip and skid-proof in all directions.
The helicopter deck shall be equipped with three exits, complete with stair, platform and safety
railings. One of the exits shall be provided at the forward edge of the helideck. A platform shall
be provided under the helideck for towing equipment deployment and retrieval system and
emergency escape from the forward helideck exit.
All superstructure shall be hose tested and proven watertight as per Regulatory Body
requirements.

3.5.14 EMERGENCY GENERATOR HOUSE

Builder shall furnish a fully welded corrugated steel house for the emergency generator, day
tank, starting batteries and switchboard. House shall be mounted on quarter’s roof and
furnished with two (2) weather tight doors. HVAC for the Emergency Generator house shall
be provided in accordance with this CTS, and in addition there shall be suitable and sufficient
opening in the bulkhead for the discharge of cooling air from the emergency generator engine
radiator, complete with automatic louver. The deck and bulkhead boundaries separating the
space from the stairway and other accommodation spaces shall be insulated to ABS
requirements. An access ladder and one stairway will be provided to the roof. A NOVEC fixed
fire- extinguishing system provided and installed by Builder.
The BUILDER shall ensure that all the necessary mechanical handling equipment and fittings
are included to allow safe maintenance and material handling throughout the E-Gen house.
Such provision shall include but not be limited to, runway beams and pad eyes as agreed with
the BUYER. There shall be coamings provided to form bonded areas around the emergency
generator, the fuel oil day tank, cold start compressor, and lube oil tank. Each bund shall be
equipped with a screwed drain plug and discharge to the oily water drains system.
Passive and active fire protection shall be in accordance with CLASS and Regulatory Bodies
requirements.

3.5.15 DRAWWORKS HOUSE AND WINDWALL

The BUILDER shall design, furnish and install a drawworks house. The drawworks house shall
be enclosed on three sides with a roof. There shall be suitable and sufficient access provided
by an inclined staircase to the drawworks enclosure roof. The enclosure shall be
approximately 17’ 8” high and extend the full longitudinal length of the drill floor. The enclosure
shall be equipped with suitable and sufficient drains that discharge into the Contaminated
Drains system. The construction shall be of corrugated steel plate bulkheads and flat steel
roof.
There shall be an opening of sufficient size in the roof plating to allow the drill line to spool on
and off the drum without contact with the steel of the roof. The opening in the roof shall be
surrounded by heavy duty guard rails and fenced to a height sufficient to prevent personnel
contact with the drill line. The roof area shall incorporate heavy duty guard rails around its
perimeter.
In addition, a flush type access hatch shall be provided in the roof to facilitate the removal of
the drawworks motors.
The drawworks house bulkheads shall incorporate openings that shall serve as windows and
provide natural ventilation.

PAGE 67 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Lifting facilities shall be provided for the removal of the drawworks drum with a safe working
load capacity of 5.5 MT. A monorail shall be provided on the underside of Drawworks / and
C&K kill house roof to be able to bring equipment safely out from under the roof to the rig floor.
Foundations shall be provided on the roof of the drawworks house to accommodate the
drawworks blower motors, wireline unit, utility winch and drawworks brake cooling unit.

3.5.16 PAINT LOCKER

The BUILDER shall provide a Paint locker, the location of which shall be on the main deck
forward under the living quarters. The paint locker shall be designed for the safe storage of
paint and associated items. It shall be fixed to the deck and constructed from, corrugated or
framed steel. The size of the paint locker shall be approximately 8' x 5' (or equivalent area).
Paint locker access doors shall be self-closing, lockable, and gas-tight.
The paint locker shall be classified as a hazardous area in accordance with the contract area
classification drawings and shall be ventilated accordingly.
The paint locker shall incorporate four (4) heavy duty three (3) tier storage racks for the storage
of painting consumables including paint and paint thinner drums as per the paint supplier
recommendation. The shelves shall incorporate removable retaining bars across the front of
shelving to will prevent materials falling from the shelves due to hull movement.
The paint locker shall be provided with the following:
• A locker for small gear
• A sink with hot and cold water supply
• A service air supply for a paint mixing machine
• A paint mixing station
• Lighting and sockets
• In addition, the paint locker shall be provided with;
• A fire detection system tied into the VESSEL’S Fire and Gas system
• A fixed firefighting system
3.5.17 MUD PUMP ROOM
The BUILDER shall provide a mud pump room within the hull, located as per Contract Plans.
BUILDER shall fabricate and install a heavy-duty steel work bench complete with a 200 mm
heavy metal working vise and a pipe vice, a tool locker and racks for the storage of tools and
subs.
A flush type hatch shall be provided on main deck above the mud pump room with trolley
beams under the deck for easy removal of pump lines, mud pump motors and material
handling.
BUILDER shall provide two (2) mud pump lube oil tanks located in the mud pump room with
safe access to include any necessary access platforms. In addition, a suitable and sufficient
lube oil drainage system shall be provided to include, but not be limited to, an isolation valve
for each mud pump drain and piping to the dirty oil tank.
Mud pump room shall be so arranged so as to incorporate storage for mud pump spares, HP
and LP valves and other consumables associated with mud pump maintenance. The mud
pump room shall be outfitted with a washbasin with hot and cold water.

3.5.18 MUD ENGINEER’S LABORATORY

The BUILDER shall provide a mud laboratory on the mezzanine deck on the aft side adjacent
to the mud pit room. The mud lab to be provided with such ventilation required to make the
area non-hazardous in accordance with the CLASS and BUYER approved hazardous area
classification plans. The mud lab shall be furnished with all necessary mud testing equipment,

PAGE 68 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

a sink with hot and cold water supplies, electrical outlet sockets for the powering of portable
electrical equipment, fume cupboard and mud sample locker.

3.6 PIPING SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

The piping systems shall be in accordance with the BUYER approved Contract Plans, and as
required to meet the Classification Society and Regulatory Body, Industrial Standards or
Equipment Manufacture requirements and shall be designed, fabricated and installed fit for
purpose. The BUILDER shall verify the information shown on the BUYER approved Contract
Plans with the information provided by the selected manufacturer of the equipment concerned
and the Classification Society and Regulatory Body Requirements.
Piping systems, where Contract Plans are not available, shall be in accordance with the
BUYER approved BUILDER’s workmanship/construction standards, the Classification Society
and Regulatory Body requirements, Industrial Standards and equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations.
All valve handles shall easily be accessible without the use of ladders. If required, the
BUILDER will provide fixed safe access platform. Valve and valve handles will be protected
from being damaged at all times.

3.6.1 GENERAL
The BUILDER shall provide all the VESSEL piping systems. The piping systems shall be
designed, installed and tested in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Plans, the
Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS and the operating conditions
stipulated in Section 2.0.
The term ‘piping system’ includes all components used for the transportation of fluids and
gases, which use pipe, tubing, hose, pumps or compressors, valves, instrumentation and
fittings for the transportation of the media in question.
The BUILDER shall develop a detailed Piping Material Specification and Standard that shall
include, but not limited to, the following elements:
• Design conditions
• Piping Service
• Material specification
• Piping dimensions
• Piping Calculations
• Fittings
• Unions
• Bolts and Nuts
• Gaskets
• Valves
• Tubing
• Special components
• Installation practice
• Penetration details
• Piping support
• Insulations details
• Pressure testing (or reference to the governing procedure)
• Cleaning and Flushing (or reference to the governing procedure)

The piping information and Specifications provided throughout this PIPING SYSTEMS AND
COMPONENTS section of the CTS including, but not limited to, the specifications provided in

PAGE 69 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

tables 3.6.1, 3.6.2, and 3.6.3, shall be considered ‘guidance’ for the benefit of the BUILDER.
These main piping specification table should not be considered complete and shall be used
as baseline for the BUILDER provided Piping Material Specification, Pressure Testing and
Flushing requirements.
Where there are deviations between the BUILDER’s standard and BUYER specifications then
the project ‘substitution’ process shall be utilized to finalize the Project Piping Material
Specification for each deviation.
As part of the on-going weight saving initiative, where CLASS allows, the substitution of
materials in this specification with Glass Reinforced Epoxy (GRE), or other light weight
material, shall be considered. All substitutions shall be as agreed by the BUYER, without
exception.

3.6.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

When designing and installing piping systems considerations shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
Piping connections to equipment with the potential for vibration shall be provided with hoses,
expansion joints, or rubber bellows etc. to prevent those vibrations from being transmitted to
the pipework.
The use of fabricated fittings shall not normally be permitted. In a case where the alternative
is not considered reasonably practicable then BUYER approval shall be required.
In general, all continuous duty pumps shall be sized for the lowest possible speed to achieve
the necessary design performance.
The size and arrangement of suction-side piping shall be designed to the avoid pump
cavitation.
So far as is reasonably practicable, valves within a system, or like systems, shall be from the
same manufacturer.
Use of Bronze or Bronze trim valves or other components is prohibited for the Fuel Oil system.
Excessive stresses in piping and bolting due to expansion shall be avoided by the use of
approved stress relieving features and techniques to include, but not be limited to, expansion
joints, expansion bends, hoses and bellows.
BUILDER shall provide pipe stress analyses to the BUYER for systems including, but not
necessarily limited to Engine exhaust, HP Mud, Cement, Choke and Kill lines.
For open ended pipework suitable orifice plates shall be incorporated to provide the necessary
pump back pressures. Orifice plate specifications shall be included in P&IDs and shall be
readily identifiable via permanent marking on the handle, and without the need for removal.
Pressure gauges shall be provided to inlet and outlet of all pump and strainers for the purpose
of differential pressure identification. All gauges shall be liquid filled, stainless steel, of either
3 inch or 4 inch face, dependent upon service. Gauges shall be mounted on panels and shall
have block & bleed isolating valves to facilitate removal
Temperature and pressure gauges shall be provided in all cooling water piping systems at
both the inlet and outlet of the equipment. Temperature probes shall be installed in pockets
and not directly into the pipework to allow removal without the need for isolation.
All gauges shall have dual scales reading PSI and BARG for pressure and Celsius and
Fahrenheit for temperature.
Pressure Relief/Safety valves shall not vent directly to atmosphere they shall be piped to a
suitable safe discharge location dependent upon service and location.
Piping connections to equipment shall incorporate removable spool pieces, where necessary,
to allow equipment maintenance, dismantling and/or removal.

PAGE 70 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Drain plugs or sockets shall be fitted at the low points in piping systems to facilitate draining
and high point vents shall be provided where necessary.
Eccentric reducers shall be used at all pump suctions unless otherwise specified.
Vortex breakers shall be installed in Preload/Ballast tanks suction and filling piping.
So far as is reasonably practicable piping shall be of standard bore size. Where equipment is
supplied with non-standard connections then suitable reducers shall be provided immediately
adjacent to the equipment.

3.6.3 MAIN SYSTEM PIPING SPECIFICATION & SCHEDULES

The main piping system materials and specifications shall meet the minimum requirements
provided in below Table 3.6.1 Main Piping Specifications:

TABLE 3.6.1 Main Piping Specifications

Design
System Pipe Material Fittings Material Flanges Valves Remarks
Press.

Bilge / Tank
Stripping
Ballast / Raw
Water

Preload

Leg Jetting (Low

Press. In Hull)

Brine

Deck Drain

Drill Water
CS, BW, ASTM CS Weld Neck RF /
BF1, BF2,
Fresh Water A234 Gr. WPB, FF, ASTM A105N
GA1, GA2,
Cooling ASTM B16.9 150#, ASME B16.5
CS, SMLS Pipe BA1, BA2,
ASTM A106 Gr. BA3,
Engine Cooling ≤ 150 PSI
B, GL1, GL2,
ASME B36.10 GL3, GL4,
Brake Cooling CS, SW, CS Slip On RF / FF
CH1, CH2,
ASTM A105N, ASTM A105N, 150#
CH3, CH4
Crankcase ASME B16.11 ASME B16.5
Breather
Tank Vent &
Sounding

Compressed Air

Bulk Air

Engine Exhaust

Low Press Mud

Black & Grey

(Outside Accom.)

GA3, BA4, FO all Valve

Fuel Oil CS, BW, ASTM CS Weld Neck RF /
CS, SMLS Pipe GL3, GL4, to be
A234, Gr. WPB, FF, ASTM A105N flanged.
ASTM A106 Gr. CH1,
Lube Oil ASTM B16.9 150#, ASME B16.5 ≤ 150 PSI
B,
ASME B36.10
Dirty Oil CS, SW, CS Slip On RF / FF

PAGE 71 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

TABLE 3.6.1 Main Piping Specifications

Design
System Pipe Material Fittings Material Flanges Valves Remarks
Press.
ASTM A105N, ASTM A105N, 150# FO Bronze
ASME B16.11 ASME B16.5 BF1, BF2 material not
acceptable

Base Oil Butterfly

valve only
applicable for
Base Oil
System
Leg Jetting (Leg, CS, SMLS Pipe, CS, BW, ASTM CS Weld Neck RF /
≤ 1,500
Spudcan and FM ASTM A106 Gr. A234, Gr. WPB, RTJ, ASTM A105N, GA4, BA8 ABS Class I
PSI
Mud Pump) B, ASME B36.10 ASTM B16.9 900#, ASME B16.5
ABS Class I
CS, SMLS Pipe, CS, BW, ASTM CS Weld Neck RF /
≤ 1,500 Nace MR-01-
Well Test ASTM A106 Gr. A234, Gr. WPB, RTJ, ASTM A105N, GA4, BA8
PSI 75 H2S Sour
B, ASME B36.10 ASTM B16.9 900#, ASME B16.5
Gas Serv.

Fire Water

Foam Fire BF3, BF4,

CS, BW, ASTM CS Weld Neck RF /
Fighting GA1, GA2,
A234, Gr. WPB, FF, ASTM A105N
CS, SMLS Pipe BA1, BA2, All valves to
ASTM B16.9 150#, ASME B16.5
ASTM A106 Gr. BA3, GL1,
Deluge ≤ 150 PSI be with Fire
B, GL2, GL3, Safe
CS, SW, CS Slip On RF / FF
ASME B36.10 GL4, CH1, Certificate
ASTM A105N, ASTM A105N, 150#
CH2, CH3,
ASME B16.11 ASME B16.5
Sprinkler CH4
(Outside Acc.)

Tank Stripping

Ballast / Raw
Water
BF1, BF2,
Preload GA1, GA2,
BA1, BA2,
GRE Pipe
GRE Flange FF BA3, ABS
Brine Bonstrand or GRE Fitting ≤ 150 PSI
150# ASME B16.5 GL1, GL2, Approved
Similar
GL3, GL4,
Deck Drain CH1, CH2,
CH3, CH4
Tank Vent

Drill Water

SS, BW, ASTM

Potable Water, A403 Gr.
(Hot & Cold) SS SMLS Pipe, WP316L, ≥ 2- BF5,
SS, Slip On, RF/FF, GA2, GA5,
ASTM A312 TP 1/2"
ASTM A182 Gr. ≤ 150 PSI GA6,
316L,
Potable Water SS, SW, ASTM F316L, B16.5 150# BA2, BA3,
ASME B36.19
Tank Vent & A182 Gr. F316L, BA5,
Sounding B16.11 ≤ 2" GL2, GL5,
GL6,
Potable Water
CPVC, Solvent CPVC Flange FF, CH5, CH6 ABS
(Hot/Cold Inside CPVC Pipe ≤ 150 PSI
type 150# ASME B16.5 Approved
Accommodation),

Black & Grey PVC and/or PVC and/or UPVC,

PVC and/or ABS
(Inside UPVC, Solvent Flange FF, 150# ≤ 150 PSI BA3
UPVC Pipe Approved
Accommodation) type ASME B16.5

SS Tube, ASTM SS Comp. Type,

Control Air ≤ 150 PSI
A269, TP 316 ASTM, TP 316

PAGE 72 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

TABLE 3.6.1 Main Piping Specifications

Design
System Pipe Material Fittings Material Flanges Valves Remarks
Press.
SS, BW, ASTM
A403 Gr.
WP316L, ≥ 2-
SS SMLS Pipe, SS, Weld Neck,
1/2"
ASTM A312 TP RF/FF, ASTM A182 As per As per
316. Gr. F316L, B16.5 OEM OEM
Breathing Air SS, SW, ASTM ABS Class I
2500# Recomme Recomme
A182 Gr. F316L
SS Tube, ASTM ndation ndation
, B16.11 ≤ 2"
A269, TP 316
SS Comp. Type,
ASTM, TP 316
SS, BW, ASTM
Drill floor A403 Gr.
Hydraulic WP316L, ≥ 2- SAE Code 61, SS
SS SMLS Pipe,
1/2" 316, C/W Screw and
ASTM A312 TP
O-ring
316 SS, SW, ASTM
BOP Control, ≥ 3,000 BA6, BA7,
A182 Gr. F316L ABS Class I
Diverter, SAE Code 62, SS PSI
SS Tube, ASTM , B16.11 ≤ 2" 316, C/W Screw and
A269, TP 316
O-ring, Non Split type.
Tensioning SS Comp. Type,
Hydraulic ASTM, TP 316
5D Long Sweep
Bulk Mud Bends
CS, SMLS Pipe, CS Slip On RF / FF,
ASTM A106 Gr. ASTM A105N, 150#. BF1, BF2
Deltas and Y full ≤ 150 PSI
B, ASME B36.10 ASME B16.5
Bulk Cement flow long seep
type
ABS Class I
Alloy St., SMLS API
Alloy St., BW Alloy St., BW Weld
High Pressure Tubing, SR, ≤ 7,500 Monogram.
Long Sweep Full Neck, RTJ, AISI 4130, GA7
Mud ASTM 519 Gr. PSI Nace MR-01-
flow, AISI 4130 API 6A, 10000PSI
4130. 75 H2S Sour
Gas Service.
ABS Class I
Alloy St., SMLS API
Alloy St., BW Alloy St., BW Weld
High Pressure Tubing, SR, ≤ 10,000 monogram.
Target Block, Neck, RTJ, AISI 4130, PL1, CH7
Cement ASTM 519 Gr. PSI Nace MR-01-
AISI 4130 API 6A, 15000PSI
4130. 75 H2S Sour
Gas Service.
ABS Class I
Alloy St., SMLS Alloy St., API
Alloy St., BW Weld
Tubing, SR, Flanged, ≤ 10,000 monogram.
Choke & Kill Neck, RTJ, AISI 4130, GA8
ASTM 519 Gr. Studded Block PSI Nace MR-01-
API 6A, 15000PSI
4130. AISI 4130 75 H2S Sour
Gas Service.
ABS Class I
Alloy St., SMLS Alloy St., API
Emergency Kill Alloy St., BW Weld
Tubing, SR, Flanged, ≤ 10,000 monogram.
from Cement Neck, RTJ, AISI 4130, GA8
ASTM 519 Gr. Studded Block PSI Nace MR-01-
Unit API 6A, 15000PSI
4130. AISI 4130 75 H2S Sour
Gas Service.
Alloy St., BW ABS Class I
Alloy St., SMLS Target Block, API
Choke & Kill Alloy St., BW Weld
Tubing, SR, AISI 4130, Alloy ≤ 5,000 monogram.
(Downstream of Neck, RTJ, AISI 4130, GA9
ASTM 519 Gr. St., Flanged, PSI Nace MR-01-
Buffer chamber) API 6A, 10000PSI
4130. Studded Block 75 H2S Sour
AISI 4130 Gas Service.

The main valve materials and specifications provided shall meet the minimum requirements
provided in below 3.6.2 Main Valve Specifications.

PAGE 73 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

TABLE 3.6.2 Main Valve Specifications

VALVE
TYPE STANDARD BODY & TRIM Remark
Ref

Body-Ductile Iron ASTM

Viton seat for HT
Butterfly Wafer or Lug Type, Gear A395,
service, Such as
BF1 Valve Operated, ANSI B16.5, Disc-Al-Bronze, Stem- SS
LPM, Engine
DN ≥ 8" 150#, Cartridge Style 316,
Cooling
Seat-Buna N or Viton,
Body-Ductile Iron ASTM
Wafer or Lug Type, Lever Viton seat for HT
Butterfly A395,
Operated, ANSI B16.5, service, Such as
BF2 Valve Disc-Al-Bronze, Stem- SS
150#, LPM, Engine
DN ≤ 6" 316,
Cartridge Style cooling
Seat-Buna N or Viton,
Body-Ductile Iron ASTM
Butterfly Wafer or Lug Type, Gear
A395, ABS Approved
BF3 Valve Operated, ANSI B16.5,
Disc-Al-Bronze, Stem- SS Fire Safe Cert.
DN ≥ 8" 150#,
316,
Body-Ductile Iron ASTM
Butterfly Wafer or Lug Type, Lever
A395, ABS Approved
BF4 Valve Operated, ANSI B16.5,
Disc-Al-Bronze, Stem- SS Fire Safe Cert.
DN ≤ 6" 150#,
316,
Butterfly Wafer or Lug Type, Lever
Body-SS, Disc-Al-Bronze, CS component
BF5 Valve Operated, ANSI B16.5,
Stem- SS 316, not acceptable
DN ≤ 6" 150#,
Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Handwheel Operated,
Gate Valve WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
GA1 Bolted Bonnet, Rising
DN ≥ 2½" 316, Graphite Non-Asbestos
Stem, Flanged RF 150#
Packing
Body- Bronze ASTM B-62,
Handwheel Operated,
Gate Valve Trim- Bronze,
GA2 Rising Stem,
DN ≤ 2" Graphite Non-Asbestos
Screwed NPT, 300#
Packing
Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Handwheel Operated,
WCB, Trim- SS 316,
GA3 Gate Valve Bolted Bonnet, Rising
Graphite Non-Asbestos
Stem, Flanged RF 150#
Packing
Handwheel Operated, Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Gate Valve
GA4 Bolted Bonnet, Rising WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
DN ≥ 2"
Stem, Flanged RF 900# 316,
Handwheel Operated, Body-SS ASTM A351,
Gate Valve
GA5 Bolted Bonnet, Rising Trim- SS 316, Graphite Non-
DN ≥ 2½"
Stem, Flanged RF 150# Asbestos Packing
Handwheel Operated,
Gate Valve Body- SS ASTM A182 Gr.
GA6 Rising Stem, Screwed or
DN ≤ 2" F316L, Trim- SS 316,
SW, 300#
API Monogram.
Mud Gate Handwheel Operated, API Body- Alloy Steel AISI Gr.
Nace MR-01-75
GA7 Valve 6A Flanged RTJ 10000# 4130,
H2S Sour Gas
2" ~ 6" (7500 PSI) Ring Grooved SS Inlay
Service.
API Monogram.
Handwheel Operated, API Body- Alloy Steel AISI Gr.
Nace MR-01-75
GA8 Gate Valve 6A Flanged RTJ, 15000 4130,
H2S Sour Gas
psi Ring Grooved SS Inlay
Service.
API Monogram.
Handwheel Operated, API Body- Alloy Steel AISI Gr.
Nace MR-01-75
GA8 Gate Valve 6A Flanged RTJ, 4130,
H2S Sour Gas
5,000 psi Ring Grooved SS Inlay
Service

PAGE 74 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

TABLE 3.6.2 Main Valve Specifications

VALVE
TYPE STANDARD BODY & TRIM Remark
Ref

Handwheel / Lever Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.

Ball Valve
BA1 Operated, Full port, WCB, Trim- SS 316 or
DN ≥ 2"
Flanged RF 150# Bronze,
Body- Bronze ASTM B-62,
Ball Valve Lever Operated, Full port,
BA2 Trim- Bronze or Brass or SS
DN ≤ 1½" Screwed. NPT, 300#
316,
Body-SS
Ball Valve Lever Operated, Full port,
BA3 Trim- Bronze or Brass or SS
DN ≤ 1½" Screwed. NPT, 300#
316,
Handwheel / Lever
Body-CS
BA4 Ball Valve Operated, Full port,
Trim- SS 316,
Flanged RF 150#
Handwheel / Lever
Ball Valve Body-SS ASTM A351,
BA5 Operated, Full port,
DN ≥ 2½" Trim- SS 316,
Flanged RF 150#
Lever Operated, Full port, Body-SS ASTM A351 Gr.
Ball Valve
BA6 Flanged RF 1500# (3000 F316,
DN ≥ 2"
PSI) Trim- SS 316,
Lever Operated, Full port, Body-SS ASTM A351 Gr.
Ball Valve
BA7 Screwed. or SW (3000 F316,
DN ≥ 1½"
PSI) Trim- SS 316,
Handwheel / Lever
Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Ball Valve Operated,
BA8 WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
DN ≥ 2" Full Port, Flanged RF
316,
900#
Straight or Angle Pattern, Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Globe Valve Handwheel Operated, WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
GL1
DN ≥ 2½" Bolted Bonnet, Rising 316, Graphite Non-Asbestos
Stem, Flanged RF 150# Packing
Straight or Angle Pattern, Body- Bronze ASTM B-62,
Globe Valve Handwheel Operated, Trim- Bronze,
GL2
DN ≤ 2" Bolted Bonnet, Rising Graphite Non-Asbestos
Stem, Screwed NPT 300# Packing
Straight or Angle Pattern, Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Handwheel Operated, WCB, Trim- SS 316,
GL3 Globe Valve
Bolted Bonnet, Rising Graphite Non-Asbestos
Stem, Flanged RF 150# Packing
Stop Check Valve, Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Straight or Angle Pattern, WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
Globe Valve
GL4 Handwheel Operated, 316,
DN ≥ 2½"
Bolted Bonnet, Rising Graphite Non-Asbestos
Stem, Flanged RF 150# Packing
Straight or Angle Pattern,
Body-SS ASTM A351,
Globe Valve Handwheel Operated,
GL5 Trim- SS 316, Graphite Non-
DN ≥ 2½" Bolted Bonnet, Rising
Asbestos Packing
Stem, Flanged RF 150#
Straight or Angle Pattern,
Globe Valve Handwheel Operated, Body- SS ASTM A182 Gr.
GL6
DN ≤ 2" Bolted Bonnet, Rising F316L, Trim- SS 316,
Stem, Screwed NPT 300#

PAGE 75 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

TABLE 3.6.2 Main Valve Specifications

VALVE
TYPE STANDARD BODY & TRIM Remark
Ref

Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.

Check Valve Swing Type, Flanged RF
CH1 WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
DN ≥ 2½" 150#
316,
Check Valve Swing Type, Screwed. Body- Bronze ASTM B-62,
CH2
DN ≤ 2" NPT 300# Trim- Bronze,
Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Check Valve Wafer Swing Type, RF
CH3 WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
DN ≥ 2½" 150#
316
Body- CS ASTM A216 Gr.
Check Valve Wafer Duel Plate Type, WCB, Trim- Bronze or SS
CH4
DN ≥ 2½" RF 150# 316,
SS 316 spring
Check Valve Swing Type, Flanged RF Body-SS ASTM A351,
CH5
DN ≥ 2½" 150# Trim- SS 316,

Check Valve Swing Type, Screwed. Body- SS ASTM A182 Gr.

CH6
DN ≤ 2" NPT 300# F316L, Trim- SS 316,
API Monogram.
API 6A Flanged RTJ, Body- Alloy Steel AISI Gr. Nace MR-01-75
CH7 Check Valve
15000 psi 4130, H2S Sour Gas
Serv.
API Monogram.
Handwheel Operated,
Body- Alloy Steel AISI Gr. Nace MR-01-75
PL1 Plug Valve Hammer union 2202 ends,
4130, H2S Sour Gas
15000 psi
Serv.

3.6.4 PIPE THICKNESS STANDARD

Pipe wall thickness for all piping systems shall be determined by class approved calculation.
The calculation shall consider the most severe condition of coincident pressure’ temperature
and service of the system and include a corrosion allowance suitable to the service life of the
VESSEL. All pipe specification calculations shall be included in the BUILDER Piping Material
Specification.
No pipe diameter smaller than ½" shall be used, with the exception of instrument tubing and
the minimum wall thickness of all carbon steel piping of 2” and below shall be a minimum of
Schedule 80.

3.6.5 PIPE THREAD AND FITTING STANDARDS

All Piping Thread and Fitting standards shall be subject to BUYER’s approval and shall be
kept consistent with the CTS requirements. All fitting and thread standards shall be consistent
throughout a system and shall be as per OEM recommendation. Proper and industry standard
leak prevention shall be provided for screwed fittings and threads. No welding of threaded
connections shall be permitted. No temporary leak protection shall be permitted for testing or
inspection purposes.

3.6.6 PIPING INSTALLATION AND JOINING

Joints in all piping systems shall be predominantly welded with a minimum weld to weld
distance of 4”.

PAGE 76 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Flanged joints and valves shall be used for all connections to equipment where the service
dictates.
Threaded joints shall only be used in low risk services that shall specifically 'exclude' corrosive,
erosive, flammable and/or toxic services.
Compression type union joints shall be used for stainless steel tubing for instruments. All
tubing, fittings, and components within a system, or like systems, shall be from the same
manufacturer.
Where galvanized piping is specified, the pipes shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication
of flanges, weld-o-lets, etc., but screwed flanges or joints, which may be attached after
galvanizing shall have pipe thread preservation applied. Only minor damage to the galvanizing
with zinc rich paint shall be acceptable. Significant coating damage will require replacement.
The jointing of Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) piping
systems shall be by 'permanent solvent cement welding' so as to chemically fuse pipe and
fittings.

3.6.7 INSULATION OF PIPING AND SWEAT PROTECTION

All Insulation materials shall be of marine type, meet CLASS and Regulatory requirements,
certified for the intended service.
Hot water piping shall be insulated with closed cell elastomer nitrile rubber (Armaflex or equal).
Suitable anti-sweat type insulation shall be applied as required to prevent the formation of
condensation and subsequent 'dripping onto equipment'.
All insulation materials shall remain firmly secured during service but shall also be readily
removable for maintenance, inspection and repair, and for reinstatement thereafter. Cladding
of insulation shall not present a risk to personnel due to sharp edges or protrusions.
Insulation for HVAC is accounted for separately in section 3.17 Heating, Ventilation and Air-
Conditioning (HVAC) Systems.

3.6.8 ROUTING AND ACCESS TO VALVES AND PUMPS

Safe access shall be provided to all valves and pumps for operation, inspection, maintenance,
removal and reinstatement, consistent with the frequency of the requirement.
Piping shall be routed in the most efficient manner possible and shall avoid undue stress on
pipe through the use of proper pipe supports, expansion joints and bends.
Pipework, so far as is reasonably practicable, shall not be routed below soft patches and/or
openings provided for equipment removal and replacement and in any case sufficiently distant
from access hatches to avoid mechanical damage when the hatches are in use for material
handling purposes.
Lines in machinery spaces shall so far as is reasonably practicable be run side by side at the
same elevation with common pipe supports at the bottom of pipe. A clear height from the deck
surface to the bottom of pipes and/or pipe support structure shall be a minimum of 2.2 meters.
Hot lines (Exhaust lines) shall be grouped and expansion loops shall be nested together. The
number of expansion loops shall be kept to a minimum.
No piping shall be routed directly over electrical switchboards or 'at risk' electrical equipment,
or pass though refrigerated spaces or pot water tanks.
Pumps shall have flexible connections, at suction and discharge and only fire rated flexible
connections shall be used for Fire, Foam, Deluge, Diesel and Base Oil pumps.
Services other than Fuel Oil and Brine shall be avoided in Fuel Oil and Brine tanks
respectively. In unavoidable circumstances where non-compatible services are to be routed

PAGE 77 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

through either the Fuel Oil or Brine tanks then the pipe schedule shall be increased in
accordance with the Project Piping Material Specification.

3.6.9 PIPE SUPPORTS AND PIPE CLAMPS

Piping systems shall be suitably and sufficiently supported. In determining suitability and
sufficiency considerations shall include, but not be limited to the following features:
• Anti-fluid shock, Water Hammer and Pulsation arrangements
• Pipework support shall incorporate anti vibration features so as to prevent vibration
and pipework ‘noise’ being transferred to the structure
• Pipe supports for non-ferrous and non-metallic pipes shall be lined with sliding pad of
copper, brass, plastic, Teflon so as not to directly contact with pipes
• Supports designed (horizontal or vertical type) with ‘U’ Bolts shall be designed as such
that the entire piping load is on the support member and none on the ‘U’ bolt.
• The special hangers and supports shall be used for the high pressure and high
temperature piping to prevent excessive stresses in piping.
• All high-pressure systems such as hydraulics, mud, cement, choke & kill, jetting and
well test support clamps are to be (4) bolt design clamps, Stauff clamps, or equal
• All angle welded to deck or bulkhead plates shall be provided with doubler plates.
• All support members welded to deck or bulkhead shall be provided with doubler plates
and backing stiffeners.
3.6.10 BULKHEAD AND DECK PENETRATIONS
All deck and bulkhead penetrations shall be as per Section 1 of the CTS and shall include but
not be limited to two half doublers fitted around the pipe on each side of the deck or bulkhead.
The pipe shall be fitted with a welded sleeve long enough to pass through the penetration and
which shall be the basis for the penetration welding of the pipe.

3.6.11 VALVES AND VALVE OPERATION

So far as is reasonably practicable valves shall be positioned in pipe runs so as to be easily
accessible and to allow safe operation and maintenance, including replacement.
Where valves are placed under deck plates or grating, the deck plating or deck grating shall
be modified to allow access either by cut outs, or hinged access covers.
All isolation valves, manual or actuated, shall be provided with open/closed position indication.
The extent of manual versus actuated valve provision within the VESSEL piping systems, and
the motive force for the operation of actuated valves i.e. electric, pneumatic, or hydraulic shall
be in accordance with the Contract Plans.
All actuated valves shall be capable of local and remote powered operation, as well as manual
operation by attached hand wheel, lever, or other, as appropriate.
Each hull seawater inlet and discharge below the 'load line' shall be provided with a valve
operable from an accessible position. Piping outboard of these sea valves must be equal to
or greater in thickness than the VESSEL side shell.
Extensions/Reach rods shall be provided where necessary for the operation of valves from
grating platforms, decks and walkways, or where manual operation from another compartment
is required.
Where butterfly valves are used to isolate pumps or other components of a piping system they
shall be ‘lug type’ to allow the component to be isolated with the valve ‘in situ’ and the piping
removed to avoid unnecessary system shutdowns.
Butterfly valves of 8" or larger shall have mechanical gearbox operators.

PAGE 78 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.6.12 OPERATION, AUTOMATION AND SENSOR CONTROL

The automation and sensor controlled piping systems and other components (such as motors,
pumps and valves) shall be installed as per IMCS and to a standard approved by BUYER and
as required. The design shall provide for system monitoring and sensor controlled capability
as per IMCS, and further outlined in the CTS, however only limited automation and remote
operation will be required. BUILDER shall, so far as is reasonably practicable, make provision
for retrofit options with regard to automation and remote operation to the installed systems.

3.6.13 TUBING AND TUBING INSTALLATION

All tubing is to be properly, bundled, aligned as necessary, and secured to adequate supports
with clamps appropriate to the system. All tubing is to be installed to avoid distortion and
vibration from the operation of the system or nearby equipment. As required due to material
or mechanical handling, all tubing is to be adequately protected against mechanical damage.
• Pneumatic tubing is to be properly secured to angle iron supports with Stauff clamp.
• Hydraulic control piping and tubing is to be properly secured using weld mounted dual
line stacked polyurethane clamps. All hardware (bolts and plates) are to be stainless
steel.
• Cold and hot potable water and HVAC copper tubing is to be properly secured to angle
iron supports with individual rubber cushioned SS straps.
• Hydraulic control tubing is to be properly secured using weld mounted dual line stacked
polyurethane clamps. All hardware (bolts and plates) are to be stainless steel.
• Cold and hot potable water copper tubing is to be properly secured to angle iron
supports with individual rubber cushioned SS straps.
All fittings shall be accessible and provide good access for maintenance and testing.

3.6.14 HOSES, FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS

BUILDER shall install any other hoses required for the effective operation of a system or piece
of machinery, which has not been specifically stated. These hoses shall be suitable for the
service intended and shall be provided with valid certification required as per Specification. All
hydraulic hoses shall be high temperature specification.
The BUILDER shall develop a detailed Hose register that shall include, but not limited to, the
following elements:
• Hose tag number
• Service
• Dimensions
• End connections and fittings
• Unions
• Manufacturer
• Date of manufacture
• Manufacturer reorder number
• Test pressure
• Burst pressure
• Certificate of conformity
• Electrical continuity test certificate
• Last inspection and/or test date
• Next inspection and/or test date

PAGE 79 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.6.15 PIPING CLEANING AND FLUSHING

The BUILDER shall provide a Pressure Testing and Flushing procedure to cover all VESSEL
piping systems. The procedures shall be either standalone or incorporated in the project
Piping Material Specification as agreed with BUYER.
All piping, piping appurtenances, and applicable equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned after
fabrication and prior to installation on the VESSEL.
Following the installation of piping on the VESSEL, the system shall be thoroughly cleaned,
pickled, and as necessary and flushed with an appropriate medium as per the original
equipment manufacturer and/or as specified in the Table 3.6.3 below, MAIN PIPING
CLEANING AND FLUSHING CRITERIA.
All flushing shall be in accordance with the National Aerospace Standard (NAS) or ISO
equivalent. System cleanliness shall, as the minimum, be to the requirement of the most
demanding component with the system.
During initial flushing, the BUILDER shall provide temporary piping or hose to bypass heat
exchangers, control valves, pumps, cylinders, accumulators, relief / regulating valve and other
machinery susceptible to damage from contaminated flushing medium. For subsequent
flushing the BUILDER shall provide suitable temporary cone type strainers on all such
equipment.
The flushing procedure shall include, but not be limited to:
• System
• System components to be removed
• System components to be bypassed
• Cleanliness Standard to be used
• Flushing medium
• Flushing flow rate
• Flushing fluid temperature
• Flushing duration
• Cleanliness Level to be achieved
• Preservation
In addition to flushing the Potable Water system shall be sterilized and confirmed by sampling
that the required standard of cleanliness and sterility has been achieved.

Table 3.6.3 MAIN PIPING CLEANING AND FLUSHING CRITERIA

Press. Flushing / Chemical

Hot Oil
System Test Press. Test Blow Down Cleaning / Remarks
Flushing
Medium Medium Pickling
Bilge / Tank
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Stripping

Ballast / Raw Water 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Preload 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Leg Jetting (Low

1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Press. In Hull)

Brine 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Deck Drain Flood Test Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Fire Water 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

PAGE 80 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Table 3.6.3 MAIN PIPING CLEANING AND FLUSHING CRITERIA

Press. Flushing / Chemical

Hot Oil
System Test Press. Test Blow Down Cleaning / Remarks
Flushing
Medium Medium Pickling

Foam Fire Fighting 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Deluge 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Sprinkler (Outside
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Acc.)

Drill Water 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Fresh Water
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. YES
Cooling

Engine Cooling 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. YES

Brake Cooling 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. YES

Fuel Oil 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. YES YES(2)

Lube Oil 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. YES YES(2)

Crankcase
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Air Air
Breather

Dirty Oil Flood Test Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Base Oil 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Tank Vent &

1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Sounding

Compressed Air 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Air

Bulk Air 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Air

Engine Exhaust 0.5 PSI Air Air

Low Press Mud 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Leg Jetting (Leg,

Spudcan and FM 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Mud Pump)

Well Test 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Potable Water, (Hot

1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. Notes 5
& Cold)
Potable Water Tank
Vent 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. Notes 5
& Sounding
Potable Water
(Hot/Cold Inside 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1)(3) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt. Notes 5
Accommodation),
Black & Grey BWT- 1.5 x Syst.
(Inside WP.(1)(3) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Accommodation.) GWT-Flood Test(3)

Control Air 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Air Air (Nitrogen)

Breathing Air 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Air (Nitrogen) Air (Nitrogen)

Drill floor Hydraulic 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Hydraulic Oil Hydraulic Oil YES YES(4)

PAGE 81 OF 358
S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Table 3.6.3 MAIN PIPING CLEANING AND FLUSHING CRITERIA

Press. Flushing / Chemical

Hot Oil
System Test Press. Test Blow Down Cleaning / Remarks
Flushing
Medium Medium Pickling
BOP Control,
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Hydraulic Oil Hydraulic Oil YES YES(4)
Diverter,
Tensioning
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Hydraulic Oil Hydraulic Oil YES YES(4)
Hydraulic

Bulk Mud 1.2 x Syst. WP. Air Air

Bulk Cement 1.2 x Syst. WP. Air Air

High Pressure Mud 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

High Pressure
1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Cement

Choke & Kill 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Choke & Kill

(Downstream of 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.
Buffer chamber)

Diverter Overboard 1.5 x Syst. WP.(1) Fresh Wt. Fresh Wt.

Notes:
1. Test pressure to be 1.5 times the system working pressure or the pump closed head
pressure, whichever is greater
2. Hot oil flushing is required for only fuel oil and lube oil supply and return piping to Main
Engine, Emergency engine, other end users as agreed with Buyer
3. Pressure Testing for these systems shall be for a minimum of 24 hours
4. Hot oil Flushing to be NAS 6 or as recommended by equipment manufacturer
5. System shall be sterilized using HADEX or equivalent sterilization procedure as agreed
with buyer

PAGE 82 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.7 GENERAL SPECIFICATION ON HULL ACCESS

Safe access shall be provided to all areas and compartments of the VESSEL, and to all
equipment, systems, and system components within them for the purpose of inspection,
operation, maintenance and removal. The means of access provided shall be appropriate to
the frequency of the access requirement.
All such access is detailed in subsections of this document and shall, as a minimum, comply
with the requirements of CLASS, regulatory bodies, and the Codes and Standards contained
within Section 1.0 of this CTS.
In order to facilitate the installation of major equipment, its removal at a later date, or for
maintenance requirements, the location of all necessary soft patch areas shall be identified
and agreed with the BUYER. Consideration shall be given to limiting the amount of destruct
required to achieve the removal of Major Equipment including, but not be limited to, installed
equipment, grating, piping, HVAC ducting, cable and cable trays. The BUYER shall provide
a plan detailing the means of access and the methodology for the removal of all Major
Equipment.
The BUILDER design shall also consider the need for operation, inspection, maintenance or
removal of equipment 'other than the major equipment'.
In this document access shall include but not be limited to the following:
• Doors
• Hatches
• Manholes and Manways
• Staircases and Companionways
• Platforms
• Walkways and Grating
• Ladders
• Escape Routes
• Bulwarks and Guardrails
3.7.1 DOORS
All doors using dogs shall be provided with a central lever or wheel which controls all dogs
simultaneously.
There shall be a locking device for locking the doors in open position. Preferably at 180°,
where practicable and where possible using the central lever for securing the door.
The BUILDER shall install watersheds over all external doors to minimize water dripping from
the top of the door.
Tops of doors shall be not less than 2.1 m above top of finished deck or step. Doors shall be
as shown on the Contract Plans and generally the door for public areas shall be 750mm
minimum width, except for toilet doors that may be 650mm wide.
All doors shall be the same structural fire protection classification as the bulkheads in which
they are installed.

3.7.1.1 WATERTIGHT DOORS

All watertight doors shall be provided in accordance with CLASS requirements. Manually
operated watertight doors, where required, shall be of offshore type, constructed of steel, with
a minimum of two (2) hinges and a minimum of six (6) dogs and a rubber gasket. The hinges
and dogs shall be fitted with bronze bushings, grease fittings and stainless-steel pins. All WT
doors on the main deck shall be fitted with a suitable and sufficient locking arrangement
compatible with the use of a padlock. WT doors shall open out into the weather.

PAGE 83 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All WT doors shall be equipped with position sensors, which shall be connected to an alarm
system, showing personnel both locally and at manned locations through IMMS panel,
whether the doors are open or closed.
Watertight doors shall have a minimum 900 mm wide clear opening, except where they are
required to be minimum 750 mm wide due to space and weight constraints.
Access doors will be provided as shown on the arrangement drawings.

3.7.1.2 WEATHER TIGHT DOORS

Weather tight doors, where required, shall be similar to watertight doors, except for the number
of dogs. The joiner type weather tight fire rated doors shall be used for LQ externals,
emergency generator room, emergency switchboard room, deck stores and welding
workshop, etc. The doors shall be of offshore type, constructed of steel, and designed to pass
the hose tests required for the bulkhead location.

3.7.1.3 WIRE MESH DOORS

Hinged expanded metal doors shall consist of galvanized painted metal angle frames with
diagonal bracing, covered with galvanized rolled 2.5 mm expanded metal of 12.5 mm mesh.
Doors shall have three (3) heavy-duty hinges. All attachment points and areas requiring the
installation of additional parts, including, but not limited to, latches, locks and handles, shall
be suitably reinforced.

3.7.1.4 GAS-TIGHT DOORS

Gas-tight, self-closing doors shall be furnished and installed in the bulkheads separating
hazardous areas (such as paint store) from surrounding non-hazardous spaces, if applicable.
The doors shall be similar to the non-tight doors and with soft rubber gaskets, installed in the
groove or recess in the doorframe and sill. The doors shall be a minimum of 40 mm thick,
insulation filled, reinforced for three (3) pairs of butts. The steel material shall be 0.8 mm
minimum.

3.7.1.5 JOINER DOORS

Joiner doors shall be hollow metal joiner doors, of minimum 0.80 mm plate steel construction,
offering good resistance to distortion in any direction. Corners and edges shall be sealed.
This type of doors shall be furnished and installed for warehouse access, storerooms, etc,
including in the accommodation and control spaces. Joiner doors in accommodation, where
indicated on drawings, shall have a reinforced observation window

3.7.2 HATCHES
Builder shall furnish deck hatches as shown on the BUYER approved arrangement drawings.
Hatch access shall be provided free of obstructing pipes, cables, ventilation ducts etc. The
hatches shall be equipped with hinged or bolted steel WT covers. The bolted WT cover shall
have rubber gaskets and shall be secured with stainless steel bolts, inserted from the main
deck. The hatches shall be either raised or flush, and in compliance with all CLASS and
Regulatory Body requirements for height and scantlings. Lifting provisions such as welded
pad eyes shall be installed on the hatch cover to allow the crane to lift the hatch. A flanged
drain system shall be provided for the hatch recesses with two (2) drain holes per hatch,
positioned in two corners, diagonally opposite of each other.
All pad eyes that are installed must comply with the applicable Regulatory Body requirements
and shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.

PAGE 84 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Soft patch type access ways shall be installed in the main deck for future access to the rooms
below; one above main engine room and one above the mud pump room.

3.7.3 MANHOLES AND MANWAYS

Oil tight or watertight flush-mounted or raised manholes with minimum 800 x 600 mm (vertical)
or 600 x 600 mm (horizontal) clear opening shall be furnished and installed for access to all
hull tanks, void spaces and compartments, as necessary. Where approved by CLASS,
manholes on main deck shall be of the flush-mounted type with a single locking mechanism
for watertight closure, excluding Potable Water, Fuel Oil, and Lube Oil, as applicable.
All hull tanks shall have two access manholes, each with ladder access.
Manholes shall have bolted plate covers with appropriate gaskets and be secured with
stainless steel studs and bronze nuts. Manholes located on vertical surfaces shall be provided
with suitable handles. Recessed deck manholes shall be fitted for lifting lugs.
Within manholes in vertical bulkheads, a platform of 1.0 m2 minimum, with handrails, shall be
provided inside the tank, 600 mm below the manhole opening. Any opening allowing access
to a ladder going down must be protected with a stainless-steel chain or FRP safety gates at
the top of the handrail.
Manholes in horizontal decks: a platform of minimum 1.0 m2 with handrails shall be provided
inside the tank, 2,400 mm below the manhole opening. Any opening allowing access to a
ladder going down must be protected with a stainless-steel chain at the top of the handrail. All
manhole covers will be permanently marked with the tank number. Markings shall be by weld
bead.

3.7.4 STAIRCASES AND COMPANIONWAYS

Stairways will not have a slope greater than 45º and will be minimum 914 mm wide in
Accommodation and 762mm in other areas with a slope not exceeding 50º. In general landings
will be provided at intervals of 3.5 m.
The riser and tread will be in accordance to recognized standards once a minimum tread width
has been established at any deck it is not to be decreased on the direction of escape. Non-
skid surfaces and safety treads shall be provided on all stairways. Main stairs to machinery
spaces shall be fitted with dust plates underneath. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) grating
will be used for walkways and stair treads.

3.7.5 PLATFORMS

3.7.5.1 WELL LOGGING UNIT PLATFORM

The BUILDER shall provide a structural platform to support the Well Logging Unit and tool
house on the Stbd side adjacent to the Stbd jack house structure.
The platform shall be ‘fit for purpose’, at an elevation, and of a size and load capacity, so as
to be suitable and sufficient for all end user well logging equipment and well logging
operational requirements. The Well Logging Unit shall have unobstructed line of sight to the
center line of the derrick V door, at the drill floor level well over the entire drilling pattern. This
needs to be demonstrated to the BUYER before delivery of the VESSEL.
Safe access shall be provided to the platform and the platform itself shall be of sufficient size
to provide all-round access for the operation and maintenance requirements of the Logging
Unit. The requirements shall include the change out of Logging Unit drum wire. The design of
the platform shall be such that a 20ft tool container can be installed, stowed for as long as
required, and removed from under the well logging platform.

PAGE 85 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

BUILDER shall provide and furnish all required materials and services required for the safe
operation of the Logging Unit. Those requirements shall include but not be limited to:
• Suitable and sufficient foundations
• Electrical power
• Piping for fuel, air, and water supplies
• Lighting
• PAGA
• Network access
• Fire and Gas Monitoring
3.7.5.2 PLATFORM FOR THIRD-PARTY CONTAINERS
The BUYER will provide details of all Third-Party equipment requirements and the necessary
design loads. In the absence of any details, the BUYER shall provide generic values from
previous projects allow the platform to be constructed in accordance with the Project Schedule
and so as to avoid rework.
BUILDER shall provide and furnish all required materials, utility stations and associated
services required for the safe use and operation of the containers. Those requirements shall
include but not be limited to:
• Suitable and sufficient foundations
• Electrical power
• Piping for fuel, air, and water supplies
• Lighting
• PAGA
• Network access
• Fire and Gas Monitoring
3.7.5.3 RADIATOR PLATFORMS
A Radiator platform shall provide the foundation for the installation of Main Engine cooling
Radiator and Fan assemblies and all associated valves and pipework. The platform shall be
of such dimensions so as to provide all round access to the radiator/fan assemblies and areas
with fall potential shall be protected by barriers.
Barriers shall be removable where required for maintenance. Any removable barriers shall be
secured in place under normal circumstances. The number of Radiators and fans shall be in
accordance with the appropriate section of this CTS and the Contract Plans.
A Staircase shall be provided for normal access to all levels of the radiator platform. Vertical
ladder(s) shall be provided, as agreed with BUYER, for use in an emergency egress should
the staircase not be available for any reason.
BUILDER shall ensure that the design and supply of the radiator installation is such that the
influx of debris to the suction side of the radiator fans and cooling fins is avoided.

3.7.6 WALKWAYS AND GRATING

Walkways shall be of grating or non-slip floor plates. The load bearing capabilities of all
walkways and grating shall be in accordance with the rules, codes and standards identified in
Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Grating shall be FRP where stipulated by the BUYER and acceptable to CLASS. FRP grating
shall be self-draining, slip resistant, mechanically pre-cut, sealed and installed with stainless
steel fasteners.
Any steel grating provided shall be pre-cut and banded prior to hot dip galvanizing and
installed using proper fasteners.

PAGE 86 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Where proper fasteners cannot be used, the grating panels may be welded to the support
structure, provided that the welded areas are subsequently cleaned and touched up with an
approved galvanize repair-coating.
Steel checker plate shall be provided in the engine room between and around the main
engines. The floor plates shall be removable for maintenance and access to the engine base
equipment. Each section of chequer plate shall be individually secured so as not to be capable
of slipping or tipping and not rely on the installation of adjacent plates to remain secure.
Only gratings with a maximum opening of 15 mm shall be provided in areas with dropped
object potential.

3.7.7 LADDERS
Vertical Ladders shall be provided for access to all tanks and compartments. The provision
and design of all ladders shall be in accordance with the rules, codes and standards identified
in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Ladders inside preload tanks and leg ladders shall not include safety cages.
Ladders shall be of welded construction and have runners of flat bar or channels, depending
on their length. Rungs shall be 22mm square bars on edge spaced twelve inches (12")
between centers. Ladders shall provide a foothold depth of not less than seven inches (7")
and shall have a minimum width of not less than eighteen inches (18"). The ladder's bottom
rung shall be twelve (12) inches from the deck.
Safety cages and landing platforms are to be fitted where required by Regulatory Bodies
requirements. Hand grabs shall be installed on two sides above the top of ladders, at all
manholes, platforms and elsewhere as required to facilitate access.
DBI Sala Ladsaf fall arrest systems shall be installed on all ladders in excess of 10’.

3.7.8 ESCAPE ROUTES

There shall be a system of 'Escape Routes' provided between working areas, muster areas
and evacuation and escape locations. Escape route dimensions shall be in accordance with
CLASS requirements, and marked in accordance with the VESSEL Paint Specification.
Escape routes shall be clearly identified and shall be suitably and sufficiently lit at all times.
Escape routes and Muster Points shall be protected as necessary by structural fire protection.

3.7.9 BULWARKS, GUARD AND HANDRAILS

A Bulwark shall be provided around the forward section of the hull and continuous guardrails
around the remaining areas. The bulwark at the forward end of the main deck shall be
designed in accordance with the wave and environmental criteria identified in Section 1.0 of
this CTS.
Permanent continuous guardrails shall be provided at edges of all decks and structures with
fall potential. Guard rails shall be in accordance with CLASS requirements.
Machinery spaces shall have rails around all open areas and as necessary for the protection
of personnel from hot equipment.
Certified Self Closing gates shall be provided wherever openings in continuous guard rails are
required for access/egress. Safety gates shall open inwards and shall have a safety stop to
prevent the gate opening out over from the closed position.
All handrails in accommodation areas shall have a low maintenance finish, e.g. brushed
stainless steel (SS304) or chrome plated. Handrails shall be provided on both sides of all
accommodation passageways and staircases.

PAGE 87 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All rails shall provide a continuous, smooth handgrip, without any sharp angles, rough edges,
obstructions, protruding brackets, or similar. The handgrip area shall be without screws and
bolts, unless they are completely recessed. The distance between the rail and any obstruction
shall be minimum 50 mm in internal accommodation areas.
Hand rails and Guard rails shall be completely free from obstructions, and not to be used as
a support or anchorages for any items of equipment.

3.7.9.1 CHAIN AND REMOVABLE PIPE RAILS

3.7.9.1.1 Chain Rails
The use of chain rails is prohibited.
3.7.9.1.2 REMOVABLE PIPE RAILS
All portable or removable rails shall be socket type, lockable with pin or bolt, easy to remove,
and designed to the same standards and requirements as fixed and welded
handrails/gaurdrails. The sockets shall provide minimum clearance to provide fixed and
secure support, shall be fitted with a water drain hole, painted and made of material that
reduces the risk of corrosion between the removal handrail stand and the socket.

PAGE 88 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.8 ELECTRICAL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS

3.8.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL PLANT
This section of the Specification describes the details and technical requirements for the
supply and installation of the electrical systems of the VESSEL as well as the BUILDER’s
responsibilities for the engineering, installation, commissioning, testing and delivery of the
complete electrical systems.
The whole electrical installation is to comply with the rules, requirements, recommended
practices and certificates as described in Section 1 and shall further comply with the
recommendations in the relevant publications from the International Electrotechnical
Commission, IEC.
The intent is to provide a stable power and distribution system at all times under varying load
conditions to meet the VESSEL’S continuous operational requirements without loss or
reduction of operating capacity.

3.8.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

The BUILDER shall provide detailed design and engineering sufficient to install and test the
installation as well as safe and efficient operation of the drilling rig and perform effective fault
finding and maintenance after going into operation.
The detailed design shall ensure that all necessary care has been taken to provide a safe
installation in compliance with proven marine practice, all relevant codes and standards
referenced in these Construction Specifications, and that all interfaces between different
equipment have been coordinated to an optimum.
The electrical installation and equipment shall comply with IEC standards. NEMA standard
equipment will be considered on a case by case basis; exceptions shall be presented to the
BUYER for approval.
The electrical equipment shall be designed and rated for a humid, salt laden atmosphere
subject to vibration and acceleration that will be experienced on a drilling rig.
Emphasis shall be placed on corrosion, temperatures, vibration, power supplies and electrical
interference effects.
Consideration shall be given in the design and construction to reliability, safety, flexibility,
redundancy, high quality and reduced maintenance and service.
All cables will be sized in accordance with the Regulatory Bodies requirements and these
specifications with special regard for high ambient temperature current rating.
The power system shall be designed according to IT earthing system type.

3.8.3 SYSTEM STUDIES

It is the BUILDER’s responsibility to verify, by calculations, as required by CLASS, the overall
functionality of the electrical system. Calculations will be in accordance with IEC 61892 Part
2, Chapter 9, system studies.
The following electrical studies shall be performed by the BUILDER and/or the equipment
vendors.

3.8.3.1 SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS

The BUILDER shall prepare a fault current analysis to indicate minimum interrupting capacity
required for each circuit breaker at its point of application. It must consider both symmetrical
and maximum peak currents. It shall include maximum as well as minimum generation and
load cases for all relevant distribution boards.

PAGE 89 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The short circuit margins at all voltages shall have sufficient margin for future expansion.
The AC calculation shall be in compliance with both IEC 60909 and IEC 61363. The DC short
circuit calculations for VFD DC bus shall be in compliance with IEC standards.
The calculation shall be in compliance with the requirements of Class.
All equipment supplied for the VESSEL will meet the requirements defined by these
calculations.

3.8.3.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICES COORDINATION AND DISCRIMINATION STUDY

The BUILDER shall perform a co-ordination and discrimination study to ensure total
discrimination in all the AC and the DC distribution systems.
The study shall be completed with the Time-Current Curves (TCC) to demonstrate that the
protective devices settings provide appropriate selectivity under all operating conditions
identified in the load analysis.
The discrimination study shall account for the effect of limited let-through currents resulting
from use of any circuit breakers employing current limiting features, to ensure that the effect
of any short circuit is limited to the opening of the circuit breaker closest to the point of the
short circuit.
All equipment supplied for the VESSEL shall meet the requirements defined by this study.

3.8.3.3 LOAD ANALYSIS AND LOAD FLOW STUDY

The BUILDER shall perform a Load Analysis and Load Flow study to verify that the ratings of
the main switchgear, transformers etc. are correct. The study shall include analysis of various
realistic load conditions as noted below. It shall be developed during the vessel’s initial design
phase and shall be continuously updated throughout the life of the project. As a minimum, the
following generator loading conditions / operation modes shall be considered:
• Normal Drilling
• Extreme or Top-Hole Drilling
• Tripping
• Elevating
• Under Tow
• Emergency
All equipment supplied for the VESSEL shall meet the requirements defined by this study.

3.8.3.4 STABILITY STUDY

The BUILDER shall perform a stability study to ensure that the power system is stable under
transient motor starting, transformer connecting and similar conditions.
All equipment supplied for the VESSEL shall meet the requirements defined by this study.

3.8.3.5 TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION STUDY

A harmonic distortion study of the power system shall be performed to ensure that the level of
harmonics in the power system is within the class specified limits.

3.8.4 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) shall be one of the basic design criteria for all the
electrical systems on the VESSEL.
The system design, the choice of equipment and method of installation shall ensure proper
trouble-free operation, including all necessary EMC considerations for working in

PAGE 90 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

marine/offshore/drilling environment, including the content of the harmonic distortion in the

power distribution system.
The power system shall be designed to be compatible with Electromagnetic compatibility
requirements as per IEC 61000.
As a minimum all signal/control, transducer cables, communication cables and intrinsically
safe cables shall be EMC screened.

3.8.5 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY

The main voltages in the electrical power system are:
Table 3.8.5: Main voltages
System
Voltage Frequency Services Connected Consumers
Earthing

Main Power Transformers for drilling VFD and

600V 60 Hz IT
Generation 480V Distribution, Cranes, etc.

Emergency Emergency consumers as per

480V 60 Hz Power IT CLASS, END USER Schedule G
Generation and HSERM, etc.
Marine and
drilling utility AC motors, machinery equipment,
480V 60 Hz IT
power pumps, HVAC, Drilling HPU, etc.
distribution

Lighting and Normal Lighting, 230V receptacles,

230V 60 Hz IT
small power space heaters, etc.

Emergency Emergency consumers as per

230V 60 Hz Lighting and IT CLASS, UPS, emergency lighting,
small power etc.

A Master UPS Distribution System consisting of two UPS units in

230V UPS 60 Hz parallel with normal & emergency power supplies complete with static
bypass switch. Including interface with IMCS for status alarms.

110V For portable hand tools located on drill floor, workshops, heavy tool
60 Hz
store etc.

3.8.6 HARMONIC LEVEL

Harmonic levels in the power system shall be within the limits specified by CLASS regulations.
BUILDER shall be responsible for mitigation of the harmonics in power system, if harmonic
levels are beyond limits specified by class as per the harmonic studies.

3.8.7 DOCUMENTATION
Documentation on Design, Engineering, Manufacturing, Testing, Installation and
commissioning of the electrical equipment and systems will be prepared by the BUILDER or
BUILDER appointed vendors as per GOOD INDUSTRY PRACTICE, class regulations and be
subject to BUYER approval.
All necessary documentation which needs class approval shall be submitted to class by
BUILDER or BUILDER appointed vendors. Shipyard drawings submitted to BUYER for
approval are to detail all electrical systems (including all OFE and BFE), and in addition to
ABS required drawings, shall include as a minimum:
PAGE 91 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Both AC and DC single line diagrams

• Protection Single Line Diagrams (Vendor drawing)
• Cable Plans Showing the Cable Routings
• System elementary schematic diagrams
• System connection diagrams
• Wiring Diagrams
• Signal maps/listings (I/O list & interface diagram, data maps including tags and
metadata)
• Instrumentation Logic Diagrams for all systems including Drilling related systems
• Software documentation for all Software controlled systems
• Settings tables for all circuit breaker protection devices
• Complete parameter settings and project specific programming for intelligent
protection devices
• Cable Schedules
• Explosion Proof equipment list with a copy of the EX certificates including the design
and installation limitations and arrangement drawings showing the location of each
component.
3.8.8 HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATION
BUILDER shall define hazardous areas in the rig and suitably rated equipment shall be
selected by the BUILDER for installation in these hazardous areas
Electrical equipment area-class rating shall be selected based on the zone location of the
equipment on the VESSEL, as indicated on the hazardous area drawings, in accordance with
CLASS, recommended practice API RP 505 and IEC 60079-10-1.
In addition to the zone rating, the equipment shall be selected in accordance to gas grouping
and ignition temperature limit of the gases and vapours that may be present in the area where
the equipment is installed.
Electrical equipment for use in hazardous area shall be selected based on CLASS
requirements and IEC 60079.

3.8.8.1 EXPLOSION PROTECTION

The equipment chosen for installation in a hazardous area shall have explosion protection
suitable for the hazardous zone where the equipment will be installed.
Refer to section 5.16

3.8.8.2 JUNCTION BOXES AND GLANDING

All junction boxes to be used in hazardous areas shall be certified as an assembly. The
components used in the junction box shall be approved to be used as per the certification of
the Junction box assembly.
Cable glands shall be selected such that the gland complies with all the requirements as per
the appropriate standard to which equipment is designed and manufactured, that the cable
entry device is appropriate to the type of cable employed and maintains the respective method
of protection suitable for installation in the applicable hazardous zone.

3.8.8.3 INSTALLATION INSPECTION AND TESTING

The equipment or apparatus to be installed in the hazardous area shall be installed in
accordance with IEC 61892 Part 7 and IEC 60079-14. Installation of explosion proof glands
and equipment shall be performed by qualified and suitably trained installers (IECEx
Certificate of competence Level Ex 003 or equivalent)

PAGE 92 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The BUILDER shall contract a Third-Party hazardous area specialist inspection company to
perform an inspection of the equipment in hazardous area in accordance with IEC 60079-17.
Inspection of explosion proof glands and equipment shall be performed by qualified and
suitably trained inspectors (IECEx Certificate of competence Level Ex 008 or equivalent) and
a detailed inspection summary report submitted to the BUYER. The BUILDER shall fulfil any
recommendations or corrective actions raised in the inspection report.

3.8.9 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

All electrical and electronic equipment, fixtures, components and materials shall be specifically
designed and built or treated for operation in the salt laden offshore environment and shall
operate as intended under conditions of moisture, vibration, pitch and roll, etc. as will be
experienced by the VESSEL.
Special consideration shall be given to the corrosive gases emanating from mud processing
systems
All electrical equipment and items shall be CLASS approved and shall meet the Regulatory
Bodies requirements.
In cases where design requisites may not be covered in sufficient detail by class requirements
or these Specifications, IEC standards shall be followed for design and construction details
and shall form a part of these specifications.
Electrical noise caused by operation of power conversion equipment shall not affect operation
or reliability of any equipment.
The use of asbestos in any form is prohibited.
For the purpose of standardization and to the maximum extent practicable, all similar electrical
equipment items and fixtures shall be from the same approved manufacturer.

3.8.9.1 ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT

The equipment arrangement drawings will be submitted to CLASS and BUYER for review and
approval.
The general arrangement of the main electrical machinery shall be as indicated on contract
drawings. Equipment emergency shutdown devices shall be easily accessible and
unobstructed in all instances.
Equipment shall be so located as to reduce to a minimum any likelihood of being exposed to
damage by oil, water, steam or heat, or to mechanical damage during the handling of stores
or drilling components, unless BUYER’s written approval is obtained.
Piping containing flanged connections shall not be run over switchboards or over panel
boards.
Adequate protection, per GOOD INDUSTRY PRACTICE and regulatory bodies, shall be
installed to protect electrical equipment from damage due to either normal operation or failure
of adjacent equipment such as piping. Flanged connections shall be shrouded or otherwise
protected to prevent a spray stream of fluid from impinging on the electrical equipment. Care
shall be taken with respect to location of equipment such that it is installed where least
exposed to weather.

3.8.9.2 EQUIPMENT RATINGS

In general, electrical equipment shall be designed for nominal running in ambient temperatures
as specified in Section 2 and in accordance with Class Rules.

PAGE 93 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.8.9.3 APPLICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

All electrical equipment and wiring, including spare parts, shall be treated and otherwise
suitably protected against corrosion, moisture, salt, mould, Caustic Soda (NaOH) or other
destructive agents to which the VESSEL will be exposed under adverse climatic conditions
during normal operations in the tropic and semi-tropic areas of the world. Ferrous components
of equipment subject to corrosion, except motor enclosures, switchboards panels, distribution
and control cabinets and similar enclosures shall, unless otherwise specified, have a corrosion
resistant finish such as zinc plate applied before any painting, but after fabrication work is
completed. In general, all equipment shall be finished to suit the location in which it is installed
Junction boxes, connection boxes, cable ways etc. exposed to the weather or excessive
dampness shall be constructed from 316-Stainless Steel, GRP or other BUYER approved
non-corrosive material

Watertight metal enclosed equipment as defined by IP 56, NEMA 4 and 4X, IEEE-45 Section
8.11 or IEC publication 14 for switchgear and control gear shall be used in all locations subject
to condensation of vapors, and in locations either temporarily or permanently exposed to the
weather or subject to routine washing down by hose. This shall particularly apply to equipment
in pump rooms, lavatories, shower rooms, laundries, refrigeration compartments, oil lockers,
and deck and open deck exposed areas.
Enclosures, fixtures and devices, installed in the living quarters and similar spaces shall be of
non-toxic low smoke materials.

3.8.9.4 PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL

All measures for protection and safety of the personnel during operation and maintenance
activities on the electrical equipment will be considered by the BUILDER. There shall be no
exposed live parts in the equipment accessible to the personnel during operation or
maintenance. All Air circuit breakers and moulded case circuit breakers shall be provided with
padlocking facility. Means of electrical isolation shall be provided wherever necessary for safe
access for maintenance on the equipment.
All required interlocks for operational safety shall be incorporated in the system during design
phase.
Approved type non-conducting rubber matting shall be installed around switchboards,
transformers, AC drives for the prevention of electric shock.

All switchboards, Motor Control Centres, panel boards, etc., must have a minimum working
space as defined by Class. Such equipment shall be installed in a dry place, away from the
vicinity of steam, water and oil pipes and should be located as shall be accessible from the
front and rear (if rear access is required). The space in the rear should be ample to permit
maintenance, in general not less than 60 cm in the clear, except that this may be reduced to
45 cm in way of stiffeners and frames. Where practicable, access from both ends shall be
provided. The space in front should be unobstructed and ample for operation, maintenance
and removal of equipment – in general not less than 92 cm for low voltage switchboards

3.8.9.5 EXTENSIONS AND MODIFICATIONS

Design, manufacturing and installation shall as far as possible, ease modifications and
extensions after the VESSEL has been taken into operation.
Where practicable, 480V and 230V electrical switchboards and Motor Control Centres shall
be arranged for future extension of one cubicle at both ends or two cubicles at one end only.

PAGE 94 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Each Switchboard and Motor Control Centre shall be provided with not less than one (1) spare
circuit breaker / motor starter complete, installed but not used, for every ten (10) Units, or
fraction thereof, for every size and type installed. These spares shall be distributed between
Main switchboards, Emergency switchboards, and Motor Control Centres in an appropriate
manner to be mutually agreed upon by BUILDER and BUYER during detailed design. The
location of spare breakers and motor starters on the various switchboards and MCCs shall be
agreed with the BUYER. These shall be shown on drawings issued to BUYER for approval.

3.8.9.6 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT, PLATFORMS, MOUNTING

All equipment shall be installed, readily accessible for maintenance, repairs and replacement.
Equipment mounted on or adjacent to bulkheads shall in general be located as to be
accessible for servicing and adjustable from adjacent decks, floors and platforms without the
use of ladders or without dismounting the equipment or removing other equipment. All
enclosures having doors shall be positioned such that all doors will open without interference
a full 90 degrees or until locked whichever is greater. The access to the equipment shall be
ergonomically designed.

3.8.9.7 ENCLOSURE PROTECTION

Ingress protection (IP rating) of electrical equipment shall be, as a minimum, in accordance
with the applicable requirements of CLASS.

3.8.9.8 SPARE PARTS

List of spare parts for major equipment shall be submitted by BUILDER to the BUYER for
approval.

3.8.9.9 NAME PLATES AND MARKING FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

General Requirements - In addition to regulatory requirements for nameplates and markings
of electrical equipment, the following shall apply:
• All nameplates and markings shall be as per the Specification
• All special precautions, maintenance, or operating instructions shall be included on the
nameplate or on a separate plate attached in a prominent, visible location on the
equipment
• Labels and Nameplates for safety or warning purposes shall be in European English
and Arabic
• All equipment shall be provided with name plate and marking with all relevant details,
Size including Kw, KVA and power factor; Rated Voltage and Current, Frequency, IP
rating, Equipment Tag number etc.
• Warning symbols shall be fixed to all the electrical equipment to provide necessary
warning on the danger of electric shock hazards in the equipment
• All equipment rated for hazardous area shall be provided with markings required by
the regulation and the certifying body with the approval certificate reference numbers
• All cables shall be fitted with cable tag numbers at termination points outside
enclosures and both sides of any transit through bulkheads. Each core shall be
identified at termination points inside enclosures with closed ring type interlocking
ferrules. Core references shall read outwards from the termination points and shall
identify the termination point of the core

PAGE 95 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.9 INTEGRATED MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient Control and Monitoring Systems throughout
the VESSEL in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated within Section 1.0
of this CTS and with the Contract Plans. Provision shall be made for the interfacing of the
Cyber Security and Data Protection Systems incorporated in vendor and Third-Party
equipment.

3.9.1 INTEGRATED MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM (IMCS)

The BUILDER shall install an Integrated Monitoring and Control System (IMCS) which shall
be based on distributed architecture. The IMCS integrates the control and monitoring functions
of various VESSEL subsystems into a single system.
The IMCS subsystems shall be supplied by a single manufacturer or system integrator, as far
as reasonably practicable, to minimize interface and integration issues.
The IMCS system shall provide central control, monitoring, alarms handling, data collection,
data analysis and trending facilities from various systems and machinery on the VESSEL. The
information shall be displayed on graphical user interfaces with system mimics and controls
at various locations on the VESSEL.
Subsystem control and monitoring philosophy shall be detailed in Functional Designs
Specifications for each subsystem.
The IMCS shall include redundant PLC Controllers, remote distributed I/O interface panels,
communication hubs, fiber optic network as required.
Main redundant PLC Controllers for IMCS system shall be located in CCR. Location of the
I/O Interface panels shall be finalized based on total VESSEL I/O requirements and distributed
I/O locations so as to minimize cabling.
The following are the major systems and equipment to interface with the IMCS for the
monitoring and display of selected system parameters and to provide an overview of the
VESSEL operational status:
• HVAC Dampers – (Monitoring) Indication Status
• Living Quarters HVAC system (including Dampers)
• Ventilation Fans – (Monitoring) Fans Tripped Alarms
• Bilge Sensors – (Monitoring) High level bilge alarms
• Emergency Generator – (Monitoring) Common alarm
• Emergency Generator – (Monitoring) Auto Mode Signal
• Emergency Generator 24VDC System – (Monitoring) Fail alarm
• Main Engine / Generator – (Monitoring)
• Main Engine After Cooler & Jacket Water Expansion Tank – (Monitoring) low level &
flow alarms.
• Watertight Doors & Hatches – (Monitoring) Status Indication of doors and hatches
including alarm mute facility when rig is not floating.
• Tank Gauging System – (Monitoring) All tanks level indication
• Preload System - (Control & Monitoring) All fill & dump valves including master dump
facility.
• Bilge Holding Tank – (Monitoring) High Level Alarm
• Environmental Weather System – (Monitoring) Status Indication
• Chiller / Freezer – (Monitoring) Man stuck in chiller / freezer alarm
In addition there shall be provision made to interface additional systems and equipment, as
agreed with BUYER, that shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Power Management System

PAGE 96 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Ventilation Fans – (Monitoring) Fans Tripped Alarms

• Ventilation dampers
• HVAC systems other than the Living Quarters (including Dampers)
• Fire Pumps 1 & 2- (Control & Monitoring) Pump Running/ Ready Indication, pressure
including manual & auto start facility
• Jockey Pump - (Control & Monitoring) Pump running / automatic start /stop at 7 & 10
bar
• Oily Water Separator – (Monitoring) Common alarm
• Water Maker (Monitoring) Common alarm
• Sewage Treatment Plant – (Monitoring) Common alarm
• Sea Water Pressure Status – (Monitoring) Low pressure alarm
• Wet Chemical / NOVEC Systems – (Monitoring) Release alarms
• Mud Process Area Foam System – (Monitoring) Release alarms
• Main UPS – (Monitoring) Common alarm, UPS on Bypass
• 24VDC Main System – (Monitoring) Common alarm
• Quick Closing Valve Cabinet – (Monitoring) Low Pressure Alarm
• Quick Closing Valves– (Monitoring) Status Indication
• Dirty Oil Tank – (Monitoring) High Level Alarm
• Hazardous & Non-Hazardous Drain Tanks – (Monitoring) High Level Alarm
• Fuel Tank – (Control & Monitoring) High level alarms with purifier & transfer pump
shutdown facility.
• Fuel Tanks – (Monitoring) Low level alarms
• Fuel Oil Purifiers – (Monitoring) Low level alarm
• Fuel Oil Day Tank – (Monitoring) High / Level alarms
• Rig Air – (Monitoring) Low pressure alarm
• Breathing AIR System – (Monitoring) Low pressure alarm
• Hospital – (Monitoring) Hospital Emergency Alarm
• Main & Drilling Transformers – (Monitoring) Temperature Alarms
• Fire and Gas detection – (Monitoring) Indication & status including cause & effect
matrix
• Emergency Shut Down system – (Monitoring) Status Indication
• Shore Power – (Monitoring) – Status Indication
3.9.1.1 OPERATOR STATIONS
Five (5) HMI monitor & control stations will be installed in the following proposed locations:
Control Room, Engine Room Mezz Deck, Machinery Spaces Port & Starboard Side & Main
Switchboard Room.
Final locations shall be determined in detailed design based upon major equipment location.

3.9.1.2 ALARMS HANDLING AND ANNUNCIATION

IMCS shall provide alarm management whereby various process parameters are monitored
and audible and visual alarms are activated when alarm thresholds are exceeded. The storage
of parameters shall include, but not be limited to:
• Time stamping
• Tag No
• Tag description
• Event/ Alarm type
• Alarm priority
• Shelved or inhibited alarms

PAGE 97 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Event summaries shall log any changes of state of equipment or processes including Operator
action. Events shall include the digital feedback status / input status such as valve open / close
for Operator information.

3.9.1.3 DATA OWNERSHIP

Individual System Vendors/OEM shall agree that any raw or analysed data collected from
vendor systems installed on the VESSEL is owned and controlled by BUYER and that this
data can be used, stored and analysed for BUYER’s maintenance and system performance
analysis, or other purposes.
System Vendor/OEM specific algorithms that fall under vendor’s intellectual property and that
may be used for the on-board equipment condition monitoring and data and trend analysis
shall not be required to be mapped or transmitted.

3.9.2 CYBER SECURITY AND DATA PROTECTION SYSTEM

3.9.2.1 LIFECYCLE CHANGE MANAGEMENT

Individual System Vendors/OEM shall guarantee that their hardware and software lifecycle
management systems shall be maintainable and supported throughout the lifecycle of the
VESSEL, including, but not limited to, the following:
• Firewalls
• Switches
• Processors
• Anti-virus software
• Operating systems
• System software
• HMIs
The BUILDER shall document how the OEM's respond to known vulnerabilities on systems
deployed throughout the fleet. To ensure compliance with future security enhancements and
protection against future virus signatures, the individual system vendors/OEM shall describe
how software and hardware upgrades are handled through their change management process
and provide applicable procedures; from initiation through to development, installation,
commissioning and close out for the lifecycle of the VESSEL.

3.9.2.2 REMOTE ACCESS

Individual System Vendor/OEM shall agree to utilize BUYER's system and procedures for
remote access and connection authorization (Privileged Access Management System). Any
remote connection to the vendor’s system on board for maintenance / fault finding / data
collection shall only be allowed via hardware or software switch system that positively
identifies and authorizes such connection; no direct connection without authorization shall be
allowed. Details of the remote connections proposed by system vendor/OEM are to be
reviewed and approved by BUYER.
BUYER will further define the remote access system during detailed design phase of the
project.

3.9.2.3 INTRUSION DETECTION

Individual System Vendors/OEM shall employ application whitelisting on all supplied systems
indexing approved software, software libraries, plug-ins, extensions and configuration files that
are permitted to be present and active on such systems.
Individual System Vendors/OEM shall install an "Agent" solution on all systems to prevent
USB drives installing malignant files or software without first performing anti-virus checking by

PAGE 98 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

a USB cyber scanning kiosk. Choice of "agent" solution shall be determined and advised by
BUYER.
Individual System Vendors/OEM shall ensure network traffic is mirrored and made accessible
to BUYER to leverage an Intrusion detection system. Individual System Vendors/OEM shall
agree that BUYER may passively monitor vendor’s networks installed on board utilizing an
Intrusion Detection system.

3.9.2.4 DE-MILITARIZED ZONE (DMZ)

All control and monitoring systems (OT) workstations and servers provided as part of the
VESSEL shall be capable of domain joining and being serviced from the BUYER/COMPANY
hosted DMZ (from onshore) for network management services, domain and access control,
application while listing, patch management and anti-virus update and periodical back-up
services.

3.10 POWER GENERATION SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a Power System for the VESSEL that is fully integrated with a
Power Management System and a Drilling Instrumentation & Control Systems. The power
system grounding arrangement of the VESSEL shall be isolated earthing system (IT system
as defined in IEC standards).

There shall be five (5) main generators. All controls and interfaces of the engine and generator
shall be connected to respective 600V Main switchboard generator control cubicles via a 600V
bus.

There shall be one (1) Offshore Emergency Generator Set connected to the 480V Emergency
Switchboard. The 600V main switchboard shall be divided into two (2) AC bus sections
interconnected via a bus-tie breaker.

There shall be suitable and sufficient drilling transformers connected to main 600Volts bus
supply that power rectifier units in the drilling VFD line-up, further rectifiers shall be connected
to a common DC bus in the drilling VFD line-up. The VFD line-up shall be divided into two (2)
DC bus sections interconnected via a bus-tie breaker.

There shall be two (2) distribution transformers with primaries connected to the 600V bus and
secondaries connected to the 480V main switchboard. All the major utilities and auxiliary
machinery packages and other auxiliary machinery packages are powered from the main
480V Bus.

Two (2) deck cranes shall be connected to the 600Volt main bus. The third (3rd) deck crane
shall be connected to the 480Volt emergency switchboard.

The Main 600V bus and emergency 480V bus shall be interconnected though circuit breakers
and cables. During normal operation of the VESSEL, when the emergency generator is on
standby, the 480V emergency switchboard shall be powered from the main 600V switchboard.
During Loss of power to the main 600V switchboard, for any reason, the emergency generator
shall come online automatically and provide power to all consumers that are connected to the
emergency switchboard.

PAGE 99 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The power generated by the emergency generator shall also be capable of being back fed to
the main 480Volt bus. The necessary protection shall be provided to disconnect back-feed
power in case of any overload in the emergency generator to make sure the emergency bus
does not lose power due to generator overloading.

The emergency consumer loads are powered from the 480V Emergency bus. An interconnect
provision between 480V emergency bus and 480V main bus is also provided.

There are two (2) 480/230V step down lighting transformers which supply 230V power to the
230V main switchboard. All the lighting and small power loads are connected to the 230V
distribution systems in the VESSEL.

The Emergency lighting system of the VESSEL is powered from the 230V emergency bus
which is fed by two (2) 480/230 emergency lighting transformer connected to the 480V
emergency bus.

There shall be 115V small power receptacles fed via step down transformers located at Drill
Floor, Heavy Tool store, Main Deck and workshops.

3.10.1 MAIN POWER GENERATION

The main engine/generator sets, each identical, and comprising a diesel engine coupled to a
generator.

3.10.1.1 MAIN ENGINES

Each engine shall have a nominal power output of 2150 BHP (1603 BKW) @ 1200 RPM. The
engines shall be prime rated, and Class certified, each driving a main generator, as described
in the CTS. Each Engine shall be capable of operating at MCR according to Class
requirements.

3.10.1.2 ENGINE STARTING

The main engines shall be air started supplied via the dedicated engine air start receiver.

3.10.1.3 NOX EMISSIONS

The Engine shall comply with current IMO tier II emission requirements.

3.10.1.4 EXHAUST SYSTEM

All engines shall incorporate a suitably designed exhaust system consisting of:
• Engine exhaust companion adapter
• Expansion joints shall indicate the direction of exhaust gas flow
• 18-inch schedule 20 exhaust between adaptor and main deck transit
• 16-inch schedule 20 pipe from main deck transit to the exhaust muffler
• Vertically oriented ‘Marine type’ spark arresting muffler, with moisture drain facility
• Exhaust piping routed down the starboard side of the hull, from the muffler to the
baseline
• A means of allowing the exhaust gas to be expelled from the exhaust piping when the
VESSEL is in the water as opposed to jacked up mode
• All exhaust flange fasteners shall be hot dip galvanized and shall be assembled with
high temp (HT) anti seize compound
• All gaskets shall be HT and asbestos free

PAGE 100 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Exhaust pipework supports shall allow for both vertical and horizontal expansion and
contraction
• All hot surfaces of the exhaust shall be protected by a cage of corrosion resistant
expanded steel to prevent personnel contact
• The deck transit location at main deck level shall incorporate a coaming of sufficient
height to prevent any fuel or flammable liquids coming into contact with the hot exhaust
pipe
• A ¾” NPT adapter nozzle for exhaust back pressure measurement shall be provided.
Safe access shall be provided to the location
• The entire exhaust system shall be insulated with stainless steel cladding
3.10.1.5 FEATURES OF ENGINES
Each Engine shall include the following features:

• Bolted flange type cooling system expansion joints (no straight hose connections)
• All hot surfaces, including exposed cooling lines shall be thermally insulated
• Fuel supply solenoid control valve and bypass arrangement
• Lockable engine lube oil sump drain valve
• Emergency stop button with shield
• Mechanical / electrical interlock that prevents the cranking of the engine whilst turning
gear is still engaged. The status of this interlock shall be monitored
• Lockable engine starting air isolation valve
• Two jacket water heaters for each engine
• Facility for continual venting connections from both water circuits on each engine
• Individual vent lines from engines to header tanks
• Cooling water drainage valve installed on the jacket water system
• Cooling water drainage valve installed on the aftercooler system
• Five (5) Oil Coolers
• Lube oil centrifuge filter for lube oil system
• A metal detector in the lube oil system
• Air pressure switch located downstream of the main air isolation valve to the starter
motor, connected to the PMS system for alarm, indication and interlocking
• High tilt oil pan as per CLASS
• Installation of engine foundation to follow the Caterpillar application & installation
guidelines as stipulated as follows – The Caterpillar petroleum offshore base consists
of a base within a base. The inner base is three point mounted, with integral spring
isolators and limit stops, to the outer base. The outer base can be welded to the rig
support structure. The inner base structure is not the same as engine rails used in
other applications.
Engine flexible multicore cable to instrumentation and control boxes shall be to be cut to size
with negligible excess.
All necessary steps shall be taken to ensure that the control and instrumentation panels on
the engine skid remain within the OEM temperature limits so as to prevent ‘heat damage or
degradation.
Prior to engine and generator being painted all ancillaries and small items, including but not
be limited to, wiring, sensors, gauges, labels, signs and tags, shall be masked off. Immediately
following painting ALL masking and residue shall be removed.
Individual engine crank case breathing system to be furnished by the shipyard.

PAGE 101 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.10.1.6 ENGINE GOVERNOR REQUIREMENTS

Each engine shall be provided with a digital electronic governor that shall be interfaced with
the PMS system and comply with the features as defined in the Power Management System
Basis of Design.
The power for operation of the governor control system shall be provided from at least two
sources.
The governor system shall include the necessary equipment and controls to allow
synchronization across the Bus Tie Circuit breakers, and when the tie breakers are closed
shall provide KW load sharing across the Bus Tie circuit breakers.
The governor system for each engine shall interface with the system for control of load sharing
and synchronization across bus tie circuit breakers to permit operation with open or closed
bus ties.
The KW load sharing system shall be configured to permit operation in both isochronous and
fixed droop modes as may be selected by the Power Management System.
The normal mode of operation shall be isochronous and load sharing shall be controlled by
the governor system.
In the event of a failure within the isochronous load sharing mode, the system shall revert to
Fixed Droop mode and continue in that mode until manually requested by the Power
Management System to return to isochronous mode.
In either mode, the operation of the governor and load sharing shall be independent of any
signals from the Power Management System.

3.10.1.7 ENGINE PROTECTION SYSTEM

The engine shall have all necessary protections and alarms required for safe and efficient
operation.
Alarms, derating and shutdown parameters shall be programmable and confirmed during
detailed design.
Horn and beacon assembly shall be installed and wired on the Local Alarm and Protection
generator set control panel.

3.10.1.8 MONITORING AND CONTROL

The following parameters to be monitored by the Caterpillar local control panel.
• Engine oil pressure
• Engine water temperature
• Oil filter differential pressure
• Service meter
• Engine Speed
• Engine start-stop (off, auto start, manual start, cool down timer)
• Overspeed shutdown notification light
• Emergency stop notification light
• Fuel Pressure
• Fuel Filter differential pressure
• High Aftercooler temperature
• Engines shall have Individual cylinder exhaust temperatures
• Engines shall have RHS & LHS exhaust bank temperatures
• Air inlet restriction
• Annunciation of engine shutdowns, alarms and status points
• Plain text fault codes
• Off/start/reset, local, remote switch

PAGE 102 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Emergency stop
• Engine control system shall have the facility of testing overspeed trip at a reduced
engine speed. (Simulation)
3.10.1.9 ALARMS
The following alarms shall be provided as a minimum; (Final parameters will be confirmed in
detailed design):
• Low oil pressure
• High coolant temperature
• Low coolant level
• Low sump oil level
3.10.1.10 SHUTDOWNS
The following shutdowns shall be provided as a minimum. (Final parameters will be confirmed
in detailed design):
• Low oil pressure
• High coolant temperature
• Overspeed
• High After Cooler Temp
• Emergency Stop Button
• High crankcase back pressure
3.10.1.11 MAIN GENERATORS
3.10.1.11.1 Generator Ratings
The main generator ratings and details shall be as follows:

Rated power output (continuous with fan) 1530 ekW / 2150kVA

Speed 1200 rpm
Rated power factor 0.7
Rated terminal voltage 600V
Frequency 60 Hz
Number of phases 3 Phase
Duty Continuous
Connection 6 Wire, Wye
Sub transient reactance See Note 1 below
Excitation system Brushless-Permanent Magnet excitation
Insulation Class H
Temperature Rise F (with temperature rise of 90°C at 50°C
ambient)
IP rating IP 23
Bearing arrangement 2 No. of re-greaseable antifriction bearings
Generator anti-condensing heating Resistor
RTD Embedded in generator windings with
spares, to be displayed in the alarm
monitoring system

PAGE 103 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Cooling system Air cooled

Sensors to communicate with IMCS Final parameters will be confirmed in
detailed design
Note 1: The values of sub-transient reactance shall be obtained during detail engineering
subject to confirmation from the manufacturer.

Each generator shall have the mounting feet machined, drilled and threaded to accept
alignment bolts. A full set of four (4) fine threaded jacking bolts shall be provided per
generator. Each foot to have a tapered locking dowel installed on each foot into the skid. The
jacking bolt threads to be free of paint and/or corrosion. Alignment shims shall be stainless
steel. With a maximum of five shims per mounting foot. Spacers, if required, shall be stainless
of stainless and machined down to as close to exact size as possible.
3.10.1.11.2 Excitation
The main generators shall be provided with a permanent magnet type exciter. The exciter
shall be controlled by a PWM type Automatic Voltage Regulator for the voltage control of the
generator. The AVR is to be Basler DECS-250. Alternative regulators may be proposed for
BUYER consideration.
The following features and accessories shall be included:
• Excitation system to provide 300% of Generator Full Load (Short Circuit) Current for 2
seconds for regulator power to permit coordinated removal of fault
• Excitation system to provide 150% of Generator Full Load (overload) Current for 30
seconds
• Stand-off terminal connectors mounted in outlet box (Location to be agreed by BUYER)
• Control Power Transformers, Voltage reference transformers, and current
transformers shall be installed in terminal enclosure to provide the necessary power
and control signals for AVR and switchboard control and synchronization, as well as
overcurrent and differential current protection plus independent CT’s and PT winding
for connection into IMCS control system for system monitoring.
• A matching set of CT’s shall be supplied to be mounted in switchboard for the
differential protection
3.10.1.11.3 Monitoring, Protection and Alarms
The Generators shall be provided with all necessary protection and alarms required as per
CLASS regulation.
The Generator windings shall be provided with Differential protection using CT’s installed in
the generator terminal box and in the switchboard.
Temperature detectors shall be provided for generator windings and bearings.
All power and current transducers associated with generators must have over range capability
of at least 50%; power transducers must also have negative power resolution of 50% of engine
or generator rating. Transducers associated with differential protection shall have a range of
at least 300%.
Power transducers for generators and for other switchboard power measurement shall be fast
response electronic units such as Siemens 7KG6000 or equal.
3.10.1.11.4 Automatic Voltage Regulator
Each generator shall be supplied with an automatic digital voltage regulator that interfaces to
the Exciter Power Source that is a part of generator and is configured with any necessary
auxiliary transformers, sensors and devices to provide reactive load sharing between all online
generators.

PAGE 104 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The voltage regulator shall command the voltage output of the generator by controlling the
amount of current supplied to the exciter of the generator.
3.10.1.11.5 Parallel Operation
All main generators shall be designed to operate in parallel with each other. All generators
shall operate in isochronous mode of parallel operation. Symmetric and asymmetric load
sharing between generators shall be possible in isochronous and droop modes of operation.
In case of any failure of load sharing signal between the generators, the generators will
operate in fixed droop mode.

3.10.2 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION

The BUILDER shall provide one (1) emergency engine/generator set comprising a diesel
engine coupled to a generator.

3.10.2.1 EMERGENCY ENGINE

The emergency engine shall have a nominal power output of 1360ekW (1700kVA) @ 1800
RPM. It shall be prime rated, and Class certified and driving an emergency generator. as
described in Section 3.10.2.11 below. The engine shall be capable of operating at 110% MCR
according to Class requirements.

3.10.2.2 ENGINE STARTING SYSTEM

The Emergency generator shall be equipped with both a battery and pneumatic starting
system. The generator package shall comprise a skid-mounted engine/generator set. There
shall be a battery charger supplying a floating charge to the ‘sealed-for-life batteries.

3.10.2.3 NOX EMISSIONS

The Engine shall comply with current IMO tier II emission requirements.

3.10.2.4 EXHAUST SYSTEM

The emergency generator engine shall incorporate a suitably designed exhaust system
consisting of:
• Engine exhaust companion adapter
• A schedule 20 pipe from deck head of the E-Gen room via a deck head transit to an
exhaust industrial muffler
• Horizontally oriented Marine type spark arresting muffler, with moisture drain facility
• All exhaust flange fasteners shall be hot dip galvanized
• All gaskets shall be HT and asbestos free
• Exhaust pipework supports shall allow for both vertical and horizontal expansion and
contraction
• All hot surfaces of the exhaust system shall be protected by a cage of corrosion
resistant expanded steel to prevent personnel contact.
• The deck head transit shall incorporate a coaming of sufficient height to prevent any
fuel or flammable liquid spillage coming into contact with the hot exhaust pipe
• A ¾” NPT adapter nozzle to enable the exhaust back pressure to be taken.
• The whole exhaust system shall be insulated with stainless steel cladding to protect
the insulation including one (1) engine muffler as per contract plans
• In way of walkways all hot surfaces shall be protected with insulation and stainless-
steel cladding

PAGE 105 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Where the exhaust pipes penetrate the main deck and where the exhaust system
elevates to a height of twelve (12) feet the hot surfaces shall be protected by hot dipped
galvanized (or stainless) steel sheet metal
• All deck penetrations shall be protected from potential flammable liquids spilled on
deck
3.10.2.5 FEATURES OF ENGINE
• Bolted flange type cooling system expansion joints (no straight hose connections)
• Lockable engine lube oil sump drain valve
• Lockable engine starting air isolation valve
• Two jacket water heaters
• Cooling water drainage valve installed on the jacket water system
• Cooling water drainage valve installed on the aftercooler system
• One (1) Fuel oil cooler
• Lube oil centrifuge filter for lube oil system
• A metal detector in the lube oil system
• Radiator cooling fan to disperse hot air outside of the emergency generator room
without any short circuiting of air flow.
• A Low-level air alarm. The E-Gen start air receiver pressure and its alarm signal shall
be connected to the IMCS.
A save all shall be provided around the engine with two diagonally opposed scuppers within
each save all. Leading to the dirty oil tank.
Engine flexible multicore to instrumentation and control boxes shall be to be cut to size and
no excess.
All necessary steps shall be taken to ensure that the control and instrumentation boxes on the
engine skid remain within the OEM temperature limits so as to prevent ‘heat damage or
degradation.
Prior to engine and generator being painted all ancillaries and small items, including but not
be limited to, wiring, sensors, gauges, labels, signs and tags, shall be masked off. Immediately
following painting ALL Masking and residue shall be removed.

3.10.2.6 ENGINE GOVERNOR REQUIREMENTS

The engine will be supplied with an electronic speed regulator to maintain a nominal engine
speed of 1800 RPM (generator frequency of 60 Hz). The speed control will operate on a droop
curve that allows the speed to drop by 3% at full load on the engine.

3.10.2.7 ENGINE PROTECTION SYSTEM

The engine shall have all necessary protections and alarms required for safe and efficient
operation.
Alarms and shutdown parameters shall be programmable and confirmed during detailed
design.

3.10.2.8 MONITORING AND CONTROL

The engine shall have a control and monitoring panel (Graphical Unit), mounted on the skid
itself, with the following minimum instrumentation with analogue gauges and with digital
display or programmable digital display incorporating:
• Oil pressure
• Water temperature
• Engine start-stop (off, auto start, manual start, cool down timer)
• Over speed shutdown notification light

PAGE 106 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Emergency stop notification light

• Engine Speed
• Annunciation of engine shutdowns, alarms and status points
• Plain text fault codes
• Off/start/reset, local, remote switch
• Emergency stop
• Normal and override for the alarm system
• Engine control system shall have the facility of testing overspeed trip at a reduced
engine speed (simulation)
• Common alarm to IMCS
3.10.2.9 ENGINE ALARMS
The following engine alarms shall be provided at the local alarm panel.
• Low oil pressure
• High coolant temperature
• High Exhaust Temp Warning
• High After Cooler Temp Warning
• Radiator header level alarm
An alarm signal shall be supplied to the IMCS for the status of the control switches when the
controls are not properly configured to automatically start and supply power if a blackout
occurs.

3.10.2.10 SHUTDOWNS
The following shutdowns shall be provided as a minimum. (Final parameters will be confirmed
in detailed design). In ‘normal’ running conditions there shall be the following shutdowns:
• Overspeed
• ESD push Button
• Low oil pressure
• High coolant temperature
• In ‘override’ mode there shall be the following shutdowns;
• Emergency Stop Button
3.10.2.11 EMERGENCY GENERATOR
The emergency generator shall have the capacity to the supply the necessary power to the
essential systems of the VESSEL via the Emergency Switchboard as required by CLASS and
END USER.

3.10.2.12 GENERATOR RATINGS

The emergency generator ratings and details shall be as follows:

Rated power output (continuous with fan) 1360 ekW / 1700 kVA
Speed 1800 rpm
Rated power factor 0.8
Rated terminal voltage 480V
Frequency 60 Hz
Number of phases 3 Phase
Duty Continuous
Connection 6 Wire, Wye

PAGE 107 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Sub transient reactance See Note 2 below

Excitation system Brushless-Permanent Magnet excitation
Insulation Class H
Temperature Temperature rise at 90°C at 50°C ambient
IP rating IP 23
Bearing arrangement 2 No. of re-greaseable antifriction bearings
Generator anti-condensing heating Resistor
RTD’s Embedded in generator windings with
spares, to be displayed in the alarm
monitoring system

Cooling system Air Cooled

Sensors to communicate with IMCS • Common Alarm
• Auto Mode Signal
• 24VDC Battery Common Alarm

Note 2: The values of sub-transient reactance shall be obtained during detail engineering
subject to confirmation from the manufacturer.

Each generator shall have the mounting feet machined, drilled and threaded to accept
alignment bolts. A full set of twelve (12) fine threaded jacking bolts shall be provided per
generator. The jacking bolt threads to be free of paint and/or corrosion. Alignment shims shall
be stainless steel, with a maximum of five shims per mounting foot. Spacers, if required, shall
be of stainless of stainless and machined down to as close to the exact size requirement as
possible and in any case so as not to require more than the maximum of five (5) shims.

The generator shall be supplied with 220V heaters.

3.10.2.13 EXCITATION
Excitation for the Emergency Gen is achieved via the Automatic Voltage Regulator.

3.10.2.14 MONITORING, PROTECTION AND ALARMS

Generator shall be provided with all necessary protection and alarms required as per CLASS
regulation.

3.10.2.15 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR

The voltage regulator commands the voltage output of the generator by controlling the amount
of current supplied to the exciter of the generator.

3.10.2.16 PARALLEL OPERATION

The Emergency generator shall not run parallel to the main generators except for very short
periods during a changeover of loads in auto mode and emergency mode.

3.10.2.17 EMERGENCY GENERATOR MODES

a) Emergency Mode
In case of any loss of power at the 480V emergency switchboard, which is normally fed from
the Main 600V bus, the Emergency generator shall come online and power the 480V

PAGE 108 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

emergency switchboard within 45 seconds as per the class requirement. The interconnect
breaker from the Main 480VAC bus shall be tripped prior to closing the generator breaker.
When the main 600V switchboard bus power is restored, the emergency generator shall
automatically synchronize with the main 600V bus and transfer the load of the emergency
switchboard from emergency power to Main power, then the emergency generator will be shut
down.
b) Auto run mode
In this mode the Emergency generator will start and synchronize with the main 480V bus
power. The Emergency Generator will then connect to the 480V emergency switchboard, and
subsequently isolate the power interconnect breaker from the main 600V bus.
c) Test Mode
For periodic testing of the emergency generator, the Emergency Generator will have
provisions for starting manually and run the engine to rated speed.
d) Load Shedding
A load shedding system shall be incorporated to prevent tripping any essential emergency
loads as a result of back-feed or loads connected to the switchboard that exceed the rating of
the engine. Tripping shall be induced as a result of overcurrent on the generator or under
frequency on the engine as follows:
• If the generator current exceeds 92% for 10 seconds the back-feed breaker shall be
tripped.
• If the generator current exceeds 95% for 5 seconds the breakers for non-essential
loads shall be tripped.
• If the generator frequency drops below 58 Hz for 3 seconds the back-feed breaker
shall be tripped.
• If the generator frequency drops below 57 Hz for 2 seconds the breakers for non-
essential loads shall be tripped.
3.10.3 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
This section of the CTS outlines the functional requirements of the PMS system only, the
hardware configuration of the PMS shall be as agreed with the BUYER.
The PMS shall, based upon consumer demand, automatically control the operating capacity
of the VESSEL electrical power generation equipment and the distribution of electrical power.
The design and functionality of the PMS shall ensure that adequate levels of reserved power
and spinning reserve are maintained during all the operational modes of VESSEL so as to
ensure safety or efficiency are not compromised.
The PMS shall include components and programming logic that are resident in equipment
supplied by a variety of manufacturers and shall operate in conjunction to provide the power
management functions described below.
The term PMS may apply to elements of systems or equipment that includes, but is not limited
to:
• Power Generation System
• Main and Emergency Switchboards
• Integrated Monitoring and Control System (IMCS)
• Drilling Control System
The PMS shall provide the following functions as a minimum:
• Control and Operation of the Main Generators and switchboards
• Automatic Generator and Switchboard synchronization
• Symmetric and Asymmetric load sharing between the generators

PAGE 109 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Base Load (fixed Load) operation of an Engine/Generator whilst load sharing

• Load dependent start stop of the Engine/Generators
• Standby start of Engine(s) in case of imminent failure or de-rated performance of a
connected Engine/Generator
• Load limit of the consumers in the case of shortage in the availability of power
• Preferential tripping and Load Shedding of consumers
• Blackout and Dead Ship Recovery

3.11 ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELS

3.11.1 GENERAL
The electrical switchboards shall be designed and manufactured to IEC 61439 standards and
Class rules.
Fluid piping shall not be allowed inside electrical rooms except for VFD and transformer
cooling. Piping where necessary, shall limit the number of flanges to a minimum and shall not
be run over switchboards or electrical equipment. Flanges, when located in the vicinity of
switchboards and panels, shall be prepared with integral measures eliminating risk of dripping
or spraying if a leak occurs.

3.11.2 RATINGS
The rating of the switchboards shall be selected considering the required safety and overload
margins. The entire bus bar system, including supports and insulation shall be designed to
withstand the maximum short circuit thermal, mechanical and magnetic stresses as calculated
by the short circuit analysis of the power system.

3.11.3 CONSTRUCTION
The switchboards shall be of self-supporting marine grade, dead-front, drip-proof, and shall
have hinged front panels that can be opened without disturbing the meters, pilot lamps, etc.
mounted on them. Each access panel shall be permitted to swing open at least 90° and shall
be provided with stays to hold access panels open. The switchboard shall be provided with
insulated handrails on front side. If back access with hinged door is provided, insulated
handrails shall be provided at the back. Operational instructions and connection diagrams for
the switchboard shall be made available in a fixed pocket within the switchboard.
All breakers, motor starters etc. shall be provided with a physical means of lock out whereby
a lock or multiple locks can be affixed to ensure positive isolation of downstream equipment
as part of lock-out/tag-out and safe maintenance operations.
Bus bar shall be tin or silver-plated copper and all bus connections shall be bolted by using
stainless steel hardware. The system shall have a permanent ground bus that made of tin-
plated or silver-plated copper bus bar. Color coding of the busbars shall be according to IEC
standards. Bus bar splice joints at shipment splits shall be clearly marked with identification
tags while preparing the shipment and same shall be marked in the assembly drawings of the
switchboards.
All termination points in the switchboards shall be provided with terminal markings and same
shall be provided in the interconnection/termination diagrams of the switchboards.
Recommended torque value for tightening to be provided by the vendor for all connections to
be completed by the BUILDER/SUBCONTRACTOR.
All switchboards shall be provided with space heaters to avoid condensation.
All equipment inside switchboards, panels etc. shall be clearly identified with permanent
markings. Stick on type labels shall not be allowed.

PAGE 110 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All fixing accessories used in the switchboards for bus bar connections and cable terminations
shall be selected such that they will not become loose when subject to vibrations or shock
during operation of the jack up drilling rig. Flat Washers with spring washer or Belleville-type
washers with nut to be used for bus bar joints. All bolted connections shall be torqued and
marked by the vendor at the factory.
The enclosures shall be grounded for safety to the overall base, and all exterior dress panels,
covers and doors shall be bonded to ground. Enclosures shall meet class ingress protection
requirements for the area in which they are located.
All cables entering to the switchboard cabinets shall do so via a Multi Cable Transit or cable
gland.
All exterior nameplates and labels shall be securely fixed to the equipment by screws or pop
rivets. Fixing shall ensure that the IP rating of the equipment is not affected.
A general equipment nameplate shall be provided to include, but not be limited to, the following
information:
• Equipment Tag number and description
• Manufacturer’s name or trademark, location and type designation
• PO number and Year of manufacture.
• Equipment Model Number and Serial Number.
• Rated voltage, frequency, current, kW, KVA, and power factor
• Degree of protection
• Class approval certification number
3.11.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
All circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting the maximum fault current at their point of
application. Circuit breakers shall be used for protection of the electrical power system and
consumers connected to the power systems. All circuit breakers shall be designed and
manufactured as per IEC 60947 low-voltage switchgear and control gear standard.
Air circuit breakers (ACB) shall be used in the Main and Emergency switchboards for ratings
of 800 AF or higher. For ratings up to 630 AF Molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall be
used.
All air circuit breakers shall be draw out type. BUILDER shall supply one circuit breaker trolley
for drawing out and material handling of the air circuit breakers.
All the switchboard lighting and small power circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit
breakers.
ACB’s and MCCB’s shall be provided with electronic type protection releases for overload and
short circuit protection as a minimum. For motor starters, the MCCB’s can be provided with
only short circuit protection and overload protection can be achieved by thermal overload
relays in motor starters. Protection devices shall be configured and set to comply with the
Protective Device Coordination and Selectivity Analysis.
The circuit breakers shall be provided with shunt trip coils, under voltage trip coils, and
auxiliary contacts, as per the single line diagrams prepared by the BUILDER.
In the following sections the number and rating of circuit breakers per switchboard are
indicative and will be finalized by the BUILDER in the detailed development of the power and
lighting distribution systems.

3.11.5 MAIN 600V AC SWITCHBOARD

The switchboard will be located in switchboard room and will consist of two (2) bus sections
and bus tie breaker.

PAGE 111 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.11.5.1 RATINGS
Main 690V switchboard shall consist of but not limited to the following. Quantity and ratings
may adjusted based on final detail design subject to approval by the BUYER:

• Five (5) x ACB 2500A

• One (1) x ACB 6300A
• Two (2) x ACB 6300A
• Four (4) x ACB 2000A
• Two (2) x ACB 3200A
• One (1) X ACB 5000A
All Feeder breakers shall be spring operated; automatic spring charged and shall be equipped
with shunt trip and closing coil as applicable to enable the essential services in the VESSEL
to be remotely restored after a blackout.

3.11.5.2 BUS TIE BREAKER

One (1) Bus-tie cubicle shall be provided with a 6300AF, draw-out air Circuit Breaker, spring
operated, automatic spring charged which can be operated both manually or automatically to
connect or isolate Bus A and Bus B. The CB shall be provided with under voltage trip and
closing coil to ensure the bus sections are isolated should a system blackout occur.

3.11.5.3 PROTECTIVE RELAYS

The power system of the rig shall be protected against all the faults that can occur in the power
system as required by CLASS regulation.
The protection features, and interrupting ratings of the circuit breakers shall be coordinated to
provide the greatest continuity of service possible and a selective system of tripping. In
reaction to a fault, only the circuit breaker closest to the fault shall trip. Time and current
settings of circuit breakers will be set based on a breaker co-ordination study performed by
the power system supplier appointed by the BUILDER.
The circuit breakers in the switchboards shall be provided with electronic protective releases.
The SWITCHBOARD shall have ground fault monitoring circuits on each bus. Interlock must
be in place to ensure only one ground fault monitoring device is sensing fault at a time when
the Bus tie breaker is closed.
The Main generators shall be provided with a differential protection relay for protection of the
generator from winding and cable faults.

3.11.5.4 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Switchboards and distribution boards shall be designed considering access for the
maintenance and protection of personnel as defined in the relevant section of this CTS.

3.11.5.5 SPARE CAPACITY

Spare capacity shall meet the requirements of section 3.8.9.5 Extensions and Modifications.

3.11.5.6 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

The SWITCHBOARD shall have ground fault monitoring circuits on each bus. Interlock must
be in place to ensure only one ground fault monitoring device is sensing fault at a time when
the Bus tie breaker is closed.
The switchboard shall be fitted with sensors for remote and local monitoring of bus kW,
Frequency, voltage and current.

PAGE 112 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All circuit breakers in Switchboard shall be electrically operated as appropriate to enable the
essential services in the VESSEL to be remotely restored after a blackout; such breakers can
be operated both locally on the switchboard or remotely from the Power Management System.
The generators can be controlled remotely from the Power Management System, and locally
from the Switchboards and the engine local control panels based on selection from the control
location.
Incoming and Feeder breaker status shall be transmitted to the PMS / IMCS system

3.11.6 MAIN 480V SWITCHBOARD

The switchboard will be located in the switchboard room and will consist of two (2) bus sections
and one (1) bus tie breaker.

3.11.6.1 RATINGS
Main 480V switchboard consists of but not limited to the following pending detailed design.
Quantity and ratings may adjusted based on final detail design subject to approval by the
BUYER:

• Three (3) x ACB 4000A

• Two (2) x ACB 2500A
• Three (3) x ACB 2000A
• One (1) x ACB 1600A
• One (1) x ACB 800A
• Two (2) X MCCB 630A
• Nine (9) x MCCB 400A
• Five (5) x MCCB 250A
3.11.6.2 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Switchboards and distribution boards shall be designed considering access for the
maintenance and protection of personnel as defined in Section 3.8.9.4.

3.11.6.3 SPARE CAPACITY

Spare capacity shall meet the requirements of Section 3.8.9.5 Extensions and Modifications.

3.11.6.4 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

The switchboard shall be fitted with sensors for remote and local monitoring of bus kW, voltage
and current.
All circuit breakers in the Switchboard shall be electrically operated as applicable to enable
the essential services in the VESSEL to be remotely restored after a blackout; such breakers
can be operated both locally on the switchboard or remotely from Power Management System.
Insulation monitoring along with Incoming and Feeder breaker status shall be transmitted to
the PMS / IMCS system

3.11.7 EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARDS

The 480V Emergency switchboard shall be located in the emergency generator room.
480VAC Shore Power can be connected to the 480V emergency switchboard through one (1)
shore power connection box.

PAGE 113 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.11.7.1 480 VOLT EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD

The Emergency 480V switchboard consists of but not limited to the following pending
detailed design: Quantity and ratings may adjusted based on final detail design subject to
approval by the BUYER:

• Two (2) x ACB 2500A

• One (1) x ACB 1250A
• One (1) x ACB 1600A
• Three (3) x MCCB 630A
• Three (3) x MCCB 400A
• One (1) x ACB 800A
• One (1) x MCCB 250A

Feeder breakers shall be spring operated; automatic spring charged and shall be equipped
with shunt trip and closing coil as applicable to enable the essential services in the VESSEL
to be automatically restored after a blackout.

3.11.7.2 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Switchboards and distribution boards shall be designed considering access for the
maintenance and protection of personnel as defined in section 3.8.9.4.

3.11.7.3 LOAD SHEDDING

The Emergency engine and generator loading shall be monitored and should the generator
load approach full load, the back-feed breaker and any non-essential loads shall be tripped.

3.11.7.4 SPARE CAPACITY

Spare capacity shall meet the requirements of Section 3.8.9.5 Extensions and Modifications.

3.11.7.5 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

Circuit breakers shall be locally operated. The emergency generator shall have an automatic
start facility in case of loss of power in the emergency switchboard.

3.11.7.6 SHORE POWER CONNECTION BOX

One (1) Shore Power Connection Box shall include the following:
• One (1) x 316L Stainless Steel Wall Mounted Enclosure with IP56 rating for outdoor
use
• One (1) x Voltmeter with Phase Selector Switch
• One (1) x Ammeter with Phase Selector Switch
• One (1) x Phase Sequence Meter
• One (1) x Phase Sequence Contactor Select Switch. If the phase sequence is
incorrect, the shore power circuit breaker will not be allowed to close
• Circuit Breaker with remote status indication to PMS / IMCS system
• Indication Lamps
3.11.7.7 INTERLOCKING
This shore power connection box shall be equipped with a circuit breaker which supplies
power to the 480VAC Emergency switchboard. Shore power is controlled at the 480V
Emergency switchboard through a breaker at the 480VAC Emergency switchboard; an
Electrical interlock must be in place to prevent parallel operation of shore power connection
with the emergency generator or the main generators. One Phase rotation meter shall be

PAGE 114 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

installed to check the phase rotation of the shore power with the rig power system before
connection of power from shore.

3.11.8 230 VOLT MAIN AND EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARDS

3.11.8.1 230 VOLTS MAIN SWITCHBOARD

The 230V main switchboard consists of two (2) 230V Buses (Bus A & Bus B) that are
supplied from two (2) 480V / 230V transformers connected to the switchboard through
1000A incomer circuit breakers. The two buses shall be interconnected by one (1) x 1000A
bus tie breaker. Electrical interlocks shall be provided in such a way that only two (2)
breakers can be closed at a time among the two incomers and the bus tie breaker for its safe
operation. Quantity and ratings may adjusted based on final detail design subject to approval
by the BUYER:

• Two (2) x ACB 1000A, incomers

• One (1) x ACB 1000A, Bus -tie
• Five (5) x MCCB 250A, Sub Switchboard Feeders
• Two (2) x MCCB 160A, Sub Switchboard Feeders
• Twenty (20) x MCCB 100AF, Sub Switchboard Feeders
3.11.8.2 230 VOLT EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD
The 230V Emergency switchboard consists of two (2) 230V Buses (Bus A & Bus B) that are
supplied from two (2) 480V / 230V lighting transformers. The two buses shall be
interconnected by one (1) x bus tie breaker. Electrical interlocks shall be provided in such a
way that only two (2) breakers can be closed at a time among the two incomers and the bus
tie breaker for its safe operation. Quantity and ratings may adjusted based on final detail
design subject to approval by the BUYER:

• Two (2) x ACB 1000A, incomers

• One (1) x ACB 1000A, Bus-tie.
• Two (2) x MCCB 250A Sub Switchboard Feeders
• Two (2) x MCCB 160A Sub Switchboard Feeders
• Twelve (12) x MCCB 100A Sub Switchboard Feeders
3.11.8.3 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Switchboards and distribution boards shall be designed considering access for the
maintenance and protection of personnel as defined in section 3.8.9.4.

3.11.8.4 SPARE CAPACITY

Spare capacity shall meet the requirements of Section 3.8.9.5 Extensions and Modifications.

3.11.8.5 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

The breakers can be operated locally on the switchboard.

3.11.8.6 SMALL POWER AND LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION PANELS

A number of 230V distribution panels are fitted for small power and lighting supplies.
The distribution panels shall be designed, manufactured and tested according to IEC 61439
standards. Minimum form of separation for the Distribution panels shall be form 2b. The
distribution panels shall be dead front type and steel or Glass reinforced plastic (GRP)
enclosed, which shall comply with the CLASS requirements. Distribution panel main buses

PAGE 115 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

shall be 3-phase (Line - Line). Single-phase loads shall be distributed over the main buses in
such a manner that a reasonably balanced 3-phase loading is maintained.
All distribution panels shall have a minimum ingress protection as per CLASS Rules and shall
be arranged for top or bottom cable entry, as required.
Distribution panels in wet or damp locations and exposed to the weather shall have a minimum
ingress protection as per CLASS Rules.
Circuit breakers in the distribution panels are to be of the MCB (miniature) type, quick make,
with inverse time tripping characteristics on overloads and instantaneous trip for short circuits.
A feeder identification list shall be installed on the back of each distribution panel door. The
feeder identification list shall be of sufficient size to allow the list to be read at a distance of 1
meter and identify the circuit breaker by distribution panel number, circuit number, name and
circuit breaker trip setting

3.11.8.7 RATINGS
The quantity of lighting and small power distribution boards, including outgoing circuit breakers
and size (ampere) shall be developed by the BUILDER during development & design of the
power and lighting distribution systems.

3.11.8.8 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Switchboards and distribution boards shall be designed considering access for the
maintenance and protection of personnel as defined in section 3.8.9.4.

3.11.8.9 SPARE CAPACITY

Spare capacity shall meet the requirements of Section 3.8.9.5 Extensions and Modifications.

3.11.8.10 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

Distribution boards shall be provided with indication lamps on each phase to indicate the
presence of voltage in the respective phase.

3.11.9 24V DC SUPPLIES

Two (2) of 24 VDC power supply systems shall be provided in the VESSEL.
• Main 24 VDC system powering 24 VDC consumers in main engine room area
• Emergency 24 VDC system powering 24 VDC consumers in Emergency engine room
area
The 24 VDC system shall be fully 1+1 redundant configuration, the 24 VDC system will have
two (2) x 100 % VRLA type battery bank providing a backup time of 30 minutes.
The batteries shall be installed in battery cabinets installed in safe area of the rig.

3.11.9.1 RATINGS
The rating of Main 24 VDC power supply system shall be:
• Rated output : To be confirmed
• Output Voltage : 24 VDC -10% and +20%
• Backup Time : 30 Mins
• Rectifier Rating : 2 x 100%
• Battery Bank : 2 x 100%
• Input Power : 480 Volts AC, 3 Phase, 60Hz
The rating of Emergency 24 VDC power supply system shall be:
• Rated output : To be confirmed

PAGE 116 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Output Voltage : 24 VDC -10% and +20%

• Backup Time : 30 Mins
• Rectifier Rating : 2 x 100%
• Battery Bank : 2 x 100%
• Input Power : 230 Volts AC, L-L, 60Hz
The ratings given above are indicative and will be finalized during the detailed design

3.11.9.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The Power supply unit and distribution board shall be of marine grade, dead-front, drip-proof,
surface wall mounting and shall have hinged front panels that can be opened and shall be
permitted to swing open at least 90° without disturbing the meters, pilot lamps, etc. mounted
on them. Each panel shall be provided with stays to hold access panels open.
Sufficient space shall be provided to accommodate outgoing cables in the cable trunking
inside the 24VDC DB and Panel
The Battery shall be supplied together with suitable battery box; the battery box shall be
resistant to the electrolyte of the battery.

3.11.9.3 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

All panels will be installed in the VESSEL considering proper and safe access for maintenance
by the personnel.

3.11.9.4 MONITORING ALARMS AND CONTROL

The following measurement, controls, visual alarm and Interface with IMCS provisions shall
be provided in the panel:
3.11.9.4.1 Measurement
• DC Voltmeter
• DC Load Ammeter
• DC charger output Ammeter
• DC Battery Ammeter
3.11.9.4.2 Controls
• Charger On/Off Switch
• Battery Isolation breaker
• Load disconnection switch
3.11.9.4.3 Visual Alarm/Protection
• AC Mains Fail
• Charger Fault
• Battery voltage low
3.11.9.4.4 Interface with IMCS
• Common Alarm
•
3.11.10 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
Natural air cooled, dry type distribution transformer shall be provided in the VESSEL.

PAGE 117 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.11.10.1 RATINGS
The distribution transformers shall be provided in the VESSEL as per below, the ratings given
below shall be finalized during the detailed design
Voltage
Rating in Winding configuration
Sl No Description rating QTY
kVA (Primary/ Secondary)
(Volts)
480V Main
2500,
1. Distribution 600/480 Delta/Delta 2 No’s
3Phase
Transformer
230V Main Lighting
2. 300, 3Phase 480/230 Delta/Delta 2 No’s
Transformer
230V Emergency
3. 300, 3Phase 480/230 Delta/Delta 2 No’s
Lighting Transformer
115V Small Power
4. 10, 3Phase 480/120 Delta/Delta 1 No
Transformer

3.11.10.2 CONSTRUCTION
All transformers shall have an enclosure with suitable IP rating to provide ingress protection
as per the CLASS regulations and construction compliance to IEC standards. NEMA standard
will be considered on a case by case basis. All enclosures shall be provided with protective
coating as per class requirements. All transformers shall be of continuous duty type, Winding
material shall be copper. The transformer insulation and temperature rise shall be suitable for
continuous operation in ambient temperature of 55 Deg. All transformers shall be provided
with space heater of suitable rating. Transformers shall have safety earthing arrangements,
overall base and enclosure shall be connected to the safety earth bar. Transformers shall have
a terminal box with tinned copper busbars for termination of incoming and outgoing power
cables.

3.11.10.3 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

Distribution Transformers shall be provided with all auxiliary protective devices such as
temperature detectors, with local indication and alarms. The temperature of windings shall be
sent to the IMCS system.

3.11.11 PHASE SHIFT TRANSFORMERS

Suitable and sufficient No. of Phase shift transformer installed in the UNIT shall be configured
with 2 secondary windings which provides phase shifted power to the drilling VFD line-up
rectifiers. The transformers shall also incorporate additional phase shifting of +/- 7.5° in the
design of the windings and connections.

3.11.11.1 RATINGS
The rating of the Phase shift transformers shall be:
• Load Rating : 4500 kVA (AN)/ 6000 kVA (AF)
• Voltage Rating : Primary- 600/ Secondary-690/690 *
• Phase :3 Phase
• Connection : Primary- Delta, Secondary: Delta, Star and +/- 7.5°
• Cooling : AN and AF (forced cooling)

Ratings may be adjusted based on final detail design results subject to approval by the
BUYER.

PAGE 118 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The transformer secondary voltage shall be confirmed with the VFD Supplier to ensure proper
operation of the VFDs.

3.11.11.2 CONSTRUCTION
All transformers shall have enclosure with suitable IP rating to provide ingress protection as
per the CLASS regulations and construction compliance IEC standards. NEMA standard will
be considered on a case by case basis. All enclosures shall be provided with protective
coating as per class requirements. All transformers shall be of continuous duty type, Winding
material shall be copper. Transformers insulation and temperature rise shall be suitable for
continuous operation in ambient temperature of 55 Deg. All transformers shall be provided
with space heater of suitable rating. Transformers shall have safety earthing arrangements,
overall base and enclosure shall be connected to the safety earth bar. Transformers shall have
a terminal box with tinned copper busbars for termination of incoming and outgoing power
cables.

3.11.11.3 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

Transformers shall be provided with all auxiliary protective devices such as temperature
detector, with local indication and alarms. The temperature of windings shall be sent to the
IMCS.

3.11.12 DRILLING SWITCHBOARD (VFD’S)

The VFD system of the rig consists of VFD line-up incorporating four (4) 6 pulse thyristor-
based rectifiers (water cooled) which are supplied with 690 VAC phase shifted power via
phase shift transformers from the 600V main switchboard.
Each rectifier shall be connected to each secondary winding of each phase shift transformer.
These rectifiers shall be connected to the common DC Bus of the VFD line up.
The DC bus in each line-up shall be interconnected via the bus-tie circuit breaker. Each drilling
motor shall have an IGBT based inverter module (water cooled) connected to the DC bus in
the VFD Line-up. Four IGBT based DC choppers shall be connected to the DC bus two (2)
per line-up) which will dissipate the regenerative power developed in the drilling motors during
drilling operation though water cooled resistor banks connected at the output of each chopper.
BUILDER shall supply one (1) DC bus tie cabinet to include the following:
• 6300A, draw-out air circuit breaker, spring operated, automatic spring charged which
can be operated manually or automatically,
• 2 x Earth fault detection device with required instrument PTs
Each VFD shall be installed with a separate operator panel.
The mud pump VFDs shall drive the motor in a single direction. Top drive and Drawworks
VFDs shall drive the motors in both clockwise and anti-clockwise direction. The VFDs for
drawworks motors and top drive motors shall be of four quadrant type with provisions for
removal of regenerated energy through chopper and braking water-cooled resistors.
The control system shall incorporate software control for anti-synchronized operation (Soft-
pump control) of Mud pumps. The software control for anti-synchronized operation (soft pump
control) of mud pumps shall be integrated as part of the drilling control system scope supplied
by the drilling equipment vendor.
The configuration of the VFDs shall not regenerate power back to the main system, however
some of the regenerated power will regenerate back to the load connected at the DC bus.
Each chopper must be a "master" and the design must include load sharing between
choppers.

PAGE 119 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The Drilling control system which is part of drilling package supplied by others of the rig shall
communicate with PMS, on the load requirements, speed, etc. for the driven equipment. The
PMS will supply Power Available signals to the Drilling Control system, which will subsequently
apportion that power to the various drilling motors when power limiting is required. The Drilling
control system will supply speed and torque command to the drilling motors based on
commands from the Driller and power available as supplied from the PMS. The Converter
and Chopper modules operate dependent upon demands from the drilling motors and the DC
Bus voltage.
The inverter, rectifier and chopper in the VFD line up are freshwater cooled. Separate Sea
water to fresh water heat exchangers shall be installed for each drilling VFD line up to provide
cooling of the drives.

3.11.12.1 RATINGS
The rating of the components in the drilling VFD line up shall be as below but shall be
dependent on final drilling package supplied:
SL Driven equipment Remark
Component Equipment being Fed Qty
No Rating s
3200 A,
1. Rectifier VFD Line-up DC Bus - 4 No’s 932
VDC
2. Inverter Mud Pump Motors 2x1150 HP 3 No’s
With top
drive
3. Inverter Top Drive 1x1150 HP 1 No’s assignm
ent
cubicle
4. Inverter Drawworks 3x1150 HP 1 No’s
water
Drilling brake cooled
5. DC-DC Chopper 1x1200 kW 4 No’s
resistors brake
resistors

3.11.12.2 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Switchboards and distribution boards shall be designed considering access for the
maintenance and protection of personnel as defined in section 3.8.9.4.

3.11.12.3 CONSTRUCTION
The design and construction of semi-conductor converters for adjustable speed motor drives,
unless otherwise contradicted by ABS Rules, shall be in compliance with the requirements of
IEC Publication 61800-5-1:2007 (titled ‘Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems:
Safety Requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy’) and 60146-1-1:2009 (titled
‘Semiconductor converters – General requirements and line commutated converters –
Specification of basic requirements)

3.11.12.4 COOLING
Two (2) Seawater to Freshwater Cooling Cabinets for VFD shall be installed in the VESSEL;
each to include but not limited to:
• Entry/ exit connections for cooling pipes.
• Flow, pressure, and temperature transducers and gauges
• Stainless steel isolation valves

PAGE 120 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Redundant Vertical mount cooling pumps with expansion tank, pressure, flow, and
temperature sensors.
• Check valve, water flow arrow, and a port drain to give the customer and service
technicians a clear understanding of the system’s water flow and to ensure quality
product maintenance.
• Control Module
• Flow Regulator Valve
• Touch Screen HMI for setup, monitoring, and maintenance
• The following equipment is part of the cooling system separate from the cooling
cabinets:
• Water drip pan (located at the bottom of each VFD cubicle). Each drip pan shall contain
one leak detection switch to monitor leakage. This leak detector switch activates a
warning (Visual and audible) and initiates cooling cabinet shut down.
• Two Water/ Water Titanium Heat Exchangers (one for each cooling cabinet) rated for
freshwater cooling. Heat exchangers must be provided with easy access for
maintenance.

3.12 ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Electrical Power Distribution System in
accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS and
the Contract Plans.

3.12.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

Exposed, non-current carrying metal parts of all fixed electrical equipment and machinery shall
be permanently and properly grounded by means of separate conductors or grounding straps
connected to the VESSEL’s structure.
Metallic cable trays/ladders are to be electrically continuous and/or grounded as required by
CLASS and IEC recommendations.
Protective and grounding conductors shall be as short as possible and bonded directly to the
steel deck or bulkheads via welded stud.
There shall be dual grounding points at diagonally opposite sides of the equipment for
switchboards, MCC’s and skid packages.
Two ground systems shall be used:
1. Protection ground ("dirty ground" PE)
2. Instrument ground ("clean ground" IE)
Where special grounding arrangements will be required for radio, communications, and
instrumentation, these shall be clearly indicated on the instrumentation drawings.
The bus bars for instrument ground and protection ground shall be kept separate from each
other by at least 500mm and shall furthermore be protected from unintentional grounding.
All earthing/bonding shall be made in a way to ensure minimal grounding / earthing resistance.
For cables which are both screened and armored special attention shall be paid to ensure
minimal grounding/earthing resistance in the whole frequency band.
Grounds and shields shall not be spliced or stacked or joined together ahead of the termination
but shall be individually terminated on the appropriate grounding point wherever possible. EDP
(Electronic Data Processing) and similar signal termination cabinets shall include separate
isolated copper signal and power ground bus bars running the width or height of the enclosure
as most appropriate to the I/O layout within the enclosure.
Any wire or cable used for making ground connections shall have a green with yellow stripe
outer sheath. Where cables will be installed without a green and yellow sheath, or where

PAGE 121 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

copper bar or tape will be used, they shall be made clearly recognizable by means of
identification markers, colored green and yellow.
Vessels and tanks insulated from the VESSEL’s structure shall be grounded by an
independent bolted ground connection that shall be taken from the Vessel or tank directly to
the steel deck. 25 mm2 ground conductor shall be used.
Standalone pressure vessels and storage tanks shall be grounded by two independent bolted
ground connections in a method identical to that above, 25 mm2 ground conductors shall be
used.
Bonding jumper conductors shall be of annealed copper strip or single core stranded annealed
copper cable with green with yellow stripe outer sheathing, and shall be of a minimum cross-
sectional area related to the relevant cable size as follows, or equal in size to the current
carrying conductor:

Cable Size Minimum Bonding Conductor Size

Up to 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
2.6 - 120 mm2 1/2 of Cable Size, but Min. 4mm2
121 - 630 mm2 70 mm2

All ground terminations on steelwork, bosses etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to
connecting the ground conductor.
After connection, the whole termination shall be greased to preserve the connection against
corrosion

3.12.2 RECEPTACLES
The receptacles are to be connected to dedicated circuits protected by circuit breakers, which
are separate from lighting circuits.
There shall be no more than eight socket outlets or other devices on any single circuit
Receptacles and plugs of different electrical ratings are not to be interchangeable.
The receptacle to be installed in each area of the VESSEL shall be selected to meet ingress
protection and hazardous area protection requirements of the area in which they are installed.

3.12.3 ACCOMMODATION QUARTERS AND OFFICES

Ample general purpose, 230V rectangular pin, duplex type receptacles complying with BS
1363 shall be installed for internal cabins, offices, public spaces, galley, inner passage ways
and ample industrial type receptacles complying with IEC 60309 shall be provided for external
areas. European style (EN) receptacles shall not be installed. All receptacles supplied shall
be subject to the standard approval process.
Feeders and receptacles having fixed loads such as for toasters, drinking fountains,
refrigerators, copy machines, etc., shall be based on the connected load.
General purpose receptacles shall not be provided in wet areas, like accommodation
bathrooms due to safety reasons.
A Universal type receptacle which is available for blade type plug & round type plug and power
selection (230VAC or 115VAC) shall be provided on each mirror light body itself for VESSEL
cabin toilets and communal toilet mirrors. Each universal type socket shall be fed through its
own isolation transformer.

3.12.4 WORKSHOPS AND STOREROOMS

An ample number of 230V AC receptacles shall be furnished and installed in the workshops
and store rooms, construction complying with IEC 60309.

PAGE 122 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.12.5 MACHINERY AREAS

An ample number of 230V AC receptacles shall be furnished and installed in the switchboard
room, electrical rooms, the CCR and other machinery areas.
The receptacles in the machinery space and deck receptacles shall be 230V AC. IP rating for
receptacles in machinery space shall be as per CLASS rules, Deck receptacles shall be
weather proof IP56 and construction shall comply with IEC 60309.

3.12.6 115V RECEPTACLES FOR HAND TOOLS

An ample number of 115V receptacles complying to IEC 60309 shall be installed in workshops,
heavy tool store, drill floor and various deck areas for use with hand tools. Receptacles for
portable hand tools to fitted with ground fault interrupters or residual current devices.

3.12.7 ELECTRICAL CABLES

3.12.7.1 SELECTION OF CABLES

In general, electric cable shall be marine cable, flame retardant type, and tested according to
IEC 60332-1 and 60332-3, Category “A” with halogen free and low smoke generation, which
has been approved by CLASS and in accordance with OEM recommendations. BUYER may
provide exceptions for specific packaged equipment on a case by case basis.
All electric cables shall be listed for marine service with insulation suitable for the
environmental conditions of the area in which they are installed. Insulation class shall be
90ºC.
Cable ratings shall be adjusted for Engine and Pump Room ambient temperature of 55
degrees C.
All cables for system voltages under 1.0 kV shall have stranded copper conductors with a
Maximum conductor temperature not exceed 85º C. Aluminium cables shall not be used.
Unless otherwise noted, all cables shall generally be ethylene propylene rubber (EPR)
insulated, halogen free compound (SHF1 or SHF2), and halogen free compound as outer
sheath.
Cables in Zone 1 hazardous areas, industrial areas such as sack stores, or where significant
risk of mechanical damage exists, shall include stranded copper wire braid armor with halogen
free compound as outer sheath.
0.6/1 kV cable shall be used for 690V or 480V AC circuit and cable used for 230V AC and 24V
DC circuit shall be rated at least 250V.
Cables from the VFD system for drilling motors shall meet specifications of the drive
manufacturers. VFD cable shall be constructed specifically for VFD duty with three (3) power
conductors, three (3) symmetrical ground conductors and suitable electrostatic shielding with
an overall sheath. Three-phase circuits shall in general be supplied by three-core cables; two
or more three-core cables in parallel may be used for larger capacities. All cables shall be in
continuous length.
Single core cable for 3 phase circuits will be accepted only for high current circuits of 500
Amps or more.
BUILDER to guarantee that the cable insulation class will meet fault current requirement by
calculation validation.
Electric cable for lighting circuit and socket outlet shall be three (3) cores cable (one core shall
be used for earthing).
Flexible cables shall be of heavy-duty construction with durable outer sheath.
The maximum voltage drop from main switchboard to final consumers shall not exceed 6%.

PAGE 123 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Generator cables and in other applications for equipment subject to mechanical vibration or
motion shall use crimp type two-hole cast copper lugs to meet vibration service requirements.
Lugs shall be installed using a one-cycle compression tool.
Cables for safety systems, which are required to maintain service during the incidence of fire,
shall be of a fire-resistant type in accordance with IEC 60331 and CLASS. This includes, but
is not necessarily limited to:
• Emergency lighting system
• Fire extinguishing system
• Fire/general alarms and its power source
• Fire and gas detection system
• Public address system
• Emergency stop circuits
• Mud resistant cables shall be used for following areas.
• Mud pump room
• Mud pit room
• Mud process or treatment room
• Drill floor except for inside driller’s cabin and LIR
• Moon pool areas
Any cables supplied by Third-Party for derrick shall be determined separately. Multi core
cables with more than five (5) conductors shall have 10% of spare conductor in use, but
minimum one (1) spare conductor. Intrinsically safe cables shall be blue in color. PVC cable
and wiring shall NOT be installed by BUILDER.

3.12.7.2 CABLE SIZING

Power cables shall be selected based on the cable sizing calculation prepared by the
BUILDER. Derating factors based on the relevant CLASS requirements and international
standards for the installation condition of the cable as per below shall be applied to the cables:
• Derating factor for ambient temperature of operation
• Derating factor for grouped installation of the power cables
• Derating factor for method of installation of the power cables
The cables size selection shall be chosen such that voltage drop in steady and during starting
of the motors are to be within the CLASS specified limits.
The VESSEL Main and Emergency Generator feeder cables shall be sized in accordance with
CLASS and for not less than 100% of the continuous current rating of the generator. The bus
tie feeder cable between the AC distribution switchgear and the emergency switchgear shall
be sized for not less than 100% of the continuous current rating of the emergency generator
or 3% voltage drop (at current of 100% of generator rating) whichever requires the larger
cable.
Motor control center feeder cables shall be sized for not less than 100% of the main bus rating
of the motor control center. These feeders shall be sized in conjunction with the branch motor
feeder circuits. Power distribution panel or switchboard feeder cables shall be sized for not
less than 100% of panel or switchboard main bus rating.
Transformer primary feeder cables shall be sized for 100% of the full rated load current of the
transformer when forced air ventilated. These cables shall be #10 AWG (5.3mm2) or larger.
Motor feeder cables shall be sized for 100% of the full load current of the motor. In no case
shall motor feeder cables be smaller than 4 mm2 except small fractional horsepower motors
serviced from 230Volt AC, 1 phase, 60 hertz source, which may have 1.5 or 2.5 mm2 feeders.
If more than one (1) motor is supplied by one (1) feeder, it shall be sized on the basis of 100%
connected load plus 25% of the largest motor. Power branch circuit conductors serving power

PAGE 124 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

receptacles, heaters, galley equipment, etc., shall be sized to carry 100% of the connected
load. All 480 Volt power branch circuit conductors shall be 4 mm2 or larger.
Shore power feeder cables shall be sized for not less than 100% of the continuous current
rating of the required shore connection capacity or 2% voltage drop, whichever requires the
larger cable.
Conductors for storage batteries to the point of distribution (examples: UPS or battery
charger) shall be calculated from the maximum charge or discharge rate of the batteries,
whichever is greater, and the voltage drop shall not exceed 3%.
The voltage drop caused by the in-rush current of any motor may exceed 6% provided that
the voltage drop is not sufficiently excessive to prevent the motor from starting properly or
prevent any other equipment on the Vessel from operating satisfactorily. Cables shall be large
enough that the operating voltage at the motor during start will not drop to less than 85% of
the nominal motor rated voltage.
Lighting panel feeders shall be sized for not less than 100% of the bus rating of the panel.
The minimum conductor size in general shall be 4 mm2 for motor and 1.5mm2 for
signal/control cables except package supply cables. Lighting circuits shall be a minimum of
2.5 mm2.
Smaller conductor sizes may be considered for special purposes; they must be approved by
the BUYER in each case.
Signal/control cables with more than 5 cores can be 0.75 mm2.

3.12.7.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

All cable installations shall be provided with identification tags at points where it enters a panel
or switchboard. All single core power cables that used in three phase circuits are to be laid in
trefoil formation and are to be adequately clamped based on prospective short circuit rating.
Electric and fiber optic cable shall be laid avoiding places of high temperature and high
humidity and shall be protected in the place where it is likely to receive mechanical damage.
Cables run in groups shall be on hanger type cable tray (200 mm and larger in width) of steel
or GRP and shall be supported by steel supports. Supports shall be fitted with proper space
from hull structure to permit easy painting of the hull structure.
As a minimum, cable trays shall be of material or coating suitable for the environmental
conditions in which they are installed without degradation.
All cable hanger and rack material shall be of 316 stainless steel not less than 3/32 inch
(2.4mm) thick in exterior, hazardous or wet areas with galvanized steel supports complete with
insulators between the two dissimilar metals.
The BUILDER’s “Standard of cable installation” containing details of cable installation shall be
submitted to BUYER for review and approval, provided these standard practices comply with
BUYER’s requirements.
Wet areas are such areas as; bilges (below deck gratings), external areas, mud handling and
processing areas, mud pit room, galley.
In other areas cable hangers and racks may be of galvanized steel or other corrosion-resistant
metal meeting the requirements of regulatory agencies. All cables shall be clamped on
"ladder-type" racks. The "steps" on which the cables will be resting shall be of the
longitudinally slotted type, minimum 40-mm width, and with deburred and rounded edges to
prevent cable damage.
The distance between the "steps" shall not be greater than 300 mm. Regardless of location,
316 Stainless steel cable channel shall be used for all cable runs smaller than 150 mm in all
exterior, hazardous or wet areas.

PAGE 125 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Cable racks shall be bolted or clamped to supports. Welding to structural steel etc. will not be
permitted without the permission of the BUYER. Cables shall be bent at not less than the
minimum bending radius of the particular cables. Cables shall not be run over sharp edges
or corners of cable racks.
Supports for cable racks shall be of such material or coating suitable for the environmental
conditions in which they are installed without degradation. Supports for horizontal cable racks
shall be spaced according to the type and width of rack and weight of cable thereon, so as to
ensure that no sagging can occur. The spacing shall normally not exceed 1.8 m, but in no
case shall the distance between supports exceed 3 m.
Vertical runs of racks shall be securely supported at intervals not exceeding 1.8 m
Cable in refrigerated provision chambers shall be laid on 316 stainless steel rack and fixed
with cable strap.
Spare capacity shall in general be provided for each cable category within each transit group,
with spare capacity for each group not less than 15% per cable category, including fiber optics.
Where cables penetrate non-watertight deck or bulkhead, coaming or cable pipe without cable
gland shall be used for cable protection. Coaming and pipe shall have rounded edges to
prevent chafing. Cable shall be properly segregated throughout run of coaming.
Where cables pass through a deck, kick plates or tubes (150 mm high) shall be fitted around
the penetration.
Wherever added protection against mechanical injury is required, such as within 10 feet of
hatches, deck penetrations, etc., cables shall be enclosed in expanded steel or steel plate
enclosures of sufficient strength to prevent damage to cables. When such protective cases
are used, adequate air space shall be provided between the protective cases and the cables
to provide ample ventilation and to avoid collection of condensation on the cables. Cables
that pass through or into such areas shall be installed overhead where practicable.
Cables in living spaces that will not be concealed behind ceilings or linings shall be suitably
covered with decorative covers of fire-retardant material.
Where cable is exposed to the danger of some mechanical damage, it shall be protected with
steel plate, galvanized steel pipe (SPP), flexible cable conduit or other equivalent means.
No compound shall be used to seal piping except in hazardous area. For non-hazardous area
application, piping shall be threaded with cable gland.
Cable on exposed deck between the deckhouse and the upper deck shall be protected with
galvanized steel pipe, and several expansion boxes shall be fitted. The galvanized steel pipe
shall be goose neck design on all deck penetrations and not straight pipe as far as practicable.
Cable along the fore mast shall be protected with galvanized steel pipe (SPP) or painted steel
plate up to three meters high above the deck or shall be installed inside of mast with cable
hanger.
Earthing shall be compliant with the CLASS Rule requirement and with these Specifications.
Minimum 10% of spare space for main cable ways of 300 mm and larger in width.
Cables shall be secured along their full length by 5/8” plastic Coated Steel cable bands at
spacing not exceeding 0.6 m for both horizontal and vertical runs. Cables need not be
individually tied. Buckle type cable band (tie) will be used.
Cable racks shall be installed with due regard for the lagging of pipes and insulation, with at
least 200 mm clearance between cables and the outer surface of any such lagging or
insulation.
All cables entering, terminating or passing through a Zone 1 hazardous area, shall be armored
with a sheath that is installed by the original manufacturer of the cable, over the armor. The

PAGE 126 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

armor shall be grounded at both ends. All cables shall be continuous without splices between
terminal points.
No cable shall run through the radio room unless it terminates in the radio room. All cables to
and from radio equipment shall be installed to fully comply with the equipment manufacturer's
requirements and CLASS.
Cables shall be run overhead where possible and shall be installed in such a manner as to
prevent a good place for rats to live.
In general, where either of two separate feeders may be used to supply the same equipment
or service, they shall be in separate cable runs not adjacent but separated as far as practicable
from each other.
All cables other than fiber optic cables passing through rooms or areas containing RF shall be
in enclosed ducts initiating and terminating outside the area. Both AC and DC control signals
shall not be contained within the same cable (Control signals can be combined, if allowed by
equipment manufacturer and CLASS).
Cable runs shall not restrict the removal of, or the access to, inspection covers. Cables shall
be kept clear of lifting gears. Any cable run exposed to mechanical damage shall be suitably
protected.
Cable runs on the open deck shall be avoided where practical.
In all instances cable strapping shall be applied at right angle to the cable axis, using tools
with adjustable torque setting. These methods and tools shall be used exclusively in order to
prevent overstraining of ties and possible cable insulation damage. Synthetic cable ties may
only be used on horizontal runs in the accommodation area.
Cables shall be laid parallel on cable racks in a neat and orderly fashion. Where two or more
trefoil cable groups run on the same route, they shall be at the same horizontal level with a
clear space, between the groups, of at least one cable diameter (of the largest cable).
Single core cables forming a DC circuit shall be run as per CLASS requirement.
Single core cables for AC circuits shall have copper wire braiding or other non-magnetic
material.
Cables shall not be strapped to the underside of any cable tray.
It is the intent of this specification to use fiber optic cable to the greatest extent practical for
instrumentation and control. Fibers shall be glass, 62.5 x 125-micron core multi-mode low
attenuation type. Construction shall be loose tube, LSZH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) OSP
(Outside Plant) type. All fiber optic cables shall be terminated into breakout style boxes with
fan out kits installed by the BUILDER. All fibers shall be terminated with breakout kits having
a minimum of 12 inches of Kevlar sleeving secured over the original fiber sleeving. All installed
fibers shall be terminated by the BUILDER using ST Multimode connectors. All
termination/junction boxes and patch panels shall provide space for storage of patch cords as
well as termination spots for additional fiber optic cables from local equipment.

3.12.7.4 MULTI CABLE TRANSITS AND PENETRATIONS

Where required, multi-cable transits will be installed for the passage of cables through a
firewall leading from a safe area into a hazardous area or bulkheads penetrations; however,
MCTs are to be suitable for A-class fire rating based on the fire integrity plan.
Power, control and VFD cables can pass though MCT designated as power
Instrumentation control (DC) and telecom cables can pass through MCT designated as
Instrument MCT
All accessories shall be as specified by the cable transit manufacturer.

PAGE 127 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All multi cable transits shall be installed as per the original manufacturer’s standards and
recommendations. Under no circumstances shall more than 1 cable be installed into individual
transit blocks. Suitable and sufficient spare transits shall be provided at each main cable route
for future additional cable installation.
Where transits carry cables through A60 bulkheads the installation shall be CLASS approved
as required. A special schedule of these transits shall be provided by the BUILDER to BUYER
for inspection purposes. This schedule is to detail location, transit number, type of transit,
manufacturer of the cable transit sealing system and manufacturer’s documentation as to each
type of sealing system used.
All transits shall be individually and uniquely numbered.
Identification of the transit shall be made by the fixing of permanent and indelible labels
(supplied by the BUILDER) to the racking or bulkhead adjacent to the penetration.
Where single core cables forming a three-phase circuit pass through a transit, they shall be
contained in one transit frame. Any stay plate in the transit causing separation of the single
core cables shall be of a non-magnetic material.
Spare ways in transit frames shall be fitted with blank filling blocks.
The BUILDER shall ensure that cable trays align with the position of the transit frames.
All cables passing through transits shall be perpendicular to the transit for a minimum distance
of 100 mm on both sides of the transit frame.
All penetrations through fire resistant bulkheads (cables/pipes) shall be closed to ensure that
fire integrity is maintained. Installation in the accommodation shall be carried out as a cable
installation on cable racks. Where panelling is applied over the hull structure in
accommodation, concealed wiring shall be carried out as far as practicable.

3.12.7.5 CABLE SEGREGATION

In order to avoid harmful levels of electrostatic or electromagnetic noise being transmitted by
the cables / conductors of one system to the cables / conductors of another, the cabling of all
circuits should be grouped into categories according to their ability shall be affected by, or to
radiate, electrical noise (interference). Cables / conductors of different categories must then
be kept apart, i.e. segregated, according to their category:

Cables / conductors categories (“Cat”):

• Category 1
• Sensitive digital signals, 5 volts logic- (Serial link and Local Area Network (LAN)
cables).
• Category 2
• Sensitive analogue signals, up to and including 24V (nominal), including
signals from transducers and plant monitoring devices including RTDS,
Thermocouples etc.
• Category 3
• Digital I/O -PLC inputs from plant contact and digital output to plant devices
• Category 4
• Local Control Station, Lighting & Small Power, and Power cables carrying 120V
to 1kV
The Cable Network shall be separated into:
• Category 1, 2, & 3 Instrumentation and Telecommunication systems
• Category 4 Low voltage power supply and control cables for electrical systems (1000V
and below)

PAGE 128 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Cable ladders installed horizontally shall have sufficient space to facilitate cable pulling and
cleating/strapping, minimum 75mm free space between top of one ladder edge to bottom of
next ladder edge, and from top ladder edge to roof.
Instrumentation and telecommunication cables may be routed on Cat 4 cable support systems
when minimum 100mm distance between the individual systems are kept.
Cat 1, 2, 3 and 4 cables can be installed on same field tray from branch to single equipment
when this is not in conflict with the type of signals in the cable.
Crossing at right angles is acceptable without further segregation.
Considerations must be taken during installations of cables entering and leaving field type of
equipment like smaller packages, minor modules, crane pedestals etc. related to segregations
as listed above.
Non-IS and IS instrument cables may be routed on the same cable ladders/rack. If the IS and
Non-IS cables are both armored and screened they can be tied together in same bundle.
Otherwise they must be separated by at least 50mm and not tied together under the same
bundle.

3.12.7.6 CABLE TERMINATIONS

All cables shall be glanded or fixed on MCT blocks at the entry points of the equipment or
panels. The cable glands shall be non-magnetic type made of brass.
The cable glands shall be selected based on the type of cables, Ingress protection
requirements in the area of installation and hazardous area classification requirements
All cable terminations shall be done using compression type cable lugs or individual cores can
be terminated on screw clamp or pressure plate type equipment terminals.
Straining of cables at cable glands shall be avoided.
Terminals for current signals and control circuits shall be selected to facilitate fault finding and
maintenance. All terminals shall be clearly marked.
As built termination diagrams for the particular equipment shall be laminated and placed in
every switchboard, control panel, termination box and junction box.
Cable glands for Hazardous Area application shall be nickel-plated brass double compression
type and shall form a weatherproof cable penetration. When glanding into a clearance hole,
a weatherproof sealing washer shall be fitted as recommended by the manufacturer of the
gland, and the gland shall be secured by means of a heavy brass gauge locknut. Brass
adapters shall be used if required.
Each gland plate shall be electrically bonded to its relevant equipment ground bar or stud.
Cable glands shall be directed downwards so far as practicable.
No cable gland entry on open deck shall face upward.
Where polycarbonate equipment boxes are to be provided and fitted, the glands may be of
the same material (nylon glands acceptable substitution).
Wire strippers and wire crimping tools shall be of professional quality.
Spare terminals shall be numbered.
All cables terminating in exterior, damp or wet locations shall have the ends sealed against
the entry of moisture and oil. All cables shall enter the equipment from the bottom, unless
prior approval is received from the BUYER.
Cable terminations or glands shall not support any weight of the cable.
All instrumentation and communication cable shields shall be terminated at only one end (left
floating at the field end) and only one location and in a proper manner as defined by the
BUYER or equipment manufacturer. Except where otherwise required by equipment

PAGE 129 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

manufacturer for optimum protection or equipment operation, shields shall be terminated on

the zero-signal reference point at the signal source.
All cables shall be continuous between outlet boxes, connection boxes, switchboards, panel
boards, etc. without crossovers between supports except at turns where a portion of the cables
turn off. Where armored cable enters any box or wiring device, the armor shall enter the
terminal or connector and shall be secured to assure a good electrical connection between
the armored cable and box or wiring device.
Change in type of cable in any cable runs and change in conductor sizes other than at
switchboard and panels shall be made only in standard appliances or fittings designed for this
purpose. Spliced connections are not permitted.
Installed cables damaged by BUILDER during construction shall be replaced in its entirety by
the BUILDER before delivery of the Vessel.

3.12.7.7 SPARES AND SPARE CORES

Where cables with spare cores are to be terminated, these shall not be cut off at the gland,
but shall be the same length as the longest connected core. Spare cores shall be numbered
and terminated at the equipment's terminal block.

3.12.8 TEST AFTER INSTALLATION

The following tests shall be conducted on the cables after installation in the VESSEL:

3.12.8.1 INSULATION RESISTANCE

BUILDER shall measure the insulation resistance of each cable, including all cores and the
screens of twisted shielded cables.
Electrical power and control cables shall be tested for insulation resistance by an insulation
tester at 500 V DC. The Insulation resistance values shall be within the minimum acceptance
criteria defined as per CLASS
Insulation resistance readings shall be recorded, dated and signed by the technician
performing the tests.

3.12.8.2 CONTINUITY CHECK

End to end continuity checks shall be made on all cables including spare cores.
Defective materials and equipment and poor workmanship, disclosed by these tests, shall be
removed, reconnected and re-tested by the BUILDER.

3.12.9 AC MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS (MCC) AND CONTROLLERS

The AC motor control centre for AC service to drilling and utility service equipment shall be
installed in the VESSEL. The MCC’s installed in the VESSEL shall be intelligent type to control
/ communicate required commands / signals as specified in other sections. MCCs to be
installed in the VESSEL shall include but not be limited to the following:
• MCC A at Switchboard room
• MCC B at switchboard room
• MCC D at LER Room Drill floor
• MCC V at Switchboard room
MCC‘s shall be designed, manufactured and tested as per IEC standards. NEMA Standard
design shall be reviewed on a case by case basis
MCC’s shall have motor starters as well as feeder breakers to cater the power supply
requirement of consumers.

PAGE 130 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.12.9.1 ARRANGEMENT AND CONSTRUCTION

The motor control center shall be free standing, dead-front type with a drip protective cover
on top, and a non-conducting handrail in front shall be provided. Power shall be distributed by
power bus assemblies consisting of a 3-phase horizontal bus with vertical riser to each load
center.
Circuit breakers shall be of the molded case type, flush mounted, and removable from the
board front.
All MCC starter or feeder cubicles are to be capable of being withdrawn independently, without
disturbing its incoming and outgoing connections / mating stationary portions.

3.12.9.2 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

MCC’s shall have the ability to interface with IMCS and drilling control system for control and
monitoring, with necessary transducers for current / voltage feedback of selected motor
starters. The MCC shall comply with the functional requirements defined in the functional
design specification for power system.
Remote start - stop push button stations which are located near equipment and also at
additional control locations, are all to be wired to the starters of MCC’s.

3.12.9.3 STARTING METHODS

Generally, all starters available in MCC’s are to be Direct Online (DOL) type, however other
starting methods like star-delta, Soft start, or VFD shall be provided as dictated by detail
design requirements.
In general starters for motors larger than 150 kW shall employ reduced voltage starters. In
the Emergency switchboard and MCC, starters for motors rated 100 kW or larger shall employ
reduced voltage starters

3.12.9.4 PROTECTION AND ISOLATION

All starters in MCCs are to be provided with control and protection circuits as required by
CLASS regulations and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Short circuit protection - Molded case circuit breakers shall provide short circuit
protection to the connected equipment and feeder cables.
• Overload protection – Bi-metallic thermal over load relays or intelligent motor
protection relays shall provide overload protection for the motors and feeder cables.
• Feeder breakers shall be provided with short circuit and overload protection.
3.12.9.5 METERING
All motor starters above 100 kW in MCC’s shall have measurement provision for current,
voltage, power and run time.

3.12.9.6 CONTROL CIRCUITS

Control circuits in the MCC shall be 230V (Line to Line), 60 Hz, and each starter shall be
provided with control transformer of appropriate size for providing control power (and motor
space heaters). The control circuits shall be protected by suitably rated fuse.
The control power in the MCC shall also power space heaters in motors and solenoid valves
of priming air ejector circuits for pumps (as applicable).

PAGE 131 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.12.9.7 NAMEPLATES
All cubicles in the MCC panels shall be provided with name plates to include, but not be limited
to, the following information:
• Description of the equipment
• Equipment tag number
• Rating in kW or HP
• Cubicle identification number
• Size of the connected power cable
Necessary control and timing circuits are to be provided in MCC starter cubicles to initiate the
pump priming circuit before starting the associated motor.

3.12.9.8 IR VIEWING WINDOWS

IR viewing windows shall be provided in the switchboards and MCC’s for thermographic
inspection of the cable connection points to bus bar to detect hot spots without opening any
compartment doors.

3.12.9.9 MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE DETECTION

Starters are to be provided with necessary temperature control relay (PT100 or PTC
thermistor), for motors which need to be protected by winding temperature detection as per
the CLASS requirement.

3.12.9.10 REVERSIBLE AND TWO SPEED MOTOR STARTERS

Any motors that are reversible or having two speed operations shall be provided with a suitable
starter cabinet with two contactors to achieve the required functionality.

3.12.9.11 OTHER SPECIAL MOOR STARTERS

Fire pump motors shall be provided with standard DOL starter.

3.12.9.12 EMERGENCY STOPS

Emergency stop push buttons shall have mushroom head buttons and shall be protected by
flaps to prevent accidental operation.

3.12.10 AC MOTORS
All AC motors installed in the VESSEL shall be induction type unless used for any special
applications. Motors may be designed and manufactured as per IEC or NEMA standards.
Electric motor driven pumps on the VESSEL with motor starter in the MCC shall have
provisions to be operated from the MCC and through local control stations. The electric motors
related to drilling, shall have provisions to be remotely operated from the Drilling
Instrumentation and Control System. Marine and utility system electric motor driven pumps
shall have remote operation provisions from the respective system control panel or control
system.
The firewater and jockey pumps shall have automatic starting provisions from the IMCS.

3.12.10.1 SERVICE FACTOR

The service factor of the motors shall be selected by the BUILDER appointed supplier
considering the operation cycle of the driven equipment. All Motors that are intended for
continuous operation shall have the following service factors
• For NEMA motors service factor are to be minimum 1.15

PAGE 132 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• For IEC motors are to be S1 duty type

3.12.10.2 IP RATINGS
The IP rating of the Motors shall be as per the CLASS requirements.

3.12.10.3 MONITORING AND ALARMS AND CONTROL

Motors shall be provided with temperature detectors as required by CLASS regulations.
Motors can also be controlled by a local control station installed near the motor except for the
auxiliaries of large motors which are part of equipment packages. (E.g. lube pump of mud
pump, DW, etc.)

3.12.10.4 INSULATION CLASS

Insulation class of the motors shall be selected according to the CLASS requirements
considering rated withstand temperature of insulation, Temperature rise of the motor and the
ambient temperature of installation location.
Sufficient safety margin for local hotspots on the insulation shall be considered while selecting
the insulation class of the motor.

3.12.10.5 MANUFACTURER AND NAME PLATES

Motors shall be provided with name plates with all necessary technical data as per CLASS
requirements.

3.12.11 POWER SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

3.12.11.1 ACCESSIBILITY
All power system connections shall be accessible for proper tightening, inspection and for
future maintenance activities.

3.12.11.2 CONNECTION TORQUEING AND TORQUE MARKING

All bolted connections in the switchboard shall be tested for the tightening torque using a
torque wrench and shall be marked after testing. The connection shall be tightened based on
the recommended torque values from panel manufacturer.
All power bus bar connection joints are to be checked for its contact resistance and values are
to be recorded by Panel BUILDER.
Though all bolted connections are to be tested and marked by Panel BUILDER at factory,
sample tests shall be performed during factory acceptance tests.

3.12.12 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS

Batteries used in the VESSEL shall be suitable for use in Marine environment, maintenance
free, Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) batteries as far as practically possible.
Batteries installed in the VESSEL shall be placed in suitable enclosures with ingress protection
based on CLASS regulations.
At the time of vessel delivery, all batteries shall be less than six months old.

3.12.12.1 RADIO BATTERY SYSTEM

The 24 V DC battery system and charger for the main station GMDSS radio communication
console shall be installed in the central control room.
GMDSS batteries provide power to GMDSS equipment in case of VESSEL’s power supply
failure. GMDSS battery sizing shall comply with SOLAS.

PAGE 133 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.12.12.2 BATTERY LIGHTING SYSTEM

The aviation obstruction lights can be positioned at top of the gantries of revolving deck cranes
and at the tip of each crane boom and top of derrick
Obstruction lights shall be powered from emergency power of the VESSEL.

3.12.13 UPS POWER SYSTEMS

The following are requirements for systems design and equipment procurement for AC and
DC Uninterruptible Power Supply distribution. For the purposes of this section, UPS
(Uninterruptible Power Supply) includes UPS’s with DC voltage outputs as well as those UPS’s
with AC voltage output.
A UPS consists of an AC/DC converter (rectifier), a battery bank, a DC/AC converter (inverter),
and a controller.

3.12.13.1 SYSTEM GUIDELINES

The VESSEL shall have a Master UPS Distribution System consisting of two UPS units in
parallel with normal & emergency power supplies complete with static bypass switch. Including
interface with IMCS for status alarms.
1. Regulated, stable, distortion and noise-free power
2. Protection from momentary and short-term loss of mains power.

3.12.13.2 SYSTEMS FAULT TOLERANCE

Systems must be designed to avoid or minimize fault propagation. Distribution circuit breakers
should disconnect faulted loads at the point nearest to the fault.
Where equipment being supplied by a UPS is part of a critical VESSEL system or is defined
by CLASS as critical for VESSEL safety, in addition to the UPS connection it shall be provided
by a second source of power. This second source of power may be from a different UPS or
may be from the suitable vessel distribution network (most likely Emergency Power
Distribution).
Loss of the primary source of power shall result in automatic, bump less transfer to the backup
source of power.
Examples of vital vessel systems include, but are not limited to:
• Integrated Monitoring and Control System
• Fire & Gas Systems
• Emergency Shutdown System
• Drilling Control System
• Communication Systems
• Navigation Lights
• Helideck Lights
• Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX)
• Fixed Fire Fighting Systems
• Jacking Control Panel
3.12.13.3 DISTRIBUTION
All cables and all distribution panels shall be clearly identified as UPS feeds. This applies to
UPS power input feeder cables as well as output power cabling and distribution panels.
UPS loads generally shall be fed from a UPS in the same general area. UPS equipment is to
be distributed throughout the vessel as best fits the loads being serviced.

PAGE 134 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.12.13.4 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

All power distribution panels fed from UPS networks shall be clearly labelled as to the source
of power, and a label warning against terminating additional loads into the panel shall be
affixed.
AC UPS shall include a maintenance bypass switch that is external to, and separate from, the
UPS itself. The bypass switch shall be a static transfer switch. Its operation shall allow the
UPS to be removed in its entirety without interrupting power to the utilization equipment. The
status of the maintenance bypass shall be indicated on the IMCS, and an alarm provided when
the switch is in the bypass position.
Upon loss of output from the inverter of an AC UPS, whether due to inverter failure or loss of
DC input to the inverter or controller failure, output of the UPS shall automatically, without any
manual intervention of any kind, transfer to the input AC source if either of the two independent
sources is available. This requires that the input AC source voltage match the output AC Load
voltage in a bump less manner.
Each UPS shall be able to provide output voltage within system specifications at full rated load
for not less than 45 minutes, based upon the nameplate rating of the UPS, after a period of
five years in the design environment. This means that when the batteries are new full rated
load will be available for more than 45 minutes.
Actual connected load on any UPS shall not exceed 75% of nameplate rating, including all
loads that could be supplied, even if they are not supplied in normal operation from the UPS
being evaluated. Spare circuits connected to the UPS shall be assumed to be loaded at full
circuit design capacity in all cases.
UPS monitoring and alarms shall be provided on the IMCS and include but not be limited to,
alarms for each of the following:
• UPS Health
• UPS on Bypass
• Battery Fault
Whether a UPS is operating on its normal or its emergency AC input, the batteries shall
continue to be charged and the output shall continue to be taken from the inverter output.
The AC input, and the battery charger section of the UPS shall be capable of charging the
UPS batteries at their maximum charge rate, which shall be no less than the C/10 charge rate,
while at the same time providing full rated UPS output, when the charging circuit power is
being supplied from either of the two (2) power inputs.
Batteries to be sealed, maintenance free lead-acid type. At the time of vessel delivery, all
UPS batteries shall be less than six (6) months old.
UPS vendors now commonly provide a serial or network option which, in addition to much of
the above, also provides additional information on UPS and battery condition. Where such is
available as a standard feature, it shall be evaluated on a case by case basis for connection
to the IMCS system.

3.12.13.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient compartments for both the Main UPS Unit(s)
and the UPS battery bank(s). The location of the compartment(s) shall be at optimum
locations in relation to one and other and in relation to the equipment for which the various the
UPS are to provide power.
Any Main UPS unit compartment shall be of sufficient size and arrangement so as to safely
accommodate the unit, allow safe access for inspection and maintenance, and if necessary,

PAGE 135 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

the removal and replacement of the unit. The compartment shall be provided with suitable
and sufficient HVAC arrangements to maintain the OEM environmental operating parameters.
UPS battery bank location(s) shall be arranged with due cognizance to the ventilation
requirements, manual handling requirements, and any associated limitations. Where
necessary mechanical handling aids shall be provided. Each UPS battery location shall be
provided, in the immediate vicinity, the Battery PPE kits described in Section 3.21.3 Personal
Protective Equipment.
The numbers and locations of UPS unit and UPS battery rooms shall be approved by BUYER
during the project ‘detailed design’ phase.

3.13 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient hydraulic systems to power the VESSEL
hydraulic equipment in accordance with the OEM requirements, the Rules Codes and
Standards stipulated within Section 1.0 of the CTS and Contract Plans.
The hydraulic systems shall include but not be limited to, all HPUs pipework, electrical, local
controls and interfaces to the remote controls.
One (1) dedicated HPU’s shall be provided for the drill floor equipment. The Hydraulic Power
Units shall include but not be limited to, the following features:
• Stainless steel fluid reservoir with clean-out covers
• Filler breather
• Magnetic flipper type level gauge
• Temperature indicator
• Drain valve
• Cooling baffles and necessary couplings installed to accommodate suction and return
connections for the system
• Low/ High Oil Level’ alarm
• Low / High Oil Temperature’ alarm
• Local start-stop for each electric motor shall be provided, also controlled from Driller
and Assistant Driller chairs
• HPU skid drip pan and lifting eyes shall be provided as part of the skid package.
• Emergency stops on the units
3.13.1 DRILL FLOOR HPU
One (1) HPU shall be provided at the drill floor to meet the hydraulic requirements of the Drill
floor equipment. The HPU shall have a minimum total capacity of 300 GPM at system design
pressure of 3,000 psi and shall be designed to be able to operate the Drill floor equipment
under normal operating conditions with two (2) pumps on standby. One (1) 9 port hydraulic
distribution manifold shall be provided at the drill floor.

PAGE 136 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14 DRILLING SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT

3.14.1 DRILL FLOOR LAYOUT AND SYSTEMS
The BUILDER shall provide the Drill floor layout with the drilling systems and equipment in
accordance with the Specification and the Contract Plans. However, whereas the functional
design of the systems described herein is accurate, some data may need to be adjusted in
accordance with selected manufacturer’s detailed specifications referred to in Section 6 of this
Specification.
The drilling systems and equipment to be provided by the BUILDER include, but shall not be
limited to, the following:
• Drilling control and monitoring system
• Hydraulic system
• Hoisting system
• Pipe handling system
• Service Access Basket (Optional for Drillfloor)
• Zone Management System
• BOP and Well Control System
• BOP handling system
• Conductor Tensioning Unit
• Winches
• Drill String and Down Hole Equipment
• Hoses
• Base Oil System
• Drill Water System
• Brine System
• Bulk System
• LP mud/ Mud treatment System
• HP mud and cement System
The design and build of the Drill floor layout shall be in line with the Specification and shall be
safe and efficient to operate with reduced risk for slip and trip hazards, dropped objects and
mechanical clashes due to equipment running simultaneously. Equipment interfaces between
vendors and suppliers should be optimized and kept consistent by combining package
components described in this Section to a limited number of OEMs. Red zones and zones
with increased risk to personnel shall be clearly marked as per OEM recommendation and
BUYER approval. Physically barriers by means of safety gates, rails or bumpers shall be
utilized to direct and indicate the safe passage and area of work and to prevent inadvertent
passage of personnel into red zones or the path of operating machinery.

3.14.2 DRILLING CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION

The VESSEL shall be provided with a Drilling Instrumentation and Control System which
comprises of the following as a minimum:
• Integrated Drilling Control and Monitoring System.
• Drilling Information Recording and Management System
• Drilling Fluids Monitoring System
• CCTV System
• Drillers Talkback System
• Drillers Cabin with Chairs, Controls, Communications, etc.
• Interfaces to the Power Management System
• Drilling Equipment data logger and data historian

PAGE 137 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Provision for Remote monitoring / Diagnostics support including firewalls and Cyber
Security provisions as necessary
3.14.2.1 INTEGRATED DRILLING CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM
The Integrated Drilling Control System shall be used for managing, controlling, and monitoring
rig drill floor equipment in independent and activity-based operations. The system shall be
designed to allow operators to focus on drilling, tripping, and stand-building processes by
providing an efficient and intuitive rig floor command center. The system shall be interactive
using color-graphic data and control screens viewed on any of the touchscreen monitors (HMI)
integrated into the operator workstations. These touchscreen monitors shall allow the Drillers
to supervise and control all drilling-related functions. The touchscreen monitors shall provide
activity-based screens for processes such as drilling and tripping as well as equipment specific
screens. The system shall incorporate alarms, events logging, trending and diagnostic
facilities for the complete drilling system including drilling fluids system with display and
annunciation of selected and prioritized alarms and events so as not to overload the operators
with non-critical status information.
The system shall be designed for high-configurability and redundancy whereby no single point
failure of control network or control equipment shall cause loss of control functions. A suitable
and sufficient number of UPS, with regard to capacity and redundancy, shall be provided.
Each UPS shall include a maintenance bypass switch and shall have dual sources of power
to provide bump less automatic switchover.
The system shall incorporate monitoring, control and alarms for the Drilling Variable
Frequency Drives including power management functions to selectively limit drilling power
demand based on available total VESSEL power.
The system shall be capable of sharing relevant information as required to the Drilling
Information Recording System, Integrated Monitoring and Control System and other Third-
Party Systems.
The system shall be modular based to ease future system additions and allow incorporation
of automated stand building, tripping and drilling processes.
The system shall consist of but not limited to the following:
• Sit down Workstations with Touch Screens – for Driller
• Sit down Workstations with Touch Screens – for Assistant Driller
• AC Draw Works Control
• Top Drive Control including soft torque function
• Auxiliary Tool Control
• Mud Pumps Control including synchronization and Local Control
• VFD Power Management
• Automated Roughneck Control
• Pipe Racker Control
• Fingerboard Control
• Zone Management / Anti Collision System
• Drill Floor Shut Down with Interface to ESD
3.14.2.2 DRILLING INFORMATION RECORDING AND MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
The Drilling information recording, and management system shall collect information from
various drilling equipment sensors to provide an overall picture of various drilling related
processes. It shall have a convenient graphical user interface and shall be highly
customizable. The system shall be configurable to display data needed for specific rig
operations, shall operate as a single interface, allowing rig personnel to access historical
information, and communicate with other displays on the VESSEL.

PAGE 138 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The system shall include the following equipment, sensors and functions as a minimum:
• MD / TOTCO Mud watch system or equivalent
• Workstations at Company Man Office, OIM Office, Drillers Chair, Assistant Drillers
Chair
• Output available in Well Information Transfer System (WITS) Format
• Mud Pit /Shaker Pit Level and Volumes
• Brine and Base Oil Tank Level
• Mud Pump Stroke Counters
• Mud Pump Pressure
• Trip Tank Level
• Mud Flow Rate
• Pressure measurement – Choke, Kill, Mud Standpipes, Cement Manifold
• Draw works Encoder
• Deadline Anchor Load
• Top Drive and Rotary Table Torque
• RPM
• Weight on Bit
• Rate of Penetration
• Hook Load
• Slips Status on / off (if available)
• Report Generation facilities in IADC format and END USER format
3.14.2.3 DRILLING EQUIPMENT DATA LOGGER AND DATA HISTORIAN
The drilling equipment shall be provided with OEM supplied Data Logger and Data Historian.
The Data Logger shall capture, store and allow access to, control system network traffic, live
and historical data from ALL data tags, including raw and calculated variables derived in the
Drilling Control System. The system shall be provided with an interface for transfer of data in
OPC UA (Object Linking and Embedding for Process Control - Unified Architecture) compliant
format for data acquisition, analysis and condition-based monitoring and maintenance
systems. A data map shall be provided including tag descriptions and Meta data information
for all variables.

3.14.2.4 DRILLING FLUIDS MONITORING SYSTEM

The Drilling Fluid Monitoring System shall be an overall monitoring system for the Drilling Fluid
Management. The system may be incorporated in the Integrated Drilling Control and
Monitoring System as a module or may be stand alone with appropriate interfaces. The system
shall primarily be monitoring only with manual control of valves.
The system shall include the supply of Level Sensors, Pressure Sensors etc. as defined in the
Functional Design Specification – Mud Control System and shall include, but not be limited to,
the following sub-systems, functions and features:
• Brine System
• Base Oil System
• Mud Bulk System including Pressure, Level and weight monitoring of Bulk Mud Tanks
and Surge Tanks
• Low Pressure Mud System
• Mud Treatment System
• HP Mud and Cement System
• Interface to Integrated Drilling Control System and IMCS as required.
• HMI for Control Room Environment. Location to be finalized during detail design.

PAGE 139 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Two (2) rugged type, Hazardous area rated HMI. Location to be finalized during detail
design
3.14.2.5 CCTV SYSTEM
The VESSEL shall be equipped with an IP based CCTV system for providing visual monitoring
services of the various identified areas on the VESSEL which shall have following functions
as a minimum:
• Transmit real-time video
• Record & Retrieve video image
• Simultaneous recording and playback
The CCTV system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• CCTV monitors with Controllers shall be installed at Drillers & Assistant Drillers Chair
(Touch screen type), Central Control & Radio Room (Console Type), OIM Office
(Desktop type) and Company Man Office (Desktop type).
• Standalone Crane CCTV system
• The Crane CCTV camera system shall be a standalone system with monitor and
controller installed inside Crane Cabin and a camera at the crane boom.
• CCTV cameras shall be High Definition IP based, Flameproof/Weatherproof
construction, PTZ type. The CCTV system shall have an Administration Terminal and
Video Management System which shall provide management, monitoring, and control
of the entire system
CCTV control stations shall have facility for the following controls:
• Capability to select individual camera for viewing
• Remote zoom, remote pan and tilt control of cameras
• Selection of pre-set positions for each camera
• Priority control setting
• Control of Wipe / Wash of Cameras
• Camera selection shall allow up to 4 cameras on screen
• Brightness control
• Contrast control
• Color control
• Playback control
• On/Off and stand-by control
CCTV cameras with Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Wiper and Wash capabilities shall be installed to provide
video coverage of the following areas as a minimum:
• Bow towing gear handling station
• Drill Floor
• Crown
• Drawworks
• Fingerboards
• Pipe Handling
• Mud Treatment
• Bulk Handling
• Moonpool
• Mud Pumps
• Engine Room
• Main Deck Port and Starboard
• Lifeboats Port and Starboard
• Under Helideck facing forward
• All leg markings

PAGE 140 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.2.6 TALKBACK SYSTEM

The Driller’s talkback system is intended to provide direct open communication between
various personnel involved in the drilling operations. The system shall enable duplex voice
communication at both calling and called party stations. The talkback system on the VESSEL
shall consist of the following equipment as a minimum:
• Talkback Central Cabinet - located in Drillers Cabin / LER or CCR
• Talkback Unit for Driller - Mounted on Driller’s Chair complete with foot switch
• Talkback Unit for Assistant Driller - Mounted on Assistant Driller’s Chair complete with
foot switch
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (two) 2 Exd Speaker for Derrick complete with hands free facility
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (two) 2 Exd Speakers for Drill Floor
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (two) 2 Exd Speaker for Moon pool BOP area
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (one) 1 Exd Speaker for Shaker Area
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (one) 1 Exd Speaker for Mud Pit Room
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (two) 2 Exd Speaker for Mud Pump Room
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (one) 1 Exd Speaker for Cement Unit
• Exd Talkback Unit w/ (one) 1 Exd Speaker for Well Logging Unit
3.14.2.7 EMERGENCY MARINE TALKBACK SYSTEM
BUILDER shall provide a dedicated Emergency Marine Talk Back System with simultaneous
voice communications. The specification of the system and the location of the talk back
stations shall be in accordance with CLASS requirements.

3.14.3 DRILLER’S CABIN

The Driller’s Cabin shall be ergonomically designed and outfitted with due cognizance to
‘Human Factors’ so as to minimize unnecessary stress having the potential to affect the
judgement and performance of the operators. The combination of the drillers cabin ‘design’
and ‘placement on the drill floor’ shall assure the best possible line of sight with regard to the
operating envelopes of the drill floor equipment
The design of the Drillers cabin shall include, but not be limited to:
• Two (2) Drilling Control chairs c/w joystick and touch screen controls
• Two (2) means of escape
• One (1) BOP Control Panel
• One (1) Choke and Kill Control Panel
• Two (2) Talkback stations
• One (1) Emergency Marine Talkback station
• One (1) Critical Action Panel
• Equipment Control cabinets
• All glass panels shall be made of shatter-proof safety glass
• Overhead glass panels sloped downward toward well centre
• Heavy duty crash barrier protection bars
• Robust mesh grilles on all glass panels
• Electric window wiper system with local controls and operable from the driller and
assistant driller HMI screens
• Sunscreens and blinds
• Sound proofing to reduce noise to below the limit stipulated in Section 2.0 of this CTS
• Fire and Gas detection
• PAGA

PAGE 141 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• ESD
• Telephone system
• Internal (dimmable) and External Lighting
• Climate Control
3.14.3.1 DRILLERS CHAIR ASSISTANT DRILLER CHAIRS
The Driller’s Chair and the Assistant Drillers Chair shall be almost identical with regard to
specification and functionality. Both chairs shall be designed and programmed to be capable
of operating the mechanized drill floor equipment, and to display operational drilling system
parameters, CCTV, and equipment and system status etc. Fine detail with regard to the
functionality of each chair and displays shall be as agreed with the BUYER.
The chairs shall be comfortable for long duration use so as to minimize unnecessary stress
having the potential to affect the judgement and performance of the operators.
The chairs shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Fully adjustable flat, widescreen, high definition, touch screens
• Left and Right Joystick controls
• Ergonomic design for ‘Sitting or Standing’ operation
• Fully adjustable seating position with all necessary armrests and footrests
• Fully adjustable to suit range of body types, i.e. mesomorph, endomorph or ectomorph
• Individual user ‘chair setup’ memory
3.14.3.2 DRILLERS CABIN PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM
The Driller’s Cabin shall include an independent Purge and Pressurization HVAC system that
shall be appropriately sized for the heat dissipation requirements of the cabin. The HVAC
system components and function shall be suitable for the hazardous area classification in
which it is located.

3.14.4 HOISTING EQUIPMENT

All necessary elements of the Hoisting system shall incorporate secondary retention/dropped
object prevention and meet all related CLASS notation requirements.

3.14.4.1 DRAWWORKS
The BUILDER shall provide an automated drawworks hoisting system for use with 1 ¾”-drill
line and ALL drawworks components shall be sized accordingly. All components of the draw
works shall safely combine, and work in conjunction so as to provide the functionality
described, in detail, within the Contract Plans.
The drawworks shall incorporate a crown saver mechanism such as a 'Crown-O-Matic'. The
maximum possible capacity shall be 750 short tons.
3.14.4.1.1 Drawworks Frame
The main drawworks components shall be provided mounted on a structural steel frame,
suitable for use in a saliferous offshore environment. The foundation bolts shall be readily
accessible to allow periodic inspection.
The frame shall be provided with a four (4)-point lifting arrangement of an appropriate safe
working load. The frame shall serve as the mounting platform for the hoisting motors, drum
assembly, brake assemblies, lubrication system, brake control system, Junction boxes and
cable routing. In addition, the frame shall include drip pan with a drain point incorporating a
valve and plug.

PAGE 142 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.4.1.2 Drawworks Motors

Total motor horsepower shall be:
Minimum 3000 horsepower derived from AC electric motors, each with integral forced air
cooling
3.14.4.1.3 Drum Assembly
The drawworks drum assembly shall incorporate:
• LeBus grooved sleeves
• Wear plates
• Keyless hubs on each end
• Drill line drum anchor point
3.14.4.1.4 Water Cooled Brake Assembly
The drawworks brake assembly shall incorporate:
• Two (2) mechanical spring/pneumatic multi-plate fail safe disc brakes, one at each end
of the drum shaft.
• Parking brake facility
• Emergency brake facility
• A minimum brake air supply pressure of 135 psi shall be provided
3.14.4.1.5 Brake cooling
Brake cooling system, or equivalent cooling system, shall provide a minimum coolant flow of
450 GPM (based on a 70/30 water/glycol mixture) and comprise:
• One (1) rectangular, closed-steel tank with a minimum capacity of 22 bbl (924 gallon);
seal welded and incorporating level indication, and drain. The tank shall be affixed to
a heavy I-beam oilfield type skid with four lifting eyes of appropriate SWL
• Two centrifugal pumps piped to allow 100% pump standby
• Each pump set to provide a suitable and sufficient flow rate
• The heat exchangers shall be marine type each having the standard In-place cleaning
facility.
• Tanks shall be fitted with high and low level alarms as well as high and low temperature
alarms.
3.14.4.1.6 Gear Box Assembly
Power from two (2) hoisting motors either side of the drum shaft shall be transmitted via two
(2) single speed double reduction, double helical gear assemblies, each rated at 3000
horsepower. The gears and bearings of the gearboxes shall be are lubricated via a pressurized
lubrication system, one circuit for each gearbox.
3.14.4.1.7 Noise Reduction arrangements
Noise reduction shall be provided, as necessary, in order for the Drawworks to meet the noise
level criteria stipulated in Section 2.0 of this CTS.
3.14.4.1.8 Sensor Modules
The Drawworks shall be equipped with ALL sensors required to function as per the Contract
Plans.
3.14.4.1.9 Air Intensifiers and Receiver
Air intensifier/receiver shall be provided as necessary to meet the air demands of the
Drawworks. Air Intensifiers shall be fabricated so that individual pressure regulators with the

PAGE 143 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

intensifier system can be individually removed and repaired or replaced without shutting down
the draw works.

3.14.4.2 CROWN BLOCK ASSEMBLY

The crown block assembly shall be rated at 750 short tons and comprise, crown block, fast
line and deadline components, all of which shall be sized for 1 ¾” drill line:
• Six (6) 68” Crown block sheaves
• Two (2) 68” Fast line sheaves
• Two (2) 68” Deadline sheaves
The Crown Block, Fast-Line and Dead-Line sheave assemblies shall incorporate:
• Grease lines coming from the sheave bearings to a remote greasing station that is
provided with safe access.
• Guards and Anti-jump bars for the drill line
Fast line sheaves, deadline sheaves, and all necessary deflector sheaves, guides and rollers
etc., shall be so positioned as to ensure the optimum drill line routing and performance.

3.14.4.3 TRAVELING BLOCK

The Travelling Block shall be rated for 750 short tons, use the same Retract Uni-Dolly system
as the Top Drive, and comprise the following components, grooved, where necessary, for 1
¾” drill line.
The travelling block assembly shall incorporate:
• Seven (7) 68” sheaves
• A lifting eye on top of the Traveling Block with a four (4) part shackle for hanging-off
the Top drive assembly
• Two (2) becket pins
• Recessed grease nipples
• Grease lines on the Travelling Block and Dolly from a common manifold located on the
dolly.
• Safe access for the change out the dolly track rollers (wheels) without total removal
and strip down of the dolly assembly.
3.14.4.4 TOP DRIVE
One (1) Single AC-motor driven top drive drilling system to be installed on guide rails running
vertically within the derrick, model TDS-8SA or equivalent on retractable dolly.
Top drive assembly shall incorporate:
• An integrated swivel gooseneck
• S-pipe
• Deublin Wash pipe
• Counter balance assembly
• Pipe handler with link adapter
• Link tilt with a cylinder actuated stop (at the derrickman and mousehole distances)
• Upper IBOP safety valve
• Lower IBOP safety valve
• Saver sub
• Hydraulic elevators
• Power hydraulic/pneumatic hook-up ports for elevators etc.
• Soft-Torque or vendor equivalent
• OEM Maintenance platform(s)

PAGE 144 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Full installation of the top drive system to include - hydraulic and pneumatic hook-up, service
loops for cables and hoses to the top drive unit.
3.14.4.4.1 SERVICE LOOPS
Service loop(s) shall be protected by an abrasion resistant sheath.

3.14.4.5 ROTATING DEADLINE ANCHOR

The deadline anchor shall incorporate the following features:
• Derrick mounted
• Rated for 72.5 mt (160,000 LBS)
• Sized for 1 ¾” drill line
• Compatible with Standard or Poly Vinyl Fluoride (PVF) coated drilline
• Electronic type compression load cell
The deadline anchor shall be capable of fully rotating around a central shaft during line slipping
and back-spooling operations. The deadline anchor shall incorporate suitable and sufficient
proprietary roller assemblies for both slipping and back spooling operations.

3.14.4.6 DRILL LINE AND SPOOLER

Drill Line Spooler shall be pneumatically or hydraulically driven gear ring & pinion type.
The capacity of the Drill Line Spooler shall be 10,000ft of 1 ¾”, 6x26 IWRC, Bridon Dryform
Wire and shall incorporate a stainless-steel top guard.

3.14.5 PIPE HANDLING SYSTEM

The VESSEL shall be provided with a semi-automated pipe handling system, requiring little
manual intervention from crews. The system shall be capable of conventional well centre
operations. The machines shall be remote control from both the Driller and the Assistant
Driller Chairs, or via a control manifold on the drill floor.
The system shall be capable of picking up tubulars to the vertical at the drill floor, make up
stands and rack back, or run in the hole.
The system shall be designed to handle Range II tubulars from 3 1/2” to 9 3/4”.
The design of the system shall impart the maximum degree of flexibility and redundancy
between the machines to be provided.
The pipe handling system shall include but not be limited to the following main components.

3.14.5.1 VERTICAL PIPE RACKER

A Vertical Pipe Racker shall be provided, certified for operation in a Zone II Hazardous area.
The Vertical Pipe Racker shall be capable of transferring tubulars back and forth between the
setback area, well centre, and the mousehole for tripping.
The Pipe Racker shall be designed to handle tubulars to include, but not be limited to:
• Drill pipe stands:
• Range II singles
• Range II drill collars
• Casing Joints
Pipe Racker shall be supplied with suitable Pick up Elevator and in addition, an Upper Gripper
head to allow the lifting of materials.
Pipe Racker shall be capable of handling 3-1/2” to 6-5/8” Drillpipe and up to 9-3/4” OD Drill
Collars

PAGE 145 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

An air-cooled resistor bank shall be provided for the regenerative braking of the electric
motors.

3.14.5.2 FINGERBOARDS
The fingerboard system design shall be as agreed with BUYER and shall be capable of racking
sufficient Drillpipe, Drill Collars, and Tubing to meet the drilling operating criteria stipulated in
Section 2.0 of this CTS and any END USER requirements.
The fingerboard latches shall be electrically controlled and pneumatically operated.
All latches shall have drops retention in place.
3.14.5.2.1 DRILL PIPE FINGERBOARDS
Drill pipe fingerboards shall accommodate the following as a minimum:
Drill pipe size Number of stands / Capacity
4”-6-5/8" O.D. Drill Pipe; Min of 30.000 ft
93 ft. length; 966,977 lbs.
9-1/2" O.D. Drill Collar; Min of 10 stands
90 ft length; 190,800 lbs

3.14.5.3 ROTARY TABLE

BUILDER shall provide a hydraulically driven rotary table with a static load bearing capacity
of 750 short tons and a torque capacity 45,000 ft-lbs.
The center bore of the main bushing shall have a standard API 49 ½” bore and accommodate
the adapter ring (49 ½” to 37 ½”).
The rotary table shall be provided with the following insert bowls:
• Bowl No 1 - 11-3/4" to 13-3/8" for 16" Slip
• Bowl No 2 - 9-5/8" to 10-3/4" for 16" Slip
• Bowl No 3 - 2-3/8" to 8-5/8" for 16" Slip
A removeable recessed cover plate shall be provided that will not interfere with the iron
roughneck rails. Removable guardrails shall be provided to prevent personnel access when
the rotary table is ‘open hole’.

3.14.5.4 IRON ROUGHNECK

BUILDER shall provide a track mounted iron roughneck.
The Iron Roughneck shall be capable of being operated from either the driller and/or assistant
driller chairs, or a portable wireless controller.
• One (1) NOV AR-160 or equivalent
• Two (2) Wireless controllers
3.14.5.5 HYDRAULIC CATHEADS
A Hydraulic Cathead system shall be provided, the components of which shall be rated and
positioned in accordance with the Contract Plans. The catheads shall be capable of being
operated from either the driller and/or assistant driller chairs or a cathead control panel on the
drill floor. The cathead system shall comprise:
• Two (2) Hydraulic Catheads with 42' Wire Rope
• Cathead Control Panel
• Drill floor mounted control panel to include:
• Selection switches for Cathead #1 or #2
• Pull force setting
• Pay out or pull

PAGE 146 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Torque gauge & status indicator

• Lamp check
3.14.5.6 MOUSEHOLE
A fixed mousehole shall be provided suitable for making up Range II or Range III pipe. The
mousehole shall extend 60’ below the drill floor. The position of the mousehole shall be on
the rig centreline between the Rotary Table and the V door, however the precise mounting
position and specifications shall be in accordance with Contract Plans. BUILDER shall design
and provide for safe and efficient temporary removal of the mousehole assembly (including
the slips). BUILDER shall make provisions for a secure vertical storage location for the
mousehole within the confines of the Derrick.
The mousehole package shall include, but not be limited to, the following ancillaries:
• One (1) Main Tube
• One (1) Interface box
• One (1) Manual Slips
• One (1) Power Slips
• One (1) High impact shock absorber
• One (1) Hoisting/Lifting yoke
• One (1) Prepared for Foxhole Slip Assembly
3.14.5.6.1 Mousehole Power Slips
The Mousehole Power slips shall comprise:
Pneumatic or hydraulic floor mounted slip assembly with 3 ½” to 14" OD tubular capacity
• One (1) Standard Inserts 5" to 9-3/4"
• One (1) Insert Kit 2-3/8” to 3-1/2”
• One (1) Insert Kit 3-1/2” to 8-1/4”
• One (1) Insert Kit 9-5/8” to 14” (Six (6) assemblies)
3.14.5.7 TONG PULL BACK POST
Three (3) Removable Pull-Back Post shall be provided on the Drill floor as follows:
• Two (2) shall be positioned at the V-Door (One (1) either side of Centreline
• One (1) shall be positioned on the Drill floor to use in conjunction with the Hydraulic
Catheads.
Each Pull-Back Post shall be rated for 10 short tons and shall have two fixed pad eyes and
one swivel pad eye.

3.14.5.8 WELL CENTRE POWER SLIPS

BUILDER shall provide one (1) Power slip to be used in conjunction with the Rotary Support
Table. The slips shall have a capacity of 750 short tons and be capable of handling tubulars
ranging from 2-3/8” to 20”. The slips shall be equipped with replaceable slips and insert
carriers to handle the various styles and sizes of tubular. The slip assembly shall be capable
of accommodating 4", 4-1/2", 5", 5-1/2" and 6-5/8" drill pipe.
A suitable and sufficient greasing system shall be provided as per OEM recommendations.

3.14.5.9 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS

One (1) hydraulic operated elevator with a maximum capacity of 500 short tons shall be
provided. The elevators shall be compatible with either 500 or 750 short ton links. The
elevator shall be provided with rotators and bushings for 3-1/2", 4" and 4- 1/2" EU drill pipe, 4-
1/2", 5" and 6-5/8" IEU drill pipe, and 5-1/2" IF IEU drill pipe.

PAGE 147 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The elevator shall be prepared for interlocking with the power slips The elevator shall be
capable, with the use of a rotary actuator, of being tilted to pick up pipe from the V-door,
eliminating the need for single joint elevators.
3.14.5.10 PNEUMATIC MUD BUCKET
A Pneumatically operated mud bucket shall be provided.
The mud bucket shall be designed to handle pipe size of 2-7/8” to 7” OD drill pipe and inserts
of 3-1/2", 4", 4-1/2", 5", 5-1/2" and 6-5/8" shall be provided.

3.14.6 ZONE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Zone Management System designed so
as to eliminate the possibility of any elements of drilling travelling equipment and pipe handling
equipment colliding with one and other or with static drill floor and derrick components.
In addition to the avoidance of equipment/equipment collisions the system shall also provide
equipment/personnel collision avoidance so far as is reasonably practicable.
The Zone Management System shall include, but not be limited to, the following equipment:
• Travelling Block/Top drive
• Link Tilt/Elevators
• Service Access Basket (Optional)
• Vertical Piperacker
• Iron Roughneck
• Casing Stabbing Arm

Because ‘Zone Management’ is so critical, the BUILDER shall demonstrate to the BUYER,
using animations derived from an accurate 3-D model, that the design of the system is robust
and ‘fit for purpose’. All pipe handling scenarios shall be covered, and the system design shall
be confirmed as ‘fit for purpose’ and ‘clash free’ prior to commencement of any associated
construction activities with the potential for ‘rework’ based upon adverse 3D model/animation
findings.
In addition, ‘line of sight’ pipe handling animations from the Driller and Assistant driller chairs
shall be provided so as to confirm the requirements stipulated in this CTS.

3.14.7 WELL CONTROL SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient well control system in accordance with
the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated in Section 2 of this CTS.
Primary Well Control shall be provided by equipment that shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
• BOP Stacks
• Diverter
• BOP/Diverter Control System
• BOP Test stump
• Test Equipment and Tools
• Choke and Kill Manifold
• Choke and Kill Control system
3.14.7.1 BOP STACK
BUILDER shall provide a 13-5/8" BOP stack of which, all components shall be to NACE MR-
01-75 standard and shall be API monogrammed. The BOP shall be stowed on then test stump
platform.

PAGE 148 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

A test stump, test equipment, maintenance equipment, and spare blocks shall be provided.
The overall BOP stacks height shall be configured to suit the drill floor height limitation.
Platforms shall be provided, as recommended by the OEM, to allow safe access to all areas
of the BOP and its parts where maintenance such as changing of rams etc. will be required.
3.14.7.1.1 The 13-5/8"BOP Stack
A 13-5/8” x 10,000 psi BOP Stack shall be provided consisting of:
• One (1) 13-5/8" x 10,000 psi Annular preventer
• One (1) 13-5/8" Double Pipe Ram preventer with 4 1/16” side outlets (Comes with one
pipe ram at upper cavity & one Shear Ram at bottom cavity)
• One (1) 13-5/8" Mud Cross with 4 1/16” outlets for Choke and Kill line assemblies that
shall be installed between ram assemblies
• One (1) 13-5/8" Double Pipe Ram preventer with 4 1/16” outlets (Pipe Rams in both
the cavities)
• Choke & kill spacer spools, valves and other accessories for the BOP stacks

3.14.7.1.2 ANNULAR DIVERTER

• One (1) 30" 1000 psi Annular Diverter as per Saudi Aramco Well Control Manual
• One (1) 21-1/4" 2000 psi Annular diverter as per Saudi Aramco Well Control Manual
• One (1) 30” 1000psi, Mud Cross with two (2) 7-1/16” 2000 psi, and one (1) 3-1/8" 2000
psi outlet connection and HVR valves as per Saudi Aramco Well Control Manual
• One (1) 21-1/4” 2000psi, Mud Cross with two (2) 7-1/16” 2000 psi, and one (1) 3-1/8"
2000 psi outlet connection and HVR valves as per Saudi Aramco Well Control Manual
• One (1) diverter overboard piping

3.14.7.2 FIXED DIVERTER SYSTEM

BUILDER shall provide a fixed diverter system to include, but not be limited to, the following
components and features:
• One (1) KFDJ Big Bore type, 49-1/2” rotary table opening, 500 psi, hydraulic lockdown,
support housing (min bore 47") and diverter assembly (min bore 36.5") shall be
provided.
• One (1) 16" Mud return line
• Two (2) 16" Overboard lines (PORT and STBD)
• One (1) 4" Fill-up line
• One (1) 4" Test line
• One (1) solid outer packer, nitrile butadiene rubber (NBR), 30.75" bore to pack off 26"
to 30" OD tubular
• Minimum bore through diverter assembly without insert packer shall be 36.5"
• The diverter shall meet API standard (RP 64, 2nd Edition)
• Insert packers, overshoot spools and packers
• Handling tools
The controls for the remote operated functions shall be installed in the driller’s cabin.

3.14.7.3 BOP & DIVERTER CONTROL SYSTEM

BUILDER shall provide a BOP/Diverter Control unit designed for operating a 13 5/8” x 10,000
psi BOP stack, at a temperature range of 0 - 50 deg C. The BOP control unit shall be located
within the cantilever and diverter control unit shall be located on rig floor..

PAGE 149 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All hydraulic piping and ancillaries between the BOP control unit and the BOP and Diverter
shall be provided. The BOP Hydraulic system shall be compatible with water based hydraulic
fluid. The accumulator shall be equipped with an air source from the cold start air compressor
for emergency operation.
Remote Control panels shall be provided at the drill floor and the OIM/Toolpusher office. HCR
valves on the choke line kill line, and the C&K manifold shall be capable of being operated via
both the main accumulator unit, and the remote panels.
BOP and Diverter Control system shall include but not be limited to, the following:
• Hydraulic power unit with reservoir
• Hydraulic control manifold module
• Bottles racks (Accumulators) for BOP stack configuration
• Bottles racks (Accumulators) for Diverter system
• Diverter control manifold unit
• Drillers control Panel and Tool pusher’s Control Panel
• Interface panels and UPS
The Hydraulic power unit (HPU) shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) stainless-steel reservoir
• Two (2) Electric - Triplex pump modules (as Primary & Secondary pumping sources)
• Suitable and sufficient pneumatic pumps as tertiary pumping system (as emergency
backup source)
• Rated at 3,000 psi working pressure.

A dedicated UPS unit with battery backup time as per API 16D requirements shall provide the
electrical power to the control system. UPS shall be suitable for installation in the safe area.

3.14.7.4 BOP TEST STUMPS

The following shall be provided:
Two (2) 10,000 psi Test Stump Assemblies suitable for 13-5/8" flange complete with ring
groove, to NACE MR-01-75 standard, API monogrammed, and 10,000 psi to 5,000 psi DSA ,
complete with, saver sub auto locking, with base plate and test port suitable for all BOPs and
Annulars.

3.14.7.5 TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

3.14.7.5.1 BOP Test Pump
The following shall be provided:
• One (1) BOP test pump unit rated for 15,000 psi for testing the BOP Stacks and Choke
& Kill Unit. The unit shall be electrically powered, rated in accordance with the
Hazardous area classification in which it is to be used, be provided on a single skid,
together with the control panel, and be complete with all necessary test hoses
3.14.7.5.2 Chart Recorder
The following shall be provided:
• One (1) Chart Recorder for use with the test pump suitable for the required pressure
recordings
3.14.7.5.3 Tools
The following shall be provided:
• One (1) hydraulic torque wrench set, suitable for BOP maintenance, complete with
HPU, sockets, and all necessary ancillaries
PAGE 150 OF 358
 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.7.5.4 Spares
The following spares shall be provided:
• Spare blocks on the pipe rams, shear rams and spare annular packer
3.14.7.6 CHOKE AND KILL MANIFOLD
One (1) 4 1/16“ 10,000 psi choke & kill manifold to NACE MR-01-75 standard and API
monogrammed, shall be provided to include, but not be limited to the following features:
• Upstream pressure rating of 10,000 psi
• Downstream rating of 5,000 psi
• API monogrammed split buffer chamber of 7-1/16” ID, 5,000 psi rating
• Two (2) hydraulic choke valves
• Two (2) manual choke valves
• Seven (7) hydraulically Actuated HCR gate valves

Connections to the manifold shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) direct line from HP mud standpipe manifold.
• One (1) direct line from HP cementing (pump) unit.
• Two (2) overboard line from buffer chamber routed overboard
• One (1) line from buffer chamber to trip tank via flow line.
• Two (2) lines from buffer chamber to MGS.
• One (1) line from buffer chamber to flare boom.
• One (1) Kill line to BOP stack
• One (1) emergency kill line to BOP stack
• Two (2) Choke lines to BOP stack
• One (1) Glycol Injection Unit
• Two (2) ¾” connections for glycol injection.
The choke, kill and emergency kill lines shall be made up of studded blocks and flanges all of
which shall be monogrammed as per API spec 6A.

3.14.7.7 CHOKE AND KILL CONTROL SYSTEM

A Choke and Kill Control System shall be provided to enable the remote operation and
monitoring of the Choke and Kill manifold and related equipment. The Choke and Kill Control
System shall include, but not be limited to the following features:
• Local Gauges / Gauge Panel
• Choke and Kill Remote Control Panel on the Drillers Cabin.
• HPU and Local Control Panel on the Drill Floor.
• Sensors and other Instruments.
All necessary, and required, valves shall be supplied with the C&K manifold.
The control of the HCR valves shall be from the BOP accumulator / BOP control panels.
During normal conditions, the hydraulic actuated chokes, shall be controlled by the driller from
the Choke and Kill Remote Control Panel. The Choke valve can also be controlled from the
Local Control Panel installed on Drill Floor.
3.14.7.7.1 Choke and Kill Remote Control Panel
The Choke and Kill control panel which shall be installed inside Driller’s cabin shall be capable
of monitoring and controlling various actuated chokes on the Choke and Kill manifold.
The panel shall have provisions to monitor / control the following:
• Choke Pressure

PAGE 151 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Kill Pressure
• Mud Standpipe A Pressure
• Mud Standpipe B Pressure
• Mud-Gas separator Pressure
• Choke / Kill Valves Open / Close Control
• Choke / Kill Valves Position Indicators
• Rig Air Pressure Indication
• Hydraulic Pressure Indication
• Mud Pump – A/B/C Stroke Counters
3.14.7.7.2 Local Choke and Kill Control Panel (LCP) / HPU
In addition to the control panel in the drillers cabin, there shall be a Local Control Panel.
The local control panel shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Zone - 2 hazardous area rated
• Suitably sized stainless steel (SS316) hydraulic oil reservoir
• Emergency hand pump
• Valve operating levers and solenoids
• Filters
• Gauges
• Fed from rig air system
The panel shall have provisions to monitor / control the following:
• Choke Pressure
• Kill Pressure
• Mud Standpipe A Pressure
• Mud Standpipe B Pressure
• Cement Manifold Pressure
• Choke / Kill Valves Open / Close Control
• Choke / Kill Valves Position Indicators
• Rig Air Pressure Indication
• Hydraulic Pressure Indication
• Mud Pump – A/B/C Stroke Counters
3.14.8 BOP HANDLING SYSTEM
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient BOP handling system in accordance with
the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated within Section 1.0 of this CTS, and the Contract
Plans. The handling system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Overhead chain hoists
• Lifting Rings
The system shall include two (2) 75 ton overhead chain hoist type BOP handling winches
mounted on rack and pinion drive system. Anti-static chains and trolley wheels shall be
utilized. Limit switches shall be provided at the ends of the BOP handling beams. Both the
hoisting and drive systems shall be pneumatically or hydraulically powered.
The design shall be such that, each hoist can be operated independently via independent
controls, or in tandem via a single control. Likewise, the rack and pinion drive systems shall
be capable of operating independently via independent controls, or in parallel via a single
control.
The BOP handling system shall allow for the loading and unloading of the BOP stack, whether
assembled as a stack, or in component form, whilst the cantilever is in the drilling position
without the necessity to skid the cantilever inboard.

PAGE 152 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.8.1 ANNULAR LIFTING RINGS

There shall be one (1) split annular lifting ring provided. The lifting rings shall be designed
with suitably rated pad eyes to allow the lifting rings to serve three different purposes.
1. To lift the annular
2. To provide BOP sea fastening anchorage
3. To provide the connection point for the secondary BOP Tensioning system

3.14.9 MATERIAL HANDLING UNDER CANTILEVER

As part of the project Material Handling Lifting Plan, the BUILDER, shall consider the
mechanism for handling of equipment in the Cellar deck area beneath the rig floor to include,
but not be limited to, the following:
• XMAS tree
• Risers
• Casing spools
• Valves and valve assemblies
• Mud crosses and well heads
• Client Third-Party Tools, Tubulars, Spools limited to the space and capacity of the
handling equipment
• BOP Stack
• Annular Diverter
When establishing the mechanism for such handling the following points shall be taken into
consideration:
• The overhead BOP hoists (2 x 75 MT) shall also be available for the handling of
wellhead equipment
• As per the winch section of this CTS, hydraulic utility winches (4 x 5 MT) and overhead
sheaves, shall be located to handle transportation of wellhead equipment
• A cargo hatch (3m x 4m approximately) shall be provided on the cantilever at the AFT
side of upper pipe rack area to provide clear access for transportation of equipment to
the wellhead platform
• BOP stowage platform shall be made foldable so that it can be kept folded back when
the BOP stack is at well centre, providing clear access to transport equipment to the
wellhead platform
• A big bore diverter system shall be installed in order to facilitate the transportation of
the majority of the wellhead spools through the diverter housing when the insert packer
has been removed
3.14.10 SERVICE ACCESS BASKET
Two (2) Service Access Baskets (SAB) shall be provided in the Cantilever, to lift and position
personnel.
The Service Access Baskets shall be hydraulically driven, with hydraulic pressure being
provided from the hydraulic system, and shall be incorporated in the Zone Management
System.
The SAB shall comprise:
• Telescopic access basket two (2) man capacity
• Onboard controls
• Deck mounted remote control panel
• Accumulator power for back-up and emergency parking and egress
• Emergency stop
• Emergency escape system

PAGE 153 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Basic Specifications:
• Safe working load 300 kg
• Boom slew 180 deg
• Tilt angle 120 deg
• Outreach 11.5 m
• Telescopic stroke 5m
• Area classification Zone 1
3.14.11 HOSES FOR DRILLING SYSTEMS
The BUILDER shall supply all hoses for the VESSEL in accordance with the detailed hose
register to be developed as detailed in CTS and shall include, but not be limited to, the
following hoses:
• Control hoses
• Cement Hoses
• Mud Hoses
• Mud Rotary Hoses
• Cement Rotary Hoses
• Choke and Kill Hoses
3.14.11.1 CONTROL HOSES
BUILDER shall provide a complete set of control hoses that shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
• Twelve (12) Flexible Rubber Hose, Wire Reinforced Rubber, Oil Resistant, 3000 psi
Max. WP @ 55°C, Min. Burst Pressure - 4 x Max. WP, 1" ID, Fig. 602 Alloy Steel
Female Hammer Union x Quick Release Coupling Ends, Fire Resistant
• Two (2) Flexible Rubber Hose, Wire Reinforced Rubber, Oil Resistant, 3000 psi Max.
WP @ 55°C, Min. Burst Pressure - 4 x Max. WP, 2" ID, Fig. 602 Alloy Steel Female
Hammer Union x Quick Release Coupling Ends, Fire Resistant
• Two (2) Flexible Rubber Hose, Wire Reinforced Rubber, Oil Resistant, 3000 psi Max.
WP @ 55°C, Min. Burst Pressure - 4 x Max. WP, 1-1/2" ID, Fig. 602 Alloy Steel Female
Hammer Union x Quick Release Coupling Ends, Fire Resistant
• Fourteen (14) Flexible Rubber Hose, Wire Reinforced Rubber, Oil Resistant, 3000 psi
Max. WP @ 55°C, Min. Burst Pressure - 4 x Max. WP, 1/2" ID, 1/2" JIC x 1/2" JIC
Ends, Fire Resistant
• One (1) Flexible Rubber Hose, Wire Reinforced Rubber, Oil Resistant, 3000 psi Max.
WP @ 55°C, Min. Burst Pressure - 4 x Max. WP, 1" ID, 1" JIC Ends, Fire Resistant

3.14.11.2 CHOKE AND KILL HOSES

BUILDER shall provide a complete set of choke and kill hoses that shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
• Four (4) Choke & Kill Hose, API 16C, Reinforced Coflexip With Coflon Liner, Stainless
Steel Interlocked Outer Wrap, 10000 psi WP, NACE MR0175, 4" ID, 4-1/16"- 15M API
6A Monogramed Hub Connector Ends With Alloy 625 Overlaid Ring Groove x Hub
Ends With Lifting Collars, Safety Clamps & Safety Chains c/w Shackles.
3.14.11.3 CEMENT HOSES
BUILDER shall provide a complete set of cement hoses that shall include, but not be limited
to the following:

PAGE 154 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Six (6) High Pressure Cement Hose, API 7K, Reinforced Synthetic Rubber Inner Tube
& Cover, Oil & Weather Resistant, 10000 psi WP, NACE MR0175, 3" ID, Fig. 1502
Male x Female Hammer Union Ends
3.14.11.4 MUD HOSES
BUILDER shall provide a complete set of mud hoses that shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
• Four (4) High Pressure Mud Hose, API 7K, Reinforced Synthetic Rubber Inner Tube &
Cover, Oil & Weather Resistant, NACE MR0175, 7500 psi WP, 5" ID, Fig. 1002 Male
x Female Hammer Union Ends
3.14.11.5 MUD ROTARY HOSES
BUILDER shall provide a complete set of mud rotary hoses that shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
• Two (2) High Pressure Mud Hose, API 7K, Reinforced NBR Inner Tube & Cover, Oil &
Weather Resistant, Swaged BW End Fittings, API Grade E, 7500 psi WP, Temperature
Range: -20°C - +121°C, NACE MR0175, 5" ID, 5" Fig. 1002 Male x Female Hammer
Union Ends with Lifting Collars, Safety Clamps & Safety Chains c/w Shackles
3.14.11.6 CEMENT ROTARY HOSE
BUILDER shall provide a complete set of cement rotary hoses that shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
• One (1) High Pressure Cement Hose, API 7K, Reinforced NBR Inner Tube & Cover,
Oil & Weather Resistant, Swaged BW End Fittings, 10000 psi WP, Temperature
Range: -20°C - +121°C, NACE MR0175, 3" ID, 4" Fig. 1502 Male x Female Hammer
Union Ends with Lifting Collars, Safety Clamps & Wire Rope c/w Shackles
3.14.12 CONDUCTOR TENSIONING UNIT (CTU)

3.14.12.1 CONDUCTOR TENSIONING UNIT

A Conductor tensioner unit of capacity 400 Kips (vertical load) shall be provided. The unit shall
utilize hydraulic cylinders supplied by an independent electrically powered Hydraulic Power
Unit. Split adapter rings suitable for 30”, 36” and 42” conductors shall be included in the
supply.

3.14.12.2 SECONDARY BOP TENSIONING SYSTEM

Provision shall be made for the retrofit of a Secondary BOP Tensioning system with a
minimum capacity of 130 MT.
The provision shall include two (2) 75 ton rated pad eyes for the suspension of a pull-type
secondary BOP tensioning system from the underside of the rotary table.
Provision shall also be made for the CTU and secondary tensioning system to share the same
control unit.

3.14.12.3 CONDUCTOR TENSIONING UNIT CONTROL

The main purpose of the control unit shall be to control the cylinder pressures in the CTU
dependent upon observed load. The Control Unit shall be suitable for control of the CTU and
incorporate controls for a retro-fit Secondary BOP Tensioning System.
The CTU shall be connected to the Conductor Tensioner Control Unit by hydraulic flexible
hoses.
The CTU Control unit shall include, but not be limited to the following features:

PAGE 155 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Bladder accumulators
• Pump assemblies
• Fluid tank
• Manifolds
• High pressure filter
• Set of hydraulic control valves
• Pressure gauges and pressure transmitters.
• Function using glycol based environmentally friendly fluid
3.14.13 WINCHES
All winches need to be provided compliant with ABS rules as stipulated in Section 1.0 of this
CTS. Important points to note are that all associated sheaves shall incorporate a greasing
system for the sheave shaft bearing, and also that the sheaves themselves follow the ‘D18’
ruling whereby sheave diameter needs to be a minimum of Rope Diameter x 18.

3.14.13.1 UTILITY WINCHES

The Utility Winches shall be hydraulic or pneumatic and incorporate:
• Counterweight 50kg
• Line Speed 0-20 m/min
• Local lever operation
• Remote operation via pendant remote control
• Zone II rated
• Anti-rotation wire
• Automatic Spooling Device
• LeBus Grooved Drum
• Drum Guard
• Hook Stop
• Main Block Protection Bar
• Emergency Stop
• Emergency Lowering
• Pressure Rollers
• Hook, 4-part Shackle, Swivel
• High and Low Limit Stops
• Overload Protection
The minimum utility winch provision shall be:
• One (1) x 10t Drill Floor
• Three (3) x 5t Drill Floor
• Four (4) x 5t Cantilever
• One (1) x 5t Cantilever upper pipe rack fwd.
• One (1) x 5t Main deck aft under cantilever

In addition, the following shall be provided:

• Four (4) x 5t (hand crank) Cantilever cellar deck
3.14.13.2 RACKING BOARD WINCHES
The Racking Board Winches shall be hydraulic or pneumatic and incorporate:
• Zone II rated
• Local lever operation
• Remote operation via pendant control

PAGE 156 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Drum guard
• Hook Stop
• Rotatable Base
• Water trap
• Lubricator
• Regulator
• Shut-off valve at the air inlet on the winch
The minimum racking board winch provision shall be:
• Two (2) x minimum of 1t (At Fingerboard Level)
3.14.13.3 MANRIDING WINCHES
The Man Riding Winches shall be hydraulic or pneumatic and incorporate:
• Bladder Accumulator for Emergency Back-up
• Safe Working Load 150 kg SWL
• Line Speed 0-55 m/min.
• Two (2) Independent braking Systems (motor and parking brake)
• Counterweight
• Local lever operation
• Remote operation via wireless remote control
• Zone 1 rated
• Anti-rotation wire
• Automatic Spooling Device
• Drum Guard
• Hook Stop
• Main Block Protection Bar
• Emergency Stop
• Emergency Lowering
• Pressure Rollers
• Hook, 4-part Shackle, Swivel
• High and Low Limit Stops
• Overload Protection
• Slack wire cut out
The minimum man riding winch provision shall be:
• Two (2) (Drill Floor)
• Two (2) (Moon pool area inside Cantilever)
3.14.13.4 BURNER BOOM WINCHES
• Pneumatic drive
• Operating Pressure 6.5 bar
• Zone II rated
• Local lever operation
• Drum guard
• Hook Stop
• Water trap
• Lubricator
• Regulator
• Shut-off valve at the air inlet on the winch
The minimum burner boom winch provision shall be:
• Two (2) x minimum 5t (Main Deck burner boom)

PAGE 157 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.14 BULK MUD AND CEMENT

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient bulk mud and cement system. The system
shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• Bulk Take on stations
• Bulk storage
• Transfer system
• Dust Collector
3.14.14.1 TAKE ON STATIONS
There shall be bulk mud and bulk cement take on stations on the Port and Starboard sides of
the VESSEL to include but not be limited to the following features:
• Hoses complete with flotation
• Unions
• Pipework
• Fittings, valves and gauges
• Rock catchers
3.14.14.2 BULK STORAGE
The following bulk storage tanks shall be provided:
• Four (4) Barite/Bentonite tanks 149 m3 (5,250 cu-ft) per tank
• Three (3) Cement tanks 198 m3 (7,000 cu-ft ) per tank
Each bulk tank shall include, but not limited to, the following features:
• Aerators
• Load cells to transmit tank content to IMCS
• Two (2) Access hatches for inspection and maintenance (top and bottom)
• Pressure relief valve piped to a safe discharge point
3.14.14.3 TRANSFER SYSTEM
Bulk materials shall be transferred by compressed air from the bulk air system via the system
piping network.
All valves in the system shall be manually operated, they shall be readily accessible for
operation and maintenance.
All elbow fittings (fill, vent, and discharge) shall be 5D bends.
Purge piping shall be provided as required for boosting or cleaning all sections of the system.

3.14.14.4 DUST COLLECTOR

There shall two (2) dust collectors provided on the main deck to satisfactorily extract dust from
the bulk mud and cement vent lines:
• Two (2) Dust collectors Capacity 2m3
3.14.14.5 SACK CHEMICALS AND BIG BAG HANDLING SYSTEM
BUILDER shall provide a super sack (big bag) chemical handling system. The super sack
handling system shall be designed to a ‘super sack specification’ provided by BUYER and
shall incorporate a means of safely and efficiently transferring super sacks of bulk chemicals
from the main deck (port side) straight into a hopper mounted on the main deck, above the
sack storage room. The system shall be designed with due cognizance of Sch G and the
design proposal, subject to BUYER’s approval, prior to detail design. All hopper and mixing

PAGE 158 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

areas shall be fitted with a containment barrier, and capable of drain into the contaminated
drain system.
A super sack laydown area shall be provided on main deck, located above the sack storage
room, and the near the main deck sack handling system. The areas exposed to super Sack
handling by fork lift shall be rated for heavy forklift use. The storage area shall be designed to
accommodate ‘double stacked’ super sack pallets.

3.14.15 LOW PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM

A Low-pressure mud system shall be provided for storing, mixing and transfer of oil
based/water based mud as required.
There shall be facility for the ‘take on’ of pre-built liquid mud, and for backload of same.
The system shall provide low pressure mud to the high-pressure mud pumps.

3.14.15.1 MUD MIXING

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient sack storage facility for mud mixing
chemicals. There shall be a sack storage room at machinery deck level shall have total storage
capacity for approximately 5,000 sacks at 100 lbs. per sack. In addition, ‘big bags’ shall be
capable of being introduced to the system either via a main deck hopper or through a sack
store hatch.
Mixing equipment shall be provided for adding chemicals and sack materials to a low-pressure
liquid mud mixing system that shall include but not be limited to, the following:
• Two (2) Liquid mud ‘take on’ stations, 1 Port and 1 Starboard
• Two (2) Surge Tanks 100 Cu. Ft capacity
• Two (2) Mix Hoppers (one to be shear type) 6”
• One (1) Liquid Additive Unit Dosing capacity 0.44 to 6.6 gpm
• One (1) Big bag hopper (with dedicated Venturi) As per END USER
• One (1) High rate mixers 100 – 120 t/hour (in mud pit room)
• One (1) Caustic Mixing Unit 2.2 to 22 gpm (0,5 – 5 m3/h)
3.14.15.2 MUD STORAGE
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient mud storage system to store, adjust and
maintain the quality of the mud. The system shall include, but not be limited to, the following
features:
• Mud Pit System
• Pumps
• Agitators
• Mud Guns
• High rate Mixer
3.14.15.3 MUD PITS
• There shall be a system of mud pits provided with the following minimum capacities:
Mud Pit 1 Capacity - 118 m3 (745 bbls)
Mud Pit 2 Capacity - 118 m3 (745 bbls)
Mud Pit 3 Capacity - 78 m3 (491 bbls)
Mud Pit 4 Capacity - 61 m3 (383 bbls)
Mud Pit 5 Capacity - 61 m3 (383 bbls)
Mud Pit 6 Capacity - 119 m3 (749 bbls)
Mud Pit 7 Capacity - 58 m3 (368 bbls)

PAGE 159 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Mud Pit 8 Capacity - 58 m3 (368 bbls)

Slug Pit 1 Capacity - 20 m3 (126 bbls)
Premix Pit Capacity - 20 m3 (126 bbls)

All mud pits shall be designed so as to avoid ‘dead spots’ and the accumulation of solids
Precise Capacities and layout of the mud pit system may alter during detailed design.

3.14.15.4 MIXING PUMPS

There shall be three (3) mixing pumps, suitable for 23 PPG mud, provided:
• Three (3) horizontal Centrifugal Mixing Pumps capacity of 1,100 GPM at 100 ft head
complete with a suitable impeller and mechanical seal
3.14.15.5 AGITATORS
All agitators shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Vertical, plate mounted, explosion proof electric motor
• Suitable for 23 PPG mud
• Bottom stabilized
• Stainless steel shaft
• Suitable number and sized impeller(s)
• Individual impeller paddles shall be removable
The following agitators shall be provided as a minimum:
• Two (2) Mud Pit 1
• Two (2) Mud Pit 2
• One (1) Mud Pit 3
• One (1) Mud Pit 4
• One (1) Mud Pit 5
• Two (2) Mud Pit 6
• One (1) Mud Pit 7
• One (1) Mud Pit 8
• One (1) Slug Pit 1
• One (1) Premix Pit
Agitators shall be suitable for installation in Zone II hazardous areas. The final numbers,
specification, and placement, of agitators shall be established during Detailed Design.

3.14.15.6 MUD GUNS

The following 3” mud guns shall be provided as a minimum:
• Two (2) Mud Pit 1
• Two (2) Mud Pit 2
• Two (2) Mud Pit 3
• Two (2) Mud Pit 4
• Two (2) Mud Pit 5
• Two (2) Mud Pit 6
• Two (2) Mud Pit 7
• Two (2) Mud Pit 8
• One (1) Slug Pit 1
• One (1) Premix Pit
The final numbers, specification, and placement, of mud guns shall be established during
Detailed Design.

PAGE 160 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.15.7 HIGH RATE MIXER

There shall be a high rate mixer provided at the Mud Pit Room. The mixer shall be designed
with a flange to be mounted on top of a mud pit to carry the unit including the mixing head, in-
line mixer and drop pipe with air diluter.
One (1) High rate mixer of capacity 60 cubic m/hr (powder) or liquid flow of 150-300 cubic m/
hr shall be provided.

3.14.15.8 CHARGE PUMPS

Charge pumps shall be provided for the supply of mud to the HP mud pumps. The design
shall ensure that suction can be taken from the mud charging header. Provision for suction
from all active / reserve mud pits shall be provided.
The discharge from the pumps shall be tied into a charging header feeding the HP Mud pumps.
There shall be a strainer installed at the charging pump discharge.
The charge pumps shall be installed inside the mud pump room.
• Three (3) Horizontal Centrifugal Pumps capacity per pump with a minimum capacity of
1,100 GPM at 100 ft head
3.14.16 MUD PROCESSING
BUILDER shall supply a suitable and sufficient mud processing system to remove
contaminants that include, but are not limited to, drill cuttings, debris, gas, and hydrocarbons
from the return mud, prior to the mud being returned to the active mud pit system. The system
shall be capable of handling H2S and Hydrocarbon Gas, Liquid Hydrocarbons, oil based or
water based mud, completion fluids, and returns coincidental with cementing operations,
milling and other operations.

The mud processing system shall include but not be limited to the following equipmen:
• Mud/Gas Separator
• Trip tanks
• Stripping Tank
• Flowline
• Shakers and Mud Cleaner
• Vacuum Degasser
• Desander
• Desilter
• Overflow/clean tank
• Centrifuge
• Mud Charging System
3.14.16.1 MUD/GAS SEPARATOR
A suitably sized Mud/Gas Separator shall be provided at the drill floor.
One (1) Atmospheric type mud/gas separator as per END USER
The mud gas separator shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• Anti-siphon facility
• Vent extending to the top of the derrick
• Water seal and vacuum breaker
• Flowline connection
• An Isolation facility to allow the degasser to be isolated from the vent line for pressure
testing purposes, e.g. removable pup piece and blind or spectacle blind etc.

PAGE 161 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.16.2 TRIP TANKS

Trip tanks and trip tank pumps shall be provided below the drill floor at a precise location
approved by BUYER:
• Two (2) Trip Tanks Capacity 60 bbls each
• Two (2) Trip Tank Pumps Capacity 100 GPM @ 85’
3.14.16.3 STRIPPING TANKS
A stripping tank shall be provided on the drill floor in the vicinity of the C&K Manifold:
• One (1) Stripping Tank Capacity 10bbls
3.14.16.4 FLOWLINE
A suitably sized flowline shall include, but not be limited to:
• Flow return monitoring devices
• Safe access to the devices for inspection and maintenance
3.14.16.5 SHAKERS AND MUD CLEANER
Shale Shakers shall be provided to remove cuttings from the return mud. Cuttings shall be
discharged directly overboard or directed to a cuttings collection facility
There shall be five (5) Shale Shakers provided. Each shaker shall include but not be limited
to, the following features:
• Screen deck and screens of various gauges
• Readily changeable screens
• VFD driven vibrator motors so as to be fully adjustable
• VFD control panel for each shaker
• Anti-vibration mounts
• Local and remote start stop
• Mud Cleaner located above the fifth Shale Shaker
The Mud Cleaner shall incorporate:
• Header
• Feed manifold(s)
• Trough
• Twenty (20) 4" Desilter cones Minimum capacity 1,200 GPM
• Three (3) 12" Desander cones Minimum capacity 1,500 GPM
3.14.16.6 VACUUM DEGASSER SYSTEM
A Vacuum Degasser system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) Degasser tank with a capacity of approx. 61 BBL
• Vacuum degasser unit
• Skid Mounted
• Single Vacuum chamber
• One (1) Eductor
• Two (2) Gas separation pumps
• Two (2) Degasser Pumps Capacity 1100 GPM @ 105'
3.14.16.7 DESANDER PIT/PUMP
A Desander tank and pump shall be provided on the main deck starboard side
• One (1) Desander tank Capacity 61 BBL shall be installed
• One (1) Desander Pump Capacity 1600 GPM @ 95’

PAGE 162 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.16.8 DESILTER PIT/PUMP

A Desilter tank and pump shall be provided on the main deck starboard side
• One (1) Desilter tank Capacity 61 BBL
• One (1) Desilter Pump Capacity 1100 GPM @ 105’
3.14.16.9 OVERFLOW/CLEAN TANK
An overflow/clean tank shall be provided on the main deck starboard side
• One (1) overflow/clean tank Capacity 49 BBL
3.14.16.10 CENTRIFUGE
Provision shall be made for the retrofit of two (2) Third-Party centrifuges for the removal of
solids and barite recovery.

3.14.17 HIGH PRESSURE MUD SYSTEM

A 7,500 psi high pressure mud system shall be provided to include but not be limited to the
following features:
• HP Mud Pumps
• Standpipe manifold and standpipes
3.14.17.1 HP MUD PUMPS
• Three (3) HP mud pumps with max rated pressure of 7,500psi and min of 2,170 hp
Each HP mud pump shall include but not be limited to, the following features:
• Resettable discharge Pressure Safety Valve (BX Titan or Equal) piped back to the mud
pits (sloping downwards)
• A bleed off line connected to the relief valve discharge
• A pressure gauge
• Pulsation dampener on the suction and discharge
• Control system
• Lube oil system with oil cooler
• Liner wash system
• Discharge strainers
• Suitable and sufficient mechanical handling for liners and fluid end assembly blowers
for electric motors, with motor lock out facility for main and blower motors
• Water-cooled lube oil heat exchanger
• Pump Stroke Counter
• Tool Kit for Fluid End Maintenance.
• Two (2) sizes of Liners and Pistons as requested by BUYER
• Two (2) high pressure discharge lines from each HP mud pump leading to the mud
standpipe manifold on the drill floor.
• Limit switches shall be installed on the belt guards at the manual turning hatch to
prevent the Mud Pump motors from starting if the hatch is open.
In addition, BUILDER shall provide a Liner wash system with oversized Liner wash tank as
per BUYER’s approval.

3.14.17.2 STANDPIPE MANIFOLD

An H-type standpipe manifold shall be provided that shall include, but not be limited to, the
following connections:
• Two (2) HP lines from mud pumps
• Two (2) standpipes on the derrick

PAGE 163 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• One (1) bleed off to mud return

• One (1) crossover from cement manifold
• One (1) crossover to choke and kill manifold
• One (1) to diverter
There shall be two (2) standpipes provided that run vertically, and unobstructed, to a suitable
elevation in the derrick. Each shall have a gooseneck at the top terminating in a connection
compatible with the top drive hoses.

3.14.18 HIGH PRESSURE CEMENT SYSTEM

A 10,000 psi high pressure cement system shall be provided to include but not be limited to
the following features:
• Cement Unit – Third Party Supply
• Cement Lines
• Cement Manifold
• Cement Standpipe
3.14.18.1 CEMENT UNIT LINES
Three (3) independent cement lines from the cementing unit
• One (1) line shall go to the choke and kill manifold.
• One (1) emergency kill line from the cement pump to BOP stack.
• One (1) line will go from cement manifold
3.14.18.2 CEMENT MANIFOLD
HP Cement system shall consist of 10,000 psi WP Cement manifold.
The manifold shall include but not be limited to, the following connections:
• One (1) standpipe on derrick
• One (1) wash down line to overboard
• One (1) cross over to mud standpipe manifold
There cross over line from cement manifold to HP mud standpipe manifold shall incorporate
double valve isolation and a removable spool piece.
There shall be one (1) standpipe provided that runs vertically, and unobstructed, to a suitable
elevation in the derrick. The standpipe shall have a gooseneck at the top terminating in a
connection compatible with the top drive hoses.

3.14.19 WELL TEST SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall supply the entire well testing system. The exact arrangement shall be in
accordance with the Contract Plans but shall meet the following minimum provision and
capacities:
Two (2) burners with each burner capable of handling 12,000 bbls per day or 65 MSCFD,
100% burn, zero discharge to prevent water pollution. Burners shall be equipped with a remote
ignition system with LPG pilot light.
Two (2) 90-foot burner booms complete with piping, walkways, handrails and gas vent lines.
Booms shall be capable of being secured and stored in the vertical position.
A heat study shall be performed by a qualified Third-Party, based on the specifications to
follow and the proposed location for each burner boom. The results of the study should support
the proposed layout, location and appropriately sized water curtain system to protect the
vessel from radiated heat. The water curtain system shall include, but not be limited to, the
following components and features:

PAGE 164 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Two (2) Dedicated water curtain pumps

• One (1) 450-600 gallon diesel tank with 200-bbl / day variable discharge pump for
diesel injection (Positive Displacement Pump)
• One (1) 4-1/16” 10,000 psi API monogrammed choke manifold to include;
• Two (2) 4-1/16”, 10,000 psi manual chokes
• Two (2) 4-1/16” 10,000 psi hydraulic actuated chokes
• One (1) 4-1/16” 10,000 psi panic line
• Sampling ports
• Gauge ports
• Diesel injection port
• One (1) Split-type buffer chamber shall be 7-1/16” I.D., 10,000 psi, with a 4-1/16”,
10,000 psi manual gate valve separating the two buffer chamber sections. All valves
and components upstream of the buffer chamber shall be 10,000 psi rated, all valves
downstream of the buffer chamber shall be 10,000 psi rated. All components to be for
sour service
• Two (2) 3” ID, 5,000 psi, Coflex hoses with Jumper hose lining to divert formation fluid
to the flare booms from the END USER supplied production tree to the well test choke
manifold and from the rigs fixed choke and kill manifold to the well test choke manifold.
• One (1) set manual centrifuge with associated bottles and flasks for water cut and
solids determination
• Two (2) Dedicated air compressors, each with sufficient air volume and pressure to
allow burners to function at a maximum rate of 12,000 BPD
• BUILDER shall install fixed high pressure well test piping from the drill floor to the
designated area, and to the burner booms, and other ancillary services as described
below:
• One (1) 3" HP 5,000 psi, line from drill floor / choke manifold to well test area.
• One (1) 3” A106 Gr. B Sch. 160, oil line with manifold to divert flow to port and stbd
side, rated for H2S service, made up of target elbows and tees.
• 4” A106 Gr. B Sch. 160, Gas line with manifold to divert flow to port and stbd side,
rated for H2S service, made up of target elbows and tees.
• 4” compressed air line to port and stbd side
• 1” diesel line from diesel tank to port and stbd side
• 6” water line to burner booms.
• All required flexible hoses to connect the Well test manifold to the hard piping diverting
manifold and from well test piping to the burner boom.
3.14.20 DRILL STRING AND DOWN HOLE EQUIPMENT (OFE)
BUYER will provide the following additional operating tubulars and downhole equipment:
• Drilling String
• Drilling String Handling Tools
• Fishing Tools
• Subs
• Misc. Tools
3.14.21 OWNER AND THIRD-PARTY EQUIPMENT, AREA AND SPACES

3.14.21.1 UTILITY STATIONS

BUILDER shall provide the utility stations required for the installation and operation of
BUYER’s Third-Party equipment and containers. This includes but is not limited to the Cement
unit, and the Wireline unit.

PAGE 165 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.14.21.2 WIRELINE UNIT

Space provision shall be made for the installation of the Wireline Unit specified by BUYER
with all necessary interfaces and utilities for the equipment and the Third-Party.

3.14.21.3 CEMENT UNIT

The cement unit will be Third-Party supply. The BUILDER shall provide the following utilities
at the Cement unit location:
• Raw water
• Fuel Oil
• Drill water
• Compressed Air
• Electric Power
• PA/GA
• Fire and gas
• Main and Emergency lighting
3.14.21.4 MUD LOGGING UNIT
Space provision shall be for the installation of the mud logging unit with all necessary
interfaces for the mud logging Third-Party. Potable water source required for mud logging.

3.14.21.5 MWD/LWD UNIT

Space provision shall be for the installation of the MWD / LWD / Directional Drilling Unit with
all necessary interfaces and utilities for the equipment and the Service Company.

3.14.21.6 TOOL CONTAINER

Space provision shall be for the installation of the MWD/LWD unit with all necessary interfaces
and utility for the Service Company.

3.14.21.7 RIGGING GEAR

A dedicated rigging gear location (enclosed and protected from the environment) on main deck
shall be provided for END USER. The size of the dedicated space shall be equivalent but not
less than a 10ft by 10ft standard container.

3.14.21.8 MUD COOLERS

Space provision shall be made for the installation of the Mud Coolers with all necessary
interfaces and required rig side utilities.

3.14.21.9 CENTRIGUGES
Optionally two (2) centrifuge for removal of solids or recovery of barite will be installed,
complete with pumps, etc.

3.14.21.10 CUTTINGS DISCHARGE

In addition to the standard cuttings discharge process and system provided by BUILDER,
BUILDER shall also make provision for the retrofit of a suitable and sufficient cuttings
discharge system that allows BUYER to safely and efficiently discharge cuttings into a ‘zero
discharge’ SKIP and SHIP SYSTEM. The provision shall allow for any future design and
installation to meet CLASS requirements and all environmental regulations, codes and
standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS.

PAGE 166 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The provision shall allow for a system that is capable of effectively diverting cuttings from
overboard discharge to the SKIP and SHIP system, and vice versa, as and when required.

3.14.21.11 COIL TUBING EQUIPMENT

Provisions shall be made for installation of the Third-Party coiled tubing reel (as per END
USER requirements specified by BUYER), power pack and control cabin. Provisions to be
made for temporary installation of this equipment on the riser catwalk on the Third-Party
supplied platform. Coil Tubing Laydown areas should be clearly demarcated with the
maximum deck loading prominently marked.

PAGE 167 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.15 JACKING SYSTEM

3.15.1 GENERAL
Builder shall supply the elevating system components provided as part of the Keppel-LeT Kit
utilized for raising and lowering the hull. These components include the elevation switchboard,
leg junction boxes, control console, the elevating units. Builder shall provide and install all
electrical power and cable.

Each leg shall be independently powered via reversing contactors in the switchboard. Leg
over-current protection is provided via circuit breakers located in the elevation switchboard.
Leg power is controlled by pushbuttons located in the elevation control console. These
pushbuttons communicate through I/O to PLC activate relays located in the elevation
switchboard, which, in turn, control the action of each leg's reversing contactor. Feeder cables
from each leg's power contactor are connected to a cable distribution point at each Leg
Junction Box.

The Jacking System shall include, but not be limited to the following components and features:
• Jacking Control System
• Jacking Switchboard
• Jacking Console
• Motor Load Equalization
• Inclinometers
• Elevation Overload Warning System
• Leg Depth Indication
3.15.2 JACKING CONTROL SYSTEM
Builder shall supply a ‘state of the art’ jacking control system, located in the Central Control
Room, equipped for monitoring and control of the jacking functions.

3.15.2.1 JACKING SWITCHBOARD

Builder shall install Jacking Switchboard, which shall be located in the switchboard room. This
switchboard shall be connected to the 600 V main switchboard mounted in the VFD room.
This Jacking Switchboard shall supply independent power fused to each leg and interface with
the control console in the jacking control room.

3.15.2.2 JACKING CONSOLE

Keppel-LeT’s Kit shall include a Master console for control and monitoring of the elevating
functions. The Master console shall be located in the control room.
The Master console shall provide control and monitoring of the jacking operation through a
PLC based communication system. A Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
display interface shall be used for monitoring and supervision of jacking operations.

A secondary means for jacking operation shall be provided on jacking panel for emergency
jacking operation from the VFD room in case the master jacking console is compromised.

The Jacking Console shall include but not be limited to the following components and features:
• Power on/off key switch
• Self-Test lamp test button

PAGE 168 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• “UP”, “STOP”, and “DOWN” control push buttons for each leg
• “EMERGENCY STOP” button
• Fault and alarm reset buttons
• Motor overload
• brake plug fault
• Hull Inclination
• Elevation Overload Warning System
• Motor gear box oil level monitoring systems
• Leg depth indication
• Motor RPM and leg power (kW)
3.15.2.3 HULL INCLINATION
Hull inclination shall be displayed on a LCD panel providing `x-y’ inclination display as degrees
port/ stbd and fore/ aft of the hull in real time. Double bubble type `x-y’ inclinometers.

3.15.2.4 MOTOR LOAD EQUALIZATION

Motor load equalization per leg is an inherent feature of the Keppel-LeT proprietary motor and
is actively available through the operation of the jacking circuits listed above. The procedures
are inherent with the design approach with no special controls or equipment required.

3.15.2.5 INCLINOMETERS
Bubble level indicators and electronic indicators will be provided at locations approved by
BUYER.

3.15.2.6 ELEVATION OVERLOAD WARNING SYSTEM

A system of overload warning indicators shall be provided as part of the control console to
indicate an excessive current draw by the electric motors of the jacking system. Warning
indicators shall be provided for each electric motor of this system and shall be displayed on
the console in a pattern relative to the position of the motors on the platform. Current
transformers for actuating the warning lights shall be installed on each motor's power cable in
the leg junction boxes.

3.15.2.7 LEG DEPTH INDICATOR

A digital leg depth indicator system shall be provided to indicate the position of each leg in
relation to the hull. Three (3) indicators shall be mounted on the control console, one for each
leg.

3.15.3 OIL LEVEL INDICATION

A gearbox oil level indication system shall be furnished and installed in control console for
level indication of primary gearboxes.

3.15.4 POWER SUPPLY

Power for elevating shall be supplied by 600 Volt, 3-phase, 60-Hertz current from the main
generator power bus. Generators shall be arranged to serve as power for all electrical
equipment aboard the VESSEL.

3.15.5 ELEVATING UNITS

The hull shall be elevated, lowered and supported on the legs by 600-Volt AC electrical
elevating units. Four (4) Keppel-LeT 390-Kips Elevating Units shall be provided per leg as part
of the Keppel-LeT Kit, each unit having five (5) ¼-pitch output pinions for a total of 60 pinions.

PAGE 169 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The pinion, gearbox, electric motor and brake assemblies shall be complete units designed
and built to a Specification that has been approved by the Classification Society and be
installed with a manual remote greasing system. The electric motors shall be equipped with
spring loaded dry-plate multi-disk brakes to hold the hull or legs in position when the motors
are not in operation. While the elevation circuits are energized, solenoids compress the brake
springs, releasing the brakes, allowing elevating unit operation. When the electrical circuit is
interrupted, intentionally or by accident, spring pressure applied to the multi-disc brake system
locks the pinion and thus holds the hull or legs in place. Elevating units shall be single speed
and be capable of raising and lowering the hull at approximately 1.5 feet per minute (0.46
m/min.). The Elevating Units shall be installed in the leg well with jigs to maintain leg-to-guide
tolerance. Tolerances shall be verified during installation and after final weld-up. Jacking
assemblies shall be oil and weather tight.

3.15.5.1 ELEVATING UNIT CAPACITIES:

Rated Normal Elevating 390 kips/pinion (177 mt)
Effective Normal Elevating1 370 kips/pinion (168 mt)
Normal Holding 600 kips/pinion (272 mt)
Preload Holding 1,048 kips/pinion (475 mt)
Storm Holding 1,048 kips/pinion (475 mt)
Preload Emergency Jacking 418 kips/pinion (189 mt)

Notes:
1
Effective ratings account for frictional losses in guides and pinion/rack interface.

3.15.6 PINION LOAD MONITORING SYSTEM

Pinion Load Monitoring System shall consist only of KW power readings that may be
interpolated into load and displayed by the PLC.

3.15.7 LEG JUNCTION BOXES

Three (3) leg junction boxes, one (1) per leg, for distribution of power to elevating motors and
three (3) auxiliary I/O boxes for monitoring information, shall be provided by BUILDER. These
boxes shall be installed by Builder below decks in the machinery space near each leg yoke.

3.15.8 COMMUNICATION
BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient voice communication system between the
control room, close to the jacking control console, and a suitable location at each leg.

PAGE 170 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.16 SKIDDING SYSTEM

3.16.1 SKIDDING UNITS
Two sets of three (3) Keppel-LeT electric skidder units shall be furnished with automatic fail
safe breaking system for the longitudinal skidding of the cantilever assembly mounted with the
output pinion axis vertical. Two (2) Keppel-LeT electric skidder units shall be furnished with
automatic fail safe breaking system for the transverse skidding of the substructure/drill floor.
Remote controls for the skidding system shall be furnished and located near the multi-cable
transit on the main deck.
Keppel-LeT electric skidding units with racks and controls shall be provided. One (1) skidder
rack is provided on each cantilever beam, which engages, with the output pinions of the
electric skidding units mounted on the main deck for longitudinal skidding of the entire
cantilevered structure. Six (6) skidding units are installed, three (3) port and three (3)
starboard. A dual electric skidding unit shall be furnished for the transverse skidding of the
substructure/ drillfloor.
3.16.2 GREASING SYSTEM SKIDDING SYSTEM
To overcome frictional forces and allow the skidding units to move the cantilever high pressure
grease is applied manually between the two sliding surfaces i.e. cantilever beams and the
bronze alloy pads. Grease is also applied manually to all frictional generating surfaces of the
two skidding systems including the rack and pinion and cantilever bronze guides of the Upper
and lower packages. The greasing of the cantilever moving components allows for cantilever
movement forward and aft. The greasing of the upper package components is also a manual
procedure and when greased the same way will allow the upper drill floor package to be moved
transversely.

3.16.3 CONTROL SYSTEM

The control functions include forward and aft (for cantilever) port and starboard (for
substructure), port cantilever beam lockout, transverse lockout, and emergency stop. When
the forward or aft pushbuttons are energized, both sets of longitudinal skidders are activated
in the direction chosen. The port lockout control will disable the port side longitudinal skidder.
While this pushbutton is held in place, the forward or aft pushbuttons may be pressed to
energize the starboard skidder units. This will allow the operator to correct the alignment of
the cantilever beams should they become misaligned. Similar controls are provided for the
forward/aft sub base skidders. The port and starboard functions allow transverse movement
of the substructure on the sub base. The transverse lockout allows the operator to re-align the
transverse skidder system similar to the longitudinal system.
The control system shall include functions and features to ensure the system automatically
prevents the operating envelope to be exceeded.

3.16.4 THE PORTABLE REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (RCP)

Remote controls for the skidding system shall be furnished and located near the multi-cable
transit on the main deck for the longitudinal skidding and at the sub base below drill floor for
the transverse skidding. Remote controlled shall take the form of a pendent control on a
wandering lead. The pendent control storage shall be located near the multi-cable transit on
the main deck.

PAGE 171 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.16.5 POWER SUPPLY

3.16.5.1 MOTORS
Insulation class shall be class F. The skidding motors and auxiliary sensors installed in the
motor shall be suitably rated for installation in Hazardous Area as defined in Contract Plans.

3.16.6 MAINTENANCE ACCESS

The BUILDER shall ensure for safe access, inspection, routine planned maintenance, and the
repair and/or removal of major components of the skidding units. All mechanical handling
arrangements including padeyes and lifting equipment required for the removal of the major
items shall be provided.

3.17 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient heating ventilation and air conditioning
system to maintain the environmental conditions specified for all areas of the VESSEL.
The design shall be in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards, stipulated in Section
1.0 of this CTS and the Climatic Criteria in Section 2.0.
All HVAC equipment, components, and installation shall meet CLASS requirements and
components shall be of materials and specification such that they are not degraded by the
environmental conditions of the area in which they are installed. In addition, All HVAC
equipment components and installation shall be suitable to the Hazardous Area Classification
in which they are located and/ or serve, in accordance with the Contract Plans, and in particular
the Hazardous Area and Structural Fire Integrity Classification Plans.
The HVAC information and specifications provided throughout this HVAC section of the CTS
shall be considered ‘guidance’ for the benefit of the BUILDER. These specifications should
not be considered definitive, nor complete, rather shall they be used as a baseline for the
mandated BUILDER HVAC Design and Specification.

The following ambient design conditions shall be used for the HVAC system design:
Summer Design conditions Winter Design Condition
50 °C Dry Bulb Temperature @ 50% RH 0°C, RH 100% (non-condensing)
45 °C DBT @ 40% RH
35 °C DBT @ 85% RH

BUILDER shall conduct and provide for BUYER review detailed calculation that provide
analysis and verification that the required air changes, the air circulation, the heat exchange,
the balancing required for all major machinery, hull and accommodation spaces including but
not limited to:
• Engine Room
• Electrical Equipment Rooms
• Mud Pit Room
• Shaker room
• Living Quarter / Accommodation
• Moonpool area
• Sack Store
• Warehouses

PAGE 172 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.17.1 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

All external areas, ducting shall be of stainless steel and hot dip galvanized ducting shall be
provided in all other areas. All ducting shall be provided with the appropriate type of grilles,
and dampers e.g. gas tight, fire, and watertight etc. The ducting, damper construction material
etc., shall be of a thickness and grade suitable to the area of installation i.e. Hazardous or
Non-Hazardous. The following temperature and relative humidity ranges shall be maintained:

Temperature Relative humidity

22 -24°C (occupied/unoccupied) 40-55% for all occupied areas except Galley
Min 30% & Max 70%

BUILDER shall complete calculations based on the minimum air changes required for space
+ heat load + emissions. The cooling and heating load calculations shall be completed for all
of the above ambient conditions and the greatest resultant capacity shall be used for the
selection of the HVAC equipment.

Areas requiring Heating and Air Conditioning shall include, but not be limited to the following:
• Living Quarters
• Other Offices
• Drillers cabin (shall have 100% redundancy)
• Jacking SCR Room
• Mechanics Workshop
• Mud lab
• Electrical Equipment Rooms
• Electrical workshop
• Main Switchboard Room
• Warehouse
• Warehouse office
• Rubber Goods store
• LER
3.17.2 LIVING QUARTERS
The Living Quarters shall be maintained at a positive pressure of 50 Pascals in relation to the
outside conditions and connected machinery spaces. The main entrances to the Living
quarters shall be provided with suitable differential pressure indication gauges. BUILDER shall
balance the HVAC system to ensure stairways and corridors are kept at positive pressure
compared to adjoining rooms/spaces to preserve escape ways.
The Heating and Air conditioning system shall be designed for 120 POB and individual air
requirement of 8.4 l/s per person.
The table below indicates ‘Typical’ air change rate requirements for the living quarter spaces:

Table 3.11.7.1.1 ‘Typical’ air change rates for living quarters

Area supply air [AC/h] exhaust air [AC/h]
Cabins 6 6
Galley 30 40
Dry Store Room 2 0
Mess room 10 10

PAGE 173 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Table 3.11.7.1.1 ‘Typical’ air change rates for living quarters

Area supply air [AC/h] exhaust air [AC/h]
Tea Room 10 10
Recreation rooms 10 10
Training Room 10 10
TV Room 10 10
Changing rooms 15 15
Offices 8 8
Corridors 2 -
Medic Room 10 10
Laundry 15 15
Control room 10 10
Radio room 10 10
Toilets 10 10
Common toilets 15 15
Gymnasium 15-20 15-20
Prayer room 10 10

The Systems shall be of full duct medium pressure type with all AHU’s and supply & return
insulated to approved standard.

Internal heat loads from recirculated air shall be controlled by DX AHU units suitable for use
in harsh environment conditions with condensers and control system per deck with capacities
equal to 2 x 100% or 3 x 50% (AHUs & Air cooled condensing units) to ensure a minimum of
100% availability in case of failure of one unit.

The fresh air supply AHU shall be capable of delivering at least 30% of the total LQ airflow
requirement. The system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Fresh air intakes with louvres, sand filters, and fire & gas dampers
• Toxic and Flammable gas detection at intakes, as required
• System Intakes shall be positioned as far as reasonably practicable away from system
hazardous exhausts but as a minimum in accordance with Area Classification
requirements
• Secondary final filters to be F7 grade
• Return air shall not be taken from the following spaces, they shall have separate
exhausts;
• Galley
• Hospital
• Smoking coffee rooms
• Laundry
• Toilets
• Gymnasium
• Wet areas such as showers and changing rooms
The Galley, Control/ Radio Room, and IT/ UPS room shall have separate dedicated HVAC
units.
The Control/ Radio Room and IT/ UPS room on level 5, shall both have two (2) x 100%
dedicated HVAC units.

PAGE 174 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The AC units shall be packaged type and shall have full redundancy (1 W+1 S), the equipment
shall be mounted at the roof of the Radio Control Room with supply and return ducting to &
from the room.
Penetrations of ducts on the roof shall be provided with penetration pieces and motorized fire/
gas tight dampers as per Class requirement.
All external ducting shall be Stainless Steel provided with 50 mm thick thermal insulation and
0.7 mm thick Stainless-Steel cladding/lagging.
Thermostats shall be placed inside the conditioned space away from supply air outlets to
ensure correct room temperature readings are sensed by the thermostat and control the
start/stop of the duty AC unit. An electric duct mounted heater shall be placed at the common
supply air duct near to the AC unit outlet to control room temperature during the winter design
ambient condition of 0ºC.
The galley exhaust ducting shall be a A60 class SS and shall incorporate a Wet Chemical
fixed firefighting system as described in the Active Fire Fighting section of this CTS, drains,
grease traps and cleaning hatches provided with easy access from the galley area.
The laundry exhaust ducting shall incorporate easily accessible inspection/cleaning hatches
and removable lint filters.
All ductwork shall be fitted with the necessary Fire & Gas and shut off dampers as required by
CLASS and Contract Plans.
The Living Quarters HVAC shall be included the emergency power plan for the VESSEL as
stipulated in the Contract Plans.

3.17.2.1 DRILLERS CABIN

The Drillers cabin HVAC shall be supplied by the cabin manufacturer, it shall have 100%
redundancy and shall utilize Variable Frequency Drive pressurization fans to maintain positive
pressure, and purge feature.

3.17.2.2 JACKING SCR ROOM

The Jacking Variable Frequency Drive Room shall have two (2) dedicated 100% Air
Conditioning Units. Supply ducting shall not to be positioned above cabinets and air outlets
shall not be directed at the cabinets.

3.17.2.3 MECHANICS WORKSHOP

The Mechanics Workshop shall have a dedicated Air Conditioning system(s).

3.17.2.4 MUD LAB

The mud lab shall have a dedicated Air Conditioning unit and shall be equipped with a fume
cupboard with dedicated extract.

3.17.2.5 ELECTRICAL WORKSHOP

The Electrical Workshop shall have a dedicated Air Conditioning unit.

3.17.2.6 MAIN SWITCHBOARD ROOM

The Main Switchboard room shall have two (2) 100% Air Conditioning Units to serve both the
switchboard room and the engine control room.
Supply ducting shall not to be positioned above cabinets and air outlets shall not be directed
at the cabinets.

PAGE 175 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.17.2.7 WAREHOUSE OFFICE

The warehouse office shall have a dedicated Air Conditioning unit

3.17.2.8 WAREHOUSE
The warehouse shall have an Air Conditioning Unit to serve both the warehouse and the
Rubber Goods Store.

3.17.2.9 RUBBER GOODS STORE

The Rubber Goods Store shall be air conditioned via a branch from the warehouse.

3.17.2.10 LOCAL EQUIPMENT ROOM AND DRILL FLOOR WORK DESK STATION
The Local equipment Room shall have two (2) 100% Air Conditioning Units.

3.17.3 VENTILATION
For all areas not provided with Air Conditioning, Mechanical Ventilation shall be provided
where natural ventilation does not fulfil the requirements for air changes and heat rise and
high ambient temperature management.
The ventilation system design shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Incorporate a minimum number of ventilation stacks on the deck
• Suitable and sufficient inlet filtration
• Flammable and Toxic Gas detection as required
• Appropriate dampers i.e. fire, gas, shut off etc.
• Deliver the required amount of air to achieve the heat raise limit of 5-8 deg C above
ambient
• Deliver the required number of air changes for air quality i.e. fumes and odours etc.
• Prevent the ingress of fumes particulates, water and odours etc.
• Provide the necessary pressure differentials in hazardous areas
• All ventilation ducting in hazardous areas, i.e., mud pit room, shaker house etc. shall
be of stainless steel and hot dipped galvanized ducting in all other areas, complete
with the necessary grilles, and dampers etc, and of a thickness suitable to the area of
installation i.e. Hazardous or Non-Hazardous.
• For spaces provided with extract only, and no integral damper then there shall be a
weathertight lockable cover provided in lieu.
• Air locks in hazardous areas shall have dedicated ventilation systems with pressure
differential indicators and alarms.
• Bug blower type fans shall be provided for all semi enclosed spaces where natural
ventilation is not sufficient to meet the design criteria.
Areas requiring ventilation shall include but not be limited to the following:
• Engine Rooms
• Emergency Generator Room
• Mud Pump Room
• Sack Storage Room
• Port Auxiliary Equipment Room
• Stbd Auxiliary Equipment Room
• Transformer Room
• Heavy Tool Store
• Mud Pit Room
• Mud Pits
• Pump Rooms
• Shaker House

PAGE 176 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Mud Pump Room

• Welders shop
The table below provides ‘Typical’ air change rates for machinery spaces.

Table 3.11.7.2 ‘Typical’ air change rates for machinery spaces

Room/Area Location Air Changes per
hour [AC/h]
Engine Room Machinery deck 120
Emergency Generator Room Main Deck E-Gen House 20
Emergency Switchboard Room Main Deck E-Gen House 20
Mud Pump Room Machinery deck 60
Sack Storage Room Machinery deck 20
Service Air Compressor Room Mezzanine deck 60
Main Switchboard Room Machinery Deck 20
Transformer Room Machinery Deck 30
Heavy Tools Storage Machinery deck 20
Mud pit room Mezzanine Deck 30
Mud pits Machinery deck 90
Auxiliary equipment Room Machinery deck 30
Pump Rooms Machinery deck 30
Compressor Room Machinery deck 30
Bulk Air Compressor Room Main Deck E-Gen House 30
Shaker House Cantilever 30
Mud Treatment Room Cantilever 30
Mud Pump Room Machinery deck 60
Welders shop Main Deck 30

BUILDER shall complete calculations based on the minimum air changes required for space
+ heat load + emissions.
The ventilation calculations shall be completed for all the stipulated ambient conditions and
the greatest resultant requirement shall be used for the selection of the ventilation equipment.

3.17.3.1 ENGINE ROOMS

The engine room ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Provide sufficient air for space ventilation and maximum engine combustion air
requirements (all 5 engines running at 85% of maximum load/RPM)
• Space temperature rise from ambient temperature shall not exceed 10 deg C with
maximum engine load
• Differential pressure sensors to determine the necessary ventilation fan speed
• Supply and exhaust fans and their Fire / Shut off dampers shall be fully interlocked
• Smaller turbulence ventilation fans with flow guided between, and to the sides, of all
engines for the provision of additional ventilation for personnel needing to when the
engine room temperature is high. These fans shall be interlocked with main ventilation
fans to ensure complete shutdown of ventilation when required
• It shall not be possible for all dampers/fans to fail whilst engines running. I.e. so that
the engines cannot draw a vacuum within the space.

PAGE 177 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Fan motors shall be twin speed

3.17.3.2 EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM
The emergency generator engine room ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the
following features:
• Basic ventilation with small ventilation fan when the engine is not running
• Suitably sized inlet louver to open automatically on engine start up
• Inlet to allow sufficient air for space ventilation and maximum engine combustion air
requirements
• Space temperature rise from ambient temperature shall not exceed 10 deg C with
maximum engine load
3.17.3.3 MUD PUMP ROOM
The mud pump room ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Supply and exhaust fan(s) shall be 2 speed
• Supply and exhaust fans shall be interlocked
• Capable of coping with variable heat loads
3.17.3.4 SACK STORAGE ROOM
The sack storage room ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Basic supply and exhaust ventilation
• Flexible ‘spot’ extract branch to reach areas of gross contamination
• Capable of coping with variable heat loads
3.17.3.5 ENGINE ROOM SPACE UNDER VFD ROOM
The ventilation of the Engine Room Space under the VFD Room shall include, but not be
limited to, the following features:
• Basic supply and exhaust ventilation
• Capable of coping with variable heat loads
3.17.3.6 MUD PITS & ROOMS
The mud pit ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Explosion proof interlocked supply & exhaust fans to provide adequate ventilation in
all areas
• Supply and exhaust dampers to be of stainless-steel construction and interlocked with
fans.
• Exhaust shall be from both mud pits and pit room
• Balance dampers shall be provided on each pit to ensure negative pit pressure inside
the pits is maintained
• Oil separator baffles with drain on pit extracts.
• Extract duct to be fully welded a minimum of 3mm stainless steel
3.17.3.7 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT ROOMS & HEAVY TOOL STORE
The Auxiliary Equipment Rooms ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following
features:
• Basic supply and exhaust ventilation
• Capable of coping with variable heat loads

PAGE 178 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.17.3.8 PUMP ROOMS

The Pump Room ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Basic supply and exhaust ventilation
• Capable of coping with variable heat loads
3.17.3.9 SHAKER HOUSE& MUD TREATMENT ROOM.
The shaker house ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Space ventilation requirements shall comply with the Specification, including but not
limited to:
• Ventilation fans for the area shall be explosion proof
• Shut off dampers to be stainless-steel construction, interlocked with fans, and
shall have an explosion proof means of actuation
• System shall be designed to ensure good localized extraction of fumes from all shakers
and other areas where fumes may be present
• Ducting to be 3mm stainless steel, grilles balancing dampers and other accessories to
also be stainless steel
3.17.3.10 WELDERS SHOP
The Welders Shop ventilation shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Suitable and Sufficient exhaust ventilation
• Flexible ‘spot’ extract branch to extract gross fumes
3.17.4 HEATING VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT
The HVAC system shall be designed, and equipment selected, in order to minimize the
equipment generated ‘break out’ and ‘break in’ noise and the transfer of air borne noise
through the ducts. The design shall meet the level stipulated in Section 2.0 of this CTS.

3.17.4.1 HEATERS
The system heaters shall be of electric duct mounted type and shall be of 2 step capacity
control for all heaters of capacity greater than 3 kW.
Heaters shall be provided with thermostats to control the supply air temperature and shall
have inbuilt two step protection the first step to have local reset, to prevent overheating of
heater under no air flow conditions.
The maximum heater coil surface temperature shall be as per vendor recommendations,
except heaters used in hazardous areas which shall have max heater coil temperature as per
max T- rating for the area.

3.17.4.2 FANS AND MOTORS

Ventilation fans shall be of direct drive axial flow type, designed, constructed and balanced to
minimize noise levels and driven by electric motor of totally enclosed ventilated type.
• All large capacity fans and air conditioning equipment; fan motors shall be suitable for
480V, 3Ph 60Hz electrical power supply and insulation class as per ambient of 50ºC.
+ projected heat increases from exhaust fans.
• The fans shall be capable of developing the required static pressure to overcome
pressure drops throughout the system and the effects of external wind conditions with
no loss in performance
• Fans shall be able to be remotely and locally operated
• Fans serving variable load compartments shall be designed to be able to match the
variable load conditions

PAGE 179 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Fan casings to be of adequate thickness steel, min 6mm, and painted to external
painting specification.
• Fan casings shall have an external junction box and maintenance hatch for motor
inspection and be equipped with external grease nipples of bronze, brass or stainless
steel with flexible connection to internal fan/motor nipples.
• Fans shall not have dissimilar metals for blade fixing which can cause abnormal
degradation of hub, blades and bolts due to galvanic corrosion
3.17.4.3 INSULATION
The insulation to be used throughout the HVAC systems shall include, but not be limited to,
the following features:
• Fire insulation shall be Rock Wool A60 certified type the same as the bulkhead and
deck fire insulation. Fixed with 3mm copper coated welded pins.
• For round or light gauge ducts where welded pins are not possible, GOOD INDUSTRY
PRACTICE shall be adopted, i.e. slab type insulation with added 30mm banding strips
with maximum spacing of 600mm depending on weight of insulation
• Thermal insulation shall be non-combustible approved type mineral wool or slab with
minimum density of 24KG/m3 25mm thickness complete with reinforced vapor barrier
and suitable for the application
• Joints to be taped with reinforced aluminium tape of 50mm minimum width and
overlapped to ensure vapor seal.
• Vapor barriers shall have a vapor transmission rating of 1.75 PERM.
• Round pre-insulated duct and fittings shall be factory made with approved insulation
• Any internal duct insulation shall withstand velocity of 20m/s with no erosion of any
kind.
• Perforated sheets used for the protection of internal insulation shall be of the same
material quality as the ducting and have 30% perforation.
• External ducting insulation shall be jacketed as ISO 15138 and secured with stainless
steel fittings bands screws etc.
3.17.4.4 CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION.
The construction and material of the HVAC trunks, ducts shall be suitable for the installation
area and the pressure rating class. Duct class classification shall follow ISO 15138 and shall
include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Pre-galvanized sheet used for construction shall be of the Sendzimir type or equal to
prevent coating detaching during bending and forming process.
• Ducts passing through “A” class bulkheads shall be provided with a min. 3 mm thick
mild steel penetration of length 900 mm min and compatible with the classification of
the bulkhead through which they pass
• A15, A30 or A60 bulkhead penetration pieces shall be suitably insulated with fire rated
insulation the same as the bulkhead they penetrate
• Duct penetrations to watertight bulkheads shall have the same thickness and material
of the watertight damper flanges and bulkhead / deckhead they penetrate
• Ventilation hoods and louvres exposed to ambient conditions without mechanical
dampers shall be provided with a cowl or gooseneck fitted with lockable watertight
covers
• Mushroom ventilators shall have watertight means of manual closure to prevent
rainwater ingress and shall be of adequate thickness, a minimum of 6mm, and painted
to external paint specification
• Stainless wire meshed bird screen shall also be provided to prevent entry of local
wildlife

PAGE 180 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Ventilation hoods placed in structural shafts for machinery space ventilation shall
incorporate mist eliminators
3.17.4.5 DAMPERS AND CLOSURES
All dampers shall be of robust good quality, suitable for harsh salt air environment. Fire
dampers, Gas tight & shut off dampers for hazardous areas and LQ fresh air intake use, to be
constructed of stainless steel. Hot dipped galvanized steel for other areas. All emergency
dampers to have manual mechanical means of closure.
a) Fire Dampers
Fire dampers shall be provided as required by class for passive fire protection and smoke
control philosophy, to all penetrations through classified bulkheads. They shall be equipped
with suitable temperature fusible link or similar mechanism and shall be of fail-safe type
(Closed), except special conditions such as emergency generator room. Fire dampers shall
be automatic, horizontally opposed blade type and of good quality suitable for harsh salt air
environment.
• Linkages to be outside of airflow and blade spindles to be run in brass or equivalent
bush/bearings
• Rated by an internationally recognized fire testing laboratory and be of the same fire
rating as the bulkhead or deckhead they penetrate
• Actuation shall be of electrical (LQ) or pneumatic type (Machinery Space)
• Limit switches to be provided for fully open and fully closed positions
• Dampers shall be capable of being closed manually from both sides of the bulkhead
or deck which they penetrate and include a visible position indicator
b) Automatic shut off & gas tight dampers
Automatic shut off & gas tight dampers shall be of the horizontally opposed blade type,
constructed of stainless steel (for hazardous area use, hot dip galvanized in all other areas)
and include but not be limited to, the following features:
• Hot dipped galvanized steel with visible position indicator, and of fail-safe type
• Linkages to be outside of airflow and blade spindles to be run in brass or equivalent
bush/bearings
• Dampers shall conform to international recognized leakage rates
• Dampers to be operable from inside and outside the space with visible means of
damper position
c) Pressure Relief & non-return Dampers.
• To be of adjustable external weighted type to allow balancing of exhaust air
• Blade spindles to run in brass or equivalent bushes / bearings
d) Manual shut off and balancing damper
Adequate numbers of balancing and shutoff dampers to be provided to both supply and
exhaust lines to facilitate correct air balancing, and isolation when needed.
• Manual shut off & balancing dampers to have horizontally opposed blades.
• Spindles to be run in brass or equivalent bush/ bearing, cadmium coated grease
nipples to be provided for all spindles on all dampers
• Visible position indicator to be incorporated and lockable adjustment handles provided
e) Watertight Dampers
Duct penetrations through watertight bulkheads / deckheads serving adjacent compartments
shall be fitted with watertight dampers as per watertight integrity plan and shall include, but
not be limited to, the following features:
• They shall match the pressure and watertight rating of the bulkhead in which they are
installed

PAGE 181 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Actuation shall be remotely and locally operable by hydraulic actuators

• Manual means of closing
• Visible indication of valve position
3.17.4.6 CONDENSING UNITS
External condensing units shall be of air-cooled high-grade n type suitable for operation in
harsh saliferous atmosphere and compatible with the chosen refrigerant.
Larger capacity units shall have capacity control for variable load conditions and hot gas
bypass should be considered to compensate for low load conditions. The condensing units
shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• The compressors shall have factory installed anti vibration mounts
• Connecting pipework shall have vibration eliminators fitted close to compressors
• Exposed piping shall be suitably structurally protected against mechanical damage
• Casings and fittings shall be fitted with robust but easily operable locks and handles
for panel access / removal
• Compound pressure gauges for high and low pressures to be clearly visible via
Perspex window in control box
• The condenser skids shall be mounted on suitable foundations with ribbed non-
combustible rubber strip placed between foundation and skid to aid the reduction of
transmitted noise and vibration
• Adequate maintenance space to be provided for all service work
3.17.4.7 AIR HANDLING UNITS
The Air handling units for all areas shall be of direct expansion (DX) type and have visible D/P
pressure gauges fitted across the filters. All units shall be provided with adequate service
space as per manufacturer recommendations.
All units shall be mounted on suitable foundations with ribbed non-combustible rubber strip
placed between foundation and the skid to aid the reduction of transmitted noise and vibration.
a) Main External Fresh Air handling units shall include, but not be limited to, the following
features:
• Skid mounted type
• Double skinned insulated panels
• Panel type pre-filters
• Bag type final filters
• Copper/Copper evaporator coil with factory applied corrosion resistant coating
• Backward curved centrifugal belt driven fan
• Stainless Steel condensate drain pan with trap sized to prevent water carryover to
ductwork
• Air inlet with motorized isolating gastight damper.
• Demountable panels for easy access to components requiring periodic maintenance
fitted with robust but easily operated handles and panel fixings /locks
• Fan motor IP rating shall be as per class requirement
• Humidity Control features

b) Recirculating air handling units that do not handle outside air directly shall include, but not
be limited to, the following features:
• Skid mounted type
• Double skin insulated casing of suitably coated galvanized plate
• Copper/Copper evaporator coil with factory applied corrosion resistant coating
• Filters at the return air intake to be washable type

PAGE 182 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Backward curved Centrifugal belt driven fans

• Return air opening on the unit to be fitted with grill and balancing damper
• Supply air opening fitted with non-return damper where units have redundancy
capabilities
• Stainless steel condensate drain pan with water trap sized to prevent water carryover
to ductwork
• Demountable panels for easy access to components requiring periodic maintenance
All larger Air Conditioning equipment shall be suitable for an electrical power supply of 480V
3Ph 60Hz. Smaller split type local units to have at least three (3) fan speeds and units to be
230V 60Hz.

3.17.4.8 HVAC & REFRIGERATION SYSTEM PIPING

The grade of interconnecting copper piping & tubing between condensers and evaporators
shall match pressure ratings for the chosen refrigerants in use as ASME B31. & ASTM B280.
For smaller sized units requiring small bore pipework, ‘Air Conditioning and Refrigeration’
(ACR) annealed tubing is preferred to minimize joints, reducing leak potential.
Appropriate brazing & silver content rods to be used for brazing & silver soldering process. All
refrigerant piping shall be installed to industry standard with particular attention to internal
cleanliness and Nitrogen purging of lines during soldering/brazing activities
All installations to be pressure tested and evacuated to vendors recommendations.
Suction lines shall be insulated for design compliance and prevention of surface condensation
with suitable non-combustible closed cell elastomeric insulation. (Armaflex or similar).
Piping shall be suitably supported with spacing as ASHRAE standard and clamped with
recognized industry refrigeration clamps.
All pipes penetrating A-class divisions shall be fitted with ROXTEC MCTs or similar.
Where suction risers exceed 4 meters height particular attention shall be paid to ensure oil
return to compressors.

PAGE 183 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.18 SAFETY SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient Safety Systems throughout the VESSEL.
The Safety Systems covered in this section shall be provided in accordance with the Rules,
Codes and Standards stipulated within Section 1.0 of this CTS and with the Contract Plans.
The Safety Systems covered in this section are limited to the following:
• Emergency Shutdown System
• Fire Detection
• Gas Detection
• Combined F&G Cabinet
• Alarms
• Critical Action Panels
3.18.1 EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SYSTEM
BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient, stand-alone, Emergency Shutdown System
(ESD).
The ESD, Fire and Gas and the Integrated Monitoring and Control System shall be supplied
by the same equipment manufacturer so as to ensure seamless integration and interfacing
with one and other. If the supplier is not the same for both ESD and F&G system, then such
deviation shall be subject to specific approval by BUYER.
The system shall be powered by UPS meeting the requirements of the UPS Power Systems
as defined in the CTS.
BUILDER shall provide a Functional Design Specification to define the detailed equipment
requirements of the ESD system.
In addition, The ESD system shall be included in the VESSEL Cause and Effect matrix to be
developed during detailed design for the 3 interfacing systems.
The ESD system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• ESD push button stations at various parts of the VESSEL
• Interfaces including but not limited to; the following systems
• Fire and Gas detection
• Fixed Fire Fighting
• HVAC
• Fuel Oil quick closing valve
• PAGA
• Critical Action Panel at Central Control Room and Rig floor Driller Cabin and OIM office
The ESD system on the VESSEL shall include automatic initiation via inputs from the
interfacing systems or manual initiation via 'manual shutdown activation panels' located in
areas that shall include, but are not be limited to, the following:
• Critical Action Panel
• Central Control Room
• Drillers Cabin
• ESD panels
• Port Lifeboat / Muster Area
• Stbd Lifeboat / Muster Area
• Helideck
• Fuel Shutoff / Quick Closing valve activation
• Exit(s) from Engine room
The precise locations of the panels shall be established during the detailed design phase.

PAGE 184 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The ESD system shall initiate cascading levels of executive action, dependent upon the ESD
input(s). There shall be a minimum of three (3) ESD shut down levels where; ESD 3 would
be the Lowest Level and ESD 1 the highest.
The Number of ESD levels, and the requisite executive actions for each, shall be established
during the detailed design phase, and shall be reflected in the Cause and Effects Matrix.

3.18.2 FIRE DETECTION

The Fire detection system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Manual Alarm Call Points
• Sensors
• Combined F&G Cabinet
• ESD interfaces
• Tie into Third-Party locations & equipment
• Marshalling Cabinets and Field Junction Boxes
3.18.2.1 MANUAL ALARM CALL POINTS
Manual Alarm Call Points shall be provided throughout the VESSEL for manual input to the
fire detection and PAGA systems.

3.18.2.2 SENSORS
The Fire Detection system shall incorporate sensors throughout the VESSEL in accordance
with the attendant hazards and risks in the various areas and may include, but not be limited
to, the following types:
• Addressable optical smoke detectors
• Infra-Red (IR) Flame detectors
• Ultra Violet (UV) Flame detectors
• Heat detectors:
• Thermocouple
• Bi-metal
• Fusible links or plugs
• Frangible bulbs
The operational status of each sensor, either directly or indirectly, shall be constantly
identifiable both locally at the sensor and via remote monitoring facilities.
The precise locations of the sensors shall be established during the detailed design phase
and reflected on comprehensive loop diagrams.
A complete set tools associated with the installed sensors shall be provided and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
• Calibration kit
• Test smoke canisters
• Test smoke applicator c/w extendable probe
• Heat gun
• Infra-red test lamp
3.18.3 GAS DETECTION
The Gas detection system shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Flammable Gas sensors
• Toxic Gas sensors
• Combined F&G Cabinet
• ESD interfaces

PAGE 185 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Dedicated gas system for platform interface (Page 262 of HSERM)

• Tie in for Third-Party locations & equipment
• Marshalling Cabinets and Field Junction Boxes
3.18.3.1 FLAMMABLE GAS SENSORS
The Gas Detection system shall incorporate hydrocarbon (CH4) flammable gas sensors
throughout the VESSEL in accordance with the attendant hazards and risks in the various
areas and may include, but not be limited to, the following types:
• Catalytic bead
• Infra-Red (IR) point
• Infra-Red (IR) beam
3.18.3.2 TOXIC GAS SENSORS
The Gas Detection system shall incorporate Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) gas sensors throughout
the VESSEL in accordance with the attendant hazards and risks in the various areas and may
include, but not be limited to, the following types:
• Solid state absorption
• Electro-chemical cell type
The precise locations of the gas sensors shall be established during the detailed design phase
and reflected on comprehensive loop diagrams.
The operational status and gas level reading at each gas sensor, shall be constantly
identifiable both locally at the sensor and via remote monitoring facilities.
A complete set tools associated with the installed sensors shall be provided and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
• Calibration kit (for fixed and portable detectors)
• Test gas canisters, H2S and CH4
• Gas testing tubes
3.18.3.3 PORTABLE GAS DETECTORS
The VESSEL shall be provided with portable Gas Detectors to meet Class and END USER
Requirements which include:
• Twelve (12) Portable Hydrogen Sulfide monitors.
• Four (4) portable H2S Detectors (hand pump suction type such as Gas-tech) with an
adequate supply of low, medium and high level H2S and SO2. tubes. The range of
detection tubes shall be able to accurately measure from 0 ppm to high percentage
H2S and SO2.
• Continuous H2S mud monitoring system. Garrett Gas Train Sulfide Analysis unit,
together with the supply of accessory equipment (Draeger tubes) for testing water and
oil-based mud for H2S levels. A Test Kit shall be used to perform quantitative Sulfide
analysis in conjunction with the gas train system.
• Four (4) Multi-gas portable detectors (O2, H2S, and CH4 as a minimum)
All portable detectors shall be supplied with calibration certificates. Minimum two (2) spare gas
cylinders shall be provided with each type of portable gas detector for calibration.

3.18.4 COMBINED FIRE AND GAS CABINET

The combined Fire & Gas system cabinet shall be installed in a 24 hour manned space,
proposed location being the Central Control & Radio Room.

PAGE 186 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.18.5 ALARMS
The F&G Detection Systems shall be interfaced (hardwired) to PAGA system for initiating
audible and visual alarms from F&G Detection System for PAGA announcement and for
activating General Alarms. The signals given over the General Alarm system shall be capable
of being supplemented by announcements over the Public-Address system.
The fire and gas alarms from FDAS and GDAS shall be made available on Fire and Gas
Repeater panels located in Rig floor Driller’s Cabin and OIM/Toolpusher office.
Common system fault and common failure alarm of the F&G systems shall be hardwired to
IMCS.
F&G system shall have serial interface (Modbus TCP/IP or equivalent) with IMCS to transmit
F&G alarms and detector fault conditions to IMCS. IMCS HMI display shall include graphic
pages developed based upon the detector layouts for indicating the individual detector alarms
and faults. The F&G detection systems shall be time synchronized with IMCS over NTP
protocol.

3.18.6 CRITICAL ACTION PANELS

A Critical Action Panel (CAP) shall be provided at Central Control Room, OIM Office and
Drillers Cabin. The CAP panel shall have ESD functions plus manual activation of fire
suppression systems. The details of the functions to be included on the CAP panel shall be
finalized during detailed design.

3.18.7 MUSTER STATIONS

Primary and Secondary muster areas shall be identified for the VESSEL. Internal Muster
Areas should be considered Primary and external muster areas Secondary.
Primary Muster Areas shall be located in the Mess room and Recreation area.
Secondary Muster Areas shall be located at the Port and Starboard Lifeboat stations.
Equipment necessary for effective Mustering shall be provided at, or in the vicinity of, all
Muster Points and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Suitable and Sufficient lighting at all times
• Zone 1 Heavy Duty rechargeable hand lamp and charger
• First Aid kit
• PA speaker
• Rig telephone
• Hand Held Marine VHF radio
• Loudhailer
• T Card Racks or POB Tracking boards
The Lifeboat Station Muster Points shall have space for 100% POB and individual muster
positions shall be marked on the deck. There shall also be space allocated for a stretcher and
stretcher party.
The primary and the secondary Muster Points shall have cascade breathing area equipment
provided as described in the Breathing Air Section of this CTS.

PAGE 187 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19 OTHER KEY VESSEL SYSTEMS

3.19.1 TANK LEVEL INDICATION SYSTEM
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Tank Level Indication System, as
required, throughout the VESSEL.
The system shall be provided in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated
within Section 1.0 of this CTS and with the Contract Plans.
The Tank Level Monitoring System shall enable remote monitoring of fluid levels of various
tanks distributed throughout the VESSEL.
All tanks of the VESSEL shall be installed with level transmitters, the tank level indication and
associated alarm levels for each tank shall be displayed on the IMCS display (HMI). The HMI
pages for Tank Level Monitoring system shall display the contents of each Tank in Percentage,
Height, and Volume, as per respective Tank Sounding Table.
Level transmitters/sensors for drilling related tanks, shall be connected to the Drilling
Instrumentation and Control System which shall pass on the level data through a serial
communication interface to IMCS for monitoring purposes. The drilling tanks shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
• Mud Pits
• Premix Pit
• Slug Pits
• Brine Tanks
• Base Oil Tanks
• Skimmer Tank
• Sand Trap Tank
• Degasser Tank
• Desander Tank
• Desilter Tank
• Overflow Tank
• Trip Tanks
• Strip Tank
The type of tank level sensors and components shall be established during detailed design.
Cement, Barite, bulk mud storage and surge tanks shall be equipped with Load Cells for
content monitoring that shall be interfaced to Drilling Fluid Control System. Drilling Fluid
Control System and pass on the data through a serial communication interface to IMCS for
tank content display purposes.
In addition to IMCS Tank Level Monitoring every tank and void space shall include sounding
facility as described in the associated section within this CTS.

3.19.2 VENTS, SOUND AND OVERFLOWS

Vents and sounds shall be installed for all liquid tanks and void spaces. Vents (overflows) shall
be sized relative to the fill and drain flow rates for the tank and shall avoid either over
pressurization or drawing a vacuum on the tank or space. All vents and overflows located on
main deck shall be fitted with marine type float/vent valves.
In general, all vents shall have a cross-sectional area equal to, or greater than, 125% of the
fill pipe cross-sectional area. However, vent heads for preload tanks shall be sized in
accordance with the rate of discharge from the dump valve or fill line whichever the greater.
Vent heads shall be of an inline ball type as approved by the BUYER. Vent pipes and vent
heads above the main deck shall be arranged so as to be protected from mechanical damage
and so as not to impinge on or limit deck space.

PAGE 188 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Vents from oil tanks shall be fitted with 40-mesh corrosion resistant flame screens with a
mechanical protection layer of 6 mm wire mesh screens. The vents shall be directed to open
air and shall incorporate suitably sized bund. All vents open to the weather shall incorporate
covers.
The vents from the lube oil tanks in the engine room and mud pump room may terminate below
the main deck out of the weather. A bund of sufficient volume shall be provided and any vent
goose neck shall discharge be inside the bund. There shall be a drain provided from the bund
to the dirty oil tank.
Fuel oil tank vents shall be led to the open air and positioned in away from sources of ignition
with due cognizance of the Hazardous Area Classification requirements.
Potable water tank vents shall be fitted with 16-mesh or finer bug screens of corrosion resistant
wire.
All tanks shall have straight sounding tubes extending from the deck to within 38 mm of the
tank bottom. There shall be a replaceable striker plate approximately 150 mm x 150 mm x
12.5 mm thick located under the sounding tube. The sounding tube shall be 50 mm pipe with
a 5.54 mm wall thickness, continuously welded and shall with a smooth inside surface. The
sounding tube shall be sleeved at deck or tank top penetrations. The upper ends of the
sounding tubes at the main deck level shall be fitted with sounding plugs and an engraved
stainless-steel tank identification plate shall be affixed immediately adjacent to it.
Class approved self-closing type sounding heads shall be installed for all oil tanks.

3.19.3 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall provide the compressed air systems described in the section, supported
by calculations demonstrating that the maximum demand can be maintained by the equipment
provided. The information herein shall not relieve the BUILER of its express responsibility to
provide systems that are sized in appropriately for their function, fit for purpose, in accordance
with Section 1.0 of this CTS and the Contract Plans.
All compressed air system components shall be suitable for use in a saliferous marine
environment by virtue of their base material, coating or degree of protection.
The compressed air systems shall comprise:
• Bulk Air
• Service Air
• Instrument Air
• Breathing Air
• Cold Start
• Well Test
All compressors shall incorporate the necessary control lines and unloaders etc. to provide
automatic pressure switch operation.

All air receivers shall incorporate:

• Coalescing and Particulate filters, as required by BUYER
• Auto and manual drain
• Lockable bypass arrangement
• Pressure Relief Valve protection
• Earth boss
• Four (4) inch face, liquid filled, stainless steel pressure gauge
• Hot dip galvanizing
All air dryers shall incorporate:

PAGE 189 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Coalescing and Particulate filters, as required by BUYER

• Fail to shift alarm
• High dew point alarm
• Lockable bypass arrangement
• Pressure gauge on the purging air supply
• High Dew Point alarm
3.19.3.1 BULK AIR
The Bulk Air system shall be supplied by one (1) dedicated air compressor. The compressor
shall discharge to the system via an isolation valve, a stainless-steel flexible connection to
hard pipe, a bulk air dryer, and a bulk air dry receiver.
Provision shall be made to allow the Bulk Air system to be supplemented by the Service Air
system in order to accommodate situations where the air demand is in excess of the dedicated
Bulk Air compressor capacity.
3.19.3.1.1 Bulk Air-compressors
One (1) Air Cooled Bulk Air-compressor Unit (screw type), complete with all necessary
ancillaries, shall be provided at the Mezzanine Deck, Port Equipment Room. The compressor
shall incorporate automatic start/stop and loading/ unloading capability governed by the air
receiver pressure.
• Capacity 1274 m3/h (750 scfm)
• Working pressure 6.2 bar (90 psi)
• Driver electric motor
3.19.3.1.2 Bulk air dryer
One (1) bulk Air dryer shall be provided in Main Deck Compressor Room.
• Capacity 1274 m3/h (750 scfm)
• Working pressure 6.2 bar (90 psi)
• Dew point - 40° C (- 40° F)

3.19.3.1.3 Bulk air dry receiver

One (1) Bulk Air receiver shall be provided at the Mezzanine Deck, Port Equipment Room.
• Capacity 4.0 m3 (1056 gallons)

3.19.3.2 SERVICE AIR

The Service Air system shall be supplied by three (3) compressors. The compressor shall
discharge to the system via two (2) air dryers and two (2) service air dry receivers.
As per section 3.19.3.1, BULK AIR, there shall be a crossover facility provided to allow the
Service Air System to supplement the Bulk Air system as and when necessary. The crossover
facility shall include the provision of a standalone pressure reduction station to connect the
two systems that shall include, but not be limited to:
• Pressure Reduction Manifold
• Two (2) pressure reducing valves
• Pressure Relief Valve
• Water separator
The compressor discharge to the system shall be via an isolation valve and a stainless-steel
flexible connection to the system hard pipe.

PAGE 190 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The service air system shall include a dedicated starting air manifold.
The final connection between the system and the engine starter motors shall be flexible hose.
Service Air outlets for general use shall be fitted with a ball type isolation valve and crows foot
connection.
Outlets for specific items of equipment shall be fitted with a globe type isolation valve and
ancillary components to include, but not be limited to, pressure regulators and lubricators in
accordance with OEM requirements.
3.19.3.2.1 Service Air-compressors
Three (3) Air Cooled Service Air-compressors (screw type) shall be provided, complete with
all necessary ancillaries within the hull machinery spaces. The compressors shall incorporate
automatic start/stop and loading/ unloading capability governed by the air receiver pressure.
The compressors shall be assigned via automatic 'duty cycling sequencing'.
• Capacity 850 m3/h (500 SCFM) (per compressor)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)
• Driver electric motor
3.19.3.2.2 Service Air dryers
Two (2) absorption type Service Air dryers shall be provided. The two (2) air dryers shall
together have sufficient capacity to process the compressed air supplied by all three (3)
compressors operating simultaneously.
• Capacity 2548 m3/h (1500 scfm)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)
• Dew point - 40° C (- 40° F)
3.19.3.2.3 Service Air dry receiver
Two (2) Service Air dry receivers.
• Capacity 2.73 m3 (720 gal)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)

3.19.3.2.4 Service Air/Start dry receiver

One (1) Service Air/Start dry receiver.
• Capacity 2.73 m3 (720 Gallons)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)
3.19.3.2.5 Rig floor air receivers
One (1) Service Air receiver shall be provided at the rig floor for ‘Rig Floor’ equipment.
• Capacity 2.73 m3 (720 Gallons)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)

One (1) Service Air receivers shall be provided at the rig floor for ‘Cantilever’ equipment.
• Capacity 2.73 m3 (720 Gallons)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)

3.19.3.3 INSTRUMENT AIR

The Instrument Air dryer shall take its supply from the Service Air system and discharge to the
Instrument Air system via an Instrument Air receiver.

PAGE 191 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.3.3.1 Instrument Air dryer

One (1) absorption type Instrument Air dryer system shall be provided.
• Capacity 340 m3 (200 scfm)
• Working pressure 10 bar (145 psi)

3.19.3.3.2 Instrument Air receiver

One (1) Instrument air receiver shall be installed in the cantilever.
• Capacity 0.5 m3 (132 gallons)

3.19.3.4 BREATHING AIR SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall supply a breathing air system that meets the requirements of the rules,
codes and standards, Flag State, and END USER requirements referenced in Section 1.0 of
this CTS.
The breathing air system shall be designed so as to provide respiratory protection for:
• Personnel required to work in H2S contaminated atmospheres
• Personnel required to evacuate and/or escape from irrespirable atmospheres
• Personnel required to undertake emergency operations involving irrespirable
atmospheres
The Basis of Design for the breathing air system shall focus primarily on the design
requirements for the H2S Breathing Air Cascade system, and that system shall include the
provision for the additional breathing apparatus requirements related to evacuation, escape
and emergency operations, not associated directly with H2S.
The cascade system shall be a looped high-pressure cascade storage system with a capacity
suitable for the protection of 120 POB. The system shall include, but be limited to, the
following:
• Breathing Air Compressors
• Breathing Air Cascade Cylinder Rack(s)
• Interconnecting high pressure tubing
• Breathing Air Regulator Panel(s)
• Breathing Air Distribution Manifold(s)
• Breathing Air Hoses with Quick Connectors
• Breathing Apparatus Sets
• Breathing Air Quality Test Kit

High Pressure (HP) compressed air shall be generated by three (3) air compressors. HP
compressed air shall be hard piped to, and stored in, Storage Cylinder Racks. HP air from the
storage racks shall be hard piped to pressure regulator panels and strategically positioned to
‘quick fill’ decanting points. LP air from the regulator panels shall be hard piped to breathing
air manifolds. BA sets of various types shall be connected to the breathing air manifolds by
flexible hose fitted with ‘quick connectors’.
3.19.3.4.1 Compressors
There shall be three (3) Breathing Air compressors, as required by END USER. The
compressor intakes shall be located so as to avoid, so far as is reasonably practicable, the
intake of any contaminated air such as that from engine exhausts and galley extract etc.
• One (1) diesel powered

PAGE 192 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• One (1) electrically powered connected to the VESSEL Normal Power supply
• One (1) electrically powered connected to the VESSEL Emergency Power supply
A structured ‘contaminated air risk assessment’; shall be undertaken during which suitable
separation of the compressor intakes shall be considered in order to provide the best prospect
of sustaining compressed air production in the event of an H2S release and the effects of wind
direction on the extent of the H2S contamination. The maximum working pressure shall be
300 bar.
3.19.3.4.2 Interconnecting tubing
All interconnecting tubing shall be stainless steel suitable for use in a saliferous environment
such A316-L grade stainless steel as a minimum.
All high pressure fittings shall be compatible with the tubing to be utilized.
High pressure fittings from different manufacturers shall not be used in conjunction with one
and other.
All pipework shall be suitably and sufficiently secured in position with ‘fit for purpose’ clamps
that shall not damage the tubing. So far as is reasonably practicable, HP air tubing shall be
routed so as to minimize the risk to personnel in the unlikely event of a failure of pipework or
fittings.
Where necessary tubing and equipment shall be protected against mechanical damage.
Examples include but are not limited to, personnel access, forklift operations, crane operations
and mechanical handling in general.
3.19.3.4.3 Cascade Cylinder Rack(s)
Cylinder racks shall be of robust design and shall not damage the breathing air storage
cylinders within them.
All cylinders shall be clamped within the rack to prevent any movement during transit or lifting.
The storage racks shall have suitable and sufficient integral lifting points and shall be of an
appropriate Safe Working Load.
Storage racks shall incorporate a top cover to prevent the accumulation of debris and/or
contamination around the neck and valve area of the cylinders.
3.19.3.4.4 Pressure Regulator Panel(s)
The regulator panels shall be provided so as to meet the END USER requirement for the
reduction of HP air to LP air and shall have a maximum ratio of manifold outlets to regulator
of twelve (12) to one (1)
3.19.3.4.5 Distribution Manifold(s)
The manifolds shall be of stainless steel and so designed that they will retain air sufficient to
equalize the demand for breathing air under heavy use; this will require a sufficient reservoir
of air to be included in the manifold design. The manifold for the lifeboats shall comprise a
suitably sized stainless-steel header running around the lifeboat with the appropriate number
of outlets located so as to be compatible with the seating arrangements. The lifeboat section
of the cascade system shall incorporate a suitable ‘breakaway’ coupling on the air supply so
as to disconnect on lowering/launching the boat.
3.19.3.4.6 Hoses and Connectors
Each flexible hose at the distribution stations shall be of an appropriate length to be ‘fit for
purpose’ and shall be fitted with a quick connector for connection to the BA set

PAGE 193 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.3.4.7 Breathing Apparatus Sets

BA sets provided for the VESSEL shall be Positive Pressure and comprise:
• Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)
• Supplied Air (airline) Breathing Apparatus (SABA)
• Combination-Type Supplied Air Breathing Apparatus (SABA) with self-contained
escape air supply
• Emergency Escape Breathing Device (EEBD)
By virtue of the above specifications, ALL BA sets shall be capable of connecting to the
VESSEL breathing air manifolds to facilitate BA wearing for durations in excess of the cylinder
capacity.
3.19.3.4.8 Breathing Air Quality Test Kit
A breathing air quality test kit shall be provided to allow the sampling and testing of breathing
air for the following contaminants:
• Water
• Carbon Monoxide
• Carbon Dioxide
• Oil Mist
3.19.3.5 COLD START AIR
The cold start system shall be supplied by a diesel engine powered air compressor. The
primary method of starting the engine shall be by battery and a secondary method by hand
cranking. In order to keep the battery fully charged there shall be a trickle charging system
incorporated and the engine shall be fitted with an alternator to keep the battery charged
independently once running.
The compressor shall discharge to the Emergency Generator Air Receiver. In addition, a
hard-piped tie in shall be provided to the dedicated main engine air start receiver. The cold
start compressor shall also have the capability to discharge to the so designed that they will
retain air sufficient to equalize the demand for breathing air under heavy use; this will require
a sufficient reservoir of air to be included in the manifold design.
The three (3) systems shall be capable of being totally isolated from one and other by the
provision of suitable and sufficient piping and valve arrangements.
The cold start compressor engine and compressor shall meet the requirements of the project
Hazardous Area Classifications plans. The diesel engine shall be capable of running on API
2 standard diesel fuel.
3.19.3.5.1 Cold Start compressor
One (1) Diesel engine V-belt driven Cold Start compressor
• Capacity 73 m3/h (43 scfm)
• Working pressure 9.7 bar (140 psi)
• Pressure unloader 10 bar (145 psi) 'cut out' and (7.7 bar) 110psi 'cut in'
• Driver diesel engine, electric starting capability with two (2) sets of
batteries
3.19.3.5.2 Cold Start/ E-Gen air receiver
One (1) Diesel Cold Start/E-Gen receiver
• Capacity 1.89 m3 (500 gallons)

PAGE 194 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.3.6 WELL TEST AIR

Compressors shall be suitable for operation in the Hazardous Area in which they are installed
3.19.3.6.1 Well test air compressors
Two (2) dedicated diesel engine driven air compressors each with sufficient air volume and
pressure to allow the well test burners to function at a maximum rate of 12000 barrels per day.

3.19.4 BILGE SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a bilge system, split between a Port section and a Starboard
section, for the removal of fluids from the machinery spaces, voids and other compartments
and tanks as identified in the Contract Plans. All bilges and compartments shall incorporate
a suitably sized suction bilge well incorporating a mud box strainer into which the suction lines
from the suction manifolds terminate.
All bilges and compartments shall include a high level indication that is connected with the
IMCS.
There shall be a crossover facility provided between the Port and Starboard systems for both
suction and discharge. The bilge system shall take potentially contaminated fluid from the
identified areas via the Port and/or Starboard sections of the bilge system and discharge to a
single Bilge Holding Tank and a single Oily Water Separator. Clean water from the OWS shall
be discharged overboard and contaminated water re-circulated. Control of the cleanliness of
water and the discharge from the OWS shall be controlled by the inclusion of an Oil Content
Monitoring system (OCM).
Provision shall be made to allow the bilge system, when not in bilge service, to take suction
from the preload tanks in order to assist in stripping as and when required.
The bilge system shall comprise of the following.

3.19.4.1 PUMPS VALVES AND MANIFOLDS

The system Pumps, Suction Manifolds, Discharge Headers, and Valve arrangements shall be
such that there are suitable and sufficient crossovers to provide flexibility and redundancy
within the system in the event of having to address flooding or pump maintenance/failure etc.
The system shall allow the operator to choose between individual pumps, or a combination of
any or all pumps to facilitate removal of fluids from any of the bilge or selected compartment(s).
The suction for each pump shall be protected by the inclusion of a simplex strainer.
3.19.4.1.1 Manifolds
Two (2) suction manifolds, one (1) Port, and one (1) Starboard.
Both suction manifolds shall be equipped with a angle stop check valve for each suction line
and a panel mounted vacuum gauge to display the vacuum level at the manifold.
The two (2) suction manifolds shall be connected via a crossover and shall be capable of being
isolated from one and other.
3.19.4.1.2 Pumps
Two (2) fixed vertical electric powered bilge pumps, one (1) pump port and one (1) pump
starboard, both with pneumatically driven priming devices, and each with a capacity of 550
gpm, @ 90' TDH
Two (2) fixed 4” bilge 'pneumatic diaphragm pumps, one (1) pump port and one (1) pump
starboard
Two (2) water powered eductors, one (1) pump port and one (1) pump starboard.

PAGE 195 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.4.1.3 Discharge Headers

Two (2) discharge headers, one (1) Port, and one (1) Starboard.
Both Discharge Headers shall be equipped with a panel mounted pressure gauge to display
the pressure value at the header.
The two (2) Discharge Headers shall be connected via a crossover and shall be capable of
being isolated from one and other.

3.19.4.2 BILGE HOLDING TANK

The discharge from the bilge wells, via the bilge pumps and Discharge Header, shall be routed
to the bilge holding tank.
The Bilge Holding Tank shall incorporate, as a minimum, a sounding tube and a tank level
indication system that is tied into the IMCS.
Any sounding tube shall have a striker plate at the bottom of the sounding pipe and a brass,
CLASS approved, self-closing valve at the top.
The Bilge Holding Tank shall have a vent line from the tank up to the main deck. The vent line
outlet shall be fitted with a CLASS approved vent valve.

3.19.4.3 OILY WATER SEPARATOR

A 'skid based' Oily Water Separator (OWS). All components of the OWS including, but not
limited to, control panels and electrical boxes etc. shall be incorporated within the skid, with
the exception of the transfer pump that may be integral, or standalone. The OWS skid shall
be located in the Port Pump Room and shall be located within a 'bund'. The OWS pump shall
take suction from the bilge holding tank via a basket strainer and shall incorporate a panel
mounted pressure differential gauge.
The Oily Water Separator shall process the contaminated fluid from the bilge holding tank to
a cleanliness of 15ppm oil content or better. The Oil in Water Content shall be determined by
the Oil Content Monitoring System. Processed bilge water with oil content of less than 15ppm
shall be discharged overboard. If the oil content in the OWS discharge exceeds 15ppm, then
overboard discharge shall be automatically be re-circulated via the bilge holding tank. Once
the cleanliness of stream has been reinstated to 15ppm or better, then the OWS shall revert
to discharge overboard.
When oil is detected in the OWS tower then the fluid cleaning process shall stop automatically,
and a flushing cycle begin. The accumulated oil shall be flushed to the Dirty Oil Tank by a
seawater supply to the skid. Once the accumulated oil has been discharged to the Dirty Oil
Tank, then fluid processing shall resume.

One (1) suitable and sufficient oily water separator.

• Capacity 5 m3/h (22 gallons/m)

The OWS shall incorporate:

• Flushing water pressure reducing valve to prevent over pressuring the OWS
• Pressure Relief Valve on the shell of the VESSEL
• Simplex strainer up stream of the oily water separator pump
• Foot/ Check valve in the OWS suction line as close to the tank as possible
• Earth boss

PAGE 196 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.4.4 OIL CONTENT MONITORING SYSTEM

An Oil Content Monitoring (OCM) system shall be provided, integral with the OWS, to control
the where fluids from the Oily Water Separator shall be discharged, overboard or retained on
board. The OCM shall provide control to the OWS in order to prevent discharge of water with
an oil content in excess of 15ppm overboard.
The system shall include a chart recorder that provides a permanent record for the cleanliness
of water discharged overboard by the OWS.

3.19.4.5 DIRTY OIL TANK

One (1) dirty oil tank shall be provided below the tank top and have a capacity in keeping with
system design requirements.
The Dirty Oil Tank shall incorporate:
• Manhole access for cleaning
• Suction line foot valve
• Class approved self-closing valve
• Gear pump with internal relief Foot/Check valve
• Panel mounted compound suction pressure and discharge pressure gauges

The dirty oil tank pump shall discharge via hard pipe to the loading stations with a ‘MARPOL’
connection. Builder shall supply suitably sized hoses and adapter flanges to discharge to
either a supply vessel or a tote tank.

3.19.5 PRELOAD SYSTEM

BUILDER shall design, fabricate and install all supporting steelwork, foundations, electrical
and mechanical equipment, controls, piping, tubing, monitoring system and services in order
to supply a fully functional salt water preloading system.
The preload ballasting system shall provide for the filling and emptying of any of the preload
tanks and any of the preload/drill water combination tanks. Filling shall be achieved by either
dedicated preload pumps, by raw water system pumps, or a combination thereof.
There shall be one (1) dedicated high volume preload centrifugal submersible pumps and
there shall be three (3) reel mounted submersible raw water pumps. The dedicated preload
pump shall be connected to raw water header and provide the bulk of the salt water required
for preloading under normal circumstances. Where circumstances dictate the preload system
shall be capable of being either supplemented by the raw water pumps or fed from the raw
water pumps alone.
The three-reel mounted submersible pumps shall be capable of being raised and lowered to
ensure that during jacking operations salt water is constantly available, including preloading.
Maximum preload time shall be eight (8) hours.

The preloading criteria for the VESSEL shall allow the following minimum operational criteria:
• Preload all three (3) legs simultaneously
• Complete full and maximum preloading within eight (8) hours
• Allow jacking the VESSEL with the following preloading on board:
• The overboard line / dump line shall be sized to accommodate the full preload pump
flow rate
• Preloading pumps line up and minimize limits on number of fill valve opening at same
time

PAGE 197 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.5.1 PRELOAD PUMPS

One (1) preload pump shall be located on the main deck.
• Pump Type: Single stage centrifugal, submersible
• Capacity: 7000 GPM per pump at a nominal head
• Driver: Submersible electric motor
3.19.5.2 RAW WATER PUMPS
• Pump Type: Vertical multi-stage centrifugal submersible
• Capacity: 1800 GPM at 200ft head (TDH) per pump
• Driver: Submersible electric motor
3.19.5.3 PRELOAD VALVES
All preload filling operations shall be controlled by either hydraulically or electrically operated
remote valves. The valves shall be capable of control remotely from the IMCS or
manually/locally.
The preload fill valves shall be arranged outside the tanks and system isolation valves shall
be arranged in optimum locations in the ring main to ensure optimum preload performance
from the various pumps can be achieved.

3.19.5.4 PRELOAD DUMP VALVES

Preload dump system valves shall be hydraulically and remotely operated with the valves
strategically located within each preload tank. The valves shall be fitted with limit switches and
indicators to provide open or closed position indication on the preload control console. A class
approved non-return valve shall be installed upstream of each dump valve.
The preload system shall have a 'Master dump' system where, on command, water from ALL
preload tanks is dumped simultaneously. The master dump actuation control shall be clearly
highlighted on the preload control console to avoid inadvertent operation. In addition to the
'Master dump' system there shall be a 'Leg dump' system where, on command, water from
the group of tanks surrounding a selected leg is dumped simultaneously. The system shall
incorporate the leg dump facility for all three (3) legs.
The Control and monitoring of the preload valve system shall be incorporated in the IMCS.
Further provision to be made for:
• The ‘blanking off’ of each dump line with a blank flange, hammer union blank cap or
other suitable method. Handling arrangements shall be provided with whatever
system is incorporated and any blank flanges or caps etc. shall be permanently
attached to the structure with stainless steel chain so as not to be lost.
• The safe and efficient removal and change out of dump valves. So far as is reasonably
practicable, install pad eyes or other certified lifting points above manholes
3.19.5.5 PRELOAD DISCHARGE SYSTEM
The BUILDER shall provide a preload discharge and stripping system consisting of stripping
lines, actuated valves, manifold, eductor pump and a combination bilge/ballast stripping pump.
The stripping system shall be used in order to remove residual water from within the preload
tanks that has not drained via the dump valve. The design of the bilge/ballast stripping pump
and stripping eductor manifold shall be such that the bilge/ballast stripping pump shall be
capable of supplementing the dedicated eductor pump for stripping operations or used in lieu
of the eductor pump. Because the eductor stripping system pump discharges directly
overboard, the design of the manifold shall be such that the bilge pump can be isolated from
the stripping system when in use for oily water service. When the bilge pump is to be used

PAGE 198 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

for stripping operations there shall be a requirement to confirm that the pump has been
satisfactorily flushed to prevent any oily water discharge overboard.

3.19.5.6 STRIPPING EDUCTORS SPUD CANS

To empty the spud cans, an educator equipped with bell mouth shall be installed in each spud
can. Raw water supply to the eductor will be given from raw water header. The connections
between seawater supply lines near the leg wells and eductors supply lines are to be made
by flexible hose.
The outlet line of the educator shall be connected to flexible hose and to be directed overboard
inside the leg well.

3.19.6 LEG JETTING SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall supply a high- and low-pressure leg jetting system. Water for the high-
pressure system shall be supplied via the mud pumps and the low-pressure system by the
raw water pumps, via the raw water header. The system shall comprise:
• Risers, HP and LP
• Supply connections
• Spud can Ring mains
• Nozzles
3.19.6.1 RISERS
There shall be two (2) leg jetting risers running outside the truss of ‘each’ leg. Each riser shall
have a sufficient number of male hammer union connections throughout the length of the riser
to allow connection of jetting supply flexible hoses at any elevation of the VESSEL. Every
male hammer union connection shall have a female hammer union cap connected by a chain
to the riser to prevent the cap being lost, or cause injury, if dropped during installation or
removal. Each leg shall be supplied with a full set of hoses for connection between the main
deck and the jetting piping.

3.19.6.2 SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

The jetting supply hose connection to the risers shall be at main deck level. Suitable and
sufficient access and mechanical handing aids shall be provided to facilitate the safe handling
of the jetting hoses during connection and disconnection. In addition, a suitable fixed
arrangement shall be provided to hang off the hose when not in use.

3.19.6.3 SPUD CAN RINGS AND NOZZLES

The risers shall terminate within the spud cans where they shall connect with their respective
nozzle supply rings, one (1) ring just below the top surface of the spud can and one (1) ring
just above the bottom surface of the spud can.

3.19.6.4 NOZZLES
Each jetting ring within the spud can shall incorporate nozzles that protrude through the spud
can bottom, six (6) nozzles from each ring. The nozzles shall be spaced equidistant around
the spud cans at the most efficient radius from the centre point of the spud can. Each nozzle
shall be protected with a ‘half pipe’ shield to prevent plugging.

3.19.7 RAW WATER SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Raw Water transfer and distribution
system to meet the requirements of the entire VESSEL.

PAGE 199 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All raw water system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for sea
water service and prevent corrosion or degradation so far as is reasonably practicable, and
shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing rules, codes and standards included
in Section 1.0 of this CTS. In addition, it is critical that the design and arrangement of the
system shall remain fully functional at any draft and at lowest design water depth as specified
in Section 2.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.
The Raw Water system supply shall vary in accordance with the following three operating
conditions:
1. Afloat Raw water supply shall be from the submersible Raw Water Pumps
and/or sea chest suction.

2. Elevated Raw water supply shall be from the submersible Raw Water Pumps
alone.
3. During The design shall incorporate crossover capability between drill water
Jacking pump suction manifold and main fire water pump suction to supply
water from the drill water system for essential services such as fire
water. Essential services shall be as dictated in the Contract Plans

In addition, the Raw Water system shall be capable of being supplemented by two (2)
submersible Preload Pumps but during preloading operations only.
The Raw Water system shall include, but not be limited to the following components:
• Three (3) Multi Stage Raw Water Submersible Pumps
• Strainer
• One (1) Pressure sustaining valve
• One (1) Raw Water Header
• Two (2) Raw Water general service pumps
3.19.7.1 RAW WATER SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
The Raw Water submersible pumps shall be connected to the system via suitably sized hoses
mounted on hose reels, one (1) on the Port side and two (2) on the Starboard side.
The reels shall be pneumatically driven via a gearbox and capable of being driven in either
direction, up or down.
The reels shall be of such capacity that they can store the full length of hose required to meet
the operating criteria stipulated in Section 2.0 of this CTS.
• Type Centrifugal, Multi stage submersible
• Capacity and pressure 410 m3/h (1800 GPM) 200ft TDH
• Trim Stainless steel.
• Driver Electric motor (submersible)
3.19.7.2 STRAINER
A suitable and sufficient strainer shall be incorporated in the system to prevent debris entering
the system valves, pumps and components.

PAGE 200 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.7.3 PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVE

A pressure sustaining valve shall be installed on the raw water header to maintain the system
pressure at any operating configuration. Excess capacity shall be discharged overboard at the
Starboard Aft leg well.

3.19.7.4 RAW WATER HEADER

The system shall incorporate a suitably sized raw header with a capacity appropriate to the
maximum flowrate, and in any case a minimum of 12” (300mm).

3.19.7.5 RAW WATER GENERAL SERVICE PUMPS

• Type Vertical self-priming Centrifugal with Stainless steel
shaft and impeller
• Minimum Capacity 200 m3/h (880 GPM) @ 5.9 bar (85 psi)
• Driver Electric motor
The Raw water system shall be capable of supplying all necessary VESSEL end users that
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Foam / Deluge Pump
• Fire Pumps
• General Service pumps
• Oily Water Separator
• Water Makers
• Mud Pump Heat Exchangers (if applicable)
• VFD cooling
• Burner Boom
• H.P Leg jetting via the mud pumps
• L.P leg jetting
• Drawworks Brake cooling
• Drawworks Brake Resistor cooling
• Mud Pits
• Bilge Eductors
• Spudcan Eductors
• Cement Unit
• Service Outlets
• SW Flushing for mud return pipe, cuttings auger and mud trough
• Diverter flushing
Raw water to cantilever and drill floor shall be supplied by flexible (Hose) through the drag
chain.

3.19.8 ACTIVE FIRE-FIGHTING SYSTEMS

3.19.8.1 FIRE WATER SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Fire Water system to meet the
requirements of the entire VESSEL.
All fire water system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for sea
water service, without corrosion or degradation, and shall in any case meet the requirements
of the governing rules, codes and standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.

PAGE 201 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The Fire Water system supply shall vary in accordance with the following three operating
conditions:
1. Afloat The system shall be capable of taking suction from any combination
of sea chest or raw water header or drill water tanks

2. Elevated The system shall be capable of taking suction from the raw water
header and/or drill water tanks.

3. During The system shall be capable of taking suction from the Drill water
Jacking tanks

In addition, the fire main shall be capable of remote supply via International shore connections.
The fire water system shall include, but not be limited to, the following main components:
• Two (2) International shore connection
• Strainers
• One (1) Jockey Pump
• One (1) Hydrophore tank
• One (1) Ring Main
• Two (2) Fire Pumps
• Fire Hydrants/Fire Stations
• Hose Reels/Fire Stations
3.19.8.1.1 Strainer
A suitable and sufficient strainer shall be incorporated in the system to prevent debris entering
the system valves, pumps and components.
3.19.8.1.2 Jockey Pump
The Jockey pump shall be located on the same skid as a Hydrophore tank and maintain the
fire main system between 7.0 and 10.bar.
• Type Vertical self-priming Centrifugal with Bronze casing pump
stainless steel impeller and shaft
• Minimum Capacity 3 m3/h
• Driver Electric motor
3.19.8.1.3 Hydrophore tank
The tank shall be Hot Dipped Galvanized and have a minimum capacity of 3 m3
The tank shall include but not be limited to, the following components:
• Inlet and outlet isolation valves
• Pressure Relief Valve
• Drain line
• Pressure gauge
• Pressure switch
• Service air charging facility with check valve and main isolation valve
• Magnetic flipper type level gauge
• Access manhole
3.19.8.1.4 Ring Main System
The fire header ring line system shall supply fire water to the following users:

PAGE 202 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• All Fire stations

• Mud pit foam system
• Mud processing area foam system
• Helideck
In addition, the fire main shall have a crossover to the Well test area deluge, drill floor deluge
and BOP Deluge system as a back up to the normal supply.
Fire water to cantilever and drill floor shall be supplied by flexible (Hose) through the drag
chain.
Isolation valves shall be positioned strategically throughout the fireman system to enable
various sections of the main to be isolated but still maintain satisfactory fire cover in the event
of damage or maintenance. The isolation valves shall be manually operated.
3.19.8.1.5 Fire Pumps
The two (2) dedicated fire pumps shall be located in different compartments within the
machinery deck. One pump shall be supplied via main power and one fire pump via
emergency power. Both pumps shall be capable of being started either manually or
automatically depending on how the logic of the system is been set up.
Irrespective of how the pumps are started they must be stopped manually by an operator and
not automatically.
If the jockey pump cannot maintain fire main pressure and there is a drop to 5.5. bar then
there shall be an alarm initiated and the lead fire pump shall start automatically via a lead lag
pressure logic control system.
If the fire main fails to regain pressure following starting of the lead fire pump, then there shall
be a second alarm and the lag fire pump shall start automatically. Should a second pump not
be available there shall be a clear indication on the operators control screen warning that the
pump / pumps are unavailable.
• Type Vertical self-priming Centrifugal with Bronze casing pump
stainless steel impeller and shaft
• Minimum Capacity 182 m3/h (700 GPM) at 8.0 bar (118 psi.)
• Driver Electric motor
Each pump shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Panel mounted pressure gauges at each suction and discharge nozzle of the fire pump
• Pressure reducing valves on the discharge side
• Upstream simplex strainer
• Pressure differential gauge across the suction and discharge ports of the strainer
• Pressure differential Alarm
3.19.9 FIRE HYDRANTS/FIRE STATIONS
BUILDER shall provide as a minimum Fire hydrant/hose stations required by CLASS and
END USER. The number and position of the hydrant/hose stations are to be such that at
least two jets of water not emanating from the same hydrant, one of which is to be from a
single length of hose, may reach any part of the VESSEL normally accessible to the crew.
The inventory at each hose station shall include but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) purpose-built glass fibre storage box, red in colour, with station number and
any critical operating instructions provided on the door in Dual Language, English and
Arabic
• One (1) Hydrant
• One (1) length of cotton jacket rubber lined lay flat hose on a swing out hose rack and
one (1) spare length of hose. The length of the hose(s) to be provided shall be a
‘minimum’ of 10 meters each, and a ‘maximum’, per length, of:

PAGE 203 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• 15 meters in machinery rooms

• 20 meters in other spaces and
• 25 meters for open decks
• One (1) Combination fog / stream nozzle
• One (1) Connection spanner / wrench
• One (1) Hydrant Wheel spanner / wrench
3.19.9.1.1 Hose Reels/Fire Stations
Fire hose reel stations shall be provided in accordance with the CLASS and END USER
requirements and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• RED purpose-built steel cabinet with station number clearly stencilled on the doo
• Isolation Valve
• Semi Rigid non-kink hose on a swing out reel, 30 m x 25mm ID
• Combination spray/stream nozzles
• Automatic operation (By Reel Rotation)
• Connection Spanner
3.19.9.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
The BUILDER shall provide a Sprinkler System for fire suppression in the living quarters,
offices and other areas as agreed with the BUYER. The system shall be designed in
accordance with SOLAS Convention Chapter II/ FSS code. The pressure and capacities
specified in this section are preliminary only and it is the express responsibility of the BUILDER
to provide a system that meets the requirements of Sections 1.0 and 2.0 of this CTS and shall
be 'fit for purpose'.
Main system components shall include:
• Sprinkler Pressure Unit/Reservoir minimum of 3.5 m3
• Tank pressure switch 7.0/10-bar
• Sprinkler pump 90 m3/h
• Jockey Pump 3 m3/h
• Electrical Control Cabinet
• Water flow powered sounder
• Isolation Valves
• Flow Switches
• Pipework and Range pipes
• Sprinkler Heads with frangible bulb
• Alarm valve
The system tank skid shall have suitable and sufficient under deck stiffening and supports.
The system shall include but not be limited to, the following key features
The Sprinkler Pressure Unit (Tank) shall be hot dipped galvanized and incorporate a manhole
access, and all the requisite nozzles, to include but not be limited to, those for instrumentation,
relief valves, system valves, and pipework.
The sprinkler tank shall have a clearly visible engraved metal plate detailing the operating
instructions.
The tank shall be located in a bund with deck drain scuppers leading to an alarmed bilge well.
The sprinkler skid shall incorporate welded earthing bosses and the electrical control panel(s)
shall be IP 56 or better.
The system shall include a fresh water jockey pump, located on the sprinkler skid, for the
maintenance of system pressure.

PAGE 204 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

There shall be a main sprinkler pump for the provision of the firefighting water and mounted
on the tank skid. The pump shall be salt water service and capable of taking suction from
either the VESSEL’s salt water ring main system or drill water tanks.
There shall be a water driven alarm at the sprinkler tank outlet that sounds off a fire bell alarm
at the sprinkler tank for as long as there is flow from the sprinkler tank.
Both jockey pump and sprinkler pump shall have rubber expansion bellows at both the suction
and discharge of each pump.
Both jockey and sprinkler pumps shall be self-priming.
There shall be at two test connection (port and stbd) on each level of living quarter.
There shall be suitable and sufficient provisions made for the flushing the system to include a
readily accessible 1 “drain line outside the accommodation at each level and at each side.
The drain line shall include an isolation valve, pressure gauge and plug.
The sprinkler system shall include all necessary pipework, and range pipes. The range pipes
shall terminate in each compartment to be protected, with a sprinkler head incorporating a
frangible bulb, of an appropriate temperature rating. Bursting of the frangible bulb shall initiate
operation of the system.
The sprinkler system pipework shall be selected on a cost and weight saving basis by the
BUYER. No black pipe shall be incorporated anywhere in the system downstream from the
skid.
The sprinkler system shall be interfaced with the VESSEL’S Fire and Gas detection system
and therefore by default with the PA GA system.

3.19.9.3 NOVEC
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient NOVEC 1230 fixed firefighting system.
The system shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans and the Rules, Codes and
Standards stipulated in section 1.0 of this CTS.
The system shall protect the following areas:
• Main Engine room
• Switchboard room
• VFD / SCR room
• Emergency Generator / Switchboard room
• Paint Locker room
• LER House
A suitably lit and ventilated fire suppressant room shall be provided for the installation and
protection of the main NOVEC cylinders provided for the protection of:
• Main Engine room
• Switchboard room
• VFD / SCR room
Cylinders for the remaining areas shall be installed locally and be suitably protected from
weather and mechanical damage as necessary.
The number and capacity of cylinders shall be calculated by BUILDER for all spaces and
included in the Contract Plans
Opening of the system release cabinet, shall initiate an IMCS alarm indicating that the cabinet
door has been opened and the potential for system initiation. Actual initiation of the system
shall initiate a separate IMCS alarm.
Clear and precise operating instructions shall be provided at operating stations in dual
language, English and Arabic.

PAGE 205 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

There shall be a supply of spare cylinders as stipulated in the Contract Plans in the event that
cylinders should need to be replaced.
All cylinders shall be mounted securely in a frame / rack and shall not be rest directly on deck
plates.
A means of accurately weighing the cylinders in situ shall be provided
All protected areas shall have internal and external alarms i.e. visual and audible and there
shall be dual language signage clearly identifying the meaning of the alarms and the actions
to be taken.

3.19.9.4 WET CHEMICAL

3.19.9.4.1 Galley Range, Deep Fat Fryer and Galley Exhaust Trunking
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Wet chemical fixed firefighting system for
the galley hood, range, deep fat fryers and Galley Exhaust Trunking. The system shall be in
accordance with the Contract Plans and the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated in section
1.0 of this CTS.
Opening of the system release cabinet, shall initiate an IMCS alarm indicating that the cabinet
door has been opened and the potential for system initiation.
Actual initiation of the system shall initiate a separate IMCS alarm.
Clear and precise operating instructions shall be provided at operating stations in dual
language, English and Arabic.

3.19.9.5 FOAM SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient foam fixed firefighting systems. All foam
system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for sea water and
finished foam service, without corrosion or degradation, and shall in any case meet the
requirements of the governing rules, codes and standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS
The foam system water supply is from the main fire water pumps with a deluge pump as a
supplementary source.

The Main Fire Pumps shall supply the following foam systems:
• Helideck Foam Monitors
• Helideck foam hose reels
• Mud Process Area Foam system
• Mud Pit Foam system
Because this pump is common to several fire suppression systems it shall be specified so as
to meet the requirements of the system with the greatest demand.
3.19.9.5.1 HELIDECK
A foam fire fighting system, in accordance with Statutory and END USER requirements, shall
be provided at the helideck that shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) Foam skid c/w horizontal bladder tank, fast acting operating valve, and
inductors etc.
• Three (3) strategically placed Oscillating Foam Monitors
• Three (3) strategically placed foam Hose Reels
• Strategically placed operating stations
• Operating station at the foam skid
• Suitably sized 3% MIL spec AFFF foam concentrate tank. The tank shall be refilled
with fresh foam concentrate following commissioning and just prior to delivery.

PAGE 206 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Clear and precise operating instructions shall be provided at operating stations in dual
language, English and Arabic.
3.19.9.5.2 Mud Process Area
The Mud Process area foam system shall be designed and installed to protect the complete
mud treatment room that includes Mud Process tanks, Degasser, Shale Shakers and
Centrifuges.
The foam system shall be provided to include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Operating station at the foam skid
• Initiation via the fire and gas system
• Manual operating station at the foam skid
• Manual operating station outside the protected space
• Suitably sized 3% MIL spec AFFF foam concentrate tank. The tank shall be refilled
with fresh foam concentrate following commissioning and just prior to delivery.
• Inductors
• Range pipework and valves
• Discharge nozzles
The system shall effectively distribute finished foam through a system of valves, range pipes,
and nozzles to cover the fire hazards in the protected space.
Clear and precise operating instructions shall be provided at operating stations in dual
language, English and Arabic.
3.19.9.5.3 Mud Pits
The Foam system shall be designed and installed to protect the mud pits.
The foam system shall be provided to include but not be limited to the following components:
• Initiation via the fire and gas system
• Manual operating station at the foam skid
• Manual operating station outside the protected space
• Suitably sized 3% MIL spec AFFF foam concentrate tank. The tank shall be refilled
with fresh foam concentrate following commissioning and just prior to delivery.
• Inductors
• Range pipework and valves
• Discharge nozzles
• The following pits shall be protected;
• Eight (8) Mud Pits
• One (1) Pill Pit
• One (1) Slug Pit
• One (1) Pre-Mix Pit
The mud pit tank top shall be made of stiffened deck panel shall to fully enclose the top of the
pit except for essential openings that will be as small as reasonably practicable.
The system shall effectively distribute finished foam through a system of valves, range pipes,
and nozzles that are internal to the pits, to cover the surface area of the pit contents to a
satisfactory depth to prevent burn back.
Clear and precise operating instructions shall be provided at operating stations in dual
language, English and Arabic.

3.19.9.6 DELUGE SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient deluge fixed firefighting systems. All deluge
system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for sea water service,

PAGE 207 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

without corrosion or degradation, and shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing
rules, codes and standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
The deluge systems shall be supplied from dedicated deluge pump and supplemented as
necessary by the main fire pumps.

• Type Vertical self-priming Centrifugal pump with Bronze casing

stainless steel impeller and shaft
• Minimum Capacity 182 m3/h (800 GPM) at 8.0 bar (118 psi.)
• Driver Electric motor
The pump shall take suction from the same source as the Main Fire Pumps and discharge to
the following deluge systems:
• Drill Floor
• BOP/Moon Pool
• Well Test Area
Because this pump is common to several fire suppression systems it shall be specified so as
to meet the requirements of the system with the greatest demand.
The deluge systems shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Dry Pipe system whereby water is not introduced to the discharge pipework/spray
nozzles until such times as a power operated deluge valve is opened
• The deluge valves, pipework and nozzles shall be arranged so as to provide effective
firefighting and cooling of the entire protected area
• Spray Nozzle position in the discharge pipework such that the nozzles do not become
blocked by sediment or debris collecting at low levels in the lines
• Operation of the deluge valve shall be via signals from the fire and gas system and/or
fixed temperature release as agreed with BUYER
• Components of the system placed so as to avoid mechanical damage Manual release
from strategically located operating stations
• Emergency manual release that ensures operation of the system
• Electrical equipment shall be suitable for the Hazardous Area Classification in which it
is installed and of a suitable ingress protection rating.
• A suitable and sufficient number of strainers shall be incorporated in the system to
prevent debris entering critical valves and components
• System Isolation valves capable of being locked open or closed
• Flow Test facility
• Fresh Water flushing and drainage facility for all necessary components/lines
3.19.10 PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION
The BUILDER shall provide passive fire protection to the structure throughout the VESSEL in
accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS as a
minimum.
BUILDER shall provide Structural Fire Protection Plans for the entire VESSEL demonstrating
design compliance. The passive fire protection material shall be either Rockwool as classic
material option and in line with the required thickness or shall be of a lightweight material type
such as Saint-Gobain ISOVER.

3.19.10.1 GALLEY ROLLER SHUTTERS

The galley serving hatch and scullery hatch shall be fitted with SOLAS compliant A0 rated
stainless steel fire roller shutters. The shutters shall be automatically released via the fire
detection system and shall additionally incorporate a failsafe fusible link release.

PAGE 208 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.11 EVACUATION ESCAPE AND RESCUE

3.19.11.1 ESCAPE ROUTES

Escape routes shall be shown on the Fire and Safety Plan. These escape routes are to meet
the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies. The routes must be duly signalled and clearly
marked (vertically and horizontally) and lighted along both exterior and interior escape
corridors, including the emergency generator system.

3.19.11.2 LIFE RAFTS

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient means of escape from the VESSEL.
3.19.11.2.1 Liferafts
• There shall be sufficient liferafts provided to accommodate 200% of the maximum
POB, 100% on either side of the rig.
• All liferafts shall be stowed on purpose-built cradles.
• One (1) 25-man inflatable liferaft for training purposes. The training liferaft is to be
clearly marked "FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY"
• All liferafts shall have painters of a length suitable for the air gap stipulated in Section
2.0 of this CTS
• Permanent weatherproof dual language placards shall be provided in close proximity
life raft stations with clear and concise deployment instructions
3.19.11.3 LIFEBOATS, RESCUE BOAT AND DAVITS
The detailed Lifeboat/Davit and Rescue Boat/Davit locations and specifications shall be in
accordance with the Contract Plans and associated codes and standards stipulated in Section
1.0 of this CTS.
The Maintenance Pennant arrangement shall be such that the pennant can only be attached
to dedicated maintenance pennant anchorage points and NOT to the fall wire ring.
3.19.11.3.1 Lifeboats
The VESSEL will be provided with:
• Four (4) Totally Enclosed Motor Propelled Survival Craft (TEMPSC), each with a
minimum capacity of sixty (60) persons
The lifeboat specification shall include, but not be limited to:
• Fiberglass construction
• Maintenance pennant anchorage points(s)
• Diesel Engine suitable for API No2 specification fuel
• Two (2) Heavy Duty sealed for life batteries for engine starting
• Battery charging system with breakaway canopy lead
• Marine type battery selector switch
• Canopy Sprinkler System
• Cascade Air system compliant with END USER requirements
• Lifeboat engine combustion air supply
• Internal lighting
• Statutory Hull and Canopy Markings
• Alternately colour coded seatbelts
• Hydrostatic release device
• On-load release device
• Clear and Concise Dual Language lowering and release instructions displayed so as
to be readable from the Coxswains position.

PAGE 209 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Electric Widow wiper system

• Navigational Aids
• Fully outfitted to Statutory and END USER requirements
• Dehumidifier
3.19.11.3.2 Lifeboat Davits
The VESSEL will be provided with:
• Four (4) dual fall davit launching systems
• The davit and hoisting/lowering arrangements shall be of sufficient capacity to launch
and retrieve the lifeboat in a fully outfitted and fully laden condition.
• The Davits arrangements shall include, but not be limited to;
• All the necessary access platforms and ladders for safe, maintenance, boarding,
launch and recovery
• Maintenance pennant hang off points
• Maintenance pennants
• Gravity lowering with a controlling braking system
• Electrically driven retrieval winch
• Rotation Resistant fall wire
• Four (4) Part shackles throughout
• Stainless Steel brake release sheaves, shackles and release wire
• An awning to prevent the degradation of the fiberglass structure of the lifeboat from
harmful UV radiation from the sun
• Remote control on a trailing lead for hoisting the boat.
• Interlock to isolate electric hoist when hand crank handle is engaged
• Hoisting limit switches
3.19.11.3.3 Rescue Boat
The VESSEL shall be provided with:
One (1) Rescue Boat compliant with all applicable SOLAS Regulations and have a a
capacity of six (6) persons. The Rescue Boat shall be outfitted so as to be capable of
performing in a ‘fit for purpose’ manner.
The Rescue Boat specification shall include, but not be limited to:
• Fiberglass Rigid/Inflatable hull
• Inboard Diesel Engine suitable for API No2 specification fuel
• Flame retardant cover
• Four-point lifting bridle
• Heavy Duty starter batter
• Transformer/Battery Charging system
• Propulsion shall be water jet and not propeller
• Fully outfitted to Statutory and END USER requirements
3.19.11.3.4 Rescue Boat Davit
The Starboard Lifeboat platform shall have provision for mounting and supporting of one (1)
davit launched Recue Boat. Safe access and Egress shall be provided to include casualty and
stretcher handling arrangements.
• One (1) Single fall davit launching systems
The davit and hoisting/lowering arrangements shall be of sufficient capacity to launch and
retrieve the Rescue Boat in a fully outfitted and fully laden condition.
The davit and winch system shall be capable of launch and recovery of the Rescue Boat with
the VESSEL afloat or at any operating elevation.
The Davit arrangement shall include, but not be limited to:

PAGE 210 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• All the necessary access platforms and ladders for safe, maintenance, boarding,
launch and recovery
• Arrangement to allow the Recue Boat to be towed
• Gravity lowering with a controlling braking system
• Electric/hydraulic retrieval winch (Electric supply from E-Gen and Hydraulic side shall
include accumulator and hand pump)
• Coamings around the hydraulic tank and davit footprint
• Non-Rotating fall wire
• Four (4) Part shackles throughout
• Interlock to isolate hydraulic hoist when hand crank handle is engaged
• Hoisting limit switches
3.19.12 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient potable water system to meet the pot
water demand for the entire VESSEL. There shall be provision for chlorinated and
unchlorinated supplies.
All potable water system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, with the exception of
the Accommodation, shall be stainless steel. Accommodation pipework shall be in the
Accommodation section of this CTS. There shall be suitable and sufficient provision of
isolation valves in the system to provide ‘line up’ and ‘crossover’ flexibility, and for redundancy
in the case of breakdown, or planned, maintenance.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance. Where there is a risk of contamination
of the pot water system then double block isolation shall be provided.
The Pot Water System shall include, but not be limited to the following components:
• One (1) Port and One (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ stations
• One (1) Port and One (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ station sampling point
• One (1) Port and One (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ station Mechanical Flow Meter
• One (1) Port, One (1) Centre, and One (1) Starboard Pot Water Tank
• Three x (3) 5.7 m3/h (25 gpm) Pot Water Tank Recirculation Pumps
• One (1) Pressure Set
• Two (2) Cold Water Sterilizers
• Three (3) Hot Water Calorifiers
• Two (2) Hot Water Circulating pumps
• Two (2) Reverse Osmosis Water Makers (Capacity as required by OWNER)
• Two (2) Mineralizers
• Two (2) Chlorination units
3.19.12.1 ‘TAKE ON’ STATIONS
Take on station inlets shall have a male stainless-steel hammer union for connection of the
take on hose. When not in use the male inlet shall have a female cap permanently attached
to the pipework by a chain.
3.19.12.1.1 ‘Take On’ station sampling points.
Each take on station shall have a sampling point to facilitate water quality check samples to
be taken.
3.19.12.1.2 ‘Take On’ station Flow Meters
A mechanical flow meter shall be provided to monitor the pot water delivery rates at each take
on station. The flow meters shall incorporate a strainer to prevent debris entering the flow

PAGE 211 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

meter. The flow meter/strainer shall have a bypass arrangement to allow it to be isolated for
maintenance or removal as necessary.

3.19.12.2 POT WATER TANK

There shall be three (3) pot water tanks in the hull one (1) Port, one (1) Centre and one (1)
Starboard. The sizing of the tanks shall be based on BUILDER calculations for the system
capacity and functionality.
3.19.12.2.1 Pot Water Tank Recirculation Pump
Each pot water tank shall be fitted with a recirculation pump to prevent pockets of stagnation
within the tank. Nozzles within the tank shall target the necessary areas.
3.19.12.2.2 Pressure Set
The potable water shall be distributed via a potable water pressure set. The potable water
pressure sets shall incorporate two (2) self-priming +100% pumps and a pressurized
Hydrophore tank.
The Hydrophore tank shall be either Stainless steel pressure vessel or a ‘shell and insert bag’
type where the shell can be material other than stainless steel as agreed with the BUYER.
The pumps shall take suction from the potable water tanks and discharge to the various pot
water users throughout the VESSEL. Steady pressure shall be maintained in the system by
the Hydrophore tank and Pressure Regulators to start/stop of pumps. Pumps shall be
arranged such that under normal conditions only one pump shall be required to operate at any
one time.
The pressure set shall also include, but not be limited to, magnetic level gauges, safety relief
valve, manhole, drain valve, outlet valve, inlet valve, electrical control panel, temperature
gauges and sensors.

3.19.12.3 COLD WATER STERILIZERS

There shall be two (2) 100% capacity UV sterilizers in parallel. Water at ambient temperature
from the pressure set shall directed to the cold water users via the duty sterilizer.

3.19.12.4 HOT WATER CALORIFIERS

There shall be three (3) 50% capacity hot water calorifiers. Water directed to the hot water
users shall pass through the required number of calorifiers to meet, and maintain, the system
heat demands. Only two (2) calorifiers shall be required to meet the maximum heat demands
of the system and a third shall be available as redundancy for breakdown and planned
maintenance purposes.

3.19.12.5 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS

There shall be two (2) 100% capacity hot water circulating pumps. Hot water from each level
of the accommodation shall be returned and recirculated through the calorifiers by the duty
hot water circulating pump in order to maintain the system operating temperature. Each return
shall be fitted with a globe valve and temperature gauge.

3.19.12.6 REVERSE OSMOSIS WATER MAKERS

There shall be Two (2) 100% Reverse Osmosis Water Makers, each with a capacity of 65
m3/day. The capacity of each water maker shall be capable of meeting the demands of the
entire VESSEL.

PAGE 212 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The water makers shall be skid mounted units and include all necessary auxiliary equipment
and ancillaries including, but not limited to pumps, reverse osmosis membranes, piping,
control panels, instruments, and electrical components. Where possible pipework and
components shall be stainless steel
The water makers shall be provided with salt water from the VESSEL raw water system and
the fresh water generated by the water makers shall be capable of being directed to any, or
all, of three (3) separate locations:
1) Pot Water tanks, Port, Centre, and Starboard
2) Drill Water Tank
3) Non-chlorinated end users
Water held in the Pot Water tanks shall be chlorinated and of drinking quality and therefore
the stream from the water maker to the pot water tanks shall be via a mineralizer and a
chlorinator.
A non-chlorinated stream from the water makers shall be maintained for the applicable end
users that include, but are not limited to, engine cooling and closed cooling circuits.
3.19.12.6.1 Mineralizers
The Pot Water system shall include two (2) 100% mineralizing units installed in parallel with
all valves and piping to allow for one duty and one standby.
3.19.12.6.2 Chlorination units
The Pot Water system shall include two (2) 100% chlorinating units installed in parallel with all
valves and piping necessary to allow for one (1) duty and one (1) standby.
3.19.12.6.3 Salinity Detection
Each water maker shall incorporate a salinity monitoring device. On high salinity detection an
alarm shall be raised and the output stream shall automatically be re-directed to an overboard
discharge point.

3.19.13 GENERAL DRAIN SYSTEMS

The BUILDER shall supply a drainage system to collect, store, discharge, or route to treatment
systems, fluids from all areas of the VESSEL. This section of the CTS deals with all drainage
systems of the VESSEL with the exception of the bilge system and the accommodation
sanitary system that are dealt with separately in other sections of this CTS.

The meaning of 'clean' water in the context of this section shall be, water with an 'oil content'
equal to, or less than, 15 parts per million (ppm).

In general, clean water shall be discharged overboard, whereas contaminated fluids shall be
held in holding tanks and directed to treatment systems on board. ‘Clean' water from the
treatment systems shall then be discharged overboard. The residues from the treatment
systems, and some heavily contaminated fluids shall be capable of being routed to tote tanks,
or supply tanks, to be backloaded for specialist treatment and disposal onshore.

The VESSEL areas and compartments shall be ‘Classified’ in accordance with the Hazardous
Area Classification codes and standards stipulated in Section 1 of this CTS. For ease of
understanding those areas and compartments shall be described as either 'Hazardous', or
'Non-Hazardous’ and likewise, drains coming from those areas shall be considered as
‘Hazardous’ or ‘Non-Hazardous’, respectively.

PAGE 213 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

With respect to the drains systems, Hazardous Areas of the VESSEL shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
• Drill Floor
• Mud Processing Area
• Mud Pit Area
• Well Test Area
Non-Hazardous Areas shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Helideck
• Main Deck
• Cement Unit
• Upper Cantilever
• Machinery Spaces
The drains system provided by the BUILDER shall by default meet the hazardous area
classification design and installation but for the purpose of this section of the CTS the drains
shall be referred to as ‘Contaminated’ or ‘Non-Contaminated’. References to water seals etc.
associated with area classification are to provide a basic understanding only.

3.19.13.1 CONTAMINATED DRAINS

3.19.13.1.1 Drill Floor and Cantilever Drains
Fluids collected in the drill floor drain pans and the Cantilever areas shall be directed to a
drains header and on to a Cantilever Skimmer Tank located within the confines of the
Cantilever.
A water seal shall be provided between the drains and the skimmer tank to prevent the
migration of hydrocarbon gas from the Drill Floor areas to the Skimmer Tank.
3.19.13.1.2 Rotary Table Drains
Under normal circumstances fluids from the Rotary Table drains shall co mingle with the drill
floor drains and be directed to the Cantilever Skimmer Tank. Valve and Piping arrangements
shall be provided to allow high mud content drain fluids from the rotary table drain to be
redirected to the flowline e.g. when ‘wet tripping’ or as an extraordinary requirement.

3.19.13.2 MUD PROCESSING AREA

Fluids collected from the Mud Processing area shall be pumped to the Skimmer tank.
3.19.13.2.1 Mix Hopper, Mud Pump Room and Mud Pit Room
Because the fluids from the mud mix hopper, mud pump bunds, and the two (2) mud pit room
sumps, have the potential to be highly contaminated with oil and mud solids the fluids shall be
directed straight to a 'Tote Tank' on the main deck via a Mud Drain Transfer Pump.
3.19.13.2.2 Skimmer Tank
The fluids from the Drill floor, Cantilever, and Mud Processing areas shall co mingle in a
Skimmer Tank. The skimmer tank shall remove gross oil and solids contamination from the
fluids. The partially treated fluids from the cantilever skimmer tank shall then be directed via
a suitably rated pneumatically driven pump and drag chain hoses to a Contaminated Drains
Tank in the hull.

PAGE 214 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.13.2.3 Contaminated Drains Tank

There shall be a suitably sized ‘Contaminated Drains Tank’ located within the Aft Preload
Tank. The Oily Water Separator shall take suction from the Contaminated Drains Tank and
shall recirculate the fluids until such times as the Oil Content Monitor at the OWS records an
‘oil in water’ contamination level of 15ppm or less. At that point the OWS shall stop
recirculation and discharge clean water overboard. Discharge shall continue until such times
as either, the contaminated drains tank is empty and the OWS shuts down, or the oil in water
content once again exceeds 15 ppm at which point overboard discharge shall cease and
recirculation shall resume.
For the sake of maintaining MARPOL integrity, the BUILDER design shall be such that fluids
from the Contaminated Drains Tank and the VESSEL bilge system shall not, under normal
circumstances, co mingle. In addition, valves that prevent OWS bilge returns entering the
drains system shall be considered ‘environmentally sensitive’ and shall be capable of being
locked off in the isolated position.

3.19.13.3 NON-CONTAMINATED DRAINS

3.19.13.3.1 Main Deck
Fluid from the main deck shall be directed via drain scuppers and lines to the Non-
Contaminated Drains tank where the cleanliness of the fluid is continually monitored. There
shall be provision for direct discharge via a pneumatically operated overboard discharge valve
in the event of main deck flooding
3.19.13.3.2 Cement Unit
The Cement Unit shall be located on the main deck. The cement unit fluid end shall be
contained within a bund. The point of discharge from the bund shall be controlled via a
pipework and valve arrangement that will allow the stream to be directed either directly
overboard or to the non-contaminated drains tank. Under normal circumstances the stream
shall be directed directly overboard. There shall also be a bund around the drive end of the
unit that shall be emptied manually into drums via a drain cock on the bund.
3.19.13.3.3 Well test Area
The well Test area shall be enclosed with a bund. Drains from the bund shall be connected
to both the Non-Contaminated and the Contaminated Drains systems and segregated by
double block isolation valves. When well testing is being carried out the drain fluids from the
bund shall be directed to the contaminated drain tank. The line shall incorporate a water seal.
When there is no well testing then drainage from the bund shall be directed to the Non-
Contaminated Drains Tank.
3.19.13.3.4 Non-Contaminated Drains Tank
There shall be a suitably sized Non-Contaminated Drains Tank located within the Aft Preload
Tank. Under normal circumstances water entering the tank from the deck drains will be
relatively clean and shall discharge directly overboard. The cleanliness of the water in the
Non-Contaminated Drains tank shall be continually monitored via its own Oil Content
Monitoring system. The system shall comprise a small capacity sampling pump that
continually recirculates fluid from the tank through an Oil Content Monitor. If the OCM detects
oil in excess of 15ppm then the overboard discharge valve shall close. Water from the
contaminated drains tank shall then be routed to the OWS, either by manual valve operation,
or as part of an automated cycle. Piping and valve arrangements shall be provided to allow
the operator to choose between directing returns from the oily water separator back to the

PAGE 215 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Non-Contaminated Drains tank and continue to re-circulate or to discharge the OWS returns
directly into the Contaminated Drains Tank.
3.19.13.3.5 Helideck drains
The helideck shall be arranged with a perimeter bund, deck catchment, and helicopter tie
down point drain lines running into a common helideck drain line. The drain line shall lead,
via a 3-way valve to either, overboard, or to a collection tank under the helideck.
Fluids collected from the Helideck drains shall, under normal circumstances, discharge directly
overboard. In other circumstances where the drain water could be contaminated e.g. in the
event of a fuel spillage on the helideck, then the drains shall be directed to the collection tank.
The collection tank shall be fitted with a vent line with goose neck, brass gauze mesh covering
the vent line outlet, a level gauge and manway access. The tank shall be located inside a bund
sized in proportion to the tank. The tank shall be suitably marked with safety warnings relating
to the potential for the tank to contain flammable fluids.
Dual language signage shall be placed at the 3-way valve providing operating instructions.

3.19.13.4 ACCOMMODATION AND OTHER STRUCTURES

All drain lines shall be of an appropriate size and gradient. There shall be a sufficient number
of drains provided in to meet the drainage requirements of each area. Where appropriate
gradients will be incorporated into compartment area and deck construction and drain
scuppers shall be positioned accordingly to ensure effective drainage.

3.19.14 SANITARY DRAIN SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall supply a Suitable and Sufficient drains system from the accommodation
spaces with a capacity for a minimum of 120 Personnel on Board (POB).
The design of the system shall be in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards
stipulated in section 1.0 of this CTS and the Contract Plans.
There shall be two separate drainage systems provided for the accommodation spaces:
• Black Water
• Grey Water
3.19.14.1 BLACK WATER
The Black Water effluent stream shall be made up of discharge from sanitary drains i.e. from
toilets, and urinals. In addition, drains from the hospital shall be considered black water and
piped to the nearest black water header.
Black Water drains shall be capable of being directed to:
• Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)
• Raw Sewage Holding Tank
• MARPOL Connection
3.19.14.1.1 Sewage Treatment Plant (Vacuum Operated)
Under normal operating conditions the Black Water stream shall be directed to a vacuum
operated Sewage Treatment Plant, sized for a minimum of 120 POB. The Sewage Treatment
Plant and the VESSEL shall be fully compatible with vacuum collection systems and be of an
activated sludge type. Chemical disinfection and de-chlorination shall be employed to convert
the incoming effluent to water of a satisfactory cleanliness to be directed overboard.

PAGE 216 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.14.1.2 Raw Sewage Holding Tank

There shall be a raw sewage HULL tank provided for holding black water as required when
the sewage treatment plant is unavailable such as field transit or for routine or breakdown
maintenance. The tank shall have a capacity sufficient for five (5) days black water production
or 20 m3 whichever the greater.
3.19.14.1.3 MARPOL Connection
There shall be a standard MARPOL connection provided on main deck to enable the VESSEL
Raw Sewage discharge pipework to be connected with that of a reception facility as and when
required.

3.19.14.2 GREY WATER

The Grey Water stream shall be made up of discharge from non-sanitary drains i.e. from cabin
showers, sinks, and wash basins, galley dishwashing and sinks, laundry, internal deck
scuppers, and refrigerator and HVAC condensate.
Drains from Galley and Dish Washing facilities shall be directed through a Grease Trap prior
to entering the Grey Water headers.
Grey water drains shall normally be directed overboard but shall also be capable of being
directed to the sewage treatment plant, in circumstances where treatment is deemed
necessary.

3.19.15 POLLUTION CONTROL

3.19.15.1 BUNDS
Coamings (bunds) shall be provided around all equipment and areas where there is potential
for spillage of fuel, oil, and other fluids that require containment. Coamings shall be a minimum
of 6 mm x 100 mm steel flat bar, continuously welded on both sides throughout their length.
Areas where Coamings are required shall include but not be limited to:
• Cantilever pipe rack
• Cement Unit
• Water Maker Units
• Engine Generator Sets.
• Emergency Generator Set
• Fuel and lube oil tanks
• Fuel and lube oil pumps
• Fire Pump/General Service Pump
• Fuel pumps and filters
• Mud Hoppers
• Mud Pumps.
• Charging & mixing pumps
• Oily Water Separator
• Potable Water Pressure Sets
• Vents
• Base Oil Pump
• Degasser, Desander, Desilter pumps
• Rig floor
• Rig periphery and exterior decks
• Sewage Treatment Unit
• Pipe racks
• Loading Stations

PAGE 217 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Air Compressor & Dryer

• Well Test Area
• Bilge & Stripping Manifolds
• Paint and Drum Storage areas
3.19.15.2 POLLUTION CONTROL DRAINAGE SYSTEM
The pollution control drainage system is covered in section 3.19.13 of this CTS, Drainage
System.

3.19.15.3 GARBAGE TREATMENT

The BUILDER shall provide the following equipment as per Contract Plans:
• One (1) Trash compactor with a capacity of 1.13 m3 (40 ft3) and shall have the
capability of crushing 205 litre (45 gal) drums
• One (1) Food waste disposal unit
3.19.16 WASH DOWN UNITS
The BUILDER shall provide portable high-pressure wash-down units.
Two (2) portable high pressure wash down units of the following minimum specification:
• Capacity 0.9 m3/h (4.0 gpm)
• Working pressure 207 bar (3000 psi)
• Tank 38 litre (4.0 gal)
• Driver Electric (suitable for use in Hazardous areas)
• Each VESSEL shall include;
• Hose reel
• Integral Soap Dispenser
• Two (2) hose reels rated at 276 bar (4000psi) and 15mm (5/8 in) X 91m (300 ft).

One (1) stainless steel lance rated at 276 bar (4000psi) and 0.9m (36”) in length and
incorporating an adjustable nozzle. The units shall be mounted within an ‘oilfield standard’
protective frame complete with integral lifting points of an appropriate SWL.

3.19.17 FUEL OIL TRANSFER AND SERVICE SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Fuel Oil 'take on', storage, purification,
transfer and distribution system to meet the fuel oil requirements of the entire VESSEL.
All fuel oil system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for fuel oil
service and shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing rules, codes and
standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.
The Fuel Oil system shall include, but not be limited to the following components:
• One (1) Port and one (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ stations
• Four (4) Hull Tanks
• Two (2) 100% Fuel Oil purifiers Capacity: 3500 L/Hr.
• Two (2) Day Tanks
• Dedicated Main Engine supply
• Two (2) 100% Fuel Oil pumps Capacity: 15 m3/hr
• Service Distribution system
• Emergency Generator tank supply
• Well test tank supply

PAGE 218 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Two (2) 100% Fuel Oil transfer pumps Capacity: 30 m3/hr

• Mud Pit supply
• Cement Unit Tank supply
3.19.17.1 ‘TAKE ON’ STATIONS
There shall be two (2) Fuel Oil 'take on' stations, one (1) on the Port side and one (1) on the
Starboard side of the VESSEL.
The loading hoses shall be tagged and sized according to system requirements, each hose
shall have a dry break connector at the supply vessel connection and incorporate the
necessary flotation collars.
At each loading station there shall be a fuel manifold that will have the facility to isolate, filter,
monitor, test, and pressurize the system as operations require.
3.19.17.1.1 ‘Take On’ station sampling points.
Each take on station shall have a sampling point to facilitate fuel quality check samples to be
taken.
3.19.17.1.2 ‘Take On’ station Flow Meters
Each take on station shall have a mechanical flow meter to monitor the fuel oil delivery rates.
The flow meters shall incorporate a simplex basket strainer to prevent debris entering the flow
meter. The flow meter/strainer shall have a bypass arrangement to allow it to be isolated for
maintenance or removal as necessary.

3.19.17.2 HULL TANKS

There shall be Four (4) hull tanks designated for FO storage. Three (3) of the tanks shall be
designed so as to be suitable for being used as settling tanks. Designation of which tanks are
to be utilized for fuel oil shall be as agreed with BUYER.

3.19.17.3 PURIFIERS
There shall be two (2) 100% self-cleaning fuel oil purifiers. The design shall allow both purifiers
to be functioning simultaneously. Fuel Oil to the purifiers shall be from one or more of the hull
settling tanks via an electric feed pump.
The purifier pipework and valve arrangement shall be such that the feed to the purifiers can
be adjusted to suit the required purification rate and quality and excess un-purified fuel oil to
be returned to any of the hull settling tanks.

The purifier specification shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Feed Pump
• Fully automatic
• Self-cleaning
• Drain leading to a small sludge tank
• Alarmed collection tank for sensing a leaking bowl seal
• Automatic sludge removal
• Bowl seal failure alarm
• Simplex strainer (not a Y strainer)
Purified Fuel oil shall be directed to either of the main Engine day tanks.

PAGE 219 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.17.4 DAY TANKS

There shall be two (2) day tanks each of sufficient capacity to cater for eight (8) hrs of full load
operation of all five (5) main engines and 'normal' service requirements.
There shall be an equalizing line between the two-day tanks incorporating a ¼ turn valve
Isolation Valve and Quick Closing Valve at either end.
Each tank shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Suitably sized vent to main deck
• Fill Line
• Overflow Line
• Magnetic Flipper type level gauge
• Level content gauge and level transmitter to IMCS
• Self-closing sample valve
• Quick Closing Valve on all outlet nozzles
• Manhole for inspection and cleaning
• High- and Low-level alarms (both alarms shall communicate with IMCS)
• Hotwork Signage
• Suitable and sufficient bund
• Day tank drainage to hull tank capability
Overflow from the tanks shall include a sighting port and shall return to a designated hull tank.
In the event of a high high-level indication in any tanks to which the fuel oil purifiers are
discharging then there shall be a high-level alarm generated. Any change to the purifier set
up as a result shall be manual intervention only.
The day tanks shall have high- and low-level outlets to a dedicated main engine supply line
and a single low-level outlet to the fuel oil service pumps.

3.19.17.5 MAIN ENGINE SUPPLY

The engine fuel supply line shall have both a high and low suction nozzle from each day tank.
There shall be a dedicated fuel oil line to the main engines with no other lines connecting to
it. There shall be a Duplex strainer in the fuel supply line to the main engines. For each
installed fuel system strainer there shall be a differential pressure gauge fitted.
The system shall include a spill line from the engines capable of returning fuel to either day
tank. Fuel oil return from engines shall be cooled by air cooled radiators. Return valves to
each day tank shall be locked in the 'NORMALLY OPEN' position.

3.19.17.6 FUEL OIL SERVICE PUMPS

There shall be two (2) Fuel Oil service pumps, which take suction from a suction nozzle on
each of the two-day tanks and deliver fuel to end users located in and around the VESSEL.
Each service pump shall have a simplex basket strainer up stream of the pump suctions.
Discharge from the service pumps shall be via a flow meter to the service distribution system.
3.19.17.6.1 Fuel Oil Service flow meter
There shall be a service pump discharge mechanical flow meter to monitor the fuel oil delivery
rate to the service system. The flow meter shall incorporate a simplex basket strainer to
prevent debris entering the flow meter. The flow meter/strainer shall have a bypass
arrangement to allow it to be isolated for maintenance or removal as necessary.

3.19.17.7 SERVICE DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

There shall be a suitable and sufficient piping and valve distribution system to all necessary
Fuel Oil users for the VESSEL. The USERS shall include, but not be limited to:

PAGE 220 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Cement Unit fuel supply

• Lifeboat service outlet
• Wire line unit fuel supply
• Breathing Air Compressor
• Cold start Compressor service outlet.
• Well logging unit service outlet.
• Main deck service outlet(s)
• Well Testing injection pump
• Well Test fuel tank
• Emergency generator fuel tank
3.19.17.8 EMERGENCY GENERATOR TANK SUPPLY
There shall be one (1) Emergency Generator day tank provided in the Emergency Generator
room. The tank shall have sufficient capacity to provide for 18 hrs of full load operation the
Emergency Generator.
The emergency Generator tank shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Suitably sized vent to Emergency Generator House roof.
• Fill Line
• Overflow Line
• Magnetic Flipper type level gauge
• Level content gauge and level transmitter to IMCS
• Quick Closing Valve on all outlet nozzle
• Manhole for inspection and cleaning
• High- and Low-level alarms (both alarms shall communicate with IMCS)
• Hotwork Signage
• Suitable and sufficient bund with a scupper and drain down to the dirty oil tank
Overflow from the tank shall incorporate a sighting port and shall return to a designated hull
tank.

3.19.17.9 WELL TEST TANK SUPPLY

There shall be one (1) Well Testing area fuel oil tank to service the fuel requirements for the
well test compressors. The tank shall have sufficient capacity and features as agreed with the
BUYER.

3.19.17.10 FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS

There shall be two (2) 100% Fuel Oil transfer pumps shall be provided that take suction from
high and low suction lines of each or the four (4) hull tanks. Each pump shall be provided with
a simplex basket strainer at the suction.
The pumps shall deliver un-purified fuel oil to the mud pits and to the cement unit diesel/slurry
tank. Each of the two streams shall incorporate a mechanical flow meter. Each flow meter
shall incorporate a simplex basket strainer to prevent debris entering the flow meter and shall
have a bypass arrangement so as to allow for isolation for maintenance or removal as
necessary.
The system piping and valve arrangement design shall be such that the Fuel Oil transfer
pumps can be lined up to take suction from any of the four (4) hull fuel tanks and transfer fuel
using the transfer pumps via the loading station flow meters to a supply vessel.
The system shall also be capable of transferring fuel oil between hull tanks using the transfer
pumps.

PAGE 221 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

In circumstances where both purifiers are unavailable the fuel transfer pumps shall be capable
of transferring un-purified fuel from the hull tanks directly to either Day Tank.
In the event of a high-high level indication in any tank to which the fuel oil transfer pumps are
discharging, then the transfer pumps shall shut down automatically.

3.19.18 LUBE OIL SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Lubrication Oil storage and distribution
system to meet the lube oil requirements of the VESSEL. The filling of the lube oil tanks shall
be completed by decanting drums or tote tanks of lube oil and filling the tanks by gravity via
fill line. Fill lines shall be 3” nominal bore, so far as is reasonably practicable, they shall be
vertical, and shall be as close to the tank as possible.
All lube oil system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for lube oil
service and shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing rules, codes and
standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.
The lube oil requirements for the VESSEL include, but are not limited to:
• Mud Pump gear oil
• Mud Pump soluble liner wash oil
• Diesel Engine lube oil
• The Lube Oil system shall include, but not be limited to, the following components;
• One (1) Split Mud Pump Gear Oil/Liner wash oil tank
• One (1) Main Engine Lube Oil tank
• One (1) Emergency Generator Engine Lube Oil tank
• One (1) Main Engine lube oil pump
• One (1) Mud Pump lube oil hose and nozzle
• Five (5) Main Engine hose and nozzle
• One (1) Emergency Generator engine hose and nozzle
3.19.18.1 SPLIT MUD PUMP GEAR OIL/LINER WASH OIL TANK
The mud pump gear oil tank and the liner wash oil tank shall be a split tank whereby they
share a common upright tank bulkhead. Apart from that the tanks shall be considered as
separate.
Each tank shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• Main Deck fill line
• Suitably sized vent/overflow to the main deck.
• Magnetic Flipper type level gauge
• Level content gauge
• Quick Closing Valve on the outlet nozzle
• Manhole for inspection and cleaning
• Suitable and sufficient main deck bund
3.19.18.2 MUD PUMP LUBE OIL HOSE REEL AND NOZZLE
The mud pump gear oil tank shall incorporate a suitably positioned discharge nozzle to which
a transfer hose is connected. The transfer hose shall be stored on a hose reel and shall
terminate in a trigger operated filling nozzle. The hose reel mounted hose shall be of sufficient
length to comfortably reach each mud pump gear oil fill point.

PAGE 222 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.18.3 MAIN ENGINE LUBE OIL TANK

The Main Engine gear oil tank shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• Main Deck fill line
• Suitably sized vent/overflow to the main deck.
• Magnetic Flipper type level gauge
• Level content gauge
• Quick Closing Valve on the outlet nozzle
• Manhole for inspection and cleaning
• Suitable and sufficient main deck bund
3.19.18.4 MAIN ENGINE LUBE OIL PUMP
There shall be a pneumatically powered main engine lube oil pump that takes suction from
the Main Engine Lube Oil tank. The pump shall incorporate a simplex strainer and shall have
a bypass arrangement to allow the pump to be isolated for maintenance or removal as
necessary.

3.19.18.5 MAIN ENGINE HOSES AND NOZZLES

The pump shall discharge to a flexible hose adjacent to each engine. Each hose shall
terminate in a trigger operated filling nozzle. The hose shall be of sufficient length to reach
each main engine lube oil fill point.

3.19.18.6 EMERGENCY GENERATOR ENGINE LUBE OIL TANK

There shall be an Emergency Generator Engine lube oil tank located in the Emergency
Generator room. The lube oil tank shall be installed as high as is reasonably practicable in
the compartment so as to allow gravity discharge.
The tank shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• Emergency Generator House roof fill line
• Suitably sized vent/overflow to the Emergency Generator House roof
• Magnetic Flipper type level gauge
• Level content gauge
• Quick Closing Valve on the outlet nozzle
• Manhole for inspection and cleaning
• Suitable and sufficient Emergency Generator House roof bund
The quick closing valve shall be operated from outside the compartment

3.19.18.7 ONE (1) EMERGENCY GENERATOR ENGINE HOSE AND NOZZLE

The Emergency Generator lube oil tank shall discharge by gravity to a flexible hose adjacent
to the engine. The hose shall terminate in a trigger operated nozzle. The hose shall be of
sufficient length to comfortably reach Emergency Generator engine lube oil fill point.

3.19.19 FRESH WATER ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

There shall be a freshwater cooling system for main diesel engines. The design and
configuration of the cooling system shall meet the specifications and criteria stipulated by the
engine manufacturer as a minimum. The design of the system shall be in accordance with
VESSEL operating criteria stipulated in section 2.0 of this CTS.
The engine cooling system design shall ensure that optimum engine operating temperature
can be maintained under all VESSEL operating modes, and any combination of engine
selection i.e. any or all five (5) engines operating in parallel.

PAGE 223 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The basic design shall be a common enclosed cooling system. The coolant flow around the
system shall be provided by two (2) integral engine cooling water pumps per engine. The
temperature reduction shall be achieved via external radiators and the temperature controlled
via AMOT thermostatic control valves. The AMOT thermostatic control valves shall provide
fine control and steady engine operating temperature by controlling the flow of coolant through
the radiators and shall incorporate a manual override.
There shall be two separate circuits, a high temperature circuit and a low temperature circuit.
The high temperature circuit shall circulate cooling water around the high temperature
components of the engine that include but may not be limited to:
• cylinder heads
• turbo chargers
• cylinder liners
The low temperature circuit shall circulate cooling water around the lower temperature
components of the engine that include but may not be limited to:
• after coolers
• oil coolers
The cooling system shall use non-chlorinated water supplied from a header tank for each
system. Water from the header tanks shall enter the engines via two header lines and circulate
around the cooling galleries of the engine and discharge from two outlets on each engine (one
(1) HT & one (1) LT). Hot water from the engine shall then be directed to dedicated external
HT and LT radiators via two hot water header lines. Cooled water from the dedicated radiators
shall then return via the two header lines to the engine completing the cooling circuit. The
system shall include a full and comprehensive vent system for both the HT and LT circuits.
The main components of the cooling system shall include but not be limited to:
• High Temperature header tank
• Low Temperature header tank
• Hard piped Non-Chlorinated water supply to each header tank
• Isolation valves in close proximity to system components
• High temperature radiator core(s)
• Low temperature radiator core(s)
• 1 Lot Jacket water radiators
• 1 Lot SC. AC Water radiators
• 1 Lot AMOT Thermostatic control valves with manual override per caterpillar
recommendation.
• 1 Lot temperature-controlled switches for fan controls
• A means of controlling the draining of the system without spillage, and if necessary,
collecting the cooling medium for recycling.
The suction and discharge cooling line from each engine and each header line shall be fitted
with a panel mounted pressure gauge and temperature gauge.
Each header tank shall include but not be limited to the following components:
• Low-level alarm via IMCS
• Magnetic flipper type level gauge
• Over-pressurization cap
Each Radiator package (number of radiators to be confirmed by BUILDER) shall include but
not be limited to the following components:
• Inlet and outlet temperature and pressure gauges
• Low point drains (Valves and plugs)
• Sampling valves
• Expanded metal grilles to prevent debris being drawn into the radiator

PAGE 224 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Local Fan stop/start with green running light and a red not running light
The number and capacity of the radiators provided in the cooling system shall be as per Main
Engine OEM recommendation and shall assure that a maximum of 75% of the total radiator
capacity shall be capable of maintaining the required cooling performance.
All mechanical handling requirements shall be provided for maintenance and removal of the
system components with particular attention given to the removal and replacement of the
radiator fan motors.

3.19.20 DRILL WATER SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Drill Water 'take on', storage, transfer and
distribution system to meet the Drill Water requirements of the entire VESSEL.
All Drill Water system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for Drill
Water service and shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing rules, codes and
standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.
The Drill Water system shall include, but not be limited to the following components:
• One (1) Port and one (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ stations
• Four (4) Dedicated Hull Drill Water tanks
• Five (5) Dual purpose Hull Preload/Drill Water tanks
• Two (2) Drill Water pumps
• Drill Water Distribution system
3.19.20.1 ‘TAKE ON’ STATIONS
There shall be two (2) Drill Water 'take on' stations, one (1) on the Port side and one (1) on
the Starboard side of the VESSEL. The loading hoses shall be tagged and sized according to
system requirements, each hose shall be capable of being capped following disconnection
from the supply vessel connection and incorporate the necessary flotation collars.
3.19.20.1.1 ‘Take On’ station sampling points.
Each take on station shall have a sampling point to facilitate Drill Water quality check samples
to be taken.
3.19.20.1.2 ‘Take On’ station Flow Meters
Each take on station shall have a mechanical flow meter to monitor the Drill Water delivery
rates. The flow meters shall incorporate a simplex basket strainer to prevent debris entering
the flow meter. The flow meter/strainer shall have a bypass arrangement to allow it to be
isolated for maintenance or removal as necessary.

3.19.20.2 DEDICATED HULL TANKS

There shall be Four (4) hull tanks designated for Drill Water storage.
There shall be suitable access manholes with galvanized ladders for tank access.
There shall be an attachment at each tank manhole for securing an inertia reel fall arrester.
There shall be a tank gauging and monitoring system, connected to the IMCS, in addition to a
manual sounding capability.

PAGE 225 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.20.3 DUAL PURPOSE HULL TANKS

There shall five (5) dual purpose hull tanks for either Preload or Drill Water storage. All tank
manhole covers shall be readily identifiable. The manhole covers shall have welded
identification letters and numbers prominently welded to each manhole cover.
There shall be suitable access manholes with galvanized ladders for tank access.
There shall be an attachment at each tank manhole for securing an inertia reel fall arrester.
There shall be a tank gauging and monitoring system, connected to the IMCS, in addition to a
manual sounding capability.

3.19.20.4 DRILL WATER PUMPS

There shall be two (2) Drill Water pumps. The pumps shall be local manual operation only.
• Type Vertical Self Priming Centrifugal
• Capacity 68 m3/h (300 gpm) @ 5.9 bar (85psi)
• Driver Electric motor
Each drill water pump shall have a simplex strainer upstream of the pump with pressure
differential monitoring of the strainer condition.

3.19.20.5 DRILL WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

There shall be a suitable and sufficient piping and valve arrangements to provide Drill Water
to all necessary users on the VESSEL. All valves in the system shall be manually operated
and the USERS shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Drill water tanks (inter tank transfer)
• Ballast System (Crossover)
• Mud pits
• Helideck
• Lifeboat Stations
• Cement Unit
• Mud treatment area
• Shale Shakers
• Drill floor
• Cantilever
• Service/Washdown Outlets
• Fire pumps
Drill Water to the Cantilever and Drill Floor areas shall be via suitably sized drag chain hoses.
Suitable and Sufficient service/washdown outlets shall be provided throughout the VESSEL
complete with detachable hose of sufficient length to reach any normally accessible area of
the VESSEL where washdown may be required.
In addition, there shall be three (3) 35.5 m lengths of 38 mm rubber hose suitable for wash
down purposes installed on suitable racks for the purpose of main deck wash-down.
The Fire Pumps shall be capable of taking suction from the drill water tank(s) for fire water
supply during any transition period during jacking operations.
The pipework system shall allow for the fresh water generators to make and transfer water to
the drill water tanks. The connection shall incorporate double isolating check valves to assure
the integrity of the fresh water system.

3.19.21 BASE OIL SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Base Oil 'take on', storage, and transfer
system to meet the base oil requirements of the entire VESSEL.

PAGE 226 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All base oil system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for base oil
service and shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing rules, codes and
standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.
The Base Oil system shall include, but not be limited to, the following components:
• One (1) Port and one (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ stations
• One (1) Hull Tank
• One (1) Base Oil pump
• Transfer pipework and valve system
3.19.21.1 ‘TAKE ON’ STATIONS
There shall be two (2) 4” Base Oil 'take on' stations, one (1) on the Port side and one (1) on
the Starboard side of the VESSEL.
The loading hoses shall be tagged and sized according to system requirements, each hose
shall have a dry break connector at the supply vessel connection and incorporate the
necessary flotation collars.
The base oil loading station shall have a sampling point, a flow meter, and pressure gauge
mounted on block and bleed valve for pressure testing of the hose assembly connections and
seal.
3.19.21.1.1 ‘Take On’ station sampling points.
Each take on station shall have a sampling point with a self-closing sample valve to facilitate
base oil quality check samples to be taken.
3.19.21.1.2 ‘Take On’ station Flow Meters
Each take on station shall have a mechanical flow meter to monitor the base oil delivery rates.
The flow meters shall incorporate a simplex basket strainer to prevent debris entering the flow
meter. The flow meter/strainer shall have a bypass arrangement to allow it to be isolated for
maintenance or removal as necessary.

3.19.21.2 HULL TANKS

There shall be one (1) hull tank designated for base oil storage.
The base oil tanks shall have two means of ascertaining contents one (1) of which shall be
connected to the IMCS.

3.19.21.3 BASE OIL PUMP

There shall be One (1) self-priming centrifugal Base Oil pump of capacity 102m3/h (450 GPM).

3.19.21.4 TRANSFER PIPEWORK AND VALVES

There shall be a 4” line from the loading stations to the hull storage tank and a transfer and
distribution pipework system for the transfer of base oil to:
• Mud pits
• Cement unit
• Shaker house
• Drill floor
• Backload to supply vessel
• Centifuge Deck

PAGE 227 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.22 BRINE SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Brine 'take on', storage, and transfer
system to meet the Brine requirements of the entire VESSEL.
The Brine system shall be capable of mixing brine on-board via mud mixers or big bag mixers.
All Brine system pipework, valves, Instrumentation and fittings, shall be suitable for Brine
service and shall in any case meet the requirements of the governing rules, codes and
standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
Safe access shall be provided to all valves, equipment, skids and other components of the
system for the purpose of operation and maintenance.
The Brine system shall include, but not be limited to the following components:
• One (1) Port and one (1) Starboard ‘Take On’ stations
• One (1) Hull Tank one (1) Brine pump
• Transfer pipework and valve system
• Fresh Water Flushing system
• Header for brine filtration unit (Third Party) on main deck with flange connection & a
bypass line with isolation valve
• Discharge from brine filtration unit shall be led to the mud pits
3.19.22.1 TAKE ON STATIONS
There shall be two (2) suitably sized Brine 'take on' stations, one (1) on the Port side and one
(1) on the Starboard side of the VESSEL.
The loading hoses shall be tagged and sized according to system requirements, each hose
shall have a dry break connector at the supply vessel connection and incorporate the
necessary flotation collars.
The Brine loading station shall have a stainless-steel simplex basket strainer, flow meter, and
pressure gauge mounted on block and bleed valve for pressure testing of the hose assembly
connections and seal.
Flanges of the Brine system and rubber bellows shall have spray retention shields installed.
3.19.22.1.1 ‘Take On’ station Flow Meters
Each take on station shall have a mechanical flow meter to monitor the Brine delivery rates.
The flow meters shall incorporate a simplex basket strainer to prevent debris entering the flow
meter. The flow meter/strainer shall have a bypass arrangement to allow it to be isolated for
maintenance or removal as necessary.
3.19.22.1.2 Hull Tanks
There shall be one (1) hull tank designated for Brine storage.
There shall be circulating lines provided to each tank with mixing nozzles to avoid brine
settlement.
Brine tanks shall have two means of obtaining contents readings one (1) of which shall be
connected to the IMCS.
3.19.22.1.3 Brine pump
There shall be One (1) self-priming centrifugal brine pump of capacity 250 m3/h (1100 GPM).
3.12.17.4 Transfer pipework and valves
There shall be a suitably sized line from the loading stations to the one (1) hull storage tank
and a transfer and distribution pipework system for the transfer of Brine between storage tank
and:

PAGE 228 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Mud pits
• Cement unit
• Drill floor
• Mix Hoppers
• Filtration Unit
• Backload to supply vessel
3.19.22.1.4 Fresh Water Flushing
The brine system shall be provided with an efficient fresh water flushing system to avoid brine
lying in the system for long durations and the avoidance of furring of the system pipework.

3.19.23 MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT

The BUILDER shall provide Safe and Efficient material handling solutions throughout the
VESSEL. BUILDER shall develop a comprehensive Materials Handling Plan sufficiently early
in detailed design to minimize the impact of any design changes necessary to meet the
mandated provision. The Plan shall include but not be limited to, the following:
• Supply Vessel operations
• Hose Handling
• Tubular Handling
• Material Handling Equipment
• Suitably rated Laydown Areas
• Mechanical Protection of adjacent areas and equipment
• Access to Storage Areas
• Material transfer around and between decks
• Dropped Object Prevention
• Lifting Zones
• Blind Lift minimization
• Mechanical Handling Equipment for Maintenance
• Detailed equipment removal and reinstatement procedures
A suitable and sufficient number of doors, hatches and soft patches shall be provided for the
removal and reinstatement of equipment. There shall be small doors and hatches provided
within larger doors and hatches to provide the option to only use openings of an appropriate
size to the equipment requiring removal.
Ramps shall be provided throughout the VESSEL to allow the unimpeded passage of wheeled
equipment, including material handling equipment, at locations including, but not limited to:
• Doorway thresholds
• Coamings
• Deck level pipe runs
• Deck level cable trays
• Material Handling equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following;
• Fork Lift Trucks
• Pallet Lifters
• Helideck Cargo Trolley
• Deck Cranes
3.19.23.1 FORK LIFT TRUCK
The BUILDER shall provide one (1) 3t battery-powered fork lift trucks (FLT) for use throughout
the VESSEL as required. The FLT shall incorporate, but not be limited to, the following
features:
• Lifting points to allow the crane to be moved around the VESSEL with the Deck Cranes

PAGE 229 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Suitable for use in a Zone II Hazardous Area

• Battery Charging facilities on the main deck and sack store
• Provisions for securing the forklifts during vessel movement operations
• Driver’s overhead protection cage
• Seat belt
• Fire Extinguisher
• Operating Instructions
• Data Plate
• Driver’s seat activation switch
• Audible and Visual Reversing Alarm
• Rear view mirrors
3.19.23.2 PALLET LIFTERS
A suitable and sufficient number of cargo/pallet lifters shall be provided throughout the
VESSEL for the transportation of stores, miscellaneous materials and equipment. Due
cognizance shall be taken with regard to areas of need, travel distances and material handling
obstructions when identifying the number and placement of each.

3.19.23.3 HELIDECK CARGO TROLLEY

A suitable and sufficient helideck cargo trolley shall be provided. The trolley shall incorporate
certified lifting points to allow it to be lifted on and off the helideck via a main crane. The trolley
shall incorporate a flatbed capable of being raised mechanically so as to be level with the floor
of the largest helicopter (S61) to facilitate transfer of cargo to and from the aircraft without the
need for excessive manual handling.

3.19.23.4 DECK CRANES

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient crane facilities in accordance with the rules,
codes and standards stipulated in section 1.0 of this CTS and the operating criteria stipulated
in section 2.0.
There shall be three (3) Marine-type electro-hydraulic (or electric-electric) deck cranes
provided, at positions as shown in the Contract Plans.
The cranes shall be capable of functioning in afloat or jacked up condition. The cranes shall
be located so as to maximize material handling capabilities and to minimize the requirement
for blind lifts. The Cranes shall have the following primary specifications:
• Boom length: 2 X 120' (Port aft & Starboard cranes) and 1 x 140'. (Port forward crane)
• Static SWL: 45 metric tons (50 Short Tons) (Port aft & Starboard cranes) and 68 metric
tons (75 Short tons) (Port forward crane)
• Sea state working limitation of a minimum of 1.5 m significant wave height
Access to the crane operator’s cabin shall be via spiral staircase around the pedestal.
The crane operators’ cabin shall be designed and outfitted with due cognizance to ‘Human
Factors’ so as to minimize unnecessary stress with the potential to affect the performance of
the crane operator. Electrical equipment provision and installation shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the Project Plans and Hazardous Area Classification plans.
Outfitting of the Cranes shall include but not be limited to:
• Crane cab Window protection bars
• Wiper/washer to the driver’s cabin
• Crane cabin and machinery room door to be self-closing
• Mechanical boom angle indicator
• Fire and Gas detection

PAGE 230 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• PAGA
• Telephone system
• VHF marine band radio with appropriate Press to Talk (PTT) facility, headphones and
boom microphone
• Internal and External Lighting
• Climate Control
• Illuminated wind stock shall be positioned at the top of each crane gantry
• Boom tip and anti-collision lights
• Camera which will enable driver to monitor luffing winch operation
• Electrical slewing slip ring that accepts all cables and ensures 360 degree slewing
capability of the crane
• All necessary controls and instrumentation
• Crane drivers jockey seat so that driver training can be safely performed.
• Loud hailer system
• Standalone CCTV system including crane boom tip camera
• Audible and visual warning device informing workers that crane slewing is in progress
• Emergency operating mode for all functions of the crane at a reduced speed
• Emergency lowering
• Load monitoring safety alarm system
• Safe access to the full length of the boom, complete with safety lines, and at both sides
of the jib head
• Slack rope tensioner for each type of hoist
• Environmental anti -pollution system
3.19.23.5 BOOM RESTS
The location of boom rests shall be determined by the BUILDER based upon the crane
manufacturer’s requirements (allowable support position on the boom). The boom rests shall
be designed and positioned so that the boom is horizontal in the stowed position. The design
shall be such that the auxiliary block and main hoist block can be lowered to the deck for the
purposes of maintaining the lifting components without the need for working over board or
over the side shell.
To facilitate certain drilling related operations the Port Aft boom rest shall be capable of being
removed and installed in alternative locations as stipulated in the Contract Plans. All boom
rest foundations shall be of bolted construction so as to be readily removed as necessary
There shall be safe access and egress provided for the boom rest platform.
Each boom rest shall have a sea-fastening arrangement incorporating suitable and sufficient
fixtures for securing the boom in the horizontal position as and when required. In addition,
suitable and sufficient anchorages shall be provided on the main deck for securing both the
main and auxiliary blocks.
The boom rest shall incorporate all necessary rubber or hard wood rubbing strakes and pads
to prevent damage to the crane boom structure or to the coating system when using the rest.

3.19.24 MECHANICAL HANDLING

As part of the Material Handling requirements for the VESSEL, the BUILDER shall provide
suitable and sufficient 'Mechanical Handling' equipment for all material handling requirements
in excess of 25 kg. The selection and placement of the mechanical handling equipment shall
be in accordance with a detailed ‘Material Handling Plan’ for the VESSEL that is based upon
the findings of a comprehensive, suitable and sufficient ‘material handling study’.
Mechanical handling Aids shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Bridge cranes

PAGE 231 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Crane Gin Pole Beam

• Overhead trolley beams
• Powered Trolleys
• Manual Trolleys
• Winches
• Blocks
• Pull lifts
• Hoists
• Jacks
• Tirfors
Table 3.12.29.1 below provides a preliminary list of mechanical handling equipment to be
provided by the BUILDER. The final provision shall be in accordance with the material
handling Plan and the Contract Plans.

Table 3.12.29.1 - Mechanical Handling Equipment requirements

Area / Space Equipment Description QTY
Main Crane(s) Gin Pole beam and Trolley approx. 5t (Manual) One (1)
per Crane
Mud Pump Room Trolley hoist-8 T (Manual) Eight (8)
Trolley hoist-12 T(Pneumatic) One (1)
Manual Trolley for beam travel Four (4)

Compressor room Trolley hoist-1 T (Removable/ Manual) One (1)

Trolley hoist-1.5 T (Removable/ Manual) One (1)
Transformer Room Hilman roller Pneumatic controlled set- (18 T) One (1)

Shale Shaker Room Trolley hoist -2.0 T (Removable/ Manual) One (1)

Purifier Room. Trolley hoist -0.5 T (Removable/ Manual) One (1)

Auxiliary Equipment Trolley hoist -2.0 T (Removable/ Manual) Two (2)

Room.
Workshop Trolley hoist -2.0 T (Removable/ Manual) One (1)
Jack up leg Motors 20 T Electric hoists on Jib (removable type) One (1)
Sack area Forklift - 2.5T One (1)
Trolley hoist (Removal/Manual) - 3 MT One (1)
BOP BOP Trolley rails (100 te) with 75 te each Two (2)
pneumatic or hydraulic chain hoist system
Trolley beam under cantilever Piperack - 25 MT One (1)
Main Engine room Trolley hoist (Pneumatic) - 12 MT One (1)

Trolley hoist (Pneumatic) - 12 MT One (1)

Manual trolley for supporting moving beam - 5 MT Two (2)

PAGE 232 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Area / Space Equipment Description QTY

Trolley beams above each engine: 2-ton SWL for Five (5)
removal of cylinder heads, pistons and liners
Mud pit room Trolley hoist (Removal/Manual) - 2 MT One (1)
All Areas Laydown areas TBC
E-gen Room Engine & Generator TBC
Helideck Cargo handling TBC
Accommodation Stores & equipment removal TBC
Drill Floor C&K v/v removal/replacement TBC
manifold
Drill Floor Cement v/v removal/replacement TBC
man
Drill Floor Drawworks Drum, motors TBC
Welders shop Raw materials TBC
NOVEC Room Cylinders TBC
BOP Accumulators Cylinder removal replacement TBC
Transformer Room Removal replacement TBC
P & S Pump Rooms Pump removal replacement in general throughout TBC
the VESSEL
Heavy tool store In/out TBC
Note: Where To Be Confirmed (TBC) is used the capacities shall be a minimum of 1t, but of
sufficient capacity above 1t to meet the individual needs of the equipment or material to be
handled.

3.19.25 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM

3.19.25.1 SPUD CANS AND LEGS

Sacrificial Anodes shall be provided on the VESSEL Legs and Spud cans. The Anode
installation shall provide protection for a minimum of ten-years from Delivery of the VESSEL.
Anodes shall be positions on the leg, cross braces, spud cans (internal and external) and sea
chest as per vessel anode placement plan.
BUILDER shall furnish the calculation of the design to basic designer for approval and
demonstrate the approval to BUYER. Coverage is to be from the bottom of the Spudcan to an
elevation of leg which will be submerged in water in the maximum water depth condition.
Anodes installation shall be designed for simple replacement. Welding shall be in line with
Section 1.0 of the CTS.

3.19.25.2 SEA CHEST ANODES

The Sea chests shall be provided with internal sacrificial anodes, not extending past the hull
and with the minimum capacity required by Section 1 of this CTS. Installation shall provide
protection for a minimum of ten-years from Delivery of the VESSEL.

3.19.26 TOWING AND MOORING EQUIPMENT

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient towing and mooring systems. The system
shall be in accordance with the contract plans and shall as a minimum meet the requirements
of the governing Rules, Codes and Standards included in Section 1.0 of this CTS and the
Operating Criteria stipulated in section 2.0.

PAGE 233 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The Towing arrangement shall be designed so as not to chafe on any part of the rig during
deployment, use, or retrieval. In particular, when stowed, no part of the bridle system shall
come into contact with the structural steel below the helideck.
The system shall include, but not be limited to, the following components:
• Towing bridle support
• Smit Brackets
• Bollards and chocks
• Towing bridle arrangement
• Emergency Towing arrangements
• Deployment and retrieval system
• Line throwing Apparatus
3.19.26.1 TOWING BRIDLE SUPPORT
There shall be a snatch block anchorage point positioned under the helideck for supporting
the towing bridle arrangement. Safe access shall be provided to a sheave platform for greasing
and servicing. There shall be a storage hang off wire for the towing bridle. All hoists supplied
shall have sufficient wire to meet all foreseeable towing scenarios. All wires passing through
hang off sheaves shall follow the D 18 rule of sheave size.

3.19.26.2 SMIT BRACKETS

• Six (6) off Smit towing brackets for 138 t SWL, installed at main deck forward, port &
stbd sides.
3.19.26.3 BOLLARDS AND CHOCKS
• Eight (8) double bollards for mooring, capacity 67t
• Six (6) panama chocks, capacity 138 t
3.19.26.4 MAIN TOWING ARRANGEMENT
• Two (2) 3” chains 15ft, 425 t MBL
• Two (2) 3” wire ropes 90ft, 425 t MBL
• One (1) 3” wire rope 45ft, 425 t MBL
• Five (5) Crosby shackle 2130, 120 t SWL
• One (1) Delta plate 150 t SWL
3.19.26.5 EMERGENCY TOWING ARRANGEMENT
• Two (2) 3” chains 15ft, 438 t MBL
• Two (2) 3” wire ropes 90ft, 425 t MBL
• One (1) 3” wire rope 45ft, 425 t MBL
• Five (5) Crosby shackles 2130, 120 t SWL
3.19.26.6 TOWING BRIDLE DEPLOYMENT AND RETREIVAL SYSTEM
The VESSEL shall be equipped with the following:
• One (1) Lot of Air Hoist(s) for towing bridle retrieval, capacity 5 t
• One (1) Greenpin super shackle, 15 t SWL
• Four (4) Crosby shackles 2130, 9.5 t SWL
• Three (3) Crosby wide body shackle 2160, 150 t SWL
• One (1) ¾” wire rope 5 ft, 30 t MBL
• One (1) G-491 Tower/Derrick Hoist Block, 15 t SWL
• One (1) ¾” wire rope 3 ft, 30 t MBL

PAGE 234 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.26.7 EMERGENECY TOWING BRIDLE RETREIVING SYSTEM

• Two (2) Greenpin super shackle, 15 t SWL
• Eight (8) Crosby shackles 2130, 9.5 t SWL
• Six (6) Crosby wide body shackles 2160, 150 t SWL
• Two (2) ¾” wire rope 5 ft, 30 t MBL
• Two (2) G-491 Tower/Derrick Hoist Block, 15 t SWL
• Two (2) ¾” wire rope 3 ft, 30 t MBL
3.19.26.8 LINE THROWING APPARATUS
Suitable and Sufficient line throwing apparatus shall be provided for the purpose of transferring
initial heaving lines to towing vessels. The type, capacity, and performance of the line throwing
apparatus shall be as agreed with the BUYER, but shall in any case, be in accordance with
the SOLAS, Life Saving Appliance (LSA) Code.

3.19.27 LIGHTING SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient Lighting Systems throughout the VESSEL.
The Lighting Systems shall be provided in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards
stipulated within Section 1.0 of this CTS.
BUILDER shall submit a Lighting Plan covering all areas of the VESSEL. The plan shall
describe the lighting system from a both a holistic view and by each discrete lighting area.
The plan shall cover Normal and Emergency lighting and shall include, but not be limited, the
following topics:
• Normative references
• System description
• List of areas covered
• Regulatory Lux Level requirements
• Planned Lux Levels
• Calculations used
• Luminaire details
• Placement of luminaires
• Total luminance for each area
• 3D illustrations of the lighting effect for each area
• 2D Luminance Plans
General requirements for the system shall include but not be limited to the following:
• Light Fixtures and Junction Boxes shall have in built Primary and Secondary retention
capability.
• Lighting fixtures, whether normal or emergency, in CCR shall have local on/off
switches.
• Lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles used in the accommodation areas shall be
flush-mounted.
• As a minimum, Normal and Emergency lighting arrangements shall be provided for all
machinery spaces, access routes, control rooms, switchboard rooms, muster areas
and staircases.
• Sufficient floodlights shall be installed to meet operational requirements.
• In order to reduce the number of spare parts, light fixtures shall be supplied from the
same manufacturer as far as is reasonably practicable.
• Light fixtures for each individual space or area shall be split between multiple circuits
to limit lighting loss due to single circuit interruption.

PAGE 235 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.19.27.1 TYPE AND GRADE

All lighting on the VESSEL shall be LED type and be suitable for the area in which they are
installed.
The light fittings in machinery spaces shall be surface mounted type. All lights shall be of
Marine grade.

3.19.27.2 FIXTURES AND RATINGS

Ingress Protection, Hazardous Area rating, and Fire rating of light fixtures shall be compliant
with the requirements of the area in which they are installed.

3.19.27.3 LIGHTING CONTROL

Lighting in the accommodation indoor area shall be controlled by local switches, typically
installed near exit doors from the respective spaces. Other light fixtures, including but not
limited to, common accommodation area lights, external, and machinery space lighting, shall
be capable of isolation via the associated lighting distribution panel.
Bunk Lights are to be provided with a switch integral to the bunk light.

3.19.27.4 MARKINGS AND NAMEPLATES

Emergency Lights shall be easily identifiable via a sign, a white 'E' on a red background
Each component of the lighting system shall incorporate an equipment tag number. The tag
for luminaires shall include, but not ne limited to, the luminaire sequential number and the
circuit number.

3.19.27.5 NAVIGATION AND SIGNAL LIGHTS

Navigation Lights, Obstruction Lights and Helideck lighting systems shall be either standalone
systems or a combined system with common control panel. All Navigation, signal lights and
Helideck Lighting systems shall be supplied by the same manufacturer so far as is reasonably
practicable.
a) Navigation Lights
The navigation lights provided shall be LED type and shall have valid conformity certificates
for use in the VESSEL.
Each navigation light shall be provided with its own branch circuit, fitted with a protective
device.
The lights shall have a minimum IP rating of IP56 and housing shall be made of Glass-Fiber
reinforced polycarbonate housing and polycarbonate optical head. Other material options shall
be considered on a case by case basis and subject to BUYER approval
The Navigation Lighting shall be controlled via a Control Panel located in VESSEL’s Central
Control Room and the power shall be supplied from separate power sources, Normal supply,
Emergency supply, and UPS as appropriate.
Navigational Lighting Control Panel shall include but not be limited to:
• Built-in battery back-up for the power failure alarm module. The ‘power failure audible’
alarm activates if power is removed from the panel.
• Selector switch for Primary Light On/Off or Secondary light On
• Status Indication for each navigation light.
b) Aircraft Warning Lights
A self-contained solar powered Aircraft warning light system shall be provided for the top of
the legs and the crown in compliance with CAP 437 and END USER SWIM Manual
requirements.

PAGE 236 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

c) Obstruction Lights and Foghorn

Obstruction lights and foghorn system shall be provided in compliance with IALA (International
Association of Lighthouse Authorities) Recommendation O-139 on the Marking of Man-Made
Offshore Structures, and CLASS requirements. The Obstruction Lighting and Foghorn shall
be controlled via a Control Panel located in VESSEL’s Central Control Room.
The system shall include but not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) Control and monitoring panel for obstruction lights and foghorn
• Three (3) Marine Obstruction lights
• One (1) automatic daylight on-off photocell control
• One (1) Foghorn 2NM
• One (1) Common battery charger for both marine obstruction lights and foghorn
• One (1) Battery box
• One (1) Lot Batteries
• Two (2) Battery circuit breaker / isolator switch
Control panel power shall be supplied from 24V DC Battery system dedicated for the
Obstruction lights and Foghorn.
A Floodlight shall be installed to illuminate the forward leg of the VESSEL.

3.19.27.6 HELIDECK LIGHTING SYSTEM

A Helideck Lighting system shall be provided in compliance with ABS, CAP437- Latest Edition,
END USER Aviation and Loss Prevention Department Helideck Safety requirements. All
Helideck Lighting shall be LED type. Primary and secondary retention methods shall be
designed and inbuilt into the light fixtures and junction boxes as far as reasonably practicable
Helideck lighting system shall consist of following items:
• Perimeter lights
• Flood lights
• Status light and repeater
• Illuminated windsock
• Illuminated H marking
• Illuminated Touchdown / Positioning Marking (TD/PM)
• lighting control panel
• UPS for lighting system
The Helideck Lighting Control Panel shall be located in VESSEL’S Central Control Room and
powered by UPS. Control panel shall be interfaced to the fire and gas detection panel that will
activate the status and repeater lights on a confirmed fire or gas alarm and indicate same on
IMCS.

3.19.28 RADIO COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient radio communications system and
equipment in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated within Section 1.0
of this CTS and with the Contract Plans.
The main radio communications equipment shall be located in a space that combines a radio
room and Central Control Room that shall be located on Level 5 of the Living Quarters.
Aerials (antennae) shall be fitted to radio equipment according to manufacturer's
recommendation subject to BUYER approval. Location of all aerials shall generally be on top
of the Living Quarters.
Radio equipment shall be provided with connections to main, emergency sources of power,
UPS’s and Batteries as required by Class and statutory requirements.
All radio equipment shall be supplied complete with statutory toolkits and operator manuals.

PAGE 237 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All items of radio equipment shall be installed for good ergonomic control. Drawers and
cupboards for stowage of tools, spare parts, manuals and other documents shall be provided.

3.19.28.1 GMDSS SYSTEM

The Global Maritime Distress & Safety System (GMDSS) facilities shall be provided at
VESSEL’s Central Control and Radio Room to provide long-range emergency voice and data
communications.
The GMDSS system shall consist of a self-contained GMDSS Radio station with duplication
of equipment for sea area 3, as required by SOLAS. The system shall operate on all public
marine channels and a range of private channels.
The main GMDSS equipment shall be located in the Central Control & Radio Room (CCR)
and shall be independent of the VSAT Satellite and other Radio communication systems.
GMDSS system shall include, but not be limited to the following features:
• MF/HF radio installation capable of transmitting and receiving safety and distress
signals using DSC (Digital Selective Calling) and DSC Watch receiver. The system
shall support simplex and semi-duplex SSB Telephony
• VHF radio installation capable of transmitting and receiving safety and distress signals
using DSC (Digital Selective Calling) and DSC Watch receiver
• Inmarsat Mobile Earth station capable of transmitting and receiving safety and distress
communications using direct-printing telegraphy, initiation/reception of distress primary
calls, continuous watch on shore-to-ship distress alerts specific to defined
geographical area. Inmarsat shall have NBDP
• GMDSS Alarm Panels as per SOLAS / CLASS norms.
• DGPS system (includes antenna and display unit) to provide position signals to various
consumers on the VESSEL such as GMDSS system, AIS system, VHF DSC units etc
• NAVTEX receiver capable of receiving and printing localized Maritime Safety
Information (MSI) using Radio Telex
• Weather fax with associated preamplifier and antenna
• Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons (EPIRB); as required per SOLAS
• Search and Rescue Transponders (SART) as required per SOLAS
• Ship Security Alert System (SSAS) with alert pushbuttons at OIM Office and CCR and
test pushbutton at CCR
• GMDSS Handheld VHF Radios as required by CLASS / SOLAS
• Antennae for above mentioned radios
• Radio Handsets
• Printers
3.19.28.2 VHF MARINE BAND RADIO FACILITIES
A VHF marine band radio system shall be installed to enable the operators to communicate
with supply boats and vessels.
The fixed units shall operate over the complete range of VHF marine band radio channels,
which are in general operation within the Arabian Gulf area. These units shall also incorporate
DSC facilities. The locations, within which fixed units shall be provided, shall include:
• Central Control Room.
• Cranes (with hands-free headsets and other accessories)
• Lifeboats (Complying with SOLAS requirements)
A quantity of six (6) intrinsically safe, VHF marine band hand portable units, complete with
detachable rechargeable batteries, shall be provided for the support of VESSEL, crane and
other related operations. These hand portable units shall operate over a minimum of 10
channels including the regional emergency/call channel (channel 16 has full priority). Each

PAGE 238 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

hand portable will be supplied complete with carrying case, body belt, remote
speaker/microphone, push to talk (PTT) assemblies and headsets.

3.19.28.3 VHF AIR BAND RADIO FACILITIES

A Fixed Air Band Radio Unit shall be installed in the Central Control & Radio Room. The unit
shall operate over the standard Saudi Arabia/Arabian Gulf Air Band radio channels, which are
used by offshore helicopters operations.
A minimum of one set of hand-held radio units, complete with headset, shall be provided for
use by the Helicopter Landing Officer for the VESSEL. The hand-held radio shall operate as
a minimum with eight number air band radio channels.

3.19.28.4 NON-DIRECTIONAL (RADIO) BEACON (NDB)

A Non-Directional Beacon (NDB) (transmitter) shall be installed in the Central Control & Radio
Room. The NDB antenna shall be an end fed long wire suspended round the perimeter of the
helideck. The antenna shall be supplied complete with a weather proof antenna tuner unit
(ATU) that shall be located adjacent to the helideck.
The NDB monitor receiver shall be installed in the Central Control & Radio Room.

3.19.28.5 UHF MOBILE RADIO

A two-way UHF mobile radio system compliant with End User HSERM and Schedule G
requirements shall be installed.

3.19.28.6 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) NAVIGATOR

A GPS system (includes antenna and display unit) shall be provided on the VESSEL, that
shall display the location / heading of the VESSEL through the use of GPS satellites. The GPS
display unit shall be located in the CCR.

3.19.28.7 AUTOMATIC IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM (AIS)

The VESSEL shall be provided with an Automatic Identification System (AIS), which provides
location information of the VESSEL to various authorities as per SOLAS requirements. The
system shall include AIS VHF antenna and display unit which shall be located in the CCR.

3.19.28.8 FLEET BROADBAND SYSTEM

A Fleet Broadband or equivalent system which provides maritime global satellite internet,
telephony, SMS texting and high-speed ISDN network using domed terminal antennas shall
be provided on the VESSEL.
A fleet broadband system IP handset and indoor controllers shall be provided in the CCR
along with the dome antenna on the VESSEL.

3.19.28.9 LIFEBOATS
Each lifeboat package on the VESSEL shall be provided with a VHF Marine Band radio
telephone, SART and EPIRB as per SOLAS.

3.19.28.10 CRANES
Each crane on the VESSEL shall be provided with a VHF marine radio base unit, power supply
unit foot-switch, hand on PTT switch, head-set and boom microphone, VHF antenna and all
accessories and mounting hardware. Head set for the Crane radio unit shall be noise
attenuating type with integral boom microphone. Foot switch to be heavy duty foot switch

PAGE 239 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

which shall be height adjustable and removable type guard shall be provided for operation
with heavy duty safety shoes.

3.19.29 INTERNAL COMMUNICATIONS

The VESSEL shall be provided with following internal communication systems for normal,
drilling and emergency communication purposes that shall include, but not be limited to, the
following.

3.19.29.1 PAGA SYSTEM

The PAGA system shall be a state-of-the-art microprocessor based proven system utilizing
the latest amplifier technology meeting CLASS and regulatory Bodies requirements.
The system shall include speakers, beacons and access panels which shall form a fully
integrated public address and alarm service throughout the VESSEL area including all areas
of the hull, accommodation, drill floor, Third-Party containers and cranes.
The PAGA System shall broadcast routine speech, pre-recorded announcements, emergency
speech, and alarm tones to all areas of the VESSEL.
The system shall be supplied with inbuilt redundancy to guarantee no single failure of
processor, amplifier, power supply, cable, speaker or individual component will affect the
sound output level in any area of the VESSEL and ensure alarms and audio announcements
are continuously audible throughout the VESSEL.
The system shall incorporate redundant PAGA controller with HOT standby system. The
complete system shall be powered by main and emergency power source UPS through
The emergency distribution board having auto changeover, such that any event causing the
failure of one route shall not cause the loss of the second route and the ability to broadcast
emergency announcements or alarms over the PAGA system.
The system shall employ speaker loop monitoring that constantly checks for degraded speaker
performance and automatically adjusts amplifier output to maintain sound level output.
The PAGA system shall include alarm monitoring facilities where failure of amplifiers,
speakers, beacon loop faults or processor unit shall indicate on the PAGA control cabinet.
Field devices in the PAGA system shall terminate into a master panel located in the CCR.
PAGA Access Panels shall be provided in PAGA master panel and Operator Console at CCR,
Drillers Cabin and OIM Office. PAGA system shall have interface with F&G, Entertainment
and Platform PABX/Telephone systems.
In areas where the background noise level is greater than 85 dB (A), additional visual
indications shall be provided (rotating beacon lights or flashing lights).
Automatic programmable alarm activation shall be initiated via interface from the VESSEL Fire
and Gas (F&G) detection system for the following:
• H2S Alarm.
• Combustible Gas Alarm.
• Fire Alarm.
• General Alarm.
• Abandon Rig Alarm
An alarm broadcast priority list shall be established and programmed in the system. When
more than one alarm broadcast request is being made at the same time, system shall
broadcast alarm as per the priority list.
Entertainment system shall be muted when announcements are made from PAGA system.
In addition, there shall be provisions in the PAGA system to provide public address and
general alarm lines extended to the offshore platform while drilling. To achieve the same, there

PAGE 240 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

shall be a junction box installed near the cantilever area to provide further interfaces to
platform PAGA system.
3.19.29.1.1 Functional Requirements
The PAGA system shall enable the operator to make public announcements from several
locations that shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Access Panel on PAGA Central Cabinet installed in CCR.
• Access Panel on CCR HMI panel.
• Access Panel on Drillers Cabin.
• Access Panel on OIM Office.
• Telephones distributed in different areas of the VESSEL
The system shall have the flexibility to restrict an announcement to a particular zone as
suggested below:
• Zone A: All areas including cabins & adjacent corridors
• Zone B: Machinery & Open Deck Areas, accommodation work spaces including
public rooms & offices.
• The facility to page all areas will be from the PAGA Central Cabinet and PAGA access
panels only
Zones shall be user programmable at the control panel
Emergency announcements / Alarms shall over-ride any user-imposed muting.
3.19.29.1.2 Power Supplies
PAGA system shall be provided with dedicated UPS unit with automatic change over and
external manual maintenance by-pass that meets CLASS rules and the UPS requirements as
detailed in this specification.

3.19.29.2 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS (PABX SYSTEM)

A PABX system shall be installed on the VESSEL to allow voice-based communication
between the personnel within the VESSEL at different locations and provide an interface to
external communication systems. The PABX System shall be an integrated hybrid telephone
system that supports all standard telephone functions: analogue, digital and VoIP (over
Ethernet LAN).
Telephones shall be installed at locations that shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Control Rooms
• Radio Room
• Offices
• Galley
• Workshops / Maintenance Offices
• Medic Rooms
• Mess Hall
• Switchgear / VFD Rooms
• Aux. Equipment rooms
• Mud pump room
• Mud pit room
• Shale Shaker
• Wireline Office
• Mud Logging Unit
• Laundry
• Crane Cabins x 3
• Leg areas x 3

PAGE 241 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Main Deck Port & Starboard

• Cementing unit
• Helideck
• Emergency Generator room
• Derrick
• Cantilever Pipe rack
• Under Cantilever
• Cellar Deck
• Trip tank
• Near BOP area
• LER
• Drill floor
• MWD Unit
• Mud Logging Unit
• Driller’s Cabin x 2
• Lifeboats Port & Starboard
• Mechanics Workshop
• Electrical Workshop
• Sack Store
• Crane Columns x 3
• Conference Room
• Helicopter Departure Lounge
• Helicopter Safety Room
Telephone locations shall be finalized during detail design. Acoustic Hoods with Ringer and
Beacon shall be provided for High Noise Areas.
There shall be 2 Portable Units (rated for Zone-1) that shall be located as per BUYER’s
discretion.
Conference Call Type Telephones shall be supplied for Conference Room / Meeting Rooms.
The PABX system shall interface with the VESSEL PAGA system for enabling public address
from all telephones of the VESSEL.
Telephone Extension list will be affixed near each telephone with clear instructions required
to make a Public Announcement from telephones.
PABX system shall also provide interfaces to the following systems:
• Third-Party Containers (MWD/Mud Logging / Directional Drilling Unit, Cement Unit)
• VSAT
• UHF/VHF Radio system
3.19.29.2.1 Power Supplies
PABX system shall be provided with dedicated UPS unit with automatic change over and
external manual maintenance by-pass that meets CLASS rules and the UPS requirements as
detailed in this specification.
3.19.29.2.2 LAN SYSTEM
The VESSEL shall be provided with a LAN (IT) network for internal communication over
standard Ethernet (Cat-6) and Fibre-Optic cables with an interface for connectivity to external
networks through VSAT for drilling system data and condition-based monitoring data, VOIP
telephony, CCTV and Entertainment systems.
The LAN (IT) system shall be physically and logically independent of various control system
(OT) networks including that of IMCS, Drilling Instrumentation and Control System (DICS).
Power Management System (PMS), and VESSEL Automation Network.

PAGE 242 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The LAN (IT) system design shall be capable of handling 100 GBPS bandwidth and shall
include the connection to Internet Service Providers (ISP’s) networks through owner furnished
firewalls.
The LAN (IT) shall be extended throughout VESSEL using the backbone fiber optic cables
and distribution cabinets at various locations of VESSEL.
The CAT-6 structured cabling system (SCS) shall support distribution of the LAN services to
the socket outlets in Cabins, Offices, Meeting and Conference Rooms with strategically placed
Wi-Fi routers to ensure VESSEL wide coverage for user equipment connection.
The LAN (IT) system shall incorporate the required VLAN for VESSEL PABX and
Entertainment systems and shall include necessary firewalls, network switches and devices
to establish connectivity through VSAT.
LAN cabinet shall be installed inside IT room at Accommodation level-V where all main IT
equipment including BUYER’s business servers shall be located.
The quantity of location of LAN network points to be finalized during detail design particularly
relating to work spaces & offices.

PAGE 243 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.20 MISCELLANEOUS MARINE EQUIPMENT

3.20.1 NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT
BUILDER shall provide all the necessary navigational equipment required to comply with the
Rules Codes and Standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS and shall include, but not be
limited to:
• Navigation lights and Foghorn
• Gyro compass
• Echo sounder system
• Megaphones
• Weather station
• Miscellaneous Items
3.20.1.1 NAVIGATION LIGHTS AND FOGHORN
Covered in separate section.

3.20.1.2 GYRO COMPASS

A single Navigational and Survey Grade Gyrocompass with control unit and repeaters shall
be installed on the VESSEL which shall provide gyro feeds to various systems on board as
required.

3.20.1.3 ECHO SOUNDER SYSTEM

An Echo sounder system shall be provided on the VESSEL that shall display the water depth
below the hull. The system shall include, but not be limited to:
• One (1) CLASS approved sensors
• One (1) signal conditioning unit
• One (1) Visual Display Unit in the Central Control Room
3.20.1.4 MEGAPHONE
Six (6) Portable megaphones shall be provided.

3.20.1.5 WEATHER STATION

The design, siting and back-up requirements for meteorological equipment to be installed on
the VESSEL shall be in accordance with CAP 437 and all referenced documentation.
Weather sensor information shall be displayed on a dedicated Weather station display unit in
the Central Control & Radio Room.
Weather monitoring equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Atmospheric Pressure.
• Atmospheric Temperature and Dew Point.
• Wind speed and Direction.
• Humidity
3.20.1.6 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Miscellaneous Navigational equipment shall be OFE supply and shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
• Two (2) Pairs 7x50 waterproof marine binoculars
• One (1) Standalone Chronometer
• One (1) Set Admiralty Charts for the area of operation

PAGE 244 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Charting Tools
• Marine Publications as agreed with BUYER
• Four (4) windsocks in locations approved by BUYER
3.20.2 FLAGS
Flags shall be OFE supply and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) set of signal flags size 2, with signal hook
• One (1) name standard
• Four (4) signal flags, size 2, with the VESSEL's referred letters
• One (1) signal flag, size 2, letter "N"
• One (1) signal flag, size 2, letter "C"
• Two (2) national flags, one 2 m, and one 3 m
• One (1) guarantee flag
• Two (2) extra pilot's flags, letters "G" and "H"
• Two (2) Company flags
3.20.3 SHIP SECURITY ALERT SYSTEM
A dedicated ship security alert system shall be installed as per requirements of the
Specification.

3.20.4 ANTI-FOULING SYSTEM

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient Impressed Current Anti Fouling (ICAF)
system for the VESSEL in accordance with the Rules, Codes and Standards stipulated in
Section 1.0 of this CTS, and Contract Plans.
The Anti-fouling system shall prevent excessive marine bio growth in sea water system intakes
discharges and pipework. The systems to be protected shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
• Raw Water System
• Preload System
The ICAF system shall include, but mot be limited to, the following features
• Three (3) sets of anodes for raw water pump outlet suitable for the raw water pump
capacity of 410 m3/h (approx. 1800 GPM) per pump
• Two (2) sets anodes for preload pump outlet suitable for the preload pump capacity of
1590 m3/h (approx. 7000 GPM) per pump
• Two (2) sets anodes for the hull sea chests suitable for fire pump capacity of 227 m3/h
(approx. 1000 GPM) per pump
• Control System
• Junction Boxes
• Cabling
• Operator Station
In addition to the restriction of marine bio growth there shall be a raw water cleanliness
requirement to be met so as to avoid damage to raw water end users including, but not limited
to, the following VESSEL equipment:
• Water Makers.
• Brake Water Cooling
• Hydraulic Power Unit coolers
• In order to meet the raw water cleanliness requirements equipment shall be provided
to include, but not be limited to, the following;
• Coarse strainers shall be located on the main deck at the discharge from raw water
submersible pump and preload pump manifolds

PAGE 245 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Additional equipment downstream from the strainers to remove the remaining

suspended solids i.e. sand and silt, to a level appropriate to the OEM requirements for
the dependent systems
3.20.5 MASTS AND POSTS
A navigation light mast will be provided on top of the accommodation deckhouse, with safe
access to lights and equipment, and anchor points for safety harness. A mast will be provided
close to the helicopter deck for the windsock.
Easy access will be provided to replace the windsock.
Other masts or posts for antenna, navigation equipment, flags, etc. will be provided as
necessary.

3.21 MISCELLANEOUS SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The BUILDER shall provide all necessary Safety Equipment throughout the VESSEL and as
a minimum in accordance with the requirements of the Rules, Codes and Standards within
Section. 1.0 of this CTS and the Contract Plans.

3.21.1 ESCAPE EQUIPMENT

3.21.1.1 ACCOMMODATION
In every cabin there shall be escape equipment provided for each occupant, stowed in a
protective case, and shall include, but not be limited to:
• 15-minute Emergency Escape Breathing Device (EEBD) compatible with the cascade
system
• Smoke Hood
• Zone 1 rated Emergency Flashlight
• Pair of heat resistant gloves
• Lifejacket
3.21.1.2 EXTERNAL
• Breathing Apparatus shall be provided in accordance with the Breathing Air section of
this CTS and in accordance with HSERM
• Two (2) Embarkation Ladders (minimum) one each side
• Two (2) ladders in each leg
• Lifejackets – Minimum of 25% of maximum POB
• Fiberglass stowage lockers shall be provided for the lifejackets at designated areas
including but not limited to, Port and Starboard Lifeboat Station Muster Points
3.21.2 RESCUE EQUIPMENT

3.21.2.1 HELICOPTER RESCUE EQUIPMENT

Heli-crew Emergency Response cabinet shall be provided that is secured in position within a
convenient distance of the helideck and shall contain:
• Three (3) sets x Compliant Fire Fighting PPE that shall include, but not be limited to;
• Fire Fighting Jacket
• Fire Fighting Pants
• Fire Helmet with Fire protective visors
• Fire Fighting Hood
• Fire Fighting Boots
• Fire Fighting Gloves

PAGE 246 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Breathing Apparatus (two (2) sets)

A Helicopter Crash Box shall be provided that is secured in position in the immediate vicinity
of the helideck that shall contain the following, as a minimum:
• One (1) Bolt cutters 36-in
• One (1) Roll Fire Retardant Rope - 50' x ½”.
• One (1) Roll Fire Retardant Rope - 100' x ½”.
• Two (2) Fire Blanket
• Two (2) Hooligan tool, 36-in
• One (1) Firemen’s Crowbar, 51-in
• One (1) Safety Rescue Knife and sheath
• One (1) Grapnel Hook attached to 50-ft braided 3/16” SS cable
• Two (2) Water-Jet Fire Blanket (72-in. x 60-in.)
• One (1) 8' Ladder (Two-Piece) Multi-Position
• One (1) Adjustable Wrench
• One (1) Heavy duty hacksaw complete with six spare blades
• One (1) Pliers (side cutters)
• One (1) Set of assorted screwdrivers
• One (1) Set x Filter Mask (Man Made Mineral Fibre type)
• One (1) Fire Fighter Axe (Long Handle), (non-wedge or aircraft type)
3.21.2.2 RESCUE EQUIPMENT FOR HULL TANKS
• Three (3) Vertical rescue safety harnesses complete with ‘Y’ lanyard and spreader bar
• Three (3) Rescue tripods with compatible hand cranked winch
• Three (3) Rope Access type safety Helmets
3.21.2.3 HIGH VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL RESCUE KIT
A High Voltage rescue kit shall be provided at the Engine Room/Transformer Room,
Switchboard Room, VFD/ SCR room, E-Gen room & LER house to include:
• Insulated gloves for live working
• Insulated boots for live working
• Insulated helmet (with arc flash guard) for live working
• Insulating Dielectric matting for live working
• Insulated cutters
• Insulated “HOT” stick and retrieval hook.
• Hand-lamp
3.21.3 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
A ‘Battery’ Personal Protective Equipment kit shall be provided at all battery rooms. The kit
include but not be limited to:
• One (1) suitably sized fiberglass cabinet with rubber gasket seal around the door.
• One (1) pair Chemical Resistant Gloves
• One (1) pair Safety Goggles
• One (1) rubber Apron
• One (1) pair Rubber boots
3.21.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Fire extinguishers of an appropriate medium, number and capacity shall be placed so as to
cover all fire risks throughout the VESSEL and in accordance with the CLASS Approved Fire
Plan.

PAGE 247 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Fire Extinguishers shall be stowed in protective fiberglass cabinets as required or on suitably

positioned brackets ready for immediate use.
In addition to appropriate photoluminescent signage, all portable fire-extinguisher locations
shall be clearly marked with a Unique Extinguisher Number, the extinguishing medium, and
the capacity.
The BUILDER shall provide a Fire Extinguisher register that shall include, but not be limited
to, the following information:
• Unique ID Number
• Extinguishing Media
• Capacity
• Location on the VESSEL
• Date of Last inspection
• Date of Next Inspection
• Date of Last Hydraulic Test
• Date of Next Hydraulic Test
• Inspection report identifier
• Certificate of Conformity
• Manufacturer Test Certificate
3.21.5 FIRE BLANKET
One each of Fire blanket shall be provided in the Kitchen and Mess room of the Living
Quarters.

3.21.6 PERSONNEL TRANSFER BASKET

The BUILDER shall provide two (2) ‘Billy Pugh’ type personnel transfer baskets, complete with
weathertight fiberglass stowage facility. Each basket shall be capable of transferring at least
four (4) persons at any one time, to and from attendant vessels. The VESSEL deck cranes
shall be used to lift and lower the basket.
The basket shall be fully certified and if necessary recertified just prior to delivery to ensure
maximum duration until next required inspection and/or test.

3.21.7 STRETCHERS
Stretchers of following types, together with blankets and all necessary, lifting bridles, straps
and attachments, shall be provided at strategic locations around the VESSEL:

3.21.7.1 DRILL FLOOR

• One (1) Basket Stretcher
• One (1) Kendrick Extrication Device (KED) Stretcher
• One (1) Backboard/Spinal Board
3.21.7.2 FIREMAN STATIONS (X2)
• One (1) Basket Stretcher
• One (1) Paraguard ‘folding type’ Stretcher
3.21.7.3 HOSPITAL
• One (1) Basket Stretcher
• One (1) Hare Traction Stretcher
• One (1) Scoop Stretcher
• One (1) Paraguard ‘folding type’ Stretcher

PAGE 248 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• One (1) Kendrick Extrication Device (KED) Stretcher

• Two (2) Backboard/Spinal boards
3.21.7.4 HELIDECK
• One (1) Basket Stretcher
• One (1) Kendrick Extrication Device (KED) Stretcher
• One (1) Paraguard ‘folding type’ Stretcher
3.21.8 FIREMAN'S OUTFIT
The BUILDER shall provide a minimum of ten (10) Compliant Fire Fighting PPE Sets that shall
include, but not limited to the following:
• Fire Tunic
• Fire Leggings
• Non-conducting fire boots
• Heat resistant non-conducting gloves
• Flash Hood
• Fireman’s helmet with built visor and UHF portable radio compatibility
• Distress Signal Unit
• Breathing Apparatus with pig tail connection and hose extension for rescue purpose
and spare cylinder as per END USER specifications
• Safety/Lifeline
• Zone 1 rated right angled safety lamp
• Fireman’s axe
The outfits shall be stowed in suitably ventilated fiberglass cabinets to prevent mildew
formation and incorporate rubber gasket seal around the door.

3.21.9 DEFIBRILLATORS AND FIRST AID KITS

3.21.9.1 DEFIBRILLATORS
The BUILDER shall provide Automatic External Defibrillators in accordance with the END
USER Minimum Medical Standards Requirements Manual at the following locations:
• Two (2) Hospital (standard AED)
• One (1) Hospital (D6 Mindray Defibrillator)
• One (1) Mess Room (standard AED)
• One (1) Drillers Cabin (standard AED)
3.21.9.2 FIRST AID KITS
The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient number of First Aid Kits in accordance
with the HSERM Requirements, as a minimum:
• Four (4) 36 person size
3.21.10 SAFETY SHOWERS AND EYEWASH STATIONS

3.21.10.1 SAFETY SHOWERS

The BUILDER shall provide combination fresh water Safety showers and eye wash stations
where personnel have the potential to become contaminated with hazardous materials. The
locations shall include, but are not necessarily limited to:
• One (1) Rig floor
• One (1) Shaker House
• One (1) Sack Store

PAGE 249 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• One (1) Mud Pit Room

• One (1) Centrifuge Deck
• One (1) Main Deck
• One (1) Adjacent to Caustic Mixer
Combined safety shower and eye wash unit shall comprise a free standing, Self-supporting
unit, requiring only water connection for operations. They shall use a large diameter standpipe
and be self-draining to avoid overheating due to solar radiation. The eye wash units shall
incorporate a cover to protect the discharge nozzles and basin that when opened automatically
starts the flow of water.
The fresh water supply to the unit shall incorporate a replaceable filter just upstream of the
unit.

3.21.10.2 EYEWASH STATIONS

The BUILDER shall provide Wall mounted Sterile Saline Solution eye wash stations where
personnel have the potential to require immediate flushing of the eyes due to contamination.
There shall be a minimum of two (2) bottles of Sterile Saline Solution per eyewash station, the
locations of which, shall include, but not be limited to:
• One (1) Mud Pump Room
• One (1) Mud Pit Room
• One (1) Mechanics Workshop
• One (1) Electrical Workshop
• One (1) Welders Workshop
• One (1) Moonpool Area
• One (1) Sack Store
• One (1) Main Deck
• One (1) Paint Locker
• One (1) Hospital
• One (1) Auxiliary Machinery Room
• One (1) Rig floor
3.21.11 EMERGENCY AND MARINE SIGNALS

3.21.11.1 ROCKET PARACHUTE SIGNAL

Twelve (12) rocket parachute flares, complying with the requirements of the Regulatory
Bodies, are fitted. The flares shall be stored in a WT fibreglass box and installed in the CCR.

3.21.11.2 FLARES AND OTHER SIGNALS

Twelve (12) marine type emergency distress signals, such as handheld distress flares, floating
smoke signals complying with the requirements of the Regulatory Bodies, are fitted. The flares
shall be stored in a WT fibreglass box and installed in the CCR.

3.21.12 EMERGENCY LINE THROWING APPLIANCE

An emergency line-throwing appliance, complying with the Regulatory Body requirements is
provided in a fibreglass container on the roof of the accommodation building.

3.21.13 LIFE BUOYS

Stowage for Lifebuoys shall be located at regular intervals along the periphery of the lower
levels of the installation in accordance with the MODU code, and in any case a minimum of
ten (10) in accordance with HSERM.

PAGE 250 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The buoys shall be stowed in suitable steel brackets secured to the railings and/or bulwark.
The buoys shall be provided with a life line, smoke signal and self-ignite lights and
appurtenances as required by Regulatory Bodies.

3.21.14 SAFETY GATES

If ladders are used in areas outside of tanks, a self-closing safety gate shall be arranged. The
self-closing gates shall have the same design and strength as the surrounding guardrails. It
shall open towards a deck or platform, and have a firm outward stop, to prevent accidents. A
safe and user-friendly opening/locking device shall be provided. The safety gate shall be of
marine type and lightweight (such as GRE) material.

3.22 MISCELLANEOUS FABRICATION ITEMS

3.22.1 DRAG CHAINS

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient drag chain facilities for both hoses and
cables to be run between the main deck, the cantilever and the drill floor assemblies. The drag
chains shall cater for the fullest extent of the longitudinal cantilever, and transverse drill floor,
skidding envelope in accordance with the operating criteria stipulated in section 2.0 of this
CTS.
A longitudinal drag chain shall carry hoses and cables from main deck to cantilever and a
transverse drag chain shall carry hoses and cables from cantilever to the hose and cable exit
point of drill floor.
The Drag Chains shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Construction shall be in 316 stainless steel with nylon (or similar) bearings and anti-
friction fittings
• Trays or similar mechanical means shall prevent lateral movement and misalignment
of the drag chain
• All drag chain support rollers shall have greasing nipples and have a remote greasing
station with safe access from the main deck
• The design of drag chain shall ensure that the OEM recommended minimum bend
radius for each cable and hose shall not be exceeded
• The design of drag chain shall ensure that there is no damage to the hoses or cables
during operation
• Provision shall be made for the maintenance and the removal and replacement of
hoses and cables as necessary
• Hoses and cables shall be segregated to avoid chaffing and damage
• Cables shall maintain power and control segregation as per CLASS, IEC
recommendations and BUILDER installation Standards
• The Drag Chains shall have a minimum 10% free space for future connections
• Hoses and Cables shall not be intertwined and shall be clamped as per OEM
recommended practice
• Hoses shall have hammer unions at either end with safe access provided for
installation and removal
• Safety slings and clamps shall be installed at each end of every high-pressure hose.
They shall be hot dipped galvanized.
• The BUILDER shall provide a schedule and arrangement details of all hoses and
cables to be accommodated within in the drag chains.
• Drag chains shall be suitably earth bonded

PAGE 251 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.22.1.1 PADEYES
The BUILDER shall provide ‘fit for purpose’ pad eyes throughout the VESSEL for the purpose
of hanging off equipment, rigging as required, and for the attachment of mechanical handling
equipment, primarily for maintenance purposes. The numbers, locations and capacities of the
pad eyes shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans.
Each pad eye shall be permanently marked with its Safe Working Load and the Identification
Number to match Contract Plans.
Pad eyes shall be readily identifiable by virtue of their colour code or other paint scheme.
All pad eyes shall be suitably certified and so far as is reasonably practicable, freshly certified
just prior to delivery.
A pad eye register shall be provided by the BUILDER to cover all pad eyes and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following information:
• Unique ID Number
• Safe Working Load
• Location on the VESSEL
• Date of Last inspection
• Date of Next Inspection
• Inspection report identifier
• Certificate of Conformity
• Manufacturer Test Certificate
All pad eye installations shall be included in the VESSEL 3D model and tagged so as to be
readily identifiable against the Pad Eye Register.

3.22.1.2 BARRIER AND BUMPERS

Areas and equipment with the potential to suffer mechanical damage shall be identified in the
Material Handling Plan. Such areas and equipment shall be protected by barriers and
bumpers.
Barriers and bumpers shall be of such structural design that they can withstand the calculated
impact loads and prevent damage to the area or equipment that they are designed to protect.
Due cognizance shall be given, on a case by case basis, to the weight impact of providing
such barriers and bumpers versus the realistic likelihood and magnitude of the damage that
might otherwise be sustained.

3.22.1.3 HOSE HANDLING AND LOADING STATIONS

There shall be two (2) deck loading stations, one (1) on the Port side and one (1) on the
Starboard side.
The stations shall provide the interface between system hard pipe and system ‘take on’ hose.
Individual requirements for each system shall be as described, and referred to as, ‘take on’
stations in the pertinent system descriptions within this CTS.
In summary but not limited to both port and starboard loading station shall accommodate for:
• Potable water take-on hose – size 3” - length 150 feet
• Drill water take-on hose – size 4” - length 150 feet
• Fuel oil take-on hose – size 3” - length 150 feet
• Bulk take-on hose – Mud – size 5” – length 150 feet
• Bulk take-on hose – cement - size 5” - length 150 feet
• Base oil take-on hose – size 3” - length 150 feet
• Brine take-on hose – size 4” - length 150 feet
• Liquid Mud – size 4” – length 150 feet

PAGE 252 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Bulk Air – size 3” - length 150 feet

Safe access shall be provided to all hoses and hose connections and components for the
purpose of operations and/or maintenance and storage of the hoses. The hose connection on
the loading station shall be designed such that the hoses, when deployed, or in storage, do
not rub against the hull which requires the connection points to be at least one (1) meter
cantilevered from the side shell. BUILDER shall design a suitable and sufficient hose storage
system that incorporates the necessary saddles and hang off points to allow hoses to be safely
stored in elevated conditions. BUILDER shall provide for marine type anti-spill hose
connections that are to be applied on both connection ends (hard pipe side on hose station
and on hose).
All hoses shall be provided with suitable and sufficient floatation collars, as required, and in
addition, hoses provided for the transfer of environmentally sensitive materials shall be
provided with dry break connections.

3.22.1.4 DOCKING PLUGS

Two (2) docking plugs per each tank shall be provided for all tanks except for those storing
material with the potential for environmental damage. The docking plug sockets shall be of
carbon steel and the docking plugs shall be bronze plugs. Gaskets provided shall be of a
marine type, approved by CLASS. The plugs shall have a straight thread, an internal
hexagonal insert, and shall be permanently tethered to an anchorage point close to the socket
with a stainless-steel chain to prevent the plug being lost or misplaced whilst not ‘in situ’. The
location of the plugs in each tank shall be as such to provide best possible draining of the tank
and as far as practical shall be near the manholes and the ladder. A clear marking shall be
installed inside each applicable tank to allow swift clear identification of the docking plug
location.

3.22.2 LIFTING GEAR

All lifting gear shall be provided as per CTS and shall be tested in place prior to delivery and
demonstrated to be satisfactory for the purpose intended. All lifting equipment including, but
not limited to, padeyes, slings, shackles, sheaves, etc. supplied by BUILDER shall come with
certificates and shall be suitably marked as to SWL

PAGE 253 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.23 WORKSHOPS TOOL ROOMS AND STORES

The BUILDER shall provide secure lockable workshops, tool rooms & storage rooms to
include, but not be limited to the following:
• Mechanical Workshop
• Welders shop
• Warehouse starboard side on machinery deck
• Rubber goods store starboard side on Machinery deck
• Heavy tool storage room starboard side on machinery deck
• Chemical store in port sack storage room on machinery deck
• Paint store forward side on main deck
• Tool container below wire line unit on Starboard Jack house platform
• Tool container
• Shaker screen storage rack at the shaker house area
3.23.1 MECHANICAL WORKSHOP
A fully equipped Mechanical Workshop shall be provided on the machinery deck and shall be
fully outfitted with equipment that includes, but shall not be limited to, the following:
• All necessary services including rig air and electrical outlets for 110v, 220v and 440v
• One (1) Fixed heavy duty steel work bench
• Suitable and Sufficient steel storage racks and shelves c/w removable steel retainer
bars to prevent equipment and materials falling from the shelves in transit mode
• Whiteboard
• Two (2) Magnetic dial test indicators
• Micrometers and Verniers
• Hydraulic Press - Capacity 25t
• Parts Washer
• Drilling Machine complete with comprehensive selection of drill bits:
• Drills to Centre of circle – 20”
• Table Size - 18 1/8“ x 14 3/4”
• Machinist vice 10”
• Thread Cutting machine (Rigid 353)
• Capacity – Pipe 1/8” – 3”
• Bolt – ¼” – 1”
• Full set of NPT, BSP NC cutting dies
• 5 gal of cutting oil
• Power Hacksaw one (1) set of saw blades min ten (10):
• Minimum capacity @ 90 degree cut – 9”
• Minimum capacity @ 45 degree cut – 9”
• Hose Crimper – Die sizes size ¼” to 3”
• Hydro-Vacuum – Heavy duty with minimum 7-gallon storage
• 10” Pedestal Grinder with spare grinding wheels
• 8” Bench vise
• 6” Bench grinder
• Hose cutting machine – Bench mounted suitable for 3” HP hose
• Two (2) Welding Machines rated at 400 amps
• Socket sets Imperial and Metric
• Spanners Imperial and Metric
• Pneumatic Impact Socket wrenches
• Hydraulic Torque wrench c/w all attachments
• Pneumatic grease gun

PAGE 254 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Allen Keys Imperial and Metric

• Adjustable Spanners
• Mole grips
• Eagle Beak Pipe grips
• Stilsons
• Selection of ‘G’ Clamps
• Taps and Dies
• Screwdrivers
• Selection of Hammers
• Chisels
• Hydraulic Portapaks
• Pullers
• Mag drill
• Hand Drill and drill bits
• One (1) Angle Grinders 4”, 7” and 9” with spare grinding and cutting discs
• One (1) Drain Router (Rigid) Reel Mounted
• One (1) Drain Router (Rigid) pistol grip
• Number and Letter hard stamps
• Two (2) Calibrated Temperature Gun
• Crankshaft deflection measuring equipment
• One (1) set of refrigeration testing hoses and gauges
3.23.2 RIGGING STORE
The BUILDER shall provide space and utilities for the siting of a shore supply ‘fit for purpose’
self-contained rigging equipment container. The services shall include, but not be limited to
the following:
• Electricity supply
• Rig Air supply
3.23.3 WELDERS SHOP
The BUILDER shall provide a welding shop at the Port Forward Main Deck for fabrication and
repair activities. The welder’s shop shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• All necessary services including rig air and electrical outlets for 110v, 220v and 440v
• Suitable and Sufficient Fixed Extract Ventilation
• Suitable and Sufficient lighting shall be provided in the room.
• Suitable and Sufficient steel storage racks and shelves c/w removable steel retainer
bars to prevent equipment and materials falling from the shelves in transit mode.
• One (1) Heavy Duty Lockable steel chest of drawers
• One (1) Steel work bench with vice
• One (1) Tool board for use for storage of portable tools, electrical instruments etc.
• One (1) Horizontal band saw
• One (1) Radial drill press with comprehensive set of drills and chuck with key
• One (1) Welders oven for 45kg (100 lbs.) of welding rods
• Two (2) heated quiver
• Two (2) Conventional Welding Masks
• Two (2) battery pack air fed auto-darken Welding Masks
• Four (4) spare battery packs
• Two (2) battery pack charging units
• Two (2) Welders Aprons
• Two (2) Welders Smocks
• Four (4) Pairs Welders Gloves

PAGE 255 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Two (2) sets 50 meters long welding leads with all welder’s electrode holders
• One (1) Steel stool
• One (1) Steel cutting table
• One (1) One chop saw
• One (3) Hand held grinders 4”, 7”, and 9”
• One (1) MIG welder (portable)
• One (1) 400/500 A Electric welding Machines with remote controller
• One (1) TIG/MMA portable welding machine
• One (1) Portable Local Exhaust Ventilation fume extractor
• Two (2) Sets of oxy/acetylene cutting torches with range of nozzles.
• Three (3) Purpose built fixed oxygen cylinder racks (not to be installed less than 3m
from acetylene rack)
• Three (3) Purpose built fixed acetylene cylinder racks (not to be installed less than 3m
from oxygen rack)
• Two (2) portable/lifetable combined Oxygen/Acetylene cylinder racks
• Lockable Door
Racks for steel plate, steel bars and other similar materials shall be arranged in suitable
locations with crane access as close as is reasonably practical to the welding shop.
All lifting equipment such as plate grabs shall be included in the rigging loft inventory to be
provided by the BUILDER.
A steel welder’s marking out bench shall be provided adjacent to the Welders shop.

3.23.4 WAREHOUSE
The BUILDER shall provide a warehouse in the Starboard side of the machinery deck that
shall include but not be limited to, the following features:
• Suitable and Sufficient steel storage racks and shelves c/w removable steel retainer
bars to prevent equipment and materials falling from the shelves in transit mode
• Moveable ladder platform for access to high level shelves
• Electrical outlets for 110v and 220v
• HVAC Climate control
• Appropriately positioned lighting
• PA/GA
• Telephone
• Heavy duty non-slip safety matting
• Wire Mesh section panels
• Lockable Door
3.23.4.1 WAREHOUSEMAN’S OFFICE
The BUILDER shall provide a Warehouseman’s Office incorporated within the Warehouse
space for administration purposes. The office shall include but not be limited to the following
features:
• Electrical outlets for 110v and 220v
• HVAC Climate control
• Lighting
• PA/GA
• Telephone
• Network Access
• Filing Cabinets
• Ergonomic Desk
• Ergonomic Chair

PAGE 256 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.23.4.2 RUBBER GOODS STORE STARBOARD SIDE ON MEZZANINE DECK

The BUILDER shall provide a rubber goods store within the Warehouse space to store all
perishable rubber goods. The store shall be fully enclosed and have suitable and sufficient
HVAC provision in order to maintain the environmental conditions dictated by OEM of the
rubber goods to be stored. The store shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• All necessary services including 110v and 220v electrical outlets
• Lighting
• Suitable and Sufficient steel storage racks and shelves c/w removable steel retainer
bars to prevent equipment and materials falling from the shelves in transit mode.
• Suitable and sufficient access and material handling equipment for access to shelving
• Lockable self-closing door
3.23.5 HEAVY TOOL STORE
The BUILDER shall provide a heavy tool storage room on the Starboard side of the machinery
deck. The store shall include but not be limited to the following features:
• All necessary services including compressed air and 110v and 220v electrical outlets
• Suitable and Sufficient heavy-duty steel storage racks and shelves c/w removable
steel retainer bars to prevent equipment and materials falling from the shelves in transit
mode
• Lighting
• PA/GA
• Telephone
• Overhead gantry crane arrangement shall be installed that spans the entire footprint
of the storage rack areas
• Main Deck Access hatch
3.23.6 CHEMICAL STORE IN PORT SACK STORAGE ROOM ON MACHINERY DECK
The sack store shall incorporate a Hazardous Chemical Storage cage. The cage shall be
constructed from interconnecting steel mesh panels to allow the footprint of the store to be
adjusted or removed until required. The maximum footprint shall be as agreed with BUYER
and the Contract Plans. The store shall incorporate a lockable mesh door and a bund to retain
any spillage.

3.23.7 TOOL CONTAINER 1

A suitable and sufficient lockable steel tool container shall be provided below wire line unit on
Starboard Jack house platform.

3.23.8 TOOL CONTAINER 2

A suitable and sufficient lockable steel tool container shall be provided below the starboard
side of the cantilever.

3.23.9 SHAKER HOUSE STORE

A suitable and sufficient shaker screen storage rack shall be provided within the shaker house.

3.23.10 ELECTRICAL WORKSHOP

The BUILDER shall provide a suitable and sufficient electrical workshop, fully outfitted and in
accordance with the Contract Plans.
The workshop outfitting shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) work bench with non-conductive working surface

PAGE 257 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Shelving as required for maintenance and repair

• Tool Cabinets
• One (1) Desk
• One (1) ergonomic swivel chair
• One (1) Height adjustable stool suitable for sitting at the work bench
• Three (3) 4 tier metal filing cabinet
• Two (2) Magnetic white board
The electrical workshop shall include all necessary electrical tools that shall include, but not
be limited to, the following:
• Fluke 771 Milliamp Process Clamp Meter
• Fluke 87V Multimeter
• Fluke 373 clamp on meter
• Screwdriver set
• 150mm adjustable spanner
• 250mm adjustable spanner
• 250mm pipe wrench
• Weidmuller Ferrule Crimper
• Knipex Crimper
• Side Cutters
• LED Torch
• Fluke Infra-red thermometer
• Fluke Digital Multimeter 27ii
• HT 2234N Display Tachometer
• Metric Allen Keys
• Imperial Allen keys
• Adjustable wrench, 8”
• Adjustable wrench, 12”
• Ridgid Aluminium pipe wrench, 10”
• Ridgid Aluminium pipe wrench,12”
• Gedore Ball Pen hammer, 1/2 lbs.
• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 150mm
• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 180mm
• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 250mm
• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 300mm
• Gedore Curved Jaw Locking Pliers, 7”
• Gedore Curved Jaw Locking Pliers, 10”
• Gedore Curved Jaw Locking Pliers, 12”
• Metric hex key set
• Screw Drivers set
• Stanley Measuring tape, 10 meters
• Tool Bag
• Knipex Pliers, 200mm
• Knipex Pliers, 250mm
• Gedore Standard Combination spanners set
• Adjustable wrench, 8”
• Adjustable wrench, 12”
• Ridgid Aluminium pipe wrench, 10”
• Ridgid Aluminium pipe wrench,12”
• Gedore Ball Pen hammer, 1/2 lbs.
• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 150mm
• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 180mm

PAGE 258 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 250mm

• Knipex Tongue & Groove Joint Pliers, 300mm
• Gedore Curved Jaw Locking Pliers, 7”
• Gedore Curved Jaw Locking Pliers, 10”
• Gedore Curved Jaw Locking Pliers, 12”
• Standard hex key set
• Screw Drivers set
• Stanley Measuring tape, 10 meters
• Tool Bag
• Knipex Pliers, 200mm
• Knipex Pliers, 250mm
• Gedore Metric Combination spanners set
• One (1) Electrical test panel with relevant AC and DC voltages
3.23.10.1 ELECTRICIAN'S TEST PANEL
A Wall mounted Electricians test panel shall be installed in the electrical workshop
All voltages used in the VESSEL shall be made available at the test panel for equipment
testing purposes:
• AC, 3 phase, 60 Hz: 690V, 480V, 230V
• AC, L-L, 2 wire, 60 Hz: 230V, 115 V
• DC: 24 V, 12 V
The Test panel shall be provided with voltmeters, ammeters and a variable transformer with
an input of 230Volts AC and 0 – 230Volts output. Suitably rated Non-Conductive, Dielectric
matting shall be provided around the test panel area.

Test panel shall also have provisions for testing lamps and fuses and all sizes of MCC buckets.

PAGE 259 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.24 PAINTING, MARKINGS AND CORROSION PROTECTION

The BUILDER shall ensure the VESSEL is suitably protected from corrosion damage and
degradation due material selection, workmanship, or applied coating, and in accordance with
the BUYER Paint Specification included in Section 6.0, Appendix 9.0 of this CTS.

The BUILDER shall also ensure that all of the marking requirements within the Rules, Codes
and Standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS and the Contract Plans are to be fully
implemented.

In addition, there are general requirements with regard to VESSEL Painting and Marking that
shall include, but not be limited to:
• Fabricated structure and components
• Equipment
• Tanks
• Decks
• Escape Routes and muster areas
• Laydown Areas
3.24.1 PAINTING

3.24.1.1 FABRICATED STRUCTURE AND OUTFITTING

The colour scheme of the VESSEL basic construction and outfitting elements shall be in
accordance with the BUYER paint specification.

3.24.1.2 EQUIPMENT
For equipment, in general, painting shall be in accordance with the BUYER paint specification.
The only exceptions shall be where ‘re-painting’ of OEM supplied equipment may have an
adverse impact that may include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Invalidate OEM warranty
• Invalidate Ex rating
• Affect Surface Temperature ratings
• Block flame paths
• Impair performance of the equipment
• Impair functionality of the equipment
• Impair maintainability of the Equipment
• Damage to OEM coating
• Obscure equipment data plates or equipment data markings
Any BUILDER deviation from the BUYER paint specification shall constitute a ‘substitution’
and a decision shall be treated according to the Substitution Process described in this CTS
Drill floor equipment from the same OEM shall be of supplied in a uniform colour and shade
in accordance with the RAL colour standard, or equivalent.

3.24.1.3 TANKS
BUYER shall provide BUILDER with an addendum to the paint specification where deviation
from the specification is mandated. Such deviations shall include, but not be limited to, the
following areas that shall be glass flake coating:
• Mud Pits
• Mud Pit Room
• Mud Mix area of the sack storage room

PAGE 260 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Shaker/Mud treatment tanks

• Mud treatment space
• Trip Tanks
• Stripping tank
In any case, all spaces, tanks, voids and other surfaces shall be coated so as to provide the
necessary level of protection from the substances, temperature, and atmospheric conditions
to which they may be exposed.

3.24.1.4 DECKS
Deck coatings shall be non-slip where required and of a durability appropriate to the levels of
traffic to which they are expected to be exposed.

3.24.1.5 ESCAPE ROUTES

Escape routes shall be non-slip and painted on top of the deck coating of the routes they
follow.
Any unavoidable trip hazards, changes in level or impingement to the escape routes shall be
clearly highlighted.

3.24.1.6 LAYDOWN AREAS

The foot print of laydown areas shall be clearly demarcated, and the maximum deck loading
capacity clearly marked at an appropriate number of locations dependent upon size and shape
of the area.

3.24.2 MARKING
Marking shall be required throughout the VESSEL and shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
• Hull
• Leg Chords
• Cantilevers
• Helideck and Windwalls
• Life Saving Appliances
• Equipment and Machinery
• HVAC
• Signage and Labelling
3.24.2.1 HULL
The VESSEL hull shall have the following markings displayed:
• Name
• Port of Registry
• IMO Number
• Draft Marks
• Load Line
Letters and Numbers for the markings shall be cut from suitable 5mm steel plate and fully seal
welded to the hull. The letters and numbers shall be appropriately spaced, and laser aligned,
or equivalent, in the horizontal plane. The raised letters and numbers shall be painted in the
colour stipulated in the BUYER paint specification.

PAGE 261 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.24.2.1.1 Name
The VESSEL name shall be displayed in BLOCK CAPITAL lettering, 900mm in height, on the
Port and Starboard bow, and Centreline of the Transom. Each letter and number shall be
prepared, affixed, and painted as above.
3.24.2.1.2 Port of Registry
The VESSEL Port of Registry shall be displayed at an appropriate distance beneath the
VESSEL name on the Transom, in BLOCK CAPITAL lettering, 600mm in height. Each Letter/
Number shall be prepared, affixed, and painted as per the VESSEL name.
3.24.2.1.3 IMO Number
The VESSEL IMO Number shall be displayed at an appropriate distance beneath the VESSEL
Port of Registry on the transom, in BLOCK CAPITAL lettering, 300mm in height. Each
Letter/Number shall be prepared, affixed, and painted as per the VESSEL name.
3.24.2.1.4 Draft Marks
The VESSEL draft marks shall be displayed at ten (10) locations on the VESSEL:
• on the bow, close to the forward end of the hull, Port and Starboard
• on the side shell, close to the aft end of the hull, Port and Starboard
• at two locations in each leg well (port and stbd side within each leg well)
The draft marks shall be made up of horizontal segments 1” high x 6” wide and affixed at 6”
intervals from the keel to the maximum draft mark.
The draft mark segments shall be displayed so that the bottom of the segment represents the
actual measured draft from the keel.
The Draft shall be indicated numerically every two feet from the keel with 6” high numbers.
The bottom of the number at shall be level with the bottom of the corresponding draft mark.
Each number and draft mark segment shall be prepared, affixed, and painted as per the
VESSEL name, and laser aligned, or equivalent, in the vertical plane.
3.24.2.1.5 Load Line Marks
The VESSEL load line shall be designed, sized, and positioned on each side of the hull in
accordance with the VESSEL stability calculations.
The Loadline shall also be prepared, affixed, and painted as per the VESSEL name.

3.24.2.2 LEG MARKINGS

One chord of each leg shall be marked commencing 30 feet above the spud can tip to the top
of the leg, at intervals of 12” and so as to be visible from the jacking control room. Where
unobstructed line of sight from the jacking control room vantage point to the leg markings
cannot be achieved, then CCTV camera coverage shall be provided and displayed in the
Jacking Control Room. There shall be a numeric marking commencing at the 30 feet mark
and at each 5 feet thereafter, to the top of the leg.
The marking segments shall be 1” high 6” wide and the numbers shall be 6” in height.
Each number and draft mark segment shall be prepared, affixed, and painted as per the
VESSEL name and laser aligned, or equivalent, in the vertical plane.

3.24.2.3 CANTILEVER AND DRILL FLOORS

The cantilever longitudinal and drill floor transverse skidding position shall be marked to
indicate their position relative to datum points on the fixed structure.

PAGE 262 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.24.2.4 CANTILEVER
Each outboard side of the cantilever shall incorporate markings to indicate, fully retracted
position, fully extended position, all points in between at 12” intervals relative to fixed datum
point markings. The distance from well center to the transom shall be marked at each 5-foot
increment with numbers.

3.24.2.5 DRILL FLOOR

Each outboard side of the Drill Floor Sub Base shall incorporate markings to indicate,
Centreline, Maximum travel to Port, and Maximum travel to Starboard, and all points in
between at 12” intervals relative to a centerline datum point. The distance from the centreline
to Port and to Starboard shall be marked at each 5-foot increment with numbers.
The rectangular distance marking segments shall be 2” high x 1” wide and the distance
marking numbers shall be 6” in height and prepared, affixed, and painted as per the VESSEL
name.

3.24.2.6 HELIDECK AND DERRICK WINDWALLS

The Helideck and Derrick Windwalls, at the monkey board level, shall be marked in
accordance with the governing regulations set out in Section 1.0 of the CTS, and the
associated guidance, and shall include, but not be limited to:
• Civil Aviation Authority CAP 437
• END USER Aviation Standards
3.24.2.7 LIFE SAVING APPLIANCES
The VESSEL Life Saving Appliances shall be marked with the information required by the
governing regulations in Section 1.0 of the CTS. VESSEL Life Saving Appliances, shall
include, but not be limited to:
• Lifeboats
• Liferafts
• Lifebuoys
• Life Jackets
3.24.2.8 PIPING
In addition to being painted in accordance with the BUYER paint specification colours, the
piping systems shall also be marked with durable colour banding to indicate the service and
where applicable shall incorporate flow direction indication.

3.24.2.9 EQUIPMENT AND MACHINERY

Equipment and Machinery shall be marked in accordance with the Project Equipment Tag
Numbering system. Operating instructions shall be provided for critical and safety equipment
in dual language, Arabic and English.

3.24.2.10 HVAC
In addition to tag numbers, where ducting and components are hidden by deckheads such as
in the accommodation then, these tags shall be mirrored on, or adjacent to, ceiling panels that
are required to be removed to gain access to the equipment.
Supply, return, and exhaust ducts, and refrigerant piping etc. shall be marked with the line
identification (supply/ Return/Exhaust) and indicate the direction of flow at regular intervals
along the duct/pipe length. The markings shall be placed at locations visible from inspection
hatches and places where there is no requirement to dismantle other components or services.

PAGE 263 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.24.2.11 LIFTING APPLIANCES AND ACCESSORIES

Lifting equipment shall be marked as per statutory requirements and shall include, as a
minimum, the SWL.
Rigging equipment shall be colour coded in accordance with the END USER lifting colour code
for the period.

3.24.2.12 SIGNAGE AND LABELLING

All signage shall be provided to include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Safety
• Low level photoluminescent directional tape in all corridors forming part of an
escape route
• Exit and Escape Route signage
• Medical facilities
• All Life Saving Appliance signage
• LSA Plans
• Fire
• Firefighting Equipment signage
• Fire Plans
• Prohibition signs
• no smoking
• no photography
• Mandatory action signage
• PPE requirements
• Restricted Access
• Food hygiene
• Hazard
• Electrical
• Bio Hazard
• Other
• Emergency Lighting labelling
• Notice Boards
• Framed layout drawings
3.24.3 NOTICE AND INFORMATION FRAMES
BUILDER’s supply shall include all required notice and information frames as per CTS and
BUILDER install the frames with the required information in the locations approved by BUYER.
The frames shall be of approximate 1m x 1m size, wooden framing and marine type Plexiglas
front cover.

3.24.4 ON SITE MAINTENANCE AND PRESERVATION

BUILDER shall be responsible for all onsite Maintenance and Preservation of the equipment
and material prior to and after installation on board the VESSEL and until such time that the
Delivery of the VESSEL is complete. All Maintenance and Preservation shall be as per OEM
recommendation and all cost associated with the work shall by for BUILDER’s account.
BUYER’s representatives shall be provided with monthly maintenance and presentation
records.

3.24.5 CLEANING
At all times, during the construction and until Delivery of the VESSEL, BUILDER shall maintain
high housekeeping and cleaning standards across the construction sites, including the

PAGE 264 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

VESSEL. The VESSEL shall be delivered clean and ready for operation with all construction
debris, scrap, garbage etc. removed. All areas, including utility spaces inside the
accommodation and the hull, shall be inspected on regular basis and shall be subject to final
inspection prior to Delivery. Any cleaning required prior to and until Delivery of the VESSEL
shall to BUILDER’s account.

PAGE 265 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25 ACCOMMODATION UNIT AND FURNISHING

The BUILDER shall provide suitable and sufficient accommodation and services on the
VESSEL for One Hundred and Twenty (120) Personnel on Board (“POB”).
The accommodation and all equipment, joinery work and outfitting shall be in accordance with
the Rules, Codes, and Standards stipulated in Section 1.0 of this CTS.
The accommodation shall consist of a five-level forward deckhouse. The overall arrangement
of the deckhouse shall be:
• Level 2, wrap around the forward section of the leg well.
• Level 3 and 4, shall wrap around the forward leg well,
• Level 5 shall bridge between the aft sections of level 4 and provide open deck access
to the Helideck
Access between the levels shall be provided by internal and external staircases.

3.25.1 ACCOMMODATION GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

The accommodation furnishings shall be those general items to outfit the full complement of
accommodations. Accommodation General Arrangement drawings are provided for guidance
representation of layout and furnishings. All items, outfitting and furnishings, which are not
listed as BFE, and which are required to operate the accommodation as intended, including
items such as, pillows, linens, silverware, dishes, pots, pans, kitchen utensils etc., shall be
furnished by BUYER. Galley equipment such as stoves, ovens, dishwashers, steamers,
serving tables, freezer, chiller, racks, etc. will be furnished by BUILDER. BUILDER shall
provide BUYER with comprehensive list of all BFE associated with Hotel outfitting.
BUILDER shall furnish good marine quality furnishings of steel construction for industrial duty
and equipment as represented on Contract Drawings. The final arrangements and furnishings
of the quarters will be agreed between BUYER and BUILDER during the detail design,
especially considering the change from 140 POB to 120 POB) but the quarters shall contain
but shall not be limited to:

3.25.1.1 1ST LEVEL

• Medic room with 2 beds, toilet with bath tub
• Non-Smoking break room
• Smoking break room
• Common Toilets
• Utility spaces -2
3.25.1.2 2ND LEVEL
• 4-Man Cabin with Private Toilet and Shower – 09
• 2-Man Cabin with Semi-Private Toilet and Shower - 2
• 20 Man prayer room with foot wash area – 01
• Recreation room – 01
• Gymnasium – 01 (Equipment as shown on contract GA)
• Linen Store – 01
• Change Rooms with Toilet & Shower – 01
• Laundry with equipment – 01
• AHU – 03
• Utility spaces – 02
3.25.1.3 3RD LEVEL
• 1-Man Cabin with Private Toilet and Shower – 10

PAGE 266 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• 2-Man Cabin with Semi-Private Toilet and Shower – 16

• 2-Man Cabin with Private Toilet and Shower – 06
• AHU - 03
• Linen Store – 01
• Store - 02
• Utility spaces – 02
• Boot room with toilet - 01
3.25.1.4 4TH LEVEL
• 4-Man Cabin with Private Toilet and Shower – 10
• 2-Man Cabin with Semi-Private Toilet and Shower - 02
• 2-Man Cabin with Private Toilet and Shower - 01
• Recreation / Training room – 01
• Mess room – 01
• Galley – 01
• Food Storage – Chiller, Freezer and Dry store - 01
• AHU - 03
• Linen Store – 01
• Store - 02
• Utility spaces - 02
3.25.1.5 5TH LEVEL
• Control room – 01
• Radio room – 01
• Offices – 06
• Conference room – 01 (16 seats)
• Archive room – 01
• IT Room – 01
• Heli / Safety Briefing room - 01
• Tea room with toilet - 01
• AHU - 02
• Utility spaces – 01
• Emergency Gen. Room - 01
3.25.1.6 COMMON TO ALL LEVELS
• Stairwell and Internal passages as per contract GA drawings
• Stainless Steel Hand rails / Storm rail shall be provided for internal Stairways /
passages
3.25.2 ACCESS WAYS

3.25.2.1 STAIRWAYS
Stairways shall not have an incline greater than 45º. Landings shall be provided at intervals
as necessary between decks.
There shall be two (2) internal stairways:
• Port stairway from Level 1 to Level 5
• Starboard stairway from Level 1 to Level 5
• There shall be Stainless Steel handrails provided at both sides of each staircase.
• There shall be six (6) external stairways;
• Port Aft stairway from Level 1 to Level 5
• Starboard Aft stairway from Level 1 to Level 5

PAGE 267 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Centreline Forward stairway from Level 2 to Level 5

• Three (3) Helideck access stairways from Level 5 to Helideck
3.25.2.2 CORRIDORS
The corridors shall be free from obstruction by installed equipment. Any installed equipment
to be positioned within them shall be recessed into the bulkhead.
Any service openings etc. in the corridor bulkheads shall be flush including opening method.
There shall be hand rails provided at both sides of corridors.
Any electrical outlet sockets shall be flush mounted in the bulkhead.
Corridors shall be sufficiently wide for stretcher handling.

3.25.3 JOINER WORK INSULATION, AND DECK COVERING

3.25.3.1 JOINER WORK GENERAL

The joiner work installation shall conceal all piping, HVAC and electrical cables, including
ducting, wiring boxes, piping, etc., wherever practicable.
Access panels shall be furnished and installed where access to ducting, fire dampeners,
connection boxes, piping, valves, manifolds, or special controls etc. is required.
Where heavy items, such as lavatories, fire stations; lighting panels, etc. are to be affixed to
joiner panels then they shall be supported by independent strength members or backing plates
and not joiner panels alone.

3.25.3.2 JOINER CEILING AND WALL PANELS

In the accommodation, joiner bulkhead, ceilings and lining panels shall be furnished and
installed in spaces that shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Medic room
• Cool Down room
• Wash room
• Tea room (Non-smoking)
• Cabins
• Change rooms
• Common toilets
• Recreation rooms
• Majlis/Sitting Room
• Laundry
• Linen store
• Janitor room C/W HD mop and bucket sink
• Gymnasium
• Mess room (62 seats)
• Camp boss office
• Store
• Heli-briefing room
• Conference room
• Training room
• Games room
• Prayer room
• Foot washroom
• Computer / Phone room
• Offices
• Archive Room

PAGE 268 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Tea area
3.25.3.3 STAINLESS STEEL CEILING AND WALL PANELS
Stainless Steel ceiling and lining panels shall be furnished and installed in spaces that shall
include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Freezer room
• Dry store
• Chiller room
• Change rooms
• Laundry
• Dirty Tea Room (1/2 height clad)
• Smoking Room (Main Deck Forward)
3.25.3.4 DECK AND FLOOR COVERINGS
Deck and Floor coverings shall be flame retardant in accordance with the applicable rules,
codes and standards.
Coverings shall be appropriate to the area of installation and shall remain non-slip under all
foreseeable conditions of normal use.
Wet area coverings shall be fitted so as to avoid no migration of cleaning medium between
the interface of the covering and the bulkhead, or deck, to which it is attached. All floor
scuppers and deck drains in the applicable areas shall be fitted with stainless steel flush drain
gutters and covers that incorporate smooth and seamless into the inherent flooring system.
The following key flooring systems are to be considered, all systems and final products are
subject to BUYER review and approval:
AREA SYSTEM
All public washrooms and toilets Epoxy type floor with flakes, skirting
All wet units (internal washroom, shower and toilet modules), Epoxy type floor with flakes, skirting
Mess Room & Laundry
Galley Flooring Epoxy type floor with flakes, skirting
Conditioned Space Machinery Area Steel
Stateroom living area main corridors, stairwell landings, helicopter Vinyl with flooring
waiting room, hospital, medics area, offices, recreation room, gym
Change Room Deck Coverings Epoxy type floor with flakes, skirting
Central Control Room Deck Coverings Vinyl with skirting
Closets, linen or mop Vinyl with skirting

All flooring furnishing shall be of high finish and provide a smooth, easy to maintain surface
with no trip hazards and no foundations or other steel materials exposed. As appropriate and
provide in line with the requirements outlined in the Specifications, contractor may propose
alternative products during detail design for BUYER’s review and consideration. All
substitution to above listed material or systems shall be subject to BUYER’s approval.

3.25.4 INSULATION
The inside surfaces of all accommodation and other conditioned spaces, that are exposed to
the weather, or are adjacent to non-air-conditioned, excessively heated spaces, or machinery
spaces, shall have exposed portions, on the heated side where practicable, covered with
insulating material.
The insulation shall cover the inside surfaces of the bulkheads and overheads including beams
up to 450 mm deep, stiffener angles and any flanges bearing on the plating.

PAGE 269 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All insulation shall be in direct contact with the steel surface to minimize any voids, with the
exception of angle stiffeners of 100 mm or smaller, where the insulation may be shaped
around the flange but still leave a void.
All insulation shall be attached via 2.5 mm diameter copper coated steel welded studs, spaced
as per manufacturer standard and secured by galvanized slip on non-return washers.
Exposed insulation shall be covered with heavy fiberglass cloth with foster coating and tape.

3.25.5 ACCOMODATION WINDOWS AND DOORS

3.25.5.1 ACCOMODATION WINDOWS

Widows throughout the living quarters shall include, but not be limited to the following features:
• External Windows shall be fixed offshore watertight type with fire rating to match the
structural fire integrity rating of the bulkhead in which they are fitted
• Safe access and equipment shall be provided for the cleaning of external windows
Windows are to be delivered with welding type steel coaming and aluminium alloy glass keep
frame. The installation in accommodation is to be performed with due diligence to noise
reduction. All cabin windows shall be supplied with curtain and curtain rails.
Sufficient window wipers of horizontal type with washer are to be fitted in the central control
room/radio room.
The minimum window size shall be:
Central control room/radio room, offices and public 900w mm x 600h mm fixed type.
rooms above the Main Deck
All cabins and sickbay, all other rooms 450w min x 600h mm fixed type.

3.25.5.2 ACCOMODATION DOORS

Doors throughout the living quarters shall include, but not be limited to the following features:
• Door frames shall be steel and of a design that is resistant to warping under the
stresses imposed by the design operating criteria for the VESSEL within Section 2.0
of this CTS
• Fire integrity rating to match the structural fire integrity rating of the bulkhead in which
they are fitted
• Door thresholds shall incorporate ramps to allow material handling as necessary.
• Internal doors within corridors, between LQ working areas and Public Areas shall
incorporate vision panels, as appropriate, to avoid doors being opened onto personnel
on the opposite side
• Doors shall open in the direction of the escape routes
• Doors shall be sufficiently wide for stretcher handling
All internal doors shall be without thresholds if possible, except for A- class door. All hardware
shall be of heavy-duty type. All doors shall be provided with locks, hold-back hooks, rubber
tipped bumpers, knobs, handles, butts and hinges, push plates, as required to serve the space
intended.
Where necessary to obtain positive fastenings to bulkheads for doors, reinforcing plates shall
be applied in way of hardware items.
The ventilation duct/grille to be designed for minimum noise transmittal through the door. Metal
joiner doors for mud pit and mud process room shall be stainless steel type.
Frequently used doors at quarter main deck level are to be designed and constructed with a
watertight door closed while the vessel is on the sea and an open during drilling. The fire rating
of doors is to be same grade as the surrounding wall.
All doors shall be selected and provided with due diligence to noise reduction.

PAGE 270 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

A self-closing device is to be provided for each fire door off stairway enclosures and into A-60
fire rated rooms.
A self-closing device is to be provided for each door of passage entrances.
Threshold is to be stainless steel and shall be designed so that the cleaning dolly can pass.

All locks shall be keyed differently except where there is more than one door to the same
compartment, in which case these doors shall be keyed alike.
Each door lock to living spaces shall be provided with one key for each occupant plus two
spares. All other spaces requiring keys shall be provided with a total of three keys.
Two (2) master keys shall be provided, one for all accommodation spaces and the other for
machinery spaces. Both master keys shall be keyed to one grand master key. Two (2) spares
shall be provided for each master key.

3.25.6 OUTFITTING AND FURNISHING SCHEUDLE

The BUILDER shall provide a comprehensive and detailed ‘outfitting Schedule for the entire
living quarters for BUYER review and approval. All furnishings and outfitting’s shall be of high
standard and quality, marine grade, suitable for living spaces and work environments. All
rooms and spaces shall be furnished and outfitted with the quantities to cover and provide for
the design occupancy, purpose and functional requirements.
Services and systems such as HVAC, Pot water, Lighting, Fire and Gas, PAGA, Telephone
etc. are covered in their respective sections.
This section of this CTS identifies only the ‘Main’ outfitting features for each space and not all
of small furnishings, fixtures and fittings and miscellaneous items, these shall be detailed in
the ‘Outfitting Schedule’ and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Upholstery
• Color schemes
• Notice boards
• White boards
• VESSEL drawing and Information display frames
• Signage
• Magazine racks
• Clocks
• Shelving
• Waste bins
• Coat hooks
• Mirrors
• Bathroom, Shower and Toilet fittings
• Portable Electrical Appliances
• Crockery
• Cutlery
• Galley utensils
• Cookware
• Bakeware
• Janitor and Laundry ancillaries
• Bedding
• Soft Furnishings
• Locks, Keys, Etc.
• Door Closers
• Clocks

PAGE 271 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.1 MEDIC ROOM

The door arrangement of the Medic room shall provide suitable access and egress to
accommodate transportation of personnel by stretcher from the work areas and to the
helicopter deck. As the medic room shall also be used for medical consultation an entrance
from the internal staircase shall be provided.
The Medic room shall be outfitted in accordance with the END USER’s Minimum Medical
Requirements Manual and Schedule G and in any case shall include but not be limited to the
following features:
• One (1) Lockable Medicine fridge lockable type (approximately 100 L)
• Two (2) Medical bed (semi-electric type) with Fabric curtains
• One (1) Examination table
• One (1) Examination Stool
• Two (2) Lockable Medicine cabinet
• One (1) Bath tub with curtain
• One (1) Washbasin
• One (1) Office ‘L’ shaped table with drawers
• One (1) Bulkhead table/cabinets
• One (1) Office chair
• Two (2) Visitor chair
• Two (2) Bulkhead table/cabinets/cabinets
• Suitable and Sufficient number of Lockable filing cabinets
3.25.6.2 UTILITY AREAS
Utility spaces are provided in LQ on levels 1 to 5 on both Port and Starboard sides. This utility
spaces shall be allocated for the installation of equipment and services including, but not
limited to, the following:
• Cable runs
• Pipe runs
• HVAC ducting
• Distribution Panels
• HVAC power panels
• Access to the utility spaces is provided from the stair well on Main deck, Level 1, and
from the AHU rooms on other levels.
Where applicable, transits shall be designed so as to maintain the fire integrity rating of the
deck through which they pass.

3.25.6.3 COOL DOWN ROOM

The cool down shall be located in the accommodation with entry from the main deck and shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Wrap around benches
• One (1) 2 Bowl juice dispenser
• One (1) Electric type hot & cold-water dispenser
• One (1) Refrigerator
3.25.6.4 COMMON WASHROOMS, TOILETS, SHOWERS
The Common toilets shall be located in different levels and shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:

PAGE 272 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.4.1 MAIN DECK, LEVEL 1

• One (1) Stainless Steel type European water closet
• One (1) Stainless Steel - Bidet Pressurized Spray Gun with Holder Hose (one (1) near
each water closet)
• Two (2) Stainless Steel type wash hand basin
• Two (2) Stainless Steel type urinals with divider
3.25.6.4.2 LEVEL 2
• Four (4) Ceramic type European water closet
• Four (4) Stainless Steel - Bidet Pressurized Spray Gun with Holder Hose (one (1) near
each water closet)
• Three (3) Ceramic type urinal
• Change to 4 x SS Wash hand basin 1 x ceramic type (Same as 116E Ga's)
• Three (3) Shower cubicle with hot and cold mixer tap
3.25.6.4.3 LEVEL 3
• Two (2) Ceramic type European water closet
• One (1) Stainless Steel - Bidet Pressurized Spray Gun with Holder Hose (one (1) near
each water closet)
• Ceramic type wash hand basin
3.25.6.4.4 LEVEL 4
• Two (2) Ceramic type European water closet
• One (1) Ceramic type wash hand basin
• One (1) Stainless Steel - Bidet Pressurized Spray Gun with Holder Hose (one (1) near
each water closet)
• One (1) Ceramic type urinal
3.25.6.4.5 LEVEL 5
• Two (2) Ceramic type European water closet
• Two (2) Stainless Steel - Bidet Pressurized Spray Gun with Holder Hose (one (1) near
each water closet)
• One (1) Ceramic type urinal
• Two (2) Ceramic type wash hand basin
3.25.6.5 TEA ROOMS
There shall be two tea rooms.
3.25.6.5.1 DIRTY TEA ROOM
There shall be a dirty tea room at the starboard side Main deck, Level 1 that shall include but
not be limited to the following:
• Sufficient seating benches
• Two (2) Table
• One (1) Stainless Steel table with bottom cupboard
• One (1) Stainless Steel single tier overhead rack
• One (1)2 Bowl juice dispenser
• One (1) Electric hot water boiler
• One (1) Electric type hot & cold-water dispenser
• One (1) Refrigerator (300 - 350 Litre approximate)

PAGE 273 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.5.2 CLEAN TEA ROOM

There shall be a clean tea room at the Starboard side at Level 5 that shall include but not be
limited to the following:
• One (1) Seating bench
• One (1) Stainless Steel table with bottom cupboard
• One (1) Stainless Steel single tier overhead rack
• One (1) 2 Bowl juice dispenser
• One (1) Electric type hot water boiler
• One (1) Electric type hot & cold water dispenser
• One (1) Refrigerator (300 - 350 Litre approximate)
3.25.6.6 MISCALANEOUS SERVICE
A chute (for Laundry service) shall be provided, between the laundry on level 2 with access
points at Levels, two, three, and four.

3.25.6.7 CABINS
On Level 2 there shall be:
• Nine (9) 4-Man Cabin with Private toilet/wet room
• Two (2) 2-Man Cabin with shared toilet/wet room
On Level 3 there shall be:
• Ten (10) 1-Man Cabin with Private toilet/wet room
• Sixteen (16) 2-Man Cabin with shared toilet/wet room
• Six (6) 2-man cabins with private toilet/wet room
On Level 4 there shall be:
• Ten (10) 4-Man Cabin with Private toilet/wet room
• Two (2) 2-Man Cabin with shared toilet/wet room
3.25.6.7.1 One (1) 2-man cabins with private toilet/wet room
The toilet/wet rooms shall be arranged so as to provide access to the main WC and wet room
plumbing for maintenance purposes. Any hatches in the corridor bulkheads provided for the
purpose shall be flush fitting with a securing latch.
The toilet/wet room facilities shall be consistent between shared and personal and shall
include, but not be limited to:
• One (1) Ceramic type European water closet
• One (1) Stainless Steel - Bidet Pressurized Spray Gun with Holder Hose (one (1) near
each water closet)
• One (1) Shower cubicle with hot and cold mixer tap
• One (1) Ceramic type wash hand basin
• Utility holder (i.e. Holder for paper towels, towels, shower soap, wash soap, etc.)
3.25.6.7.2 TWO MAN CABINS
Each 2-man cabin shall include but not be limited to, the following:
• Two (2) metal bunk beds one above the other, both with safety rails
• Two (2) lockable drawers under the bottom bunk
• One (1) Fixed metal ladder for top bunk access
• Two (2) 2 tier lockable metal lockers
• Two (2) metal emergency equipment lockers – open or without locking capability
• One (1) Writing table with two (2) lockable drawers
• One (1) Book shelf

PAGE 274 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• One (1) Ergonomic Swivel type heavy duty chair

• One (1) 32” Remote controlled LED’ television on articulated type wall bracket
• One (1) Desk light
• One (1) Bunk light per bunk
• One (1) Bunk shelf
3.25.6.7.3 ONE MAN CABINS
Each 1-man cabin shall include but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) metal bunk bed with safety rail
• Two (2) lockable drawers under bunk
• One (1), 2-tier lockable metal locker
• One (1) metal emergency equipment locker – open or without locking capability
• One (1) Writing table with two lockable drawers
• One (1) Book shelf
• One (1) Ergonomic Swivel type heavy duty chair
• One (1) 32” Remote controlled LED’ television on articulated type wall bracket
• One (1) Desk light
• One (1) Bed light
• One (1) Bed shelf
3.25.6.8 CHANGE ROOMS
There shall be two change rooms at Starboard side of the LQ on Level 2 and Level 3. There
shall be a sloping top to all lockers to prevent the collection of dust and debris and to prevent
boots and coveralls from being placed on top of the lockers. A total of 120 metal offshore
lockers shall be provided in addition to urinals, toilets, shower, wash basins and outfitted with
double coat hooks and wooden benches.

3.25.6.9 RECREATION ROOM

Recreation Room inside the Accommodation shall be designed and outfitted for recreational
activities and rest and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) 60’’ Remote controlled LED television complete with surround sound system
• One (1) Home theatre music system
• One (1) Projector with screen
• Sixteen (16) Recreation type easy chair
• Eight (8) Chairs with arm rests
• Two (2) Round tables for 4 persons
• One (1) Bulkhead table/cabinet
• One (1) 4-Seater sofa
3.25.6.10 LAUNDRY ROOM
A Laundry Room shall be located on the Starboard side of Level 2 and shall include, but not
be limited to, the following:
• Four (4) Heavy duty marine washing machine – 18Kg capacity
• Four (4) Heavy duty marine dryer – 18 Kg capacity
• One (1) Stainless Steel 316L Gr. Janitor sink
• One (1) Stainless Steel 304 Gr. Trolley for cloth movement
• One (1) Laundry chute with access from level – II, III, & IV
• One (1) Adjustable height work bench

PAGE 275 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.10.1 WASHING MACHINES

Washing machines shall be installed so that the loading doors are at a working height with all
round access for cleaning and maintenance of the units.
The washing machines shall have bulk soap and fabric softener dispensers with automatic
feed to the machines.
Each washing machine shall incorporate lint and debris filter. There shall be a master drain
discharge simplex strainer located in the laundry drain line that is easily accessed for regular
cleaning.
The machines shall be mounted on Stainless-steel foundations.
3.25.6.10.2 DRYERS
Dryers shall be installed so that the loading doors are at a working height with all round access
for cleaning and maintenance of the units.
Each Dryer shall have a separate exhaust duct, feeding directly into a dedicated duct to the
outside and shall be not connected to the main HVAC/Ventilation system.
Each machine exhaust duct shall incorporate a check valve, close to the machine, to prevent
backflow to dryers that are not in use. The ducting shall be run as straight as possible with
access hatches for easy cleaning of the lint filters and ducting.
There shall be sufficient amount of well vented shelving inside the laundry room to allow for
cooling down of hot clothing removed from the dryers.

3.25.6.11 LINEN AND JANITOR ROOMS

Linen Stores and Janitor rooms shall be provided at levels 2, 3, and 4. Each Janitor room
shall include a low level hot and cold water tap for the filling of buckets.

3.25.6.12 AHU ROOMS

AHU rooms shall be provided to accommodate the HVAC AHUs, all associated trunking and
control panels. The AHUs are described in the HVAC section of this CTS.

3.25.6.13 GYMNASIUM
A Gymnasium shall be located on the Starboard side of Level 3. A suitable bulkhead of the
gymnasium shall be fully mirrored. The gymnasium equipment shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
• Two (2) Running Machine (electric)
• Two (2) Exercise bike
• One (1) Multi Gym
• One (1) set dumbbells (full range of weights)
• One (1) dumbbells storage rack
• One (1) set free weights (full range of weights)
• Weight Lifting Bench
• Weight Storage Rack
• One (1) DVD micro music system
• One (1) 42’’ Remote controlled LED television with wall bracket and Surround sound
system
• One (1) Electric type hot & cold-water dispenser
3.25.6.14 GALLEY
A galley shall be provided, suitably designed and outfitted so as to cater for 120 POB.

PAGE 276 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

All fixed galley equipment shall be of an ergonomic design. Deck supported galley equipment
shall be mounted on steel pads that are welded to the steel deck.
The galley shall have a separate scullery area for dishwashing activities and storage of
cutleries and crockery and both spaces shall be designed and arranged so as to assure the
necessary food hygiene standards are capable of being maintained.
The galley outfitting shall include but not be limited to the following electrical appliances:
• One (1) Marine Convection Oven
• One (1) Marine Convection Steamer
• One (1) Marine Cooking Range, with 3 Rectangular Hot Plates
• One (1) Marine Cooking Range Griddle top
• One (1) Marine Deep Fryer
• One (1) Bain Marie
• One (1) Food Waste Disposal Unit with Pre-Rinse
• One (1) CLASS approved Deep Fat Fryer
• One (1) Dough mixer
• One (1) Dish Washer
• One (1) Food Mixture
• One (1) Meat Slicer
• One (1) Meat Tenderizer
• One (1) Potato Peeler
• One (1) Can Opener
• One (1) Refrigerator
• One (1) Freezer
• One (1) Defrost cabinet
• UV dish sterilizer
Additional Provisions shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) Stainless Steel Gr. 304 Galley hood
• One (1) Stainless Steel dough preparation table
• One (1) Stainless Steel Gr. 316L table with sinks and cupboards / racks
• One (1) Stainless Steel Gr. 316L overhead shelf
• One (1) potable water wash-down hosereel
• One (1) Stainless Steel 3 bin disposal unit
• One (1) Grease trap, readily removable for cleaning, to prevent drainage system
contamination
• Suitable and Sufficient number of storage racks and cabinets

The Galley Fire Protection shall include but not be limited to the following:
• The galley range and deep fate fryer hood connected to a continuous exhaust leading
to outside of the LQ;
• Exhaust duct grease trap, readily removable for cleaning
• Fire damper located in the galley end of the exhaust duct that shall be automatically
and remotely operated
• Remotely operated fire damper located in the exhaust end of the duct
• arrangements, operable from within the galley, for shutting off the exhaust fans
• gaseous fixed firefighting systems within the exhaust duct
• wet chemical fixed firefighting system to cover the range and deep fat fryer
• SOLAS compliant fire shutters provided between the galley and the mess room.
The fire shutters and Fixed Fire Fighting systems are described in the relevant sections of this
CTS.

PAGE 277 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.15 DEDICATED GALLEY WASHROOM

There shall be a fully outfitted, dedicated, washroom provided for the catering staff so as to
avoid contamination of the living quarters with foodstuffs and to assure the necessary food
hygiene standards are maintained within in the galley areas. The washroom shall include but
not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) Ceramic type European water closet
• One (1) Ceramic type wash hand basin
• One (1) Electric hand dryer
The WC and washing areas shall be segregated within the space

3.25.6.16 MESSROOM
A mess room shall be provided, suitably designed and outfitted so as to cater for at maximum
POB of 120 and 62 personnel at any one time. The Mess Room shall be designed and
arranged so as to assure the necessary food hygiene standards are capable of being
maintained.
All equipment not permanently fixed by design shall be capable of being easily and quickly
readily sea fastened and including tables and chairs.
The Mess Room outfitting shall include but not be limited to the following electrical appliances:
• One (1) Refrigerated Display Cabinet
• One (1) Milk Dispenser
• One (1) Ice Cream Machine
• One (1) Refrigerator with glass door
• One (1) Salad Bar
• One (1) Ice Maker
• Two (2) Juice Dispenser
• Two (2) Hot Water Boiler
• Two (2) Coffee Brewer
• Two (2) Bread Toaster
• Two (2) Microwave Oven
• Two (2) Plate Warmer, Mobile Self Levelling Cabinets
• Four (4) 60’’Remote LED television with wall brackets

Additional Provisions shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) Stainless Steel Gr. 316L table with cupboards
• One (1) Stainless Steel 3 bin disposal unit
• Five (5) 10 place ‘ship type’ mess room table c/w edge retention for adverse sea states
• Three (3) 4 place ‘ship type’ mess room table c/w edge retention for adverse sea states
• Sixty-two (62) Chairs
• One (1) Stainless Steel Gr. 316L Island with cupboards either side
• One (1) Stainless Steel Gr. 316L waste receptacle – 3-hole type
• Four (4) 60’’Remote LED television with wall brackets
3.25.6.17 CAMP BOSS OFFICE
The camp Boss Office shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Ergonomic workstation chair
• Desk with lockable drawers
• Lockable 4 tier metal filing cabinet

PAGE 278 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.18 HELICOPTER WAITING ROOM

A helicopter waiting room shall be provided on the Port side of Level 4 of the accommodation
that shall be suitably outfitted so as to primarily, operate efficiently as the helicopter waiting
room but to also be used as a recreational area when not in use for the primary purpose.
The outfitting of the helicopter waiting room shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• One (1) 60’’ Remote controlled LED television with wall bracket and surround sound
system
• One (1) Heli briefing provision (DVD player etc.)
• One (1) Home theatre music system
• One (1) Projector with screen
• One (12) Training room chair
• One (1) Office chair with arm rest
• One (1) table with counter top
• One (1) Electronic heavy-duty weighing scales for personnel and luggage
• One (1) Baggage search table
3.25.6.19 CONFERENCE ROOM
There shall be a Conference room provided on the Starboard side of level 4 and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) Conference table with 16 chairs
• One (1) 60’’ remote controlled LED television with wall bracket and surround sound
system
• One (1) Projector with screen
3.25.6.20 TRAINING ROOM
There shall be a Training Room provided on the Starboard side of level 4 and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following features:
• Fifteen (15) Training room chairs
• One (1) 60’’ Remote controlled LED television with wall bracket
• One (1) Projector with screen
• Two (2) storage cabinet
3.25.6.21 PRAYER ROOM
There shall be a Prayer Room provided on the Starboard side of level 4 to accommodate 20
persons and shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Twenty (20) Prayer mats
• One (1) Shoe rack suitable for 20 pairs of shoes
3.25.6.22 FOOTWASH ROOM
There shall be a Foot Wash Room provided on the Starboard side of level 4 and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following features:
• One (1) Hot water supply
• One (1) Cold-water supply
• One (1) Foot wash tray
3.25.6.23 COMPUTER ROOM/PHONE AREA
There shall be a dedicated and separate Telephone and Computer Area provided inside the
quiet area of the accommodation and which shall include, but not be limited to, the following
features:

PAGE 279 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Four (3) Telephones in sound proof booth

3.25.6.24 IT ROOM
There shall be an Information technology (IT) room provided on the Port side of level 5 for the
installation of the VESSEL IT cabinets.

3.25.6.25 OFFICES
There shall be a suitable and sufficient number of offices provided on Level 5 to meet the
BUYER and END USER requirements. The provision of offices shall include but not be limited
to, the following:
• One (1) OIM/Toolpusher
• One (1) Company Men
• One (1) Drilling Engineer and Geologist
• Three (3) unallocated offices to be agreed with BUYER
3.25.6.25.1 OIM OFFICE/TOOLPUSHER
To include, but not be limited to:
• Two (2) Ergonomic workstation chairs
• One (1) 2-seater settee
• Wrap around Workstation/Desk with lockable drawers
• Two (2) Lockable 4-tier metal filing cabinet
• One (1) BOP control panel
• One (1) Diverter control panel
• One (1) Choke and Kill control panel
• One (1) Drilling Information Recording display
• One (1) CCTV screen
• One (1) CCTV Control Panel
3.25.6.25.2 COMPANY MAN OFFICE
To include, but not be limited to:
• Two (2) desks
• Two (2) Filing shelves
• Three (3) Ergonomic workstation chair
• Two (2) Lockable 4-tier metal filing cabinet
• One (1) Drilling Information Recording display
3.25.6.25.3 DRILLING ENGINEER OFFICE
To include, but not be limited to:
• Two (2) desks
• Two (2) Filing shelves
• Three (3) Ergonomic workstation chair
• Two (2) Lockable 4 tier metal filing cabinet
• One (1) Drilling Information Recording display
3.25.6.25.4 UNALLOCATED OFFICE
To include, but not be limited to:
• Two (2) Bulkhead end desks
• Two (2) Ergonomic workstation chair
• Two (2) Lockable 4-tier metal filing cabinet

PAGE 280 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

3.25.6.25.5 ARCHIVE ROOM

There shall be a suitable and sufficient Archive Room provided on the Starboard side of level
5. The archive room shall be capable of storing the VESSEL Technical library and shall
include but not be limited to the following features:
• Filing Cabinets for suspension files
• Large format cabinets for the storage of drawings up to and including A0
• Bookcases
• Two (2) workstations to access electronic library
3.25.6.26 CENTRAL CONTROL ROOM & RADIO ROOM
There shall be a Central Control Room & Radio Room provided on the centreline of the
VESSEL. The Control and & Radio room shall include but not be limited to; the following
features:
• Five (5) Ergonomic Office chairs with arm rest
• One (1) Jacking/Skidding Console
• Three (3) Jacking Console Chair
• One (1) Radio Communications Console
• One )1) Meteorological Equipment
• One (1) Navigation and Helideck Lighting panel
• One (1) Gyro Compass
• One (1) GMDSS Panel
• Three (3) Tables
• One (1) Chart Table
• Three (3) Lockable 3-tier filing Cabinets
• One (1) Fire and Gas Panel
• One (1) PA/GA Panel
• One (1) IMCS Panel
The Central Control Room shall be designed and furnished as required to meet the various
sections in which the Central control Room is referred to throughout this CTS.

3.25.7 REFRIGERATED SPACES

There shall be two (2) air cooled refrigeration plants provide, one duty and one standby.
Each plant shall utilize an environmentally friendly refrigerant as cooling medium and operated
through direct expansion.
There shall be:
• One (1) chiller room
• One (1) freezer room
• One (1) dry store room
All 3 spaces shall be provided on Level 4 and adjacent to the Galley.
The refrigeration systems shall ensure that the refrigerated spaces are capable of being
cooled to the design operating temperatures in the table below within 18 hours of initiation,
and the temperature maintained thereafter.
Space Design operating temperature
Freezer Minus (-) 20 deg C to minus (-) 25 deg C
Chiller Room Plus (+) 2 deg C to Plus (+) 4 deg C
Dry Store Plus (+)13 deg C to Plus (+) 15 deg C

PAGE 281 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Refrigerating machinery shall be sized to provide a 15 % contingency factor above and above
the calculated sizing of the system.

3.25.7.1 FREEZER ROOM

Freezer room shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Bulkheads ceilings and floors to be insulated with approx. 100 mm polyurethane foam
filled panels including dividing walls
• Insulation panels shall meet at least the maximum required thermal conductivity rating
• Panels to be assembled using industry standard cam lock system.
• Walls and ceiling panels to be finished & backed with 0.8mm grade 316 stainless-steel
crimped plate with hairline brush finish
• Corners to be finished with same grade stainless steel sealed angle type covers
• Floor to wall joint shall have 150 mm upstand.
• Floor panel of 150 mm thick insulated panels re-in forced with wooden spacers,
covered with 12 mm WBP plywood, including vapor seal, and finished with stainless
steel Gr. 316L non-slip plate
• Two (2) Evaporators, one (1) duty & one (1) standby
• Drains to outside space with appropriate heaters
• Lockable, hinged and heated door with clear opening size 900 mm x 1900 mm in Gr.
316L SS finish, with 50 mm sill, with all heavy-duty hardware
• Door shall be operable from internally as well as externally and be provided with an
escape function
• Space to be provided with a ‘man trapped’ alarm call point within the freezer with
audible alarm, flashing beacon and connected to IMCS/Control Room.
• Pressure relief port with heater
• Easily removable heavy-duty plastic strip curtain
• low heat emission lighting with one (1) light on constantly and the others activated by
door opening and closing
• Approved design Stainless-steel 316 shelving with fall prevention bars and means of
securing to floor, bulkhead or deckhead as required
• Easily visible 150mm temperature gauges fitted outside each compartment.
3.25.7.2 CHILLER ROOM
Chiller room shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Bulkheads ceilings and floors to be insulated with approx. 100 mm polyurethane foam
filled panels including dividing bulkheads
• Insulation panels shall meet at least the maximum required thermal conductivity rating
• Panels to be assembled using industry standard cam lock system.
• Walls and ceiling panels to be finished & backed with 0.8mm grade 316 stainless-steel
crimped plate with hairline brush finish
• Corners to be finished with same grade stainless steel sealed angle type covers. Floor
to wall joint covers to have 150 mm upstand
• Floor panel of 100 mm thick insulated panels re-in forced with wooden spacers,
covered with 12 mm WBP plywood, including vapor seal and finished with stainless-
steel Gr. 316L non-slip plate
• Two (2) Evaporators, one (1) duty & one (1) standby
• Drains to outside space
• Lockable, hinged door with clear opening size 900 mm x 1900 mm in Gr. 316L SS
finish, with 50 mm sill, with all heavy-duty hardware
• Pressure relief port with heater
• Door shall be operable from internally as well as externally and be provided with an
escape function.

PAGE 282 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Easily removable heavy-duty plastic strip curtain

• Equipped with low heat emission lighting
• Approved design Stainless-steel 316 shelving with fall prevention bars and means of
securing to floor, bulkhead or deckhead as required
• Easily visible 150mm temperature gauges fitted outside each compartment
3.25.7.3 DRY STORE
The Dry Store room shall include, but not be limited to, the following features:
• Insulated with suitable thermal insulation and shall be designed fabricated and
furnished to meet all requirements shown in contract general arrangement drawing
• Walls and ceiling panels to be finished with 0.8mm grade 316 stainless-steel crimped
plate with hairline brush finish
• Appropriately insulated door.
• Two (2) Evaporators, one (1) duty & one (1) standby
• Approved design Stainless-steel 316 shelving with fall prevention bars and means of
securing to floor, bulkhead or deckhead as required
• Easily visible 150mm temperature gauges fitted outside each compartment
3.25.7.4 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
3.25.7.4.1 Refrigeration Control Panel
The entire Refrigeration System shall include a centralized control panel located close to the
refrigerated spaces.
The Control panel shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Temperature controllers
• Audible alarms
• Change over switch
• Alarm panel to include;
• Lights for Run, Stand by and Trip
• Audible Alarm
• Door Open Alarm
• Room temperature high: (temperature probes to be positioned away from evaporator
to reduce nuisance alarms during defrost cycle
• Room temperature low
• Compressor failure
• High pressure
• Low pressure
• Freezer Trapped Man alarm
3.25.7.4.2 Evaporators
Each refrigerated space shall be equipped with two (2) x DX evaporators to provide 100%
redundancy. Evaporators shall meet CLASS requirements and components shall be of
materials and specification such that they are not degraded by the environmental conditions
of the area in which they are installed. Features of the evaporators shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
• Copper/ Copper coils
• Low noise fans & motors
• Be of a ceiling hung type
• Appropriate defrost heaters
• Drain pan heaters
• Expansion valves

PAGE 283 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Solenoid valves and shut off valves for operation and change over requirements.
3.25.7.4.3 CONDENSERS
The refrigeration system shall include two (2) 100 % direct expansion system condensing units
The Condensers shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Built on a single skid
• Be sized so as to provide 15 % contingency factor over and above the calculated sizing
of the system
• Located inside well-ventilated stainless-steel cabinets
• Condensers shall meet CLASS requirements and components shall be of materials
and specification such that they are not degraded by the environmental conditions of
the area in which they are installed
• Condenser coils to be Copper/Copper with factory applied protective coating
• Control panel with all relevant pressure switches compound gauges etc. housed in a
stainless-steel control box with Perspex window to allow gauges to be seen without
opening the panel
• Compressors shall be mounted on rubber anti vibration feet with vibration eliminators
on connecting piping
• Each compressor shall be equipped an oil level sight glass, and have low oil pressure,
high discharge pressure, and low suction pressure protection
• All service valves for changeover, filter dryer changes, and maintenance etc. shall be
provided as part of the condenser skid
• Pressure relieve valves to be provided at the correct rating for the operating pressures
with outlet piped to a safe location below condenser
3.25.7.4.4 REFRIGERATION PIPING AND CLADDING
The refrigerant piping for the Chiller and Freezer equipment shall be of copper ASTM B280
and suitable for the refrigerant working pressure under consideration.
The refrigeration suction and liquid line pipes shall be provided with 12.5 mm thick closed cell
vapor sealed elastomeric insulation.
Low capacity oil traps shall be provided on evaporator outlets to suction line and suction risers
for low load oil return.
Piping inside the refrigerated spaces shall be boxed in with same grade stainless-steel as the
panel finish.
Exposed Refrigerant pipes subject to possible damage shall be provided with a suitable
structural protection against accidental damages.
Piping running outside shall be Stainless-steel clad.
Penetrations through cold room walls shall incorporate Roxtec penetration pieces.

3.25.8 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

3.25.8.1 TELEVISION SYSTEM

The VESSEL shall be provided with an IP based Entertainment System utilizing the latest
proven technology, for receiving and distributing satellite TV, radio signals, and on-board
generated audio and video content.
The Entertainment system shall consist of centralized entertainment system cabinets and
extensive LAN infrastructure for distribution. A virtual LAN shall be established over the
VESSEL’s Local Area Network infrastructure using standard Ethernet (Cat-6) cable to
distribute the entertainment system signals.
The Entertainment System shall include, but not be limited to, the following major components:

PAGE 284 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Stabilized Satellite TV Antenna(s) designed for marine and offshore use providing
complete 360° coverage independent of VESSEL orientation, complete with Cables
• Entertainment System Cabinet, located at Level V IT room, which houses Receivers,
Modulators, Encoders, Decoders, IPTV Switches, Video-On-Demand (VOD) servers,
patch panels, PDU etc.
• Two (2) x Multifunction Blue ray / DVD / CD player
• Set Top Box or inbuilt IPTV capabilities in the supplied TV sets, with Remote Control
Unit at the user end
• The VESSEL Entertainment System major functions shall include, but not be limited
to;
• Distribution of live free to air and subscription-based satellite programs as well as
recorded programs to all cabins, offices, recreation areas, mess room etc. as defined
in the room detail specification sections
• Select programs and Channels from local audio and video sources including network
PCs, Multifunction Blue ray / DVD / CD player, VESSEL CCTV system and Drilling
information and management system
• Allow configuration from system cabinet HMI by authorized user (i.e. to add, remove
or change system components)
• Provide a graphical user interface that enable users to access Electronic Program
Guide, content navigation, VOD servers etc.
• Automatic muting capability when general alarm or announcements are broadcast
3.25.8.2 ENTERTAINMENT RADIO SYSTEM
Local FM & AM radio signals shall also be distributed over the LAN as part of the entertainment
Television system described in section 3.25.8.1.

3.25.9 TOILET & SHOWER MODULES

For ease of installation, prefabricated modular "wet units” with toilets and showers shall be
furnished and installed in the accommodations as shown on the Contract Drawings. The unit’s
shall be of high marine grade and quality and piping shall be of CLASS approved material
such as CPVC, SS 316L or Copper The units shall meet the details outlined in the applicable
sections of this Specification. Two-man cabins shall share toilet & shower modules with
adjacent cabin with separate door openings to each cabin. 4-man cabins shall be supplied
with one toilet & shower module per cabin as the single man cabins.

PAGE 285 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 4 – INSPECTIONS, TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND TRIALS

4.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Section is to ensure that there is no misconception, or doubt, with regard
to the scope, the activities, or the responsibility, for the successful completion of Inspection,
Testing, Commissioning and Trials, associated with the delivery of the VESSEL.
This Section is intended as an overarching reference which shall be supported by the
subordinate detailed documents and procedures that are referenced and listed within it. All
such supporting and subordinate documents and procedures shall be prepared by BUILDER
and reviewed and approved by the BUYER. The minimum requirements for such subordinate
procedures are tabulated in the sub-sections below. Within ninety (90) days, following the
Effective date of the Contract, BUILDER shall develop all detailed supporting and subordinate
documents and procedures referenced and required as per the Specification and submit to
BUYER for review and approval. For the avoidance of doubt no inspection testing
commissioning or trial shall take place without a detailed procedure that has been reviewed
and approved by the BUYER in line with the Section.

4.2 SCOPE
The scope of this section and the subordinate procedures is all elements of the VESSEL.
Those elements could be BUILDER Furnished Equipment (BFE), Third-Party Furnished
Equipment or Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE). In this context equipment means
equipment and materials. All supply shall be in accordance with the Specification.
The VESSEL materials and equipment covered by this procedure are derived from a number
of sources including but not limited to:
• Design Documentation
• Other sections within this Contract Technical Specification
• Project Master Equipment List (MEL)
• BUYER requirements

4.3 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

Requirements for Inspection, Testing, Commissioning and Trials of various types also stem
from a number of differing sources including Statutory Requirements, Class Requirements,
BFE, OFE and BUYER specific requirements.
Such 'requirements' commence soon after contract award with the need for appraisal and
surveillance of Vendors and Suppliers. Vendors and Suppliers include those for BFE, Third--
Party and OFE. The need for appraisal and Surveillance shall be to the BUYER satisfaction
and can include new and existing BUILDER vendors and suppliers.
Requirements relating to Inspection, Testing, Commissioning and Trials span all stages of the
project i.e. Construction, Mechanical Completion, Commissioning, and on to Acceptance
Testing and Trials.
The flowchart in Section 4.4 illustrates the key project activities from which the requirements
stem and the responsibility for their completion.
In order to ensure that the expectations of the BUILDER’s and BUYER’s are clearly
established and monitored with regard to the key performance requirements of each project
stage, including but not limited to, HSE, Quality, Schedule and Budget, only BUYER Approved'
controlling procedures shall be used throughout the project. Where there is a need to 'bridge'
between BUILDER and BUYER procedures, then a specific 'bridging document' shall be jointly
developed and 'Approved by the BUYER’.

PAGE 286 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Where there is a joint requirement for controlling procedures then references to the BUYER
equivalent of the BUILDER procedures shall be referenced in the documentation tables within
the following subsections.

4.3.1 VENDOR/SUPPLIER SELECTION AND SURVEILLANCE

BUILDER and BUYER have their own vendors and suppliers for BFE and OFE respectively.
In order to ensure that such vendors and suppliers meet the expectations of the BUILDER and
BUYER with regard to key performance requirements each shall have ‘BUYER Approved'
controlling procedures incorporating the requirements stipulated in Table 4.3.1 below as a
minimum.

Document Type
Vendor Selection and Surveillance
Minimum aspects to be covered in the BUILDER documentation
1) Surveillance Personnel Organization
2) Surveillance Personnel Competence
3) Mandatory BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
4) Optional BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
5) Hold Point and Call Out methodology
6) New Supplier Evaluation Process
7) Subsequent Surveillance Processes applicable to both New and Existing
Vendors/Suppliers to include as a minimum:
a) Identification Vendors and Suppliers requiring surveillance
b) Selection criteria and type of surveillance required e.g. continuous, periodic, FAT
etc.
c) Surveillance Schedule
d) Surveillance audit checklists
e) Surveillance audit reporting
f) Identifying, documenting and addressing Non-Conformance issues
BUILDER Documents Applicable BUYER Documents
Number- Name Number- Name
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxx-xxxx-xx-xx- Surveillance Plan
xxx
Table 4.3.1 Vendor/Supplier Surveillance Documents

4.3.2 CONSTRUCTION
Construction is the sole responsibility of the BUILDER and is considered to be the phase of
the project between 'first steel' and the Mechanical Completion (MC) of areas and/or systems
in accordance with a Construction Plan and Integrated Project Schedule. Construction
activities cover all disciplines including Structural, Mechanical, Piping, Electrical,
Instrumentation, Architectural, Heating and Ventilation, and any remaining Miscellaneous
Elements.
In order to ensure construction activities are completed in accordance with the HSE, Quality,
Schedule and Budget requirements the BUILDER shall have 'BUYER approved' controlling
procedures incorporating the minimum requirements stipulated in Table 4.3.2 below.

Document Type
Construction

PAGE 287 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Minimum aspects to be covered in the BUILDER documents

1) A Construction Plan that incorporates or references subordinate documentation that
requires Inspection and Test Plans and Procedures covering all disciplines shall include
as a minimum:
a) Governing Rules, Regulations, Codes and Standards
b) Hold Point and Call Out procedures
c) Material Specification and Test Certification
d) Non-Destructive Examination Plans (NDE)
e) Non-Destructive Testing Plans (NDT)
f) Load Testing extent and methodology
g) Leak Testing extent and methodology
h) Pressure Testing extent and methodology
i) Surface preparation and coating inspections and checks
j) Dimensional Checking extent and methodology
k) Class Inspection and test requirements
l) Regulatory Inspection and test requirements
m) Preservation following Construction
BUILDER Documents Applicable BUYER Documents
Number- Name Number- Name
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
Table 4.3.2 Construction Inspection and Test Documents

4.3.3 MECHANICAL COMPLETION

Mechanical Completion is the verification, by inspecting, testing, and subsequent
documenting, that equipment installation and construction activities conform to, and are
fabricated and installed, in accordance with approved project drawings, governing rules and,
regulations, design codes, standards, and specifications.
Mechanical Completion shall be deemed to have been achieved when successful inspection
and testing of workmanship and equipment has been verified and documented. Mechanical
Completion shall be confirmed on a discipline by discipline basis.
As with Construction, Mechanical Completion encompasses all disciplines and there is a
natural overlap. As a consequence, some of the controlling documentation related to
Construction is applicable to elements of the Mechanical Completion process and vice versa.
Successful Mechanical Completion is however a definitive point in the delivery of a system i.e.
the point at which Construction is verified as having been completed, with the exception of
Punch List Items, and the point at which preparation for Commissioning begins, i.e. Pre-
Commissioning.
The BUILDER has the primary responsibility with regard to equipment installation be that BFE,
Third-Party or OFE. However, the BUYER shall have a responsibility to verify that MC is
indeed complete with respect to not only OFE Equipment and Systems but also MC
requirements for BFE and Third-Party Equipment and Systems.
The BUYER will be required to confirm acceptance of equipment and system Mechanical
Completion status prior to any Pre-Commissioning activities being undertaken on the system.
In order to ensure Mechanical Completion activities are completed in accordance with the
HSE, Quality, Schedule and Budget requirements the BUILDER shall have ‘BUYER approved'

PAGE 288 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

controlling procedures incorporating the minimum requirements stipulated in Table 4.3.3

below.
Document Type
Mechanical Completion
Minimum aspects to be covered in the BUILDER documentation
1) A Mechanical Completion procedure covering:
a) The overall MC Processes
b) Mandatory BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
c) Optional BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
d) Punch listing requirements and methodology
e) Any Preservation requirements between MC and Commissioning
2) Discipline Inspection and Test Procedures (ITP) / Inspection and Test Record (ITR)
including:
a) Structural
i) Material certification
ii) Welding Controls
iii) Visual inspection
iv) Dimensional Control
v) Non-Destructive Examination Plans (NDE)
vi) Non-Destructive Testing Plans (NDT)Welding
vii) Preservation
b) Mechanical
i) Visual inspections
ii) Internal inspection of tanks and pressure vessels
iii) Alignment
iv) Load testing of lifting accessories (i.e. Padeyes, Trolley Beams)
v) Load testing of lifting appliances (i.e. Cranes, Hoists, Lifts)
vi) Flushing with appropriate medium (where applicable)
vii) Bolt tensioning
viii) Dimension control
ix) Preservation
c) Piping
i) NDE/NDT carried out
ii) Line Check
iii) Flushing of piping with appropriate medium (Where Applicable)
iv) Chemical cleaning (for applicable systems) and testing of piping
v) Post Test Drying of pipework
vi) Reinstatement of all items after testing
vii) Final inspection of pipework
viii) Test packs (ISO's and P&ID's showing the extent of each pressure test)
ix) Bolt tensioning
x) Pipe supports
xi) Insulation
xii) Pipe Color Coding (Service and Flow direction)
xiii) Preservation
d) Electrical
i) Visual inspections
ii) Insulation, Resistance and continuity testing of cables
iii) Insulation testing of generators, transformers and motors, bus, panels,
distribution boards etc.
iv) Earth checks
v) Static check of switches and control devices
vi) Battery preparations

PAGE 289 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

vii) Lighting and small power socket checks

viii) Equipment Approvals
ix) Preservation
x) Instrumentation
xi) Visual inspections
xii) Calibration of instruments
xiii) Insulation and continuity testing
xiv) Cleaning, flushing, pressure and leak testing of instrument tubing.
xv) Flushing of instrument tubing with appropriate medium (Where Applicable)
xvi) Preservation
e) Architectural
i) Visual inspections
ii) Insulation
iii) Surface preparation and Coatings
iv) Fire proofing
v) Doors
vi) Wet Units.
vii) Preservation
f) Heating and Ventilation
i) Visual inspection for complete and correct installation.
ii) Cleaning of ductwork.
iii) Leak testing of ductwork.
iv) color coding (Flow directions, Duct coding etc.)
v) Insulation
vi) Alignment checks.
vii) Mechanical function checks of equipment.
viii) Flow Vacuum testing
ix) Flushing with appropriate medium (Where applicable)
x) Preservation
3) An MC Dossier for each system for handover to the Commissioning Group shall
include as minimum:
a) Description of the Area or System Limits
b) Satisfactorily completed ITRs for each discipline included within the area or system
limits
c) Outstanding Punch List Items
d) Final Mechanical Completion - Verification Certificate/Document covering the area
boundaries or system limits
e) Marked up 'As Built' drawings or in lieu As Built 'red lines'
BUILDER Documents Applicable BUYER Documents
Number- Name Number- Name
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ARO-R001-PL- Commissioning
CM-008 Plan
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
Table 4.3.3 Mechanical Completion Documents

4.3.4 PRE-COMMISSIONING
As there exists an overlap between Construction and Mechanical Completion, so exists an
overlap between Mechanical Completion and Commissioning, this area of overlap is
considered to be 'Pre-Commissioning'. As a consequence, some of the controlling
documentation related to Mechanical Completion is also applicable to elements of the Pre-
Commissioning process and vice versa.

PAGE 290 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

Pre-commissioning activities include various checks in, not only the de-energized state as at
MC, but also checks requiring the energization of systems and/or equipment in preparation for
Commissioning activities.
In order to safely transition from 'dead' systems to 'live' systems, and Pre-Commissioning, a
'Livening Up' procedure shall be implemented, including a Livening Up Notice (LUN), the
purpose of which is to make all necessary personnel aware of the forthcoming equipment
status change, i.e. from 'Dead' to 'Live' and therefore from an 'Inert' to 'Hazardous' state.
As Mechanical Completion is a definitive, and measurable point, in the system delivery so is
'Livening Up', or energization of equipment and systems. Making people aware prior to this
definitive point is critical and allows the raising of the necessary ‘Permit To Work’ and the
implementation of 'Risk Reducing Measures’ appropriate to the system/sub system, the form
of energization in question, and the magnitude of risk associated with it.
In order to ensure Pre-Commissioning is completed in accordance with the HSE, Quality,
Schedule and Budget requirements the BUILDER shall have 'BUYER approved' controlling
procedures incorporating the minimum requirements stipulated in Table 4.3.4 below.

Document Type
Pre-Commissioning
Minimum aspects to be covered in the BUILDER documentation
1) A Pre-Commissioning procedure covering;
2) Mandatory BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
3) Optional BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
4) The 'Livening Up' Process and Control
5) Link with the Permit To Work System
6) Punch listing requirements and methodology
7) Discipline Function Test Procedures (FTP) / Function Test Record (FTR) including:
a) Instrument loop checks/calibrations
b) Uncoupled motor runs
c) Motor direction checks
d) Adjustment of control, alarm and shutdown settings
e) Function testing of control systems.
f) Function testing of field instruments.
g) Relief Valve Calibration
h) Equipment checks and testing/recording prior to and when control panels are
energized
i) First fills (in accordance with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) specifications
approved by the BUYER)
j) Valve and Piping line ups and the installation of temporary strainers as necessary
BUILDER Documents Applicable BUYER Documents
Number- Name Number- Name
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ARO-R001-PL- Commissioning
CM-008 Plan
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
Table 4.3.4 Pre Commissioning Documents

PAGE 291 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

4.3.5 COMMISSIONING
Following any Pre-commissioning, the Commissioning of systems and sub systems shall be
completed in accordance with the Commissioning Procedures developed specifically for each
system, sub-system and included equipment.
The BUILDER has the responsibility for the commissioning of BFE, Third-Party suppliers have
the responsibility for the commissioning of their scope of supply in accordance with all
BUILDER and BUYER Management System policies, procedures and safeguards, and the
BUYER has the responsibility for the commissioning of OFE.
In order to ensure Commissioning is completed in accordance with the HSE, Quality, Schedule
and Budget requirements the BUILDER shall have 'BUYER approved' controlling procedures
incorporating the minimum requirements stipulated in Table 4.3.5 below.
Document Type
Commissioning
Minimum aspects to be covered in the BUILDER documentation
1) A Commissioning Plan including a requirement for commissioning procedures.
2) A Commissioning schedule for BFE, Third-Party and OFE with Hold Points for Class
representatives and other Interested Parties
3) Mandatory BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
4) Optional BUILDER/BUYER liaison/co-operation
5) Call Out requirements
6) System Acceptance and handover process
7) Complete BFE Systems/Sub-System/Equipment 'to be commissioned' List
8) Full list of Commissioning Procedures that covers the full scope of BFE supply
9) Commissioning Procedure for each entry on the Commissioning Procedures list. Each
commissioning Procedure shall include, but not be limited to, applicable documentation
from the following list:
a) Any Commissioning pre-requisites
b) Tool requirements
c) Temporary supplies, Load Banks, and Services required
d) HSE requirements
e) Step by step dynamic tests that are required to be completed in order to verify the
functionality and performance of equipment and systems. Where required Original
Equipment Manufacturers requirements shall be incorporated.
f) Hold Points for Class representatives and other Interested Parties
g) Any Preservation requirement required between Commissioning and further Testing
or Trials
10) Requirement to populate Commissioning Dossier for handover to the Operations Group,
via the BUYER, that shall include as minimum:
a) systems acceptance document/certificate
b) Mechanical Completion Dossier
c) Completed Commissioning Procedure
d) Equipment data package
BUILDER Documents Applicable BUYER Documents
Number- Name Number- Name
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ARO-R001-PL- Commissioning
CM-008 Plan
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
Table 4.3.5 Commissioning

PAGE 292 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

4.3.6 ADDITIONAL ACTIVITIES

The responsibility for Testing and Trials, post-Commissioning, is divided between the
BUILDER and the BUYER / BUYER Operations Group.

4.3.6.1 INCLINING TEST

The BUILDER is responsible for conducting an Inclining Test. The BUILDER shall prepare an
inclining test procedure and submit to the Class in sufficient time for the procedure to be
approved prior to the test. The approved procedure shall be submitted to the BUYER for
information prior to the scheduled test. In order to perform the inclining test the BUILDER
shall perform two pre requisite activities, a deadweight survey and weighing of the cantilever.
• The deadweight survey is an audit of all items which must be added, removed or
relocated on the VESSEL at the time of the incline test so that the observed condition
of the VESSEL can be adjusted to the lightship condition
• Weighing of the cantilever is conducted in order to use it as the 'calibrated weight' for
the Inclining Test
The inclining test shall then be performed by the BUILDER using the data gathered from the
deadweight survey and the weighing of the cantilever. The test shall be conducted in
accordance with the approved procedure and shall establish the necessary stability data
including lightship weight and centres of gravity for inclusion in project documentation.
The results of the test shall be submitted to the Class for approval. The approved lightship
weight and centres of gravity of the VESSEL will be used by the BUILDER to develop the trim
and stability calculations covering the full range of operating and transit conditions for inclusion
in the Rig Operating Manual.

4.3.6.2 SYSTEM INTEGRATION TEST (SIT), ENDURANCE TEST AND DOCK TRIALS
As part of the required TESTS and TRIALS, the BUILDER shall prepare a suitable and
sufficient System Integration Test (including Endurance Test) and Dock Trials procedure for
review and approval by the BUYER and Class representative. The procedure shall incorporate
the necessity to operate the full VESSEL’s power generation system and controls and all major
systems, whilst still alongside and prior to DELIVERY of the VESSEL.
In order to ensure that Endurance Testing and Dock trials are completed in accordance with
the HSE, Quality, Schedule and Budget requirements the BUILDER shall have BUYER and
Class approved' controlling procedures incorporating the minimum requirements stipulated in
Table 4.3.6 below.
Document Type
Integrated Acceptance and Endurance Testing
Minimum aspects to be covered in the BUILDER documentation
1) An Integrated Acceptance, Endurance and Dock Trials procedure to include, but not be
limited to:
a) Full Description of the Class requirements with references to the pertinent 'rules'
b) Scope of the testing to identify equipment to be included in the test
c) Testing Logic together with a Schedule of Testing for the various Systems and
Equipment
d) Sections for recording the results of the tests and trials
e) Sign off requirements and appropriate sign off sections
BUILDER Documents Applicable BUYER Documents
Number- Name Number- Name
x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A

PAGE 293 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A

x-xxx-xxxxxx-xxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx N/A N/A
Table 4.3.6 Integrated Acceptance Testing and Dock Trials

4.3.6.3 ADDITIONAL INTEGRATED ACCEPTANCE TEST

The BUYER shall be responsible for the completion of any additional integrated acceptance
testing that is required between BUYER and END USER. BUILDER shall support and facilitate
BUYER and END USER to conduct any additional integrated acceptance until that time that
the test is completed.

4.3.6.4 CLIENT DOCK TRIALS

The BUYER shall be responsible for the completion of any Dock Trials that are required over
and above those stipulated in section 4.3.6.2 above

4.3.6.5 CLIENT ACCEPTANCE TEST

The BUYER shall be responsible for the completion of any location-based Client Acceptance
testing that is required over and above that stipulated in section 4.3.6.2.
BUILDER shall support BUYER as required and at no additional cost, to host the Client
representatives and for BUYER to conduct the Client Acceptance Tests and inspections with
the Client representatives.

4.3.6.6 THERMOGRAPHIC TESTING

Official thermographic inspection of switchboards etc. shall be completed by the BUYER on
the first drilling location. Such tests are to be attended and witnessed by BUILDER’s
representative(s), at BUILDER’s expense. BUILDER shall develop and provide to BUYER for
review and approval a detailed testing procedure. Inspections and tests shall be carried out
by a BUYER’s approved independent Third-Party at BUILDER’s expense.

4.3.6.7 VIBRATION TESTING

Extensive vibration test shall be conducted during ENDURANCE TESTING and DOCK
TRIALS to determine the "base line" for the performance of all machinery and components.
All major equipment shall be tested and measured both with the VESSEL afloat and in the
elevated condition except that drilling equipment need not be tested in the afloat condition.
These tests shall be run when the machinery and components are operating at simulated full
rated capacity and design conditions so far as practicable. Additional readings may be
requested at various intermediate speeds of equipment that is not constant speed equipment,
i.e. equipment powered by internal combustion engines, DC motors, or multiple speed AC
motors.
Measurement of global and local vibrations during the endurance test in the accommodations,
drill floor, and machinery spaces shall be carried out by a BUYER’s approved independent
Third-Party at BUILDER’s expense.

4.3.6.8 NOISE TESTING

For the avoidance of doubt, the noise limitations outlined in this specification shall be valid for
normal drilling operations and not as simulated or during trials and commissioning of the
VESSEL. The noise level measurements shall be carried out under the intended operating
conditions of the systems during the trials and which are representative for normal operations
and under the following minimum conditions:

PAGE 294 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Machinery necessary for normal operation shall be live and running and average and
not minimum load
• Mechanical ventilation and air-conditioning equipment to be in normal operation
• All doors and windows of the room to be closed
• No intermittent or extraneous sound or noise to be included in the testing (i.e. air hons,
flushing, emergency generator, telephone, speaker, alarms, foot step noise)
• The measurement is to be taken at a height of 1.2 m to 1.6 m above deck in the center
of the room or compartment
• Mean values of graduations on the meter to be taken as noise level
If the noise level exceeds 1.5 dB (A) above the specified value, the BUILDER shall make
necessary improvements, including HVAC, to a practical extent under BUILDER’s
responsibility. All test shall be carried out by a BUYER’s approved independent third party at
BUILDER’s expense.

PAGE 295 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

4.4 SECTION 4 – APPENDIX 1- ACTIVITY AND RESPONSIBILITY FLOWCHART

PAGE 296 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 5 – DESIGN, ENGINEERING AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION

All drawings, plans, booklets, name plates, caution/identification plates and whatever
documents are required for the implementation of these Specifications to be prepared in
English. Primary dimensional units for the operating manual, General Arrangements and
system drawings in their final form shall be in approved standard SI-units, with US
conventional standard units adjacent and shown in parentheses. US equivalent units shall be
rounded to nearest standard figures and not a prices conversion.
If any other language than English is required for any reason whatsoever, the text of translation
to be provided with the BUYER’s support. The layout, structure and content for all of
BUILDER’s documentation and deliverables shall be reviewed and approved by BUYER prior
to Delivery of the VESSEL. Unless indicated otherwise, the supply of all required design,
engineering and construction documentation shall not be later than forty-five (45) days prior
to Delivery of the VESSEL.

5.1 MASTER DOCUMENT REGISTER AND LIBRARY

BUILDER shall develop and maintain, throughout the design, construction and until delivery
of the VESSEL, an updated and current Master Document Register (“MDR”). The MDR shall
include all basic and detail design deliverables required to, Design, Build and Deliver the
VESSEL as per Specification, including, but not limited to drawings, plan(s), procedures,
datasheets, analyses and design reports, etc. The MDR shall be prepared in a format reviewed
and agreed by BUYER. The MDR shall be shared as requested by BUYER. Prior to delivery,
BUILDER shall provide a final as-built MDR with all final and latest information including but
not limited to final revision numbers and revision dates.

5.2 PLANS, DRAWINGS, REPORTS

Upon completion of all construction, and prior to Delivery of the VESSEL, the BUILDER shall
provide to BUYER a formal Letter of “Basic Design Compliance” issued by Keppel LeTourneau
as well as with two (2) sets of AutoCAD .DWG files on DVD and three (3) sets of photocopy
"as-built" working plans, including tank tables (in barrels, litres, metric tonnes, VCG, LCG,
TCG, and longitudinal and transverse free surface moment as a function of actual sounding
height in meters and millimetres), capacity plan, curves of form, stability booklet, all diagrams,
and material traceability booklet (construction portfolio) developed from contract plans (basic
and detailed).

5.3 TEST RECORDS AND COMMISSIONING DOSSIERS

Data on all tests is to be recorded by the BUILDER's Commissioning personnel for BUILDER
furnished equipment (BFE) and approved by the BUYER. All test data records And
Commissioning Dossiers shall be prepared and delivered by BUILDER to BUYER as per
Section 4 of this CTS.
Data on all tests is to be recorded by the BUYER’s vendor engineer or crew for BUYER
furnished equipment (OFE), approved by the BUYER, and passed to BUILDER's
Commissioning personnel for documentation compilation. All final test results shall be initialled
and signed off by BUILDER and BUYER immediately following the test. Any equipment or
system for which test results are unsatisfactory must be retested following suitable and
sufficient corrective action.

5.4 PHOTOGRAPHS AND VIDEOS

During the construction of the VESSEL, the BUILDER shall provide the BUYER with one (1)
set of approximately five hundred (500) digital photographs, in high resolution, that identify

PAGE 297 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

construction progress. Additionally, upon completion of the completed VESSEL, the

BUILDER shall provide approximately two hundred (200) professional digital photographs, in
high resolution showing exterior and interior views as directed and furnish one (1) hard copy
and two (2) digital copies of each to the BUYER.
Photographs shall only be taken by the BUILDER or the BUYER’s representative. The public
release of any photographs shall be forbidden with the exception of specific photographs that
shall be agreed on a photograph by photograph basis between the BUILDER and the BUYER.

5.5 3D MODEL REQUIREMENTS

BUILDER shall provide a final as-built engineering three (3) dimensional model (also referred
to as 3D Model) developed in accordance with industry best practice using state-of-the-art
software, prior to delivery of the VESSEL. The 3D Model shall be based upon final production
and construction drawings, ‘as built’ dimensional surveys, laser surveys, and any other
surveys as deemed to be required and vendor data updates. Each compartment and area
shall be modelled as detailed so far as is reasonably practicable to accurately reflect the ‘as-
built’ condition. BUILDER shall continuously update the 3D Model during the detail design
and during build phases, including all system components, LQ, machinery spaces, storage
areas, tanks etc. During the design and construction period, and until final delivery of the
VESSEL, BUILDER shall use the 3D Model to validate the detail design, integrity and
consistency checks, interdisciplinary design checks, clash and feasibility checks, construction
planning, and for BUILDER’s design review activities as per Section 1.7 of this CTS. In
addition, the 3D Model shall:
• Include all final scantling information, accurate dimensional and material data, and
visual aids to include, but not be limited to, piping color coding and signage, lights and
alarms
• Include ALL System, Sub System and Equipment tag numbers
• Provide final and ‘as built’ animation sequences for the following areas:
o Deck Cranes – laydown areas and cargo hatches
o Pipe racking from main deck to elevated pipe deck, reach limits)
o Major operations for BOP handling, well head, offline BOP testing, conductor
and annular handling)
o Drill floor operations - all major functions (hoisting, tripping, make and breaking
connections, racking and laying down drill pipe, racking casing, offline stand
building, running tools, wireline operations, cementing, crane access)
o Mud processing and discharge operation
The final 3D Model file shall be in both raw NAVISWORKS and STEP formats and rendered
in final colour schemes as agreed with BUYER, so as to be suitable for ARO marketing,
engineering and client liaison activities. On a monthly basis, and as required by BUYER,
BUILDER shall provide the latest, and at the time of the request, current revision, of the 3D
model to BUYER’s representative on site in digital format for BUYER review and Technical
Assurance activities to include, but not be limited to, risk assessment, operability,
maintainability, planning, and training etc.

5.6 CONSTRUCTION PORTFOLIO

A portfolio of pertinent documentation shall be compiled by the BUILDER, reviewed and
approved by the Class (through BUILDER) and presented to the BUYER as available but no
later than forty-five (45) days prior to delivery of the VESSEL. The BUILDER shall develop a
written procedure for the supply of documents within ninety (90) days of Effective Contract
date that shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Key plans showing locations and grades of steel material

PAGE 298 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

•List of piping and fitting materials for all application

•List of structural drawings
•Welding procedures, specifications for all special, primary and secondary materials
•Welding procedure qualification records
•Non-Destruction Testing (NDT) Plan for period Class surveys post delivery
•NDT records of during construction
•Recommendation for repair procedures for all special, primary and safety critical
structures, for the avoidance of doubt, this is not limited to steel structures but includes
all materials as required
• Mill certificates on all high strength and special application materials with a record of
where all such identified materials are to be found in the completed VESSEL
• Full certification for all BFE
• Recommended repair procedures for all Special Application Structures, Primary
Application Structures, and Safety Critical Structures. For the avoidance of doubt, such
procedures are not limited to steel structures but also any other materials, as required
Those items of special steel, LP/HP piping and fittings included in lists shall include trade
names, ASTM (or equivalent) specifications, chemical composition, and physical properties,
as well as any pertinent data, modifications, etc., that may be required when ordering
replacement parts or materials.

5.7 OPERATIONS MANUAL

The BUILDER shall furnish to BUYER one (1) copy in electronic format on DVD and three (3)
hard copies of the Class approved Operating Manuals and reference documents therein.

5.8 STABILITY BOOKLET AND SOFTWARE

Based on the results of the inclining experiment, the BUILDER shall update the operating
manual, which sets forth the stability data necessary to permit safe and efficient handling of
the VESSEL. The operating manual shall include indication of any operating conditions which
must be maintained to assure that the VESSEL can safely withstand damage under the
standard of subdivision required by these Specifications. These instructions shall be as clear
and concise as practicable and shall be approved by the Class and BUYER.

5.9 IADC SCHEDULE A AND EQUIPMENT LIST

The BUILDER shall furnish to BUYER one (1) copy in electronic format on DVD and three (3)
hard copies of an IADC format compliant rig specification for BUYER’s marketing purposes.
BUYER can, if necessary, assist BUILDER with the required format, layout and structure of
such specification.

5.10 SPARE PART INVENTORY AND CONSUMABLES LIST

BUILDER shall obtain from each vendor of BFE a list of recommended spares for one (1)
years’ service, two (2) years’ service (OEM recommended) and safety critical spares and
compile these spares lists in a cross-indexed booklet form and present them to the BUYER
for his subsequent use. This booklet shall be provided to the BUYER at least one-hundred fifty
(150) days prior to delivery of the VESSEL and notification of any long delivery spares shall
be given as soon as possible during the construction of the VESSEL.

PAGE 299 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

5.11 PRV AND HOSE REGISTER

5.11.1 HOSE REGISTER
BUILDER shall supply a detailed register of all hoses installed on the VESSEL and that are
required for the effective operation of a system or piece of machinery. The register shall list
shall contain the name and tag number of the equipment or machinery, the systems the hose
forms part of, its pressure and temperature rating, the manufacturer and the manufacturer re-
order number, the length and nominal diameter, its fittings used on both ends, the operating
medium of the hose, the hose tag number, serial number and test certificate reference with
the effective and expiry date.

5.11.2 PRV REGISTER

BUILDER shall supply a detailed register of all Pressure Relieve Valves (“PRV”) installed on
the VESSEL and that are required for the effective operation of a system or piece of
machinery. The register shall list shall contain the name and tag number of the equipment or
machinery, the systems the PRV forms part of, its pressure rating, the manufacturer and the
manufacturer re-order number, the thread and fitting standard, the operating medium of the
system, the tag number, serial number and test certificate reference with the effective and
expiry date.

5.12 PAD EYE AND LIFTING GEAR REGISTER

BUILDER shall supply a detailed padeye and lifting register for the VESSEL. The register shall
contain all information about each certified padeye intended for use during operation of the
VESSEL, including, but not limited to location, system, tag number, SWL, diameter of the inner
hole, test load, certificate reference, and date of last test and expiry of the certificate. In
addition, the register shall contain all lifting and hoisting gear including but not limited to;
shackles, slings, straps, chain hoist, trolley beams, lashing and sea fasting equipment etc.
supplied as OFE or BFE and intended for the operation of the VESSEL.

5.13 GREASING SCHEDULE

BUILDER shall provide a detailed greasing schedule for all greasing required as per OEM for
the effective operation and maintenance of equipment or piece of machinery. The greasing
schedule shall contain the name and tag number of the equipment or machinery, the system
it is part of, the subsystem or components as applicable, the type and make of grease required,
the amount of grease and the OEM manual reference for the grease requirements.

5.14 LUBRICATION SCHEDULE

BUILDER shall provide a detailed lubrication schedule for all lube oil required as per OEM for
the effective operation and maintenance of equipment or piece of machinery. The lubrication
schedule shall contain the name and tag number of the equipment or machinery, the system
it is part of, the subsystem or components as applicable, the type and make of lube oil required,
the amount of lube oil and the OEM manual reference for the lube oil requirements.

5.15 TORQUE TABLES

BUILDER shall provide a detailed torque table for all torque values required for each bolted
connection required as per OEM for the effective operation and maintenance of equipment or
piece of machinery. The torque table shall contain the name and tag number of the equipment
or machinery, the system it is part of, the subsystem or components as applicable, the type,

PAGE 300 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

size and grade of the bolts and nuts utilized in the connection, the torqueing sequence, the
dry and lubricated torque values, and any pretension as required.

5.16 HAZARDOUS AREA EQUIPMENT REGISTER

BUILDER shall provide a complete hazardous area equipment register (Ex Register) that
outlines and describes ALL electrical equipment installed in Hazardous Areas. The equipment
chosen by BUILDER for installation in the Hazardous Areas shall have the necessary
protection suitable for the hazardous zone where the equipment will be installed. The
equipment shall have valid certification from a recognized certifying body and detail populated
into a Hazardous Area Equipment Register (HAER) consisting of but not limited to the
following:
• Area / Location – Register can be split to logical zones for easier management
• Equipment ID Number
• Equipment Description
• Drawing Number – If Applicable
• Manufacturer
• Model / Serial Number
• Certifying Authority
• Zone (As per hazardous area plans)
• Type of Protection
• Gas Group
• Temperature Class
• Ingress Protection (if available)
• Certificate Number
• Date of last detailed Inspection
• Date of Last close visual Inspection
• Date of last visual inspection

5.17 FINAL FUNCTIONAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS

BUILDER shall prepare and provide detailed as-built functional design specification for each
system and prior to commencing any inspection, testing and trial activities as per Section 4 of
the Specification. Each as-built functional design specified shall be submitted to BUYER for
review and approval prior to any testing, commissioning and trial activities is taking place and
shall form part of the delivery documentation.

5.18 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES AND IN-SERVICE INSPECTION MANUAL

BUYER shall develop a dedicated Maintenance system for the VESSEL and requires
BUILDER to supply, at no additional cost to BUYER, all final and ‘as-built’ maintenance
information required or recommended by OEM for the safe and effective operation and
maintenance of all systems, equipment and components thereof. BUYER and BUILDER shall
agree both the documentation to be provided and a mutually agreed schedule for the delivery
of such documentation. Any delay or change to OEM supplied information shall not be reason
for delay, schedule impact or reason for change order and shall be at no additional cost to
BUYER.

In addition, BUYER and Class shall develop an ‘in-service’ inspection program for the VESSEL
to allow for detailed planning of the periodic inspections and surveys to be carried out by Class.
BUILDER shall support these planning activities, as required by BUYER, and shall supply, at
no additional cost, to BUYER, all final and ‘as-built’ maintenance information required or
recommended as per Class for the recertification and periodic classification of the VESSEL.

PAGE 301 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The BUILDER shall further furnish a complete list, with addresses, telephone/ fax numbers, of
all relevant subcontractors.

5.19 MATERIAL HANDLING ENVELOPE

Material handling studies shall be provided for all areas of the VESSEL. The material handling
studies shall include, but not be limited to, all storage and warehouse facilities, laydown areas
and lockers as well as storage areas within enclosed spaces. The material handling studies
shall analyse and verify the material flow and handling during operations. The studies shall
also include the material handling of spare parts from applicable storage areas, their
installation at the location of all major equipment or machinery, and the removal of machinery
or components from those locations. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to:
• Main Engines and Power Generation
• Power Distribution and Management
• Jacking and Skidding System
• Deck Cranes
• Drill floor Equipment
• Mud Mixing Equipment and Mud Pumps
• Mud Processing Equipment inside the cantilever
• BOP storage and handling area inside the cantilever
• BOP Control Unit - Accumulator bottle racks
• Supply of provisions to the Cold and Dry Storage for the Galley
• Towing Equipment
• Accommodation Equipment
• Third-Party Equipment

5.20 TAGGING STRUCTURE AND REGISTER

The Equipment Tagging and Numbering procedure to be followed is:

# DOCUMENT TITLE DOCUMENT NUMBER REV DATE

100-00-00-NBEG-PRO-
1 Equipment Numbering System Procedure
00004_R01
1 27-AUG-2019

As part of the WORK and prior to delivery of the VESSEL, BUILDER shall provide the final as-
built and complete Equipment Tagging Register with a full and complete breakdown of all tags
and its associated hardware in the layout and format approved by BUYER and in line with the
procedure referenced in 5.20.

5.21 VIRUTUAL WAREHOUSE INVENTORY

The BUILDER shall supply physical warehouse facilities as described in Section 1.12.2. Virtual
Warehouse.
In addition, the BUILDER shall prepare a procedure for the development and maintenance of
a suitable and sufficient Inventory for the Virtual Warehouse. The inventory shall be produced
in MS Excel or similar and shall provide a cross reference between the inventory location
within the Virtual Warehouse and the ‘sail away’ storage location for the inventory on the
VESSEL.
The Virtual Warehouse Inventory shall include but not be limited to, the following fields:
• Vendor Equipment Description
• Vendor
• Vendor Part Number

PAGE 302 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

• Vendor Serial Number(s)

• ARO Purchase Order Number
• ARO VESSEL Equipment Tag Number
• ARO Master Material Number
• Virtual Warehouse Tag Number
o BUILDER Virtual Warehouse storage locator
o VESSEL storage locator
• Required On Site date
• Actual On Site date
• Transfer to Warehouse Date
• Transfer to VESSEL date
• Remarks
5.21.1 DEFENITION OF INVENTORY FIELDS

5.21.1.1 VENDOR DESCRIPTION

The item description of the equipment or component shall be as provided by the vendor.

5.21.1.2 VENDOR
The Vendor shall be the Original Equipment Manufacturer.

5.21.1.3 VENDOR PART NUMBER

The Vendor Part Number shall be the Original Equipment Manufacturer equipment or
component model number. Where the Vendor Part number is derived from a Third-Party
supplier, then this information shall be noted in the ‘Remarks’ section.

5.21.1.4 VENDOR SERIAL NUMBER(S)

The Vendor Serial Number shall be the Original Equipment Manufacturer serial number for
individual items of equipment where applicable.

5.21.1.5 ARO PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER

The ARO Purchase Order (PO) number shall be included so as to allow equipment and
components to be verified against the requirements of the PO prior to storage.

5.21.1.6 ARO VESSEL EQUIPMENT TAG NUMBER

The ARO VESSEL system tag number is the tag number for a component or piece of
equipment relating specifically to the VESSEL system in which it features and shall be in
accordance with the Equipment Tagging Procedure described in Section 1.12.1.

5.21.1.7 ARO MASTER MATERIAL NUMBER

The ARO Master Material Number shall be provided by the BUYER and is a code within the
ARO system that identifies a specific spare part, or piece of equipment, based upon it’s
characteristics and specifications and is not linked to the VESSEL system in which it features.
This number ensures the correctly specified piece of equipment is ordered via the ARO SAP
system if and when necessary.

5.21.1.8 VIRTUAL WAREHOUSE TAG NUMBER

The Virtual Warehouse TAG number shall be made up of two parts, the BUILDER Virtual
Warehouse storage locator and the VESSEL storage locator.

PAGE 303 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

5.21.1.8.1 BUILDER Virtual Warehouse storage locator

This is the unique Virtual Warehouse storage locator number developed by the BUILDER.
This part of the TAG allows the equipment to be stored and located when necessary within
the Virtual Warehouse.
5.21.1.8.2 VESSEL storage locator
This is the unique VESSEL storage locator number used by the BUYER. This part of the Virtual
Warehouse TAG allows the equipment to be transferred to the correct storage location on the
VESSEL.

5.21.1.9 REQUIRED ON SITE DATE

This is the latest date that the equipment is required on site at BUILDER facility and is dictated
by lead times and preservation requirements etc.

5.21.1.10 ACTUAL ON-SITE DATE

This is the date that the equipment actually arrives at BUILDER facility.

5.21.1.11 TRANSFER TO WAREHOUSE DATE

This is the date that the equipment is actually stored within the Virtual Warehouse facility and
provides a differential between ROS and securely stored.

5.21.1.12 TRANSFER TO VESSEL DATE

This is the date that the equipment is transferred from the BUILDER virtual warehouse to the
VESSEL storage location. Where equipment is used from the virtual warehouse as opposed
to being transferred from Virtual Warehouse storage to vessel storage then these details shall
be recorded in the remarks section together with reorder/re-supply details.

5.21.1.13 REMARKS
This section of the inventory shall be utilized for documenting any pertinent information or
explanatory notes relating to inventory items. The BUILDER shall maintain the inventory
electronically and shall ensure it is distributed and archived as agreed with the BUYER.

5.22 VENDOR AND THIRD-PARTY DOCUMENTATION

BUILDER shall supply all vendor and Third-Party drawings, manuals, datasheets and parts
lists for all BFE in both electronic format and hard copy. The equipment operation and
maintenance manuals shall include information describing; installation, operation, safety,
maintenance, adjustment, wiring, and parts lists, with suitable illustrations and dimensional
drawings. The manuals shall be formatted and organized according to BUYER requirements,
and include information verified and approved by the OEM.

5.23 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION AND FINISHED PLANS

All information regarding the as-built condition of the VESSEL shall be submitted to the
BUYER and Designer no later than thirty (30) days prior to Delivery of the VESSEL.
BUILDER shall develop and provide to BUYER for review and approval, a Master Document
Register (MDR) listing all current, planned and completed documents regarding the as-built
condition and the finished plans of the VESSEL including, but not limited to, all drawings,
plans, datasheets, manuals, reports and analysis, production and construction documentation
etc. within sixty (60) days of the Effective Contract date.

PAGE 304 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

The MDR shall include all basic design, detail design, construction and delivery
documentation. The MDR shall include the planned and the final schedule of submittal for this
information.
The BUILDER shall provide and install framed drawings or plasticized posters, instructions,
notices etc. with glass, as required by the Specification that shall include, but not be limited
to, a complete set of Safety and Fire Control Plans. The approved drawings shall detail the
location of all safety and firefighting equipment overlaid on the General Arrangement
Drawings. The BUILDER shall install the approved plans laminated, framed and securely
mounted, at visible locations on the competed VESSEL as required. The BUILDER shall use
suitable stainless steel or brushed aluminium 12 mm frames of sufficient size for this purpose.
Similarly, the BUILDER shall provide a laminated set of Muster Tables. Muster tables shall
not require framing.
Upon delivery and acceptance of the VESSEL, BUILDER shall at its cost furnish three (3) hard
copies and two (2) electronic copies of all detailed construction drawings such as general
arrangement, structural, mechanical, piping system, electrical system and outfitting drawings,
plus drawing indices, corrected to agree with the completed construction of the VESSEL to
BUYER for use by BUYER, or its successors or assignees, and such other documentation
and information as may reasonably be required for the operation, maintenance, and repair of
the VESSEL.
All drawings etc. shall be provided in the latest AUTOCAD and Acrobat PDF format. All
specifications, plans, procedures, "as-built" documentation etc. shall be provided in the latest
Acrobat PDF and Microsoft Word formats. All DVD contents shall be linked, indexed and key-
word searchable. All designs, drawings and other technical documents, whether or not
described in the Specification, but which were prepared directly or indirectly in connection with
the works, shall become part of the works. BUYER agrees that it shall not release any such
information to third parties, except as needed for specific purposes connected with the
operation, maintenance and repair of the VESSEL, and review by governmental authorities or
underwriters or as may be required by law.

5.24 BUILD RECORDS, MATERIAL TRACEABILITY

BUILDER shall always maintain detailed and accurate build records and shall prepare
electronic back-ups throughout the Contract period. The build records shall provide details for
material traceability, welding traceability including welder qualifications, weld maps that
indicate welder information special steel or primary steel weld, NDT and inspection records,
material certificates, etc. for all major and all safety critical equipment, material and outfitting.
BUYER will request random verification of the updated records and BUILDER shall provide
access as requested for BUYER to review and verify the content of the records. Detailed
Quality Control, Commissioning Dossiers etc. per system shall be developed by the BUILDER
as per Specification and delivered to BUYER in a timely manner but no later than sixty (60)
days prior to Delivery of the VESSEL.

5.25 DOCUMENT NUMBERING AND CORRESPONDENCE

BUILDER shall coordinate and provide all documentation, plans and drawings and all other
project deliverables in accordance with BUYER’s instructions and as outlined the following
Document Management Procedures provided by BUYER.
1) 100-00-00-NBPC-PRO-02001_R05 Technical Documentation Identification &
Management Specification
2) 100-00-00-NBPC-PRO-02004_R04 Correspondence Identification & Management
Specification.

PAGE 305 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

SECTION 6 – APPENDICES

6.1 APPENDIX I – SUPER 116E BASIC DESIGN SPECIFICATION

The below Technical Guide is referenced for information and shall provide guidance on the
Basic Design details for the VESSEL. For the avoidance of doubt the requirements set forth
and outlined in the Specification shall prevail over the information provided in this Appendix I
and BUILDER shall provide the VESSEL in compliance with the Specification and as part of
the WORK to the extent specified in the Specification.

In the event of conflicts, or inconsistencies, between the Specification and APPENDIX I,

BUILDER shall bring such conflict or inconsistency to the attention of the BUYER who shall
provide the BUILDER with a resolution. Under no circumstances shall such resolution cause
the BUILDER to request a variation order unless the resolution clearly exceeds the intent of
the Specification. Any resolution of such conflict is subject to review and approval by BUYER
and CLASS and the Basic Designer as required by CLASS.

DOCUMENT
# DOCUMENT TITLE REV DATE
NUMBER
TECHNICAL GUIDELINE
1 TG_ARO_3.0_2019 3 08-Jan-2020
LeTOURNEAU SUPER 116E CLASS

PAGE 306 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

6.2 APPENDIX II – CONTRACT PLANS AND DRAWINGS

DOCUMENT TITLE DRAWING # REV

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT INNER BOTTOM TANKS 19-0001-EN-N-0001 A

Sheet 1 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT MISCELLANEOUS TANK 19-0001-EN-N-0001 A
ARRANGEMENT Sheet 2 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT MACHINERY DECK 19-0001-EN-N-0101 A
Sheet 1 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT MACHINERY DECK @ 20’-0” ABL 19-0001-EN-N-0101 A
Sheet 2 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT OUTBOARD PROFILE 19-0001-EN-N-0201 A
Sheet 1 of 1
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT MAIN DECK PLAN 19-0001-EN-N-0202 A
Sheet 1 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT MAIN DECK PLAN AT 40’-0” ABL 19-0001-EN-N-0202 A
Sheet 2 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT TOP PLAN 19-0001-EN-N-0203 A
Sheet 1 of 1
LQ GENERAL ARRANGEMENT LAYOUT FOR 120 MAN 19-0001-EN-N-0301 A
Sheet 1 of 5
LQ GENERAL ARRANGEMENT LAYOUT FOR 120 MAN 19-0001-EN-N-0301 A
Sheet 2 of 5
LQ GENERAL ARRANGEMENT LAYOUT FOR 120 MAN 19-0001-EN-N-0301 A
Sheet 3 of 5
LQ GENERAL ARRANGEMENT LAYOUT FOR 120 MAN 19-0001-EN-N-0301 A
Sheet 4 of 5
LQ GENERAL ARRANGEMENT LAYOUT FOR 120 MAN 19-0001-EN-N-0301 A
Sheet 5 of 5
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRILL FLOOR 19-0001-EN-N-0801 A
Sheet 1 of 2
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT BELOW DRILL FLOOR 19-0001-EN-N-0801 A
Sheet 2 of 2

PAGE 307 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

6.3 APPENDIX III - MASTER EQUIPMENT LIST (MAKERS LIST)

PAGE 308 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
1 JACKING SYSTEM Jacking System 1 Lot BFE Keppel-Letourneau
Manual Greasing
2 JACKING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE Keppel-Letourneau
System
SKIDDING SYSTEM CANTILEVER / Skidding System Rack
3 1 Lot BFE Keppel-Letourneau
DRILLFLOOR & Pinion drive
4 SKIDDING SYSTEM DRILL FLOOR Greasing system 1 Lot BFE Keppel-Letourneau
5 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lifeboat 4 BFE VIKING

6 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Lifeboat Davit 4 BFE VIKING

7 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Rescue Boat 1 BFE VIKING

Rescue Boat VIKING
8 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
launching davits
9 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Inflatable life raft 1 Lot BFE VIKING
10 THIS LINE IS EMPTY - - - -

11 THIS LINE IS EMPTY - - - -

12 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Cradles for Life Rafts 1 Lot BFE VIKING or Equal
13 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Life Vest/ Jacket 150 BFE VIKING or Equal
14 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Work vest 24 BFE VIKING or Equal
Scrambling net /
15 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 2 BFE VIKING or Equal
Jacobs ladder
Monkey board escape
16 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 1 BFE DPI SALA or Equal
system
VIKING
17 SAFETY EQUIPMENT First aid kit 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
or Equal

PAGE 309 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
VIKING
18 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Stretcher 11 BFE SOLAs
or Equal
VIKING
10
19 SAFETY EQUIPMENT Life buoy BFE SOLAS
min.
or Equal
Helicopter deck SOLAS
20 SAFETY EQUIPMENT rescue equipment 1 Lot BFE VIKING
W/Storage locker or Equal
SALA for Inertia Reel and Harnesses and
Inertia reels &
21 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE DBI Sala Ladsafe for ladder fall arrest (DBI
harnesses
Sala Ladsafe could be OFE) or Equal
Approved Work
22 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 2 BFE Swire oil field Services or equal
Basket
SOLAS
Personnel Transfer
23 SAFETY EQUIPMENT 2 BFE VIKING
Basket
or Equal
Breathing air
24 BREATHING AIR 3 BFE SOLAS
compressor
25 BREATHING AIR Storage Cylinders 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
Air Filtration (Air
26 BREATHING AIR 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
Quality Test Kit)
Contained BA Set
27 BREATHING AIR 37 BFE SOLAS
(30min SCBA's)
Dust Proof Boxes &
Covers for BA
28 BREATHING AIR 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
Manifolds & cascade
outlets
Escape pack Set (15
29 BREATHING AIR 161 BFE SOLAS
minutes SCBA's)

PAGE 310 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Air Manifolds &
30 BREATHING AIR 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
Regulator Panels
31 BREATHING AIR Personal H2S Monitor 12 BFE SOLAS
Portable H2S
32 BREATHING AIR Detectors with hand 4 BFE SOLAS
pump
Gulf Gulp
33 POLLUTION CONTROL Garbage grinder 1 BFE
Hobart or similar
34 POLLUTION CONTROL Garbage compactor 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
FUGURO
Temperature
35 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE SOLAS
Indicator
or Equal
FUGURO
Barometric pressure
36 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE SOLAS
indicator
or Equal
FUGURO
Humidity sensing
37 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE SOLAS
indicator
or Equal
FUGURO
Wind speed /
38 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE SOLAS
direction meter
or Equal
FUGURO
39 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Cloud Height Sensor 1 OFE SOLAS
or Equal
NAVTEX
40 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Weather facsimile 1 BFE
or Equal
SPERRY
FURUNO
41 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Gyro compass 1 BFE
ANSCHUTZ
or Equal

PAGE 311 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
SPERRY
FURUNO
42 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Depth sounder 1 BFE ANSCHUTZ
GARMIN
or Equal
Rig Net
Satellite
Harris Caprock
43 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION communication 1 OFE
(Dome Supports and Cabling are BFE)
system
or Equal
SAILOR
44 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION SSB transceiver 1 BFE FURUNO
or Equal
NAUTIC EXPO
Emergency Position
SAILOR
45 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Indicating Radio 1 BFE
VIKING
Beacon
or Equal
SAILOR
46 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Marine VHF radio 1 BFE
or Equal
NAUTEL
Aircraft radio beacon FURUNO
47 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE
transmitter SOUTHERN AVIONICS
or Equal
NAUTEL
Aeronautical VHF FURUNO
48 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE
transceiver SAILOR
or Equal
FURUNO
49 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Watch receiver 1 BFE ANSCHUTZ
or Equal
FURUNO
50 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Facsimile 1 BFE
ANSCHUTZ

PAGE 312 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
FURUNO
51 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Telex 1 BFE ANSCHUTZ
or Equal
FURUNO
MF / HF DSC / watch
52 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE ANSCHUTZ
receiver
or Equal
FURUNO
Portable VHF
53 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE ANSCHUTZ
transceiver
or Equal
Master Systems LLC
FURUNO
54 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION SART 1 Lot BFE
ANSCHUTZ
or Equal
FURUNO
MARINE GPS
55 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE ANSCHUTZ
NAVIGATOR
or Equal
SAILOR
56 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION RADIO CONSOLE 1 Lot BFE FURUNO
or Equal
SAILOR
Mobile Earth Station
57 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE FURUNO
Inmarsat-F
or Equal
FURUNO
58 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION NDBP TERMINAL 1 BFE ANSCHUTZ
or Equal
59 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Telephone System 1 BFE SOLAS
60 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Public Address system 1 BFE SOLAS (FEDERAL SIGNAL)
Drill floor - derrick
61 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE CAMERON
man talkback

PAGE 313 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
62 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION General Alarm system 1 BFE SOLAS (FEDERAL SIGNAL)
Crane communication
63 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE CRANE SUPPLIER
system
LAN Distribution
64 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
System
Operation Support IT
65 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 OFE BUYER PROVIDED
System
Obstruction light ORGA
66 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE
(vessel marking)
67 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Fog Horn 1 BFE ORGA

68 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Photocell 1 BFE ORGA

Obstruction light and
69 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE ORGA
fog horn control panel
Helideck perimeter &
70 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE ORGA
flood light
71 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Helideck Floodlights 1 Lot BFE ORGA
Helideck H and Circle
72 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE ORGA
Lights
73 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Helideck status light 1 BFE ORGA
Helideck Lighting
74 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE ORGA
Control Panel
75 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Helideck lighting UPS 1 BFE ORGA
Aircraft warning light
76 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE CRANE SUPPLIER
on Cranes
Navigation &
77 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 Lot BFE ORGA
signalling light
Navigation lighting
78 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE ORGA
Control Panel

PAGE 314 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Aircraft Warning
79 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION Lights (DERRICK & 3 BFE ORGA
LEGS)
Illuminated
80 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 3 BFE ORGA
Windsocks
81 DECK CRANES (120ft boom) Deck Cranes 2 BFE NOV/Seatrax or equal
82 DECK CRANES (140 ft boom) Deck Cranes 1 BFE NOV/Seatrax or equal
83 MOORING EQUIPMENT Mooring lines 1 Lot BFE BRIDON or equal
Wires and lashings
84 MOORING EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE BRIDON or equal
equipment
RIG MARINE
POSIDONIA
85 MOORING EQUIPMENT Bollards 8 BFE
FENDERCARE
or Equal
RIG MARINE
POSIDONIA
86 MOORING EQUIPMENT Panama Chokes 6 BFE
FENDERCARE
or Equal
RIG MARINE
POSIDONIA
87 MOORING EQUIPMENT Smit Brackets 6 BFE
FENDERCARE
or Equal
Towing bridle. Wires
HENDRIK VEDERRIG MARINE
88 TOWING EQUIPMENT and chain with a Delta 1 Set BFE
or Equal
Plate, etc.
HENDRIK VEDER
Emergency Towing
89 TOWING EQUIPMENT 1 OFE RIG MARINE
bridle. Wires, etc.
or Equal
Burner Boom Winch INGERSOLL RAND
90 WELL TESTING 2 BFE
(Air) or Equal

PAGE 315 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Air-operated winch INGERSOLL RAND
91 TOWING EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
(Towing Bridle) or Equal
CROSBY
Slings, shackles and all HENDRIK VEDER
92 TOWING EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
related equipment RIG MARINE
or Equal
Longitudinal Hose METREEL
93 DRAG CHAIN SYSTEM 1 BFE
Drag Chain or Equal
Longitudinal Cable METREEL
94 DRAG CHAIN SYSTEM 1 BFE
Drag Chain or Equal
Transverse Hose Drag METREEL
95 DRAG CHAIN SYSTEM 1 BFE
Chain or Equal
Transverse Cable Drag METREEL
96 DRAG CHAIN SYSTEM 1 BFE
Chain or Equal
RECORD
97 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Machinist Bench Vice 1 BFE MAKITA or equal
or Equal
MAKITA
98 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Pedestal Grinder 1 BFE
MILWAUKEE or equal
MAKITA
99 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Bench Grinder 1 BFE
MILWAUKEE or equal
PARKER
100 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Hose Cutting Machine 1 BFE
or Equal
MAKITA
101 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Drilling machine 1 BFE
or Equal
DeWalt
102 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Power hacksaw 1 BFE
or Equal
ENERPAC
103 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Hydraulic pipe bender 1 BFE
or Equal
Pipe thread cutting RIGID
104 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
machine or Equal

PAGE 316 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
SnapOn
105 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Hand tools & Tool Box 1 Lot BFE PROTO
or Equal
Steel shelving for
106 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
storage
MILLER
107 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Welding machine 2 BFE LINCON
or Equal
BOC
108 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Cutting torch 2 BFE
or Equal
Bottle rack (One Per
109 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
Gas)
SnapOn
110 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Torque Wrench 2 BFE PROTO
or Equal
SnapOn
111 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Tools 1 Lot BFE PROTO
or Equal
PARKER
112 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Crimping Tool 2 BFE KNIPEX
or Equal
Hose crimping PARKER
113 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
machine or Equal
BLACK & DECKER
114 WORKSHOP EQUIPMENT Hydro Vac 1 BFE
or Equal
KOMMATSU
TOYOTA
Forklift - battery-
115 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 BFE CATERPILLAR
powered
YALE
or Equal

PAGE 317 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
YALE
Hoisting equipment ELEPHANT
116 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
engine room INGERSOLL RAND
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment ELEPHANT
117 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Mud pump room INGERSOLL RAND
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment ELEPHANT
118 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Heavy tool store INGERSOLL RAND
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment ELEPHANT
119 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
mechanical workshop INGERSOLL RAND
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment ELEPHANT
120 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Welding shop INGERSOLL RAND
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment
ELEPHANT
121 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT BOP control 1 Lot BFE
INGERSOLL RAND
equipment area
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment
ELEPHANT
122 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT Above Choke and kill 1 Lot BFE
INGERSOLL RAND
manifold
or Equal
YALE
Hoisting equipment
123 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE ELEPHANT
above draw works
INGERSOLL RAND

PAGE 318 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
Sioux
Portable Deck Wash
124 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT 2 BFE Kircher
Unit
or Equal
125 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT Watertight Doors 1 Lot BFE TBD - LOCAL SUPPLY
126 MISCELANEOUS DECK EQUIPMENT Watertight hatches 1 Lot BFE TBD - LOCAL SUPPLY
INTERNATIONAL PAINTS
HEMPEL
127 CORROSION PROTECTION PAINT 1 Lot BFE
JOTUN
or Equal
128 CORROSION PROTECTION ANODES 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
CATHELCO
129 CORROSION PROTECTION Anti-Fouling Unit 3 BFE
or Equal
CATHELCO
130 CORROSION PROTECTION Anti-Fouling Unit 2 BFE
or Equal
CATHELCO
131 CORROSION PROTECTION Anti-Fouling Unit 1 BFE
or Equal
PHOENIX BEATIE
HP Jetting Hoses with
PARKER
132 MARINE HOSE hammer unions & 6 BFE
GATES
lifting device
or Equal
PHOENIX BEATIE
Hoses on the drag
PARKER
133 MARINE HOSE chain for marine 1 Lot BFE
GATES
systems
or Equal
134 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM Main Generator Set 5 BFE CATERPILLAR
135 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM Main Engine 5 BFE CATERPILLAR

PAGE 319 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Exhaust Gas Silencer
136 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE CATERPILLAR
/Mufflers
Emergency Generator
137 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1 BFE CATERPILLAR
Engine
Emergency Generator
138 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1 BFE CATERPILLAR
skid Mounted
Main Engine Cooling
Radiators (Air Cooled) SERCK
Optional - Main CATERPILLAR
139 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE
engines provided with DOLPHIN
Sea water cooling or Equal
system
140 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM E Gen Eng. Silencer 1 BFE CATERPILLAR
141 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM E Gen Battery box 1 set BFE CATERPILLAR
E Gen Auto Float
142 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM Charger (engine 1 Set BFE CATERPILLAR
starting batteries)
Thermostat valves AMOT
143 POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE
with override or Equal
ALFA LAVAL
Oily Water Separator WARTSILA
144 DRAIN WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 1 BFE
Unit HAMWORTHY
or Equal
Oil content
WORLDWIDE WATER
145 DRAIN WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM monitoring system for 1 BFE
or Equal
holding tanks
Drain pump for the
WILDEN
mud pump/mixing
146 DRAIN WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM 1 BFE INGERSOLL RAND
hopper coaming
or Equal
sumps

PAGE 320 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HAMWORTHY
DESMI
147 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM Main Fire Pump 2 BFE
ALLWEILER
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
DESMI
148 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM Jockey Pump 1 BFE
ALLWEILER
or Equal
Fire water Pressure
149 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
Tank (Hydrophore)
HAMWORTHY
DESMI
150 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM Foam pump 1 BFE ALLWEILER
SOLAS
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
Deluge Pump for DESMI
151 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM Burner boom (Flare 2 BFE ALLWEILER
Boom Deluge Pump) SOLAS
or Equal
Fire Hydrants, Hoses,
SOLAS
152 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM Storage boxes, 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
Nozzles and tools
BRAY
Deluge Valve - Motor KEYSTONE
153 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 BFE
Operated SOLAS
or Equal
Portable fire SOLAS
154 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE
extinguishers system or Equal

PAGE 321 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Helideck Foam
155 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM Package including 1 BFE SOLAS
tank
Helideck Foam
156 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 3 BFE SOLAS
Monitors
Helideck Foam Hose
157 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 3 BFE SOLAS
Reels
Optional
158 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 BFE SOLAS
Helideck DIFF System
AKRON
SKUM/TYCO
Well test area Water
159 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 BFE ANGUS
cannons or Deluge
CHUBB
or Equal
VIKING
HLO equipment and
160 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
fire rescue team
or Equal
Fixed firefighting
system for machinery
161 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
spaces (Main Engine
room / Switchboard
Fixed firefighting
162 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM system for Emergency 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
generator room
Fixed firefighting
163 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
system LER.
Fixed firefighting
164 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM system for paint 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
locker room

PAGE 322 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
OPTIONAL firefighting
165 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM system for Radio 1 Lot OPTIONAL TBC
room / control room
Fixed firefighting
166 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM system for Mud 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
Process Area
Deluge system for drill SOLAS
167 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE
floor or Equal
Fixed firefighting
168 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM system for Galley 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
hood ducting
Wet chemical system
169 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
for galley fryer
DESMI
Fuel Oil Transfer
170 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 2 BFE ALLWEILER
Pump
or Equal
WESTFALIA
Fuel Oil Purifier
171 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 2 BFE ALFA LAVAL
(Centrifuge)
or Equal
Suction Transfer DESMI
172 FUEL OIL SYSTEM pumps for fuel 2 BFE ALLWEILER
purifier feed or Equal
DESMI
173 FUEL OIL SYSTEM Fuel Oil Service Pump 2 BFE ALLWEILER
or Equal
Quick closing valves - LK VALVES
174 FUEL OIL SYSTEM Fuel Oil Day Tanks for 1 Lot BFE ARMATUREN-WOLFF
Main Engine or equal
LK VALVES
Quick closing valve for
175 LUBRICATION OIL SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE ARMATUREN-WOLFF
Lube Oil systems
or equal

PAGE 323 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Quick Closing Valve
LK VALVES
Control Panel Outside
176 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE ARMATUREN-WOLFF
Engine Room Port
or equal
Side
Quick Closing Valve
LK VALVES
Control Panel Outside
177 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE ARMATUREN-WOLFF
Engine Room STBD
or equal
Side
Quick closing valves -
LK VALVES ARMATUREN
178 FUEL OIL SYSTEM Fuel Oil Day Tanks for 1 Lot BFE
WOLFF or equal
Emergency Engine
Quick Closing Valve
LK VALVES
Control Panel Outside
179 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE ARMATUREN-WOLFF
Emergency Gen Room
or equal
Port Side
Quick Closing Valve
LK VALVES
Control Panel Outside
180 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE ARMATUREN-WOLFF
Emergency Gen Room
or equal
STBD Side
181 All RIG SYSTEMS Flow meters 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
ASHCROFT
182 All RIG SYSTEMS Pressure Gauges 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
TOTO
183 All RIG SYSTEMS Pressure Relief Valves 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
Pressure Reducing FISHER
184 All RIG SYSTEMS 1 Lot BFE
Valves or Equal
SIEMENS
185 All RIG SYSTEMS Pressure Transmitter 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
or Equal
SIEMENS
186 All RIG SYSTEMS Level Transmitter 1 Lot BFE
SOLAS

PAGE 324 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
SIEMENS
187 All RIG SYSTEMS Pressure Switch 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
or Equal
SIEMENS
188 All RIG SYSTEMS Level Gauge 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
or Equal
SIEMENS
189 All RIG SYSTEMS Temperature Gauge 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
or Equal
SIEMENS
190 All RIG SYSTEMS Temperature Switch 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
or Equal
191 THIS LINE IS DELETED - - - -
DESMI
Dirty Oil Transfer
192 DIRTY OIL SYSTEM 1 BFE ALLWEILER
Pump
or Equal
Service Air
193 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 3 BFE INGERSOL RAND
Compressor
INGERSOL RAND
194 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Service Air Dryer 2 BFE PIONER
or Equal
195 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Service Air Receiver 2 BFE NO PREFERENCE
Main Engine Start Air
196 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
Receiver
Instrument air dryer INGERSOL RAND
197 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM (For cantilever/drill 1 BFE PIONER
floor) or Equal
Instrument air
198 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
receiver

PAGE 325 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
199 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Drill Floor Air receiver 2 BFE NO PREFERENCE
BOP Control air NO PREFERENCE
200 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 1 BFE
receiver
201 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Bulk Air Receiver 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE

202 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Bulk Air Compressor 1 BFE INGERSOL RAND
Bulk Air Reduction INGERSOL RAND
203 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Station with two (2) 1 BFE FISHER
regulating manifold or Equal
INGERSOL RAND
204 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Bulk Air Dryers 1 BFE PIONER
or Equal
Cold Start Air
Compressor with
205 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 1 BFE INGERSOL RAND
electric and hand
crank start.
206 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM Cold Start Air Receiver 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
SIEMENS
207 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM Fresh Water Maker 2 BFE
or Equal
PH-Neutralizing Filter See fresh water maker
208 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 2 BFE
(Part of Water Maker) or Equal
Automatic Dosing
SIEMENS
209 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM Chlorinating Unit 2 BFE
or Equal
(Part of Water Maker)
Mineral regenerating
See fresh water maker
210 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM tank 2 BFE
or Equal
(Part of Water Maker)
Sampling & Dosing
SIEMENS
211 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM Unit (Part of Water 2 BFE
or Equal
Maker)

PAGE 326 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Potable Water
Pressure Set includes:
ALPHA LAVAL
212 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 2 x pumps 1 BFE
or Equal
1 x s/s Tank
jewellery
ADVANCE WATER TEK
213 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM U.V. Sterilizer 1 SET BFE
or Equal
HUBBEL
Calorifier Units SS
214 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 3 BFE STATE
tanks (Water Heaters)
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
Hot Water Circulating
215 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 2 BFE DESMI
Pumps
or Equal
Circulating pumps for HAMWORTHY
216 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM stirring pot water 2 BFE DESMI
holding tanks or Equal
Eye wash and safety SOLAS
217 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM 1 Lot BFE
shower stations or Equal
Halsey Taylor
218 POTABLE WATER SYSTEM Water Fountains 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
EVAC
SANITARY TREATMENT AND Sewage Treatment WARTSILA HAMWORTHY
219 1 BFE
DISCHARGE SYSTEM Plant OMNIPURE
or Equal
EVAC
SANITARY TREATMENT AND Sewage Treatment
220 1 BFE WARTSILA HAMWORTHY
DISCHARGE SYSTEM vacuum system unit
or Equal
SANITARY TREATMENT AND
221 Sewage Holding Tank 1 BFE NO PREFERENCE
DISCHARGE SYSTEM
SANITARY TREATMENT AND
222 Chemical Dosing Tank 1 Lot BFE PART OF SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
DISCHARGE SYSTEM

PAGE 327 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
VICTOR
SANITARY TREATMENT AND RWO
223 Grease trap for Galley 1 BFE
DISCHARGE SYSTEM LOGAM
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Air Handling unit for CARRIER
224 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
LQ NOVENCO
or Equal
Air Handling unit for HEINEN & HOPMAN
LQ CARRIER
225 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
Control / Radio Room NOVENCO
(Package unit) or Equal
Air Handling unit for HEINEN & HOPMANCARRIERNOVENCO
226 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
Galley or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Fresh Air Handling CARRIER
227 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
Units Port side NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Air cooled condensing CARRIER
228 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
unit for LQ NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Fresh Air Condensing CARRIER
229 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
Units stud side NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Air cooled condensing CARRIER
230 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
unit for Galley NOVENCO
or Equal

PAGE 328 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Chiller, Freezer and
CARRIER
231 HVAC Dry store unit, 1 Lot BFE
NOVENCO
complete package
or Equal
DNP
Fire damper, electric TROX
232 HVAC actuated, (2 ~ 5 1 Lot BFE HALTON
second closing time) WOZAIR
or Equal
DNP
TROX
Fire damper,
233 HVAC 1 Lot BFE HALTON
Pneumatic actuated
WOZAIR
or Equal
HALTON
Volume control
234 HVAC 1 Lot BFE WOZAIR
damper
or Equal
DNP
TROX
Smoke damper (Gas
235 HVAC 1 Lot BFE HALTON
tight shutoff damper)
WOZAIR
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for Galley
236 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
Hood
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
Exhaust fan for Galley HARTZELL
237 HVAC 1 BFE
Hood ELDRIDGE
NOVENCO

PAGE 329 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
238 HVAC Exhaust fan for Medic 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Medic
239 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
toilet
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for LQ
240 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
cabin room toilet
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
Mechanical HARTZELL
241 HVAC Ventilation system for 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Laundry room NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
Mechanical HARTZELL
242 HVAC Ventilation system for 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
change room NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
Exhaust fans for
HARTZELL
common toilet &
243 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
change room @ level-
NOVENCO
2
or Equal

PAGE 330 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HISON
Mechanical HARTZELL
244 HVAC Ventilation system for 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
coffee shops NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Tea
245 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
room @ level-1
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Tea
246 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
room @ Level-5
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
Mechanical HARTZELL
247 HVAC Ventilation system for 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
LQ Stair tower NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Switchboard room CARRIER
248 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
AHU NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
CARRIER
249 HVAC Switchboard room CU 1 Lot BFE
NOVENCO
or Equal
Mechanic's workshop HEINEN & HOPMAN
250 HVAC / Office Indoor Split 1 Lot BFE CARRIER
AC unit NOVENCO

PAGE 331 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Mechanic's workshop
CARRIER
251 HVAC / Office Outdoor 1 Lot BFE
NOVENCO
condensing unit
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Electrical workshop CARRIER
252 HVAC 1 BFE
Indoor Split AC unit NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Electrical workshop
CARRIER
253 HVAC Outdoor condensing 1 BFE
NOVENCO
unit
or Equal
Air conditioning
254 HVAC system for Drillers 2 BFE CAMERON
cabin
Package AC unit with
255 HVAC 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
DC pressurizer
Air conditioning
256 HVAC 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
system for LER
HEINEN & HOPMAN
AHU for Rubber store CARRIER
257 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
and Warehouse NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
CU for Rubber store CARRIER
258 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
and Warehouse NOVENCO
or Equal
Outdoor unit for
259 HVAC 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
smoking room

PAGE 332 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HISON
Ventilation / Air
HARTZELL
conditioning system
260 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
for Emergency
NOVENCO
generator room
or Equal
HISON
Ventilation supply fan HARTZELL
261 HVAC for emergency 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
generator room NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for Engine
262 HVAC 2 BFE ELDRIDGE
room
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Engine
263 HVAC 2 BFE ELDRIDGE
room
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for Mud pit
264 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
room
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Mud
265 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
pit room
NOVENCO
or Equal

PAGE 333 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Mud
266 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
pits
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for
267 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
Transformer area
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for
268 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
Transformer area
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for
269 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
compressor room
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for
270 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
compressor room
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Ventilation system for
271 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Mud lab
NOVENCO
or Equal

PAGE 334 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HISON
Ventilation system for HARTZELL
272 HVAC Mud Pit room air 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
locks NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Ventilation system for
273 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Rigging store
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Ventilation system for
274 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Welding shop
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Ventilation system for
275 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Paint store
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for Mud
276 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Treatment area
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Mud
277 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Treatment area
NOVENCO
or Equal

PAGE 335 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HISON
HARTZELL
Supply fan for Mud
278 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
pump room
NOVENCO
or Equal
HISON
HARTZELL
Exhaust fan for Mud
279 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
pump room
NOVENCO
or Equal
NOVENCO
Silencers for
280 HVAC 1 Lot BFE HARTZELL
ventilation system
or Equal
HISON
Mechanical
HARTZELL
Ventilation exhaust
281 HVAC 1 BFE ELDRIDGE
fan for Gymnasium @
NOVENCO
Level-2
or Equal
HISON
Booster fan for LQ, as
HARTZELL
deemed necessary by
282 HVAC 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
design to maintain
NOVENCO
CTS requirements
or Equal
HISON
Turbulence fan for HARTZELL
283 HVAC Heavy tool Storage 1 Lot BFE ELDRIDGE
Room NOVENCO
or Equal
Turbulence fan for HARTZELL
284 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
Compressor Room or Equal

PAGE 336 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Turbulence fan for HARTZELL
285 HVAC 4 BFE
Engine Room or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Package AC unit for IT CARRIER
286 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
Room NOVENCO
or Equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
Duct mounted electric CARRIER
287 HVAC 1 Lot BFE
heater NOVENCO
or Equal
ASHCROFT
Differential Pressure
288 HVAC 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
Switch
or Equal
PLUEGER
Raw Water S&N
289 RAW WATER SYSTEM 3 BFE
submersible Pump RITZ
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
290 RAW WATER SYSTEM Preload Pump 1 BFE PLEUGER
or Equal
REEL POWER
Raw Water Pump HAMWORTHY
291 RAW WATER SYSTEM 3 BFE
Reels PLEUGER
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
General Service (and
DESMI
292 SEAWATER SUPPLY SYSTEM Booster) Sea water 2 BFE
ALLWEILER
Pump
or Equal
-Bilge / Tank Stripping HAMWORTHY
2/1
293 BILGE SYSTEM / Pump. BFE DESMI
Lot
- Eductor for stripping ALLWEILER

PAGE 337 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
WILDEN
294 BILGE SYSTEM Daily Bilge Pump 2 BFE INGERSOLL RAND
or Equal
EMERSON
TYCO
Remote valve system EXCEL MARCO
295 Hydraulic Remote Valve System 1 Lot BFE
Including actuator etc. CONSILLIUM
BRAY
or Equal
296 Leg RACK & CHORD 1 BFE JSA
SCHUTTE & KORTING
Brass or Bronze BILGE MATE
297 Spud Can educator 3 BFE
educators VITA MOTIVATOR
or Equal
Helideck equipment's
SOLAS
298 Helideck Equipment i.e. Humper, safety 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
net etc.
PARKER
3" Loading Hoses for
GATES
299 Loading Hoses Fuel system complete 2 sets BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
with flotation devices
or Equal
PARKER
3" Loading Hoses for
GATES
300 Loading Hoses Potable water with 2 sets BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices
or Equal
PARKER
4" Loading Hoses for
GATES
301 Loading Hoses Drill water with 2 sets BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices
or Equal

PAGE 338 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
3" Loading Hoses for PARKER
Base oil system GATES
302 Loading Hoses 2 sets BFE
complete with CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices or Equal
PARKER
4" Loading Hoses for
GATES
303 Loading Hoses Brine system with 2 sets BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices
or Equal
4" Loading Hoses for PARKER
LP Mud system GATES
304 Loading Hoses 2 sets BFE
complete with CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices or Equal
PARKER
5" Loading Hoses for
GATES
305 Loading Hoses Bulk mud with 2 sets BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices
or Equal
PARKER
5" Loading Hoses for
GATES
306 Loading Hoses Bulk cement with 2 sets BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices
or Equal
3" Loading Hoses for PARKER
Bulk air system GATES
307 Loading Hoses 2 sets BFE
complete with CONTITECH BEATTIE
flotation devices or Equal
PARKER
GATES
308 Loading Hoses 2" Hose for dirty oil 1 BFE
CONTITECH BEATTIE
or Equal
PARKER
2" Hose for Black
309 Loading Hoses 1 BFE GATES
water
CONTITECH BEATTIE

PAGE 339 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
Heavy Duty Sink for
310 Sinks 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
machinery space
311 Hospital equipment 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
Barite/Bentonite
Storage Tank Dry
312 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM 4 BFE CAMERON
Bulk, with electronic
load cell, PSV etc.
Barite/ Bentonite
Surge Tank
313 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM 2 BFE CAMERON
with electronic load
cell, PSV etc.
Cement Storage Tank
Dry Bulk with
314 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM 3 BFE CAMERON
electronic load cell,
PSV etc.
315 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM Hopper with mixer 2 BFE CAMERON
YALE
Super sack Handling
316 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM 1 BFE INGERSOLL RAND
System
OR EQUAL
Dust Collector & CAMERON
317 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM 2 BFE
Cyclone dry bulk
318 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM Liquid Additive Unit 1 BFE CAMERON

319 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM Rock catcher 2 BFE CAMERON

320 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM Caustic Mixing Unit 1 BFE CAMERON

321 BULK & CEMENT SYSTEM Big Bag Hopper 1 BFE CAMERON

PAGE 340 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
HAMWORTHY
Drill Water Pump DESMI
322 DRILL WATER SYSTEMS 2 BFE
Vertical Self priming ALLWEILER
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
Brine Transfer Pump DESMI
323 BRINE SYSTEMS 1 BFE
Self priming ALLWEILER
or Equal
HAMWORTHY
Base Oil Transfer DESMI
324 BASE OIL SYSTEMS 1 BFE
Pump ALLWEILER
or Equal
Drawworks CAMERON
(Includes Brake
325 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Cooling Unit & Air
Intensifier)
Rotary Support Table CAMERON
326 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT (with Control Panel 1 BFE
and slip ring)
Power Slips CAMERON
327 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 2 BFE
Hydraulic
328 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT Deadline Anchor 1 BFE CAMERON

329 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT Iron Roughneck 1 BFE CAMERON

330 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT Casing Module 1 BFE CAMERON

331 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT Driller's Cabin 1 BFE CAMERON

Drilling Line Reel - CAMERON
332 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Pneumatic
Wireline unit CAMERON
333 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Assembly

PAGE 341 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Utility Winch Drill CAMERON
334 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 3 BFE
floor
Racking Winch CAMERON
335 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT (Monkey Board 2 BFE
Winch)
Man Riding Winch CAMERON
336 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 2 BFE
(Hydraulic)
337 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT Catheads 2 BFE CAMERON
Mud Bucket CAMERON
338 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
(Pneumatic)
339 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT Bug Blowers 9 BFE CAMERON
Batch of Slips for DP, CAMERON
340 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
DC, CSG
Utility Winch Drill CAMERON
341 DRILL FLOOR EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
floor (Pneumatic)
CAMERON
342 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Derrick 1 BFE
LOADMASTER
343 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Fingerboards 1 BFE CAMERON
CAMERON
344 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Crown Block 1 BFE
LOADMASTER
345 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Traveling Block 1 BFE CAMERON
Dolly and Block CAMERON
346 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Retract System (Top 1 BFE
Drive)
347 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Top Drive, TDS-8SA 1 BFE CAMERON

348 DERRICK EQUIPMENT Casing Stabbing Arm 1 BFE CAMERON

Batch of Elevators for CAMERON
349 DERRICK EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
DP, DC, CSG

PAGE 342 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
BX- Hydraulic CAMERON
350 DERRICK EQUIPMENT 2 BFE
Elevators
351 HP MUD & CEMENT Charging Pump 3 BFE CAMERON
352 HP MUD & CEMENT HP Mud Pump 3 BFE CAMERON
HP Mud Manifold CAMERON
353 HP MUD & CEMENT 1 BFE
(Valves)
HP Stand Pipe CAMERON
354 HP MUD & CEMENT 1 BFE
Manifold
355 HP MUD & CEMENT Rotary - Mud Hose 2 BFE CAMERON
Choke and Kill CAMERON
356 HP MUD & CEMENT 1 BFE
Manifold
Choke and Kill CAMERON
357 HP MUD & CEMENT Manifold Control 1 BFE
Panel.
358 HP MUD & CEMENT Mud/Gas Separator 1 BFE CAMERON

359 HP MUD & CEMENT HP Cement Manifold 1 BFE CAMERON

360 HP MUD & CEMENT HP- Mud Hose 4 BFE CONTITECH

361 HP MUD & CEMENT HP- Cement Hose 6 BFE CONTITECH
Mud Mix / Transfer
362 LP MUD MIXING & TRANSFER 3 BFE CAMERON
Pump
363 LP MUD MIXING & TRANSFER Agitator for Pits 14 BFE CAMERON

364 LP MUD MIXING & TRANSFER Mud Guns 22 BFE CAMERON

365 LP MUD MIXING & TRANSFER High rate mixers 1 BFE CAMERON

366 MUD TREATMENT Main Shale Shakers 5 BFE CAMERON

367 MUD TREATMENT Vacuum Degasser 1 BFE CAMERON

PAGE 343 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Mud cleaner with CAMERON
Desander and Desilter
368 MUD TREATMENT 1 BFE
cones mounted on
one shaker
369 MUD TREATMENT Degasser Feed Pump 2 BFE CAMERON

370 MUD TREATMENT Desander Feed Pump 1 BFE CAMERON

371 MUD TREATMENT Desilter Feed Pump 1 BFE CAMERON

372 MUD TREATMENT Trip Tank Pump 2 BFE CAMERON

Cuttings Screw CAMERON
373 MUD TREATMENT 1 BFE
Conveyor system
374 PIPE HANDLING EQUIPMENT Pipe Racking System 1 BFE CAMERON

375 PIPE HANDLING EQUIPMENT Foxslip assembly 1 BFE CAMERON

376 PIPE HANDLING EQUIPMENT Fixed Mousehole 1 BFE CAMERON

Mousehole Spider / CAMERON
377 PIPE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
slips
378 VARIOUS DRILLING EQUIPMENT Hydraulic Power Unit 1 BFE CAMERON
Conductor-Tensioning CAMERON
379 VARIOUS DRILLING EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
System
Secondary tensioning CAMERON
380 VARIOUS DRILLING EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
system, for BOP
Accumulators for CAMERON
381 VARIOUS DRILLING EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
tensioning system
Hydraulic distribution CAMERON
382 VARIOUS DRILLING EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
manifold
383 CAMERON
WELL CONTROL Annular Diverter 2 BFE
384

PAGE 344 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
385 WELL CONTROL Overshot Riser 4" 1 BFE CAMERON

386 WELL CONTROL Overshot Riser 30" 1 BFE CAMERON

387 WELL CONTROL BOP Handling System 1 BFE CAMERON

BOP Control System, CAMERON
Full system contains,
HPU, Accumulator
388 WELL CONTROL 1 Lot BFE
racks, control
consoles, control
panel ETC.
Choke and Kill Control CAMERON
389 WELL CONTROL 1 BFE
Panel - Drillers Cabin
BOP Parking / Test CAMERON
390 WELL CONTROL 2 BFE
Stump
Utility Winch CAMERON
391 WELL CONTROL 4 BFE
Moonpool
Man Riding Winch - CAMERON
392 WELL CONTROL 2 BFE
Cellar deck
Test Pump / BOP Test CAMERON
393 WELL CONTROL 1 BFE
Unit
Diverter system, Full CAMERON
system, Valves,
accumulators rack,
394 WELL CONTROL 1 BFE
control consoles,
overshot packers,
mandrels etc.
395 WELL CONTROL Hose Choke 2 BFE COFLEXIP or equal
396 WELL CONTROL Hose Kill 2 BFE COFLEXIP or equal
Cement Hose Stand CAMERON
397 WELL CONTROL 1 BFE
pipe

PAGE 345 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
13-5/8” BOP Stack CAMERON
398 WELL CONTROL 1 BFE
10000 psi
399 WELL CONTROL Glycol injector unit 1 BFE CAMERON
Mud lab equipment
400 WELL CONTROL 1 Lot BFE NO PREFERENCE
(Testing equipment)
90FT. Burner booms .
Expro / SWIRE
401 WELL TESTING package 2 BFE
or Equal
Pedestal Shall be BFE
CAMERON
402 WELL TESTING Well test hose 2 BFE
or Equal
Burner Boom INGERSOLL RAND
403 WELL TESTING 2 BFE
Handling Winch or Equal
600 V Main CAMERON
404 SWITCHGEARS & SWITCHBOARDS 1 Lot BFE
switchboard
480 V Emergency CAMERON
405 SWITCHGEARS & SWITCHBOARDS 1 Lot BFE
switchboard
406 VFD SYSTEMS 600V VFD Line Up 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
Jacking switchboard
407 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE Keppel-Letourneau
PLC
Braking resistor
408 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT packages for jacking 3 BFE Keppel-Letourneau
system
Skidding system
409 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 BFE Keppel-Letourneau
control cabinet
Skidding system
410 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE Keppel-Letourneau
power
Braking resistor CAMERON
411 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT package for drilling 1 Lot BFE
consumers

PAGE 346 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
480 V Main CAMERON
412 SWITCHGEARS & SWITCHBOARDS 1 Lot BFE
switchboard
480 V Emergency CAMERON
413 SWITCHGEARS & SWITCHBOARDS 1 Lot BFE
switchboard
414 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 480V MCC 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
EATON
480V Galley Power
415 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 BFE SCHNEIDER
Panel (GPNL#1)
or Equal
EATON
416 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 480V HVAC Panel 1 Lot BFE SCHNEIDER
or Equal
480 V shore power CAMERON
417 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
panel
230 V Main CAMERON
418 SWITCHGEARS & SWITCHBOARDS 1 Lot BFE
switchboard
230 V Emergency CAMERON
419 SWITCHGEARS & SWITCHBOARDS 1 Lot BFE
switchboard
EATON
230V Normal Sub-
420 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 Lot BFE SCHNEIDER
Distribution Boards
or Equal
EATON
230 V Laundry Power
421 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 BFE SCHNEIDER
Distribution Panel
or Equal
EATON
230V Emergency Sub-
422 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 Lot BFE SCHNEIDER
Distribution Boards
or Equal
EATON
230V Galley Power
423 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 BFE SCHNEIDER
Panel (GPNL#2)
or Equal

PAGE 347 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
600/480 V CAMERON
424 TRANSFORMERS Distribution 1 Lot BFE
transformer 1
480/230 V CAMERON
425 TRANSFORMERS Distribution 1 Lot BFE
transformer
480/230 V Emergency CAMERON
426 TRANSFORMERS distribution 1 Lot BFE
transformer
427 TRANSFORMERS Drilling transformer 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
Drill Floor UPS CAMERON
428 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 BFE
Distribution Panel
BOP 230V UPS CAMERON
429 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 BFE
distribution panel
430 UPS SYSTEMS Drill floor UPS 1 BFE CAMERON

431 UPS SYSTEMS BOP UPS 1 BFE CAMERON

LER Fire Damper CAMERON
432 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Control Panel
Pipe Racker VFD CAMERON
433 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Control Panel
Braking Resistor for CAMERON
434 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Pipe Racker
Heinen & Hopman
Carrier
435 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FAHU Control Panel 1 Lot BFE
Novenco
or Equal
Heinen & Hopman
Emergency Generator
Carrier
436 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Room Louver Control 1 BFE
Novenco
Panel
or Equal

PAGE 348 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
Heinen & Hopman
Chiller & Freezer Carrier
437 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 BFE
Control Panel Novenco
or Equal
BOP Remote Control
438 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Panel - Driller's Panel 2 BFE CAMERON
& tool pucher off
Raytech
Glamox
439 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LED Light Fittings 1 Lot BFE
Chalmit
or Equal
Raytech
LED Light Fittings with Glamox
440 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
battery back-up Chalmit
or Equal
Raytech
Glamox
441 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Flood Lights 1 Lot BFE
Chalmit
or Equal
ROXTEC
442 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MCT 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
EATON
443 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Electricians test panel 1 BFE SCHNEIDER
or Equal
444 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ESD System 1 Lot BFE EXEL MARCO
HAWKE
445 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Cable Glands 1 Lot BFE CMP
or Equal
446 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Fire and Gas System 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
447 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CCTV System 1 Lot BFE SOLAS

PAGE 349 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
448 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Entertainment system 1 Lot BFE SOLAS
VARIO+C640:S641US ELECTRICAL
449 Satellite & Dish 1 BFE SOLAS
EQUIPMENT
450 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IMCS system 1 Lot BFE EXEL MARCO
Drilling
451 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Instrumentation 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
System
Helideck Aluminium SOLAS
452 Helideck Equipment 1 BFE
Pancake or Equal
GULF ELEVATORS
453 LQ EQUIPMENT Dumb waiter 1 BFE GULF TECH
or Equal
ELECTRO LUX
454 LQ EQUIPMENT Laundry Equipment 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
455 LQ EQUIPMENT Galley equipment 1 Lot BFE HOBART or equal
Mess room & Tea
456 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE HOBART or equal
Room equipment
Medic Room PHILIPP KIRSCH GmbH
457 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
equipment or Equal
Gymnasium AIBI
458 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
equipment or Equal
LED Television - 60'' BFE LG
459 LQ EQUIPMENT with Blu ray & DVD 1 Lot SAMSUNG
player or Equal
BFE LG
LED Television - 42''
460 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot SAMSUNG
with DVD player
or Equal
BFE LG
461 LQ EQUIPMENT LED Television (32'') 1 Lot SAMSUNG
or Equal

PAGE 350 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
BFE SONY
462 LQ EQUIPMENT Projector with screen 1 Lot
or equal
463 LQ EQUIPMENT Music system 1 Lot BFE SONY or equal
Fire rated Joiner
464 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE STACO or equal
doors
Fire rated Marine
465 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE TBC
windows
ROCKWOOL
466 LQ EQUIPMENT Insulation 1 Lot BFE St. GOBAIN ISOMER
or Equal
467 LQ EQUIPMENT Wall panel 1 Lot BFE STACO or equal
HEINEN & HOPMAN
468 LQ EQUIPMENT Cold Rooms 1 Lot BFE NOVENCO
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Flooring CHALMERS
469 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
underlayment RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Flooring final coat - CHALMERS
470 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Wet area RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Flooring final coat - CHALMERS
471 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Dry area RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
472 LQ EQUIPMENT Ceiling tiles 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal

PAGE 351 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
473 LQ EQUIPMENT Toilet Module 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
BOLTON GATE
474 LQ EQUIPMENT Galley Shutters 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
HALTON
475 LQ EQUIPMENT Galley Hood 1 Lot BFE
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Internal Staircase CHALMERS
476 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Handrail & Storm Rail RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
477 LQ EQUIPMENT Furniture items 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
478 LQ EQUIPMENT Metal furniture 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Stainless steel CHALMERS
479 LQ EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
furniture RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
480 LQ EQUIPMENT Wooden furniture 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
481 LQ EQUIPMENT Chairs & Sofa 1 Lot BFE CHALMERS
RIGFIT

PAGE 352 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Miscellaneous (Coat /
CHALMERS
482 LQ EQUIPMENT Hat hook, writing 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
board, etc.)
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
483 LQ EQUIPMENT Curtain & Blinds 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
484 LQ EQUIPMENT Wire Shelving 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Water Closet, Vacuum CHALMERS
485 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
type RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
486 LQ Equipment Urinal 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Shower Mixer and CHALMERS
487 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
Shower Head RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
488 LQ Equipment Wash Basin Mixer 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal

PAGE 353 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
489 LQ Equipment Wash Basin 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Common Toilet
CHALMERS
490 LQ Equipment Stainless Steel Sinks 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
(Custom Fabricated)
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Common Toilet Sink CHALMERS
491 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
Mixer RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Linen Floor Sink CHALMERS
492 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
Faucet RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Bib Tap for Prayer CHALMERS
493 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
room Ablution RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
494 LQ Equipment Toilet Spray wash 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Circular Wash
CHALMERS
495 LQ Equipment Fountain for Common 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
Toilet
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
496 LQ Equipment Water Filter 1 Lot BFE CHALMERS
RIGFIT

PAGE 354 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Pre- Rinse Unit for CHALMERS
497 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
Scullery Sink RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
498 LQ Equipment Galley Sink Mixer 1 Lot BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Dry Store Stainless CHALMERS
499 LQ Equipment 1 BFE
Steel Two Bowl Sink RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Dry Store Stainless
CHALMERS
500 LQ Equipment Steel Two Bowl Sink 1 BFE
RIGFIT
Mixer
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
501 LQ Equipment Bath Tub for Sick Bay 1 BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Bath Shower Mixer CHALMERS
502 LQ Equipment 1 BFE
for Sick Bay RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
Laundry Stainless CHALMERS
503 LQ Equipment 1 BFE
Steel Janitor Sink RIGFIT
or Equal

PAGE 355 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

ITEM ID SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QTY BFE / OFE VENDOR TAKE OFF LIST
SEVEN SEAS
Laundry Janitor Sink CHALMERS
504 LQ Equipment 1 BFE
Mixer RIGFIT
or Equal
SEVEN SEAS
CHALMERS
505 LQ Equipment Tea Room Sink Mixer 1 BFE
RIGFIT
or Equal
Fire Hose Reel and SOLAS
506 LQ Equipment 1 Lot BFE
Box or Equal
507 LQ Equipment Fire Penetration Seal 1 Lot BFE ROXTEC or equal
EATON
SOLAS
508 UPS SYSTEMS UPS systems 1 Lot BFE
AEG
or Equal
480V/110V,
509 TRANSFORMERS 1 Lot BFE CAMERON
Transformer
EATON
110V Distribution
510 DISTRIBUTION PANELS 1 Lot BFE SCHNEIDER
Panel
or Equal
511 Welding Welding DC Outlet 1 Lot BFE Unitor or Equal
512 Welding Welding Junction Box 1 Lot BFE Unitor or Equal
EATON
Engine Room Fire SCHNEIDER
513 VARIOUS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT 1 Lot BFE
Damper Control Panel SOLAS
or Equal
Helideck status/wave
514 NAVIGATION & COMMUNICATION 1 BFE ORGA
off /repeater light

PAGE 356 OF 358

 S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

6.4 APPENDIX IV – VENDOR SPECIFICATIONS AND DATASHEETS

BUILDER shall incorporate the specifications and datasheets stipulated in table 6.4.1 below
as an integral part of this CTS, and the written requirements herein. For the avoidance of
doubt, the specifications and datasheets provided in this section relate to a limited number of
vendors only and do not, in any way, constitute either a complete list of vendors, or a complete
scope of supply.
Those specifications and datasheets that are provided shall be considered a minimum
specification and scope of supply for each package listed.
If the specification or scope of supply is considered inappropriate in any way by BUILDER,
neither the specification nor the scope of supply shall be altered without written approval from
the BUYER.
Each vendor package set forth in this section of the CTS shall be provided by BUILDER in full,
without deviation, alteration or reduction to the scope of supply.
BUILDER shall, as soon as is reasonably practicable, advise BUYER of any omissions or
perceived discrepancies, in the vendor information provided in this section of the CTS
compared with that provided by BUYER elsewhere in the CTS.
Following review and approval by BUYER, BUILDER shall ‘make good’, at no additional cost
to the BUYER, all such discrepancies and/or omissions. For the avoidance of doubt the term
‘make good’ shall include, but not be limited to, compliance with this CTS in it’s entirety.

6.4.1 LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND DATASHEETS

# VENDOR DOCUMENT TITLE DOCUMENT NUMBER REV DATE

28-167-EA04-A-QT-100 28-167-EA04-A-QT-
1 CAMERON A7 17-Apr-19
REV.A7_FULL PKG 100
PET-03-2019-923 – Rev 01
2 CATERPILLAR PET-03-2019-923 1 01-Apr-19
(Main Gen - Qty 5)
PET-03-2019-924 – Rev 01
3 CATERPILLAR PET-03-2019-924 1 01-Apr-19
(Emer Gen - Qty 1)
Rack Post for 2 Rounds of
4 JSA 19134-WP R01 - 05-Apr-19
Leg X 2 Rigs
Combined Helideck and
5 ORGA SQ1058847-C04 - 28-Mar-19
Navigational Aid System
Aeronautical Obstruction
6 ORGA SQ1058009-01 - 17-Mar-19
Lights

7 ORGA Illuminated Wind Socks SQ4000184-C00 - 28-Mar-19

Breathing Air Cascade

8 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-25A 0 16-Apr-19
System
9 SOLAS Helideck foam system SMSG-ES-19-25E 0 16-Apr-19
Galley Wet Chemical
10 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-25D 0 16-Apr-19
System
11 SOLAS Paint Locker CO2 System SMSG-ES-19-25G 0 16-Apr-19
Helideck Pancake and
12 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-25E 0 16-Apr-19
Accessories
13 SOLAS Mud Pit Foam System SMSG-ES-19-25C 0 16-Apr-19

PAGE 357 OF 358

S116E – CTS – REV0 – ARO DRILLING 12-Jan-2020

# VENDOR DOCUMENT TITLE DOCUMENT NUMBER REV DATE

Mud Process Area Foam

14 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-25B 0 16-Apr-19
System
NOVEC 1230 Fire
15 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-25F 0 16-Apr-19
Suppression System
16 SOLAS CCTV System SMSG-ES-19-47B 02 16-Apr-19
17 SOLAS IP Entertainment System SMSG-ES-19-66A 00 16-Apr-19
Honeywell Fire and Gas
18 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-47A 00 16-Apr-19
System
19 SOLAS Navigational Light System SMSG-ES-19-47B 01 16-Apr-19
IP PABX & Telephone
20 SOLAS SMSG-ES-19-47D 00 16-Apr-19
System
21 SOLAS PAGA System SMSG-ES-19-26A 00 16-Apr-19
JOULON / EXEL
22 ESD System 219_005_ET 0 02-Apr-19
MARCO
JOULON / EXEL Integrated Monitoring and
23 219_005_ET 0 12-Mar-19
MARCO Control System
Life Boat 60 POB & Davit -
24 VIKING IMI/LBD/032019 - 28-Mar-19
Qty 4)
Rescue Boat 6 POB Diesel &
25 VIKING IMI/RBD/032019 - 28-Mar-19
Davit - Qty 1)
Life Raft 30 POB, and
26 VIKING IMI/LRD/032019 - 28-Mar-19
Training Life Raft - Qty 4)
INGERSOLL
27 Diaphragm Pumps 28030119 - 28-Mar-19
RAND
INGERSOLL
28 Compressors AP/03/2019/20 1 1-Apr-19
RAND
29 LOADMASTER Derrick Product Specification 19134-PS-02 2 10-Apr-19
30 LOADMASTER Derrick Data Sheet 19134-DS-02 2 10-Apr-19
31 LOADMASTER Derrick Assembly 19187-DA-02 00 10-Apr-19
INTERNATIONAL
32 Paint Systems, Technical 15Jan2019.jclark.120 - 17-Apr-19
PAINT

PAGE 358 OF 358